1

Contents

Contents

Program descriptions in detail

Page Page

Memories

Model select 59 59Copy / Erase 60 60Suppressing codes 62 62Suppressing models 62 62

Basic transmitter, model and servo settings

Base setup model 64 66Model type 70Helicopter type 72Servo adjustment 74 74

Transmitter controls

Stick mode 76 77Transmitter control settings 78 80

Throttle limit 82Dual Rates / Exponential 86 88Channel 1 curve 90 92

Switches

Switch display 93 93Control switches 94 94Logical switches 97 97

Flight phases

How do I program a fl ight phase? 98 98Phase settings 100 102Phase assignment 104 104Phase trim F3B 105Non-delayed channels 105 105

2

Page Page

Timers

Timers (general) 106 106Flight phase timers 108 108

Mixers

What is a mixer? 110 110Wing mixers 110Helicopter mixers 122

Setting up the throttle and collective pitch curve 129Auto-rotation 132

General notes on freely programmable mixers 134 134Free Mixers 135 135MIX aktive in phase 142 142Mix only channel 142 142Dual mixers 144 144Swashplate mixers 145

Special functions

Fail-Safe settings, PCM 20 146 146Fail-Safe settings, SPCM 20 148 148Fail-Safe settings, APCM 20 149 149Trainer (teacher / pupil) mode 150 150Receiver output swap 153 153

Global functions

General basic settings 154 154Servo display 156 156Servo test 156 156Code lock 157 157

General notes

Safety notes ............................................................... 4Foreword .................................................................... 7mx-24s Computer System ....................................... 8Operating notes ....................................................... 12DSC socket .............................................................. 18Description of transmitter ......................................... 20Description of screen ............................................... 22Using the system for the fi rst time ........................... 23

Preliminary notes ................................................ 23Selecting the language ....................................... 23Frequency scanner ............................................. 24Selecting the channel ......................................... 25

Receiving system .................................................... 26Installation notes ................................................ 27

Defi nition of terms ................................................... 28Signal fl ow chart ................................................. 29

Basic operations ...................................................... 30Button pad .......................................................... 30Rotary control ..................................................... 30Hotkeys ............................................................... 30Menu settings ..................................................... 31

Assigning transmitter controls, switches and control switches ................................. 32Digital trims / Cut-off trim ......................................... 34Fixed-wing model aircraft ........................................ 36

Receiver socket sequence ................................. 37Model helicopters .................................................... 42

Receiver socket sequence ................................. 43

Programming – a brief introduction

Brief programming instructions ................................ 44

Program descriptions

Setting up a new model memory ............................. 58

Programming examples

Fixed-wing models (general) ................................. 158Fixed-wing model gliders ....................................... 160Including an electric power system ........................ 165C1 stick doubling as control for:

Electric motor and butterfl y (crow) .................... 167Electric motor and airbrakes ............................. 169

Operating timers using a stick function or switch ... 170Servos running in parallel ...................................... 172

Two airbrake or spoiler servos .......................... 172Multi-motor power models ................................ 172Two elevator servos .......................................... 173Two rudder servos ............................................ 173

Using fl ight phases ................................................ 174Controlling timed sequences ................................. 182Eight-fl ap wing ....................................................... 184Delta / fl ying wing model aircraft ............................ 188F3A models ........................................................... 192Model helicopters .................................................. 196

Appendix

Trainer system accessories ................................... 204Transmitter accessories ......................................... 205Approved operating frequencies ............................ 206Conformity declaration ........................................... 207Index ...................................................................... 208Guarantee certifi cate ............................................. 215

3Contents

Notes on environmental protectionThe presence of this symbol on a product, in the user instructions or the packaging, means that you must not dispose of that item, or the electronic components contai-ned within it, in the ordinary domestic was-

te when the product comes to the end of its useful life. The correct method of disposal is to take it to your lo-cal collection point for recycling electrical and electro-nic equipment.Individual markings indicate which materials can be recycled and re-used. You can make an important contribution to the protection of our shared environ-ment by re-using the product, recycling the basic ma-terials or re-processing redundant equipment in other ways.Dry cells and rechargeable batteries must be remo-ved from the device and taken separately to a suitab-le battery disposal centre.If you don’t know the location of your nearest disposal centre, please enquire at your local authority offi ce.

Environmental protection notes

We all want you to have many hours of pleasure in our mutual hobby of modelling, and safety is an im-portant aspect of this. It is absolutely essential that you read right through these instructions and take ca-reful note of all our safety recommendations.If you are a beginner to the world of radio-controlled model aircraft, boats and cars, we strongly advise that you seek out an experienced modeller in your fi eld and ask him for help and advice.These instructions must be handed on to the new ow-ner if you ever sell or dispose of the transmitter.

ApplicationThis radio control system may only be used for the purpose for which the manufacturer designed it, i.e. for operating radio-controlled models which do not carry humans. No other type of use is approved or permissible.

Safety notesSAFETY IS NO ACCIDENT

andRADIO-CONTROLLED MODELS ARE NOT

PLAYTHINGSEven small models can cause serious personal inju-ry and damage to property if they are handled incom-petently.Technical problems in electrical and mechanical sys-tems can cause motors to rev up or burst into life un-expectedly, with the result that parts may fl y off at gre-at speed, causing series injury.Short-circuits of all kinds must be avoided at all times. Short-circuits can easily destroy parts of the radio control system, but even more dangerous is the acu-te risk of fi re and explosion, depending on the circum-stances and the energy content of the batteries.Propellers (aircraft and boat), helicopter rotors, open gearboxes and all other rotating parts which are dri-ven by a motor or engine represent a permanent in-

jury hazard. Do not touch these items with any object or part of your body. Remember that a propeller spin-ning at high speed can easily slice off a fi nger. Ensu-re that no other object can make contact with the dri-ven components.Never stand in the primary danger zone, i. e. in the rotational plane of the propeller or other rotating parts, when the motor is running or the drive battery is con-nected.If an internal-combustion engine or electric motor is connected to the system, take great care to avoid any possibility of it bursting into life when you are pro-gramming the transmitter. We recommend that you disconnect the fuel supply or the drive battery before-hand.Protect all electronic equipment from dust, dirt, damp, and foreign bodies. Avoid subjecting the equipment to vibration and excessive heat or cold. Radio control equipment should only be used in “normal” ambient temperatures, i. e. within the range -15°C to +55°C.Avoid subjecting the equipment to shock and pressu-re. Check the units at regular intervals for damage to cases and leads. Do not re-use any item which is da-maged or has become wet, even after you have dried it out thoroughly.Use only those components and accessories which we expressly recommend. Be sure to use only genui-ne matching GRAUPNER connectors of the same de-sign with contacts of the same material. If you are still using plug-in crystals, use only genuine GRAUPNER crystals on the appropriate frequency band.When deploying cables note that they must not be un-der tension, and should never be bent tightly or kin-ked, otherwise they may fracture. Avoid sharp edges which could wear through the cable insulation.Check that all connectors are pushed home fi rmly be-fore using the system. When disconnecting compon-ents, pull on the connectors themselves – not on the

wires.It is not permissible to carry out any modifi cations to the RC system components. Avoid reverse polari-ty and short-circuits of all kinds involving the connec-ting leads, as the equipment is not protected against such errors.

Installing the receiving system and deploying the receiver aerialIn a model aircraft the receiver must be packed in soft foam and stowed behind a stout bulkhead, and in a model boat or car should be protected effectively from dust and spray.The receiver must not make contact with the fuselage, hull or chassis at any point, otherwise motor vibration and landing shocks will be transmitted directly to it.When installing the receiving system in a model po-wered by a glowplug or petrol engine, be sure to in-stall all the components in well-protected positions so that no exhaust gas or oil residues can reach the units and get inside them. This applies above all to the ON / OFF switch, which is usually installed in the outer skin of the model.Secure the receiver in such a way that the aerial, ser-vo leads and switch harness are not under any strain.The receiver aerial is permanently attached to the re-ceiver. It is about 100 cm long and must not be shor-tened or extended. The aerial should be routed as far away as possible from electric motors, servos, me-tal pushrods and high-current cables. However, it is best not to deploy the aerial in an exactly straight line, but to angle it: e. g. run it straight to the tailplane, then leave the fi nal 10 - 15 cm trailing freely, as this helps to avoid reception “blind spots” when the model is in the air. If this is not possible, we recommend that you lay out part of the aerial wire in an S-shape inside the model, close to the receiver if possible.

Safety notesPlease read carefully!

4 Safety notes

Installing the servosAlways install servos using the vibration-damping grommets supplied. The rubber grommets provide some degree of protection from mechanical shocks and severe vibration.

Installing control linkagesThe basic rule is that all linkages should be installed in such a way that the pushrods move accurate-ly, smoothly and freely. It is particularly important that all servo output arms can move to their full extent wit-hout fouling or rubbing on anything, or being obstruc-ted mechanically at any point in their travel.It is important that you can stop your motor at any time. With a glow motor this is achieved by adjusting the throttle so that the barrel closes completely when you move the throttle stick and trim to their end-points.Ensure that no metal parts are able to rub against each other, e. g. when controls are operated, when parts rotate, or when motor vibration affects the mo-del. Metal-to-metal contact causes electrical “noise” which can interfere with the correct working of the re-ceiver.

Always extend the transmitter aerial fully before operating your modelTransmitter fi eld strength is at a minimum in an ima-ginary line extending straight out from the transmit-ter aerial. It is therefore fundamentally misguided to “point” the transmitter aerial at the model with the idea of obtaining good reception.When several radio control systems are in use on ad-jacent channels, the pilots should always stand to-gether in a loose group. Pilots who insist on standing away from the group endanger their own models as well as those of the other pilots.

Pre-fl ight checkingIf there are several modellers at the site, check ca-refully with all of them that you are the only one on

“your” channel before you switch on your own trans-mitter. If two modellers switch on transmitters on the same channel, the result is interference to one or both models, and the usual result is at least one wre-cked model.Before you switch on the receiver, ensure that the throttle stick is at the stop / idle end-point.

Always switch on the transmitter fi rst, and only then the receiver.

Always switch off the receiver fi rst, and only then the transmitter.

If you do not keep to this sequence, i. e. if the recei-ver is at any time switched on when “its” transmitter is switched off, then the receiver is wide open to sig-nals from other transmitters and any interference, and may respond. The model might then carry out uncon-trolled movements, which could easily result in perso-nal injury or damage to property. The servos may run to their end-stops and damage the gearbox, linkage, control surface etc.Please take particular care if your model is fi tted with a mechanical gyro:Before you switch your receiver off, disconnect the power supply to ensure that the motor cannot run up to high speed accidentally.

Gyros can generate such high voltages as they run down that the receiver picks up apparently valid throttle commands, and the motor could re-spond by accelerating unexpectedly.

Range checkingBefore every session check that the system works properly in every respect, and has adequate range. This means checking that all the control surfaces re-spond correctly and in the appropriate direction to the transmitter commands, at a suitable ground range. Repeat this check with the motor running, while an assistant holds the model securely for you.

Operating your model aircraft, helicopter, boat or carNever fl y directly over spectators or other pilots, and take care at all times not to endanger people or ani-mals. Keep well clear of high-tension overhead cables. Never run your model boat close to locks and full-size boats. Model cars should never be run on public streets or motorways, footpaths, public squares etc..

Checking the transmitter and receiver batteriesIt is essential to stop using the radio control system and recharge the batteries well before they are com-pletely discharged. In the case of the transmitter this means – at the very latest – when the message “Bat-tery must be charged” appears on the screen, and you hear an audible warning signal.It is vital to check the state of the receiver battery at regular intervals. When the battery is almost fl at you may notice the servos running more slowly, but it is by no means safe to keep fl ying or running your mo-del until this happens. Always replace or recharge the batteries in good time.Keep to the battery manufacturer’s instructions and don’t leave the batteries on charge for a longer peri-od than stated. Do not leave batteries on charge un-supervised.Never attempt to recharge dry cells, as they may ex-plode.Rechargeable batteries should always be rechar-ged before every session. When charging batteries it is important to avoid short-circuits. Do this by con-necting the charge lead banana plugs to the charger fi rst, taking care to maintain correct polarity. Only then connect the charge lead to the transmitter or receiver battery.Disconnect all batteries and remove them from your model if you know you will not be using it in the near future.

5Safety notes

Capacity and operating timesThis rule applies to all forms of electrical power sour-ce: capacity is greatly reduced at low temperatures, i. e. operating times are shorter in cold conditions.Frequent charging of batteries, and use of battery maintenance programs, can also result in a gradual loss of battery capacity. For this reason you should al-ways check the actual capacity of your packs at regu-lar intervals - every six months at least.Purchase only genuine GRAUPNER batteries!

Suppressing electric motorsAll conventional electric motors produce sparks bet-ween commutator and brushes, to a greater or lesser extent depending on the motor type; the sparking ge-nerates serious interference to the radio control sys-tem.In electric-powered models every motor must there-fore be thoroughly suppressed. Suppressor fi lters ef-fectively eliminate such interference, and should al-ways be fi tted.Please read the notes and recommendations sup-plied by the motor’s manufacturer. Refer to the main GRAUPNER FS catalogue for more information on suppressor fi lters.

Servo suppressor fi lters for extension leadsOrder No. 1040Servo suppressor fi lters are required if you are obli-ged to use long servo extension leads, as they elimi-nate the danger of de-tuning the receiver. The fi lter is connected directly to the receiver input. In very diffi -cult cases a second fi lter can be used, positioned clo-se to the servo.

Using electronic speed controllersElectronic speed controllers must be chosen to suit the size of electric motor which they will control.There is always a danger of overloading and possibly damaging the speed controller, but you can avoid this

by ensuring that the controller’s current-handling ca-pacity is at least half the motor’s maximum stall cur-rent.Particular care is called for if you are using a “hot” (i. e. upgrade) motor, as any low-turn motor (small number of turns on the winding) may draw many times its no-minal current when stalled, and the high current can easily wreck the speed controller.

Electrical ignition systemsIgnition systems for internal combustion engines can also produce interference which has an adverse ef-fect on the operation of the radio control system.Electrical ignition systems should always be powered by a separate battery – not the receiver battery.Be sure to use effectively suppressed spark plugs and plug caps, and shielded ignition leads.Keep the receiving system an adequate distance away from the ignition system.

Static chargesThe operation of a radio control system can be affec-ted by magnetic shock waves which are generated by lightning – even when the storm is several kilometres away. For this reason …

… if you see a storm approaching, cease opera-tions immediately! Static charges via the trans-mitter aerial also constitute a lethal danger!

CautionRadio control systems may only be operated on the frequency bands and spot frequencies which are ap-proved for that purpose in the country in which the equipment is used. Information on this can be found in the section entitled “Approved Operating Frequen-cies” on page 206. It is prohibited by law to use radio control systems on any other frequency, and such mis-use will be punished by the relevant authorities.

Care and maintenanceDon’t use cleaning agents, petrol, water or other sol-vents to clean this equipment. If the case, the whip aerial etc. should become soiled, wipe clean with a soft dry cloth.

Components and accessoriesAs manufacturer of this equipment, GRAUPNER GmbH & Co. KG recommends that you only use com-ponents and accessories which have been checked by GRAUPNER and are known to work properly and reliably. If you observe this advice, GRAUPNER ac-cepts product responsibility.GRAUPNER does not accept liability if this equip-ment is used in conjunction with components or accessories made by other manufacturers which have not been approved. We are not in a position to assess whether every individual product made by other companies can be used with safety.

Liability exclusion / CompensationAs manufacturers, we at GRAUPNER are not in a po-sition to infl uence the way you install, operate and maintain the radio control system components. For this reason we are obliged to refute all liability for loss, damage or costs which are incurred due to the in-competent or incorrect use and operation of our pro-ducts, or which are connected with such operation in any way.Unless otherwise prescribed by law, the obligation of the GRAUPNER company to pay compensation is li-mited to the invoice value of that quantity of GRAUP-NER products which was immediately and directly in-volved in the event in which the damage occurred. This does not apply if GRAUPNER is found to be sub-ject to unlimited liability according to binding legal re-gulation on account of deliberate or gross negligence.

6 Safety notes

Safety notes

The new mx-24s is presented in a sophisticated, er-gonomically effi cient hand-held case which offers ma-ximum operating convenience and ease of transport. It represents a further development of the mc-24 PROFI, of which many thousands are already in use by highly successful modellers. The system’s opera-ting convenience has been further improved: the pro-gramming procedure is now even easier, using just four buttons and a digital 3-D ROTARY control knob which operates on two levels. As with its smaller sis-ter, the mx-22, the new transmitter is easy to use even for the inexperienced modeller.We have called upon the experience and feedback of many pilots in handling and using the mc-24 PRO-FI to create new ideas which have been incorporated into the overall software design of the mx-24s.The GRAUPNER software team, collaborating with renowned top-level pilots from all over the world, and professional and competition pilots in a vast range of model fl ying areas, has worked ceaselessly to pro-duce this pioneering further development of high-end transmitter software. Teamwork and thorough testing in national and international competitions and events of all disciplines have helped to create this new sys-tem, based on the world-wide success of the mc-24 radio control system, without in any way overlooking the requirements of beginners.The mx-24s is equipped as standard with all controls and switches required for operating up to twelve ser-vos, which means that fans of scale models and mul-ti-function model boats will not fi nd themselves run-ning short of functions or control options.Another standard feature is a DSC socket for connec-ting a receiver directly to the transmitter, allowing wor-king systems to be checked without the transmitter radiating an RF signal. The same socket can also be used for Trainer mode operations and for controlling fl ight simulators.The familiar modulations of PPM18, PPM24, PCM20 and SPCM 20 are now complemented by two new transmission modes:

• PPM10 for Pico-size receivers in indoor models, fun-fl y aircraft, small helicopters, RC cars and other models fi tted with a maximum of fi ve servos. This transmission mode features a reduced cycle rate, giving extremely fast response times.

• APCM24 is for the demanding pilot who wishes to operate his models with up to twelve servos, and is designed to satisfy exacting demands on pre-cision and identical timing of all servos – e. g. in high-speed models.

A new RF SYNTHESIZER module eliminates the need for plug-in crystals on the 35 / 35B MHz band and the 40 / 41 MHz band. The channel you wish to use is set by software, and is available for use as soon as you answer a security query. An important in-novation in terms of safety considerations is the en-tirely new integrated dual-conversion scanner, which can be used when the transmitter is switched on to check whether a particular channel is already in use at your fl ying site.In terms of hardware, the generously sized LCD screen now features backlighting which makes the display much easier to read, especially under unfa-vourable lighting conditions. An EEPROM (Electrical-ly Erasable Programmable Read-Only Memory) su-persedes the Lithium data back-up battery which has been necessary until now.The structure of the transmitter software has been further refi ned: all the important adjustment facili-ties in each menu are now displayed on the graphic screen in a form which is virtually self-explanatory. However, if you encounter a problem and the manual is not to hand, the integral Help menu can provide ad-ditional assistance at the press of a button.The mx-24s provides forty model memories, each of which can store model settings for up to eight fl ight phases. Flight phases can be called up in fl ight simply by operating a switch, so that you can try out different settings quickly and without risk. This feature can be exploited for test purposes as well as for varying fl ight parameters in different phases of fl ight.

mx-24s: the new generation of radio control technology

Amongst the new features of the software are:• “Auto-Trim” function: the model is brought to the

desired fl ight attitude using the two dual-axis sticks. At the moment the auto-trim switch is ope-rated, the software notes the deviations of the sticks from the neutral position, and sets them as the new trim values.

• “Swashplate limit”: this option limits the swashpla-te defl ection when the roll (aileron) and pitch-axis (elevator) sticks are moved to their end-points si-multaneously.

The software package is rounded off by a range of new, thoroughly practical features, such as a button pad lock, a variable warning threshold for the trans-mitter battery and a simplifi ed method of switching between electric motor and airbrake control.This manual describes each menu in detail, and also provides dozens of useful tips, notes and program-ming examples to complement the basic informati-on. More general modelling terms, such as Transmit-ter controls, Dual-Rates, Butterfl y and many others, are all explained in the manual, which also includes a comprehensive index at the end. The section on pa-ges 44 … 56 includes a quick-access overview of the essential operating procedures in tabular form.Please read the Safety Notes and the Technical In-formation. We recommend that you start by che-cking all the functions as described in the instructions. When you have programmed a model it is important to ensure on the ground that all the programmed set-tings are correct before committing the model to the air. Always handle your radio-controlled model with a responsible attitude to avoid endangering yourself and others.All of us in the GRAUPNER team wish you every suc-cess and many years of pleasure with your mx-24s, which is a radio control system of the very highest quality.

Kirchheim-Teck, April 2008

7Foreword

mx-24sRadio control system providing 5 to 9 control functions in PPM10 / PPM18 mode, up to 10 functions in (S)PCM mode and up to 12 control functions in PPM24 and APCM24 modes

• Four-language dialogue menu (German, English, French, Italian).

• The latest hardware and integral Synthesizer sys-tem for channel selection, with safety menu to avo-id problems if the transmitter is switched on acci-dentally.

• Completely new “Auto-Trim” function: press a sing-le button to adopt the current stick positions as the new neutral settings, with a gradual transition to the new trims.

• Simple method of programming the dual use of the C1 stick for controlling the motor and braking system of electric gliders.

• Display of type of modulation and spot frequency on the LCD screen.

• Automatic transmitter control assignment by ope-rating the control itself.

• Forty model memories.

• Update-capable software ensures that the trans-mitter has an extended future life.

• 3-D cylinder rotary encoder in conjunction with four programming buttons provides accurate ad-justment facilities and excellent programming con-venience.

• High-resolution MULTI-DATA GRAPHIC LCD screen with grey-scales provides superb monito-ring facilities, accurate graphical representation of curves, characteristic lines, spot frequency etc..

• Screen backlighting variable in the »General basic settings« menu.

• New type of switch monitor for checking all physi-cal and control switches.

• CONVENIENT MODE SELECTOR provides a simple means of switching between stick modes 1 to 4 (e. g. throttle right / throttle left).

• Real Time Processing (RTP). All selected settings

Fantastic technologyGRAUPNER’s new mx-24s sets new standards in high-end radio control technology. The programs in-cluded in the mx-24s professional system constitute a further milestone in radio control technology for the beginner and pro-standard pilot alike.A PLL Synthesizer RF module with integral frequen-cy scanner provides a fast, safe method of switching 8 Description of radio control system

channels.The proven, highly practical dual-function rotary enco-der with 3-D rotary select programming technology is ultra-simple to use in combination with modern, logi-cally structured, clearly laid-out software.mx-24s: radio control technology which is sheer ple-asure to use!

and changes take immediate effect at the receiver output, virtually in real time.

• Digital Trim system for all four stick trim functions, effective globally or separately for each fl ight pha-se, variable separately for each function, with ad-justable trim increment and instant-effect throttle / idle trim.

• Six switchable types of modulation:

PPM10 Super-fast modulation for Pico-size receivers, sui-

table for controlling up to fi ve servos. Ideal for RC cars, indoor models, fun-fl y aircraft etc..

PPM18 The most widely used standard transmission pro-

cess (FM and FMsss). For C 6, C 8, C 12, C 16, C 17, C 19, DS 18, DS 19, DS 20 receivers, and XP 4, XP 8, XP 10, XP 12, XN 12, XM 16, R16SCAN, R 600 light, R 600, R 700, C 6 FM, SB6 SYN 40 S, SR6SYN miniature receivers.

PPM24 Multi-servo PPM transmission mode for simulta-

neous operation of up to twelve servos. For the DS 24 FM S receiver.

PCM20 PCM with system resolution of 512 steps per con-

trol function. For mc-12, mc-20, DS 20 mc recei-vers.

SPCM20 Super PCM modulation with high system resolu-

tion of 1024 steps per control function. For smc-14 S, smc-16 SCAN, smc-19, smc-19 DS, smc-20, smc-20 DS, smc-20 DSYN, smc-20 DSCAN recei-vers.

APCM24 Advanced PCM modulation with high system reso-

lution and ultra-fast transmission process, for amc

receivers. Capable of controlling up to twelve ser-vos.

• Twelve freely programmable mixers for fi xed-wing models and helicopters with freely selectable input and output function, four of which exploit a new type of eight-point curve technology which is freely variable in 0.5% increments. Using ingenious poly-nomial approximation techniques an ideally roun-ded mixer curve can be generated from the selec-ted mixer reference points simply by pressing a button.

• The eight-point throttle and collective pitch cur-ves available in the helicopter menu also feature a multi-point curve system (MPC). Once again an ideally rounded curve can be generated, based on your selected mixer reference points.

• Four dual mixers.

• Eight fl ight phase programs for fi xed-wing model aircraft, and seven + auto-rotation for model heli-copters. These can be adjusted individually to suit particular models, and assigned names and sepa-rately programmable transition times.

• Super-menu for servos, providing a full overview of all servo set-up data and simple correction of four parameters (direction of rotation, centre posi-tion, servo travel separately in both directions, and servo limit variable separately in both directions, for all twelve servos).

• Super Dual Rate / Expo menu for three control functions and eight fl ight phases. Variable sepa-rately in each model memory, and switchable in fl ight.

• Expanded transmitter control menu: centre adjus-tment at input end. The side-mounted proportio-nal controls, the INC / DEC buttons, the C1 control and all the switches can be assigned as transmit-ter controls.

• Highly practical, sophisticated multi-function menu

9Description of radio control system

for fi xed-wing models and helicopters. Entering the number of aileron and camber-changing fl ap ser-vos automatically programs all the requisite mixer functions in the multi-function wing menu.

• Re-designed multi-fl ap menu, providing an ultra-simple, clearly laid-out means of setting up a ma-ximum of six wing-mounted servos, variable sepa-rately for each fl ight phase, even without the use of supplementary free mixers.

• Helicopter swashplate mixer for one-point, two-point, three-point and four-point linkages.

• Swashplate servo linearisation function: electronic compensation for non-linear travel of rotary-output swashplate servos.

• Swashplate limiting: limits the angle of tilt of the swashplate when roll and pitch-axis commands are applied simultaneously.

• Tailplane types: normal, V-tail, delta / fl ying wing and 2 EL Sv 3 + 8 (which provides a standard means of controlling two linked elevator servos wi-thout the use of free mixers or dual mixers).

• Number of wing fl aps: 2 AIL / 4 FL: full support for six wing-mounted servos, now also without the use of free mixers.

• Switchable delay for fl ight phase change-over swit-ches: the transition time can be switched off for in-dividual channels in individual fl ight phases; e. g. for motor OFF in electric-powered models, and for heading lock activate / disable in model helicop-ters.

• Ten supplementary user-defi ned phase names: in addition to the default fl ight phases the user can enter ten phase names of his own choice.

• Model copy function for all model memories.

• Copy all models � PC. All occupied memories can be backed-up to a PC using a single command.

• Integral socket accepts an optional interface mo-

dule for copying between two mx-24s transmitters or between an mx-24s and a PC.

• “Info” in the »Base setup model« menu: a small amount of supplementary information can be en-tered at this point for each model (max. fi fteen let-ters or symbols); this information then appears in the revised Model Select menu.

• Logical switches: this function makes it possible to link two switches using an “AND” or “OR” function; the result can then be used as a virtual switch.

• Variable warning threshold for power-on “Throttle too high” warning in the Helicopter menu.

• Fail-Safe monitor for eight servo functions; for up to twelve servos in APCM24 mode.

• HELP button provides valuable hints on program-ming and currently selected programming menu. Leaf through the Help pages using the HLP button or the rotary control.

• Convenient Timer menu: system includes eight stopwatches, alarm timer, count-down timer, lap counter etc., two time values and one lap time va-lue can be displayed on-screen simultaneously in a large typeface.

• Stopwatch with History function: the lap counter is complemented by “Time1”, which records power-on times, and “Time2”, which records the ON and OFF switched times separately.

• Highlighted display of timer over-runs are more easily picked out by the user.

• Revised CLEAR function for the timers: even if in-dividual times are still running, CLEAR still resets the remaining timers.

• Separate operating time recorder for each model.

• Slot time can be recorded by pressing the rota-ry control + ESC button, and then reset using the CLR button.

• Transmitter operating hours timer is automatically

reset to zero when the battery is recharged.

• Prepared as standard for use as Pupil or Teacher transmitter in a Trainer system.

Operational security and operating convenience• SYNTHESIZER RF module with integral scan-

ner function exploiting dual-conversion technology: checks frequency band for occupied channels.

• Selectable button pad lock prevents accidental and unwanted changes during fl ight operations.

• Input lock using code number.

• Warning beep and pop-up on-screen message if Trainer connection is incorrect.

• Variable warning threshold for battery voltage.

• Non-volatile memory for data back-up even when the transmitter battery is discharged or removed.

• Rotary control Enter function: the software always interprets a brief press on the rotary control as ENTER. In the Model Select and Function Select menus it is possible to select an item and call it up using the rotary control alone.

• Hotkeys for contrast adjustment, servo display (from virtually all menus), button pad lock and mo-del select.

• The servo sequence at the receiver output can be changed in the software.

• Model icons: graphic display of the model type (fi xed-wing / helicopter).

• Clearly arranged character table for simplifi ed name input procedure.

mx-24s

10 Description of radio control system

mx-24s micro-computer radio control system

Transmitter alone, with PLL Synthesizer RF module and rechargeable transmitter battery installed, in alu-minium case:Order No. 4730.77 35/35B MHz bandOrder No. 4748.77 40/41* MHz-Band

* 41 MHz band only approved for use in France.

Specifi cation – mx-24s transmitter

Transmission system Switchable: SPCM20, PCM20, PPM10, PPM18, PPM 24, APCM24

Radio Frequency section

Synthesizer (10 kHz spacing), 35 / 35B, 40 / 41 MHz band

Spot frequencies 35-MHz band: chan. 61-80, 281*, 282* 35-MHz-B band: channels 182 ... 191 40-MHz band: chan. 50 ... 59, 81 ... 92 41-MHz band: channels 400 ... 420**

Channel spacing 10 kHz

Max. control func-tions

SPCM20 = 10, PCM20 = 10, APCM24 = 12, PPM10 = 5, PPM18 = 9, PPM24 =12

Control functions Four proportional functions with digi-tal trims, two proportional functions, two switched functions, two INC / DEC but-tons

Channel pulse width 1,5 ms ± 0,5 ms

Control resolution SPCM20/APCM24: 10 Bit (1024 steps), PCM20: 9 Bit (512 steps)

Aerial Telescopic aerial, ten sections, approx. 1150 mm long

Operating voltage 9,6 ... 12 V

Current drain approx. 85 mA (RF module removed)150 mA (RF module switched off)230 mA (RF module switched on)250 mA (RF module and screen back-

light switched on)

Dimensions approx. 200 x 195 x 98 mm

Weight approx. 1100 g incl. transmitter battery

* Channels 281 and 282 not approved for use in Germany.

** 41 MHz band only approved for use in France.

* For charging the batteries you will also need the transmitter charge lead, Order No. 3022.

** 12 V power source required.

Chargers and charge leads (optional accessories)Order No. 6422 Minilader 2Order No. 6427 Multilader 3Order No. 6426 Multilader 6E*

Automatic battery chargers with special NiMH charge programs:Order No. 6419 Ultramat 5*, **Order No. 6409 Ultramat 6*, **Order No. 6410 Ultramat 10*,Order No. 6412 Ultramat 12*, **Order No. 6412.200 Ultramat 12*Order No. 6414 Ultramat 14*,Order No. 6417 Ultramat 25*, **Order No. 6417.200 Ultramat 25*Order No. 6416 Ultra Duo Plus 30*, **Order No. 6425 Twin Charger

Please refer to the main GRAUPNER FS catalogue for details of other battery chargers.

Recommended accessories

Order No. Description70.25 Neckstrap (25 mm)4178.1 Diagnosis lead3290.22 Trainer / PC module4182.9 PC interface lead

mc-22(s)/mx-22/mx-24s/PC4185 USB PC interface

mc-22(s)/mx-22/mx-24s/PC

Replacement partOrder No. 3100.6 Telescopic transmitter aerialPlease refer to the Appendix and the main GRAUP-NER FS catalogue for a detailed description of all available accessories for the mx-24s radio control set.

Description of radio control system 11

12 Operating notes

Transmitter power supply

The mx-24s transmitter is fi tted as standard with a 9.6 Volt NiMH battery (8NH-2000TX) (specifi cation may change). However, this battery is not charged as supplied. When you are using the transmitter you can monitor the battery voltage on the LCD screen. If the voltage of the transmitter battery falls below a certain point (see »General basic settings« menu – page 154) you will hear an audible warning signal. The screen then displays the following message to re-mind you that the transmitter battery needs to be re-charged:

If this happens, cease operations immediately; ideal-ly the battery should be recharged before this level is reached.

Removing the transmitter battery

To remove the transmitter battery fi rst remove the bat-tery compartment cover on the rear face of the trans-mitter by sliding it in the direction of the arrow, then lift it off. Carefully disconnect the con-nector at the main circuit board – either pull gently on the cable or pull out the plug with a fi ngernail, pulling on the lug on the top of the connec-tor. Don’t pull the plug up or down when removing it; keep it parallel with the circuit board.

Operating notes

Batt must be re- charged!!

Charging the transmitter battery

The rechargeable NiMH transmitter battery can be re-charged via the charge socket fi tted to the right-hand side of the case.The transmitter must be switched off and left at “OFF” for the whole period of the charge process. Never switch the transmitter on when it is still connec-ted to the charger; even a very brief interruption in the charge process can cause the charge volta-ge to rise to the point where the transmitter is im-mediately damaged by the excess voltage. For this reason check carefully that all connectors are secure and are making really good contact.

Polarity of the mx-24s charge socketCommercially available bat-tery charge leads produced by other manufacturers are often made up with reversed polarity. For this reason use genuine GRAUPNER charge leads exclusively.Caution: it is essential to connect the banana plugs on the charge lead to the charger fi rst, and only then to connect the other end of the lead to the charge socket on the transmitter; this avoids the danger of short-circuits. Never allow the bare ends of a connec-ted charge lead to touch each other!

Charging the battery using a standard battery chargerThe basic rule for charging the battery using a stan-dard charger, i. e. one without automatic charge ter-mination, is to start with a discharged pack and char-ge it for fourteen hours at a current corresponding to one tenth of the capacity printed on the label. In the case of the standard transmitter battery this means 200 mA. It is up to you to terminate the charge pro-cess at the correct time.

Charging the transmitter battery using an auto-matic chargerThe transmitter is designed as standard for use with automatic battery chargers to recharge the transmit-ter pack.If you wish to use an automatic charger designed for NiCd batteries to recharge the NiMH pack which is fi t-ted to the transmitter as standard, please carry out a series of test charges and check carefully that the charger terminates the process correctly. If your char-ger provides a facility for adjusting the Delta Peak ter-mination voltage, you may well need to adjust this va-lue.

Maximum charge currentDo not exceed the maximum permissible charge cur-rent of 1.0 A, otherwise there is a danger of causing damage to the transmitter.

Fuse: the transmitter is fi tted with a 20 mm cartridge fuse (type: 3 Ampere, fast-blow). If the battery will not accept a charge, or the transmit-ter cannot be switched on, ple-ase check this fuse (see “Ope-ning the transmitter” on page 14). Never by-pass (bridge) the fuse. Replacement fu-ses can be obtained from any electrical supplies shop. Ensure that the fuse is fi rmly and correctly seated; you may need to bend the spring contacts slightly.

On-screen display of battery operating time

#01 0:00h SPCM20

10.9V 0:00h C620 0 0 0

Stop watch

Flight tim

0 000 00::

This timer shows the cumulative operating time of the transmitter since the last time the transmitter battery Polarity of trans-

mitter battery plug

brown or black

red

13

was charged. This timer is automatically reset to “0:00” when the transmitter battery voltage is signifi cantly higher than the last time the unit was switched on, i. e. after a charge process. This is the state shown in the screen-shot.

Receiver power supply

Various 4.8 V NiMH batteries are available for the re-ceiver, varying in capacity. For reasons of safety you should not use dry cells in model aircraft, helicopters and other high-speed models. For the same reason do not use individual cells fi tted in a battery holder; always use ready-made battery packs with welded or soldered connections.There is no direct method of checking receiver battery voltage when operating a model.Make it a routine to check the state of your batteries at regular intervals. Charge your batteries in good time: don’t wait until you notice the servos running more slowly than usual before recharging the pack.Please refer to the main GRAUPNER FS catalogue for full details of batteries, chargers, measuring equipment and monitoring units for use with rechar-geable batteries.

Charging the receiver battery

The charge lead, Order No. 3021, can be connected directly to the receiver battery for charging. If the bat-tery is installed in a model and you have fi tted one of the following switch harnesses: Order No. 3046, 3050, 3934 or 3934.3, then the battery can be char-ged via the separate charge socket or the charge so-cket which is built into the switch. The switch on the switch harness must be left at the “OFF” position for charging.

Operating notes

General notes on battery charging

• Always connect the charge lead to the charger fi rst, and only then to the receiver or transmitter battery. This avoids the danger of accidental short-circuit between the bare ends of the charge lead.

• Observe the recommendations provided by the charger manufacturer and the battery manufactu-rer at all times. Keep to the recommended maxi-mum charge current stated by the battery manuf-acturer. To avoid damage to the transmitter, the charge current should never exceed 1.0 A; you can usually limit the charge current on the battery charger itself.

• Do not discharge the battery or carry out battery maintenance programs via the integral charge so-cket, as the socket is not suitable for this applicati-on.

• Never leave batteries on charge unsupervised.

Disposal of dry cells and rechargeable batteries

Never dispose of exhausted batteries in the house-hold rubbish. As end-user you are legally obliged (“Battery Disposal Directive”) to return old and ex-hausted dry cells and rechargeable batteries to an approved disposal centre, e. g. your local toxic waste collection point or a retail outlet where batteries of the same type are sold.

Polarity of receiver battery connector

14 Operating notes

Operating notes

Adjusting stick length

Both sticks are infi nitely variable in length over a broad range, enabling you to set them to the correct length to suit your personal preference to provide fi ne, accurate control of your models.Loosen the retaining screw using a 2 mm allen key, then screw the stick top in or out to shorten or extend it. Carefully tighten the grubscrew again to lock the set length.

Opening the transmitter case

Please read the following notes carefully before you open the transmitter. If you are inexperienced in such matters we recommend that you ask your local GRAUPNER Service Centre to carry out these proce-dures for you. The transmitter should only be opened in the follo-wing circumstances:

• In order to convert a non self-neutralising stick to self-neutralising, or vice versa; see page 16;

• In order to adjust the stick centring tension;

• In order to replace the internal fuse (3 A, fast-blow);

• In order to install a “Trainer” system and data trans-fer system; see page 15 and page 204 of the Ap-pendix.

Before opening the transmitter it is essential to check that it is switched off (move the Power switch towards the screen). It is not necessary to remove the trans-mitter battery, but if you do not remove it take care ne-ver to switch the transmitter on while the case is open (“ON” position). Please see page 12 for information on removing the transmitter battery. The RF module can also be left in place.Use a cross-point screwdriver (size PH1) to undo the six recessed screws at the indicated points in the rear face of the trans-mitter. Hold the two case shells together with your hand, turn the transmitter over and allow the six screws to fall out. The back cover can now be carefully re-moved.

Caution:A loom of cables connects a circuit board in the rear cover to the circuit board in the main case, which means that the transmitter back cover can only be folded down or to the side.

Important notes:• Do not modify the transmitter circuit in any

way, as this invalidates your guarantee and also invalidates offi cial approval for the system.

• On no account touch the circuit boards with any metallic object, and do not touch the con-tacts with your fi ngers.

• Never switch the transmitter on when the case is open.

When closing the transmitter please note the fol-lowing points:• Insert the two side-mounted proportional controls

correctly in the cut-outs designed for them in the si-des of the transmitter case;

• You will fi nd two rubber pads fi tted loose in the si-des; ensure that they are located with the small slot facing the back cover, and engage them in the ap-propriate case cut-outs in the sides;

• Ensure that the wire loom connector between the back cover and the circuit board is fi rmly inserted;

• Check that the V-shaped spring contacts (earth contacts) in the centre of the transmitter are not bent or deformed.

• Take care that no wires get caught when you close the back.

• Ensure that the two case shells line up exactly fl ush before you fi t the retaining screws. Never force the case shells together.

Please refer to the illustration on the next page when you carry out this procedure.

15

PaddingIf the two pieces of padding fall out when you open the trans-mitter, re-fi t them when closing the case, noting that the nar-row slots face down in the case back, where they engage over a small lug.

Operating notes

Side-mounted proportional controlsWhen re-assembling the transmitter check carefully that the two side-mounted controls engage correctly in the cut-outs designed for them in the top and bottom case shells. On no account force the case shells together. All the other switches are permanently installed.

Interface socket14-pin socket for the optio-nal Trainer / PC module, Or-der No. 3290.22, which is available as an accessory (see Appendix).

Earth contact springThis spring completes the earth connection to the cir -cuit board in the case back cover. Take great care not to bend or deform these contacts. If the ends of the spring appear to be dirty, clean them gently with a soft, dry cloth.

Cartridge fuse(3A, fast-blow)

Transmitter installation baysThe Trainer / PC module available as an optional accessory (Order No. 3290.22) is installed in these two bays; see Appendix.

Directing the telescopic aerialBefore using the transmitter to control a model, screw the ten-section aerial fi rmly into its socket and extend it to its full length. However, never

point the aerial directly towards the model, as signal strength is low in an imaginary line extending straight out from the aerial tip.

Aerial socketMake sure that the aerial is fi rmly screwed into the socket before using the transmitter.

Never switch the transmitter on when the case is open.

C A U T I O N: on no account touch any soldered joint with a metal object: SHORT-CIRCUIT HAZARD. Such action invalidates your guarantee.

Padding (see top right)

16 Operating notes

3. Attach the ratchet spring:Attach the ratchet spring to one end of the plastic pillar, and set the desired spring force by screwing the M3 screw in or out at the brass stud.

4. If you wish to re-convert the stick to self-neutralising action, fi rst remove the ratchet spring and slightly loosen the centring force adjustor screw: see right picture. Re-con-nect the neutralising lever, and slip a length of thin thread through the top loop of the spring (don’t tie a knot). Now use a pair of tweezers to connect the bottom loop of the spring to the adjustment sys-tem (see close-up picture below). Finally connect the top end of the spring to the neutralising lever using the thread. Once the spring is in the correct position, the thread can be withdrawn again.

The software also has to be “informed” of the change in stick mode; this can be carried out separately for

each model in the »Base setup model« menu (pa-ges 64 / 66). To set the stick mode for the transmitter as a whole, i. e. so that it applies to all newly set-up model memories, use the »General basic settings« menu (page 154).

Stick centring force

The tension of the stick unit centring springs can be adjusted to suit your personal preference: the adjust-ment system is located adjacent to each centring spring.Rotate the adjustment screw with a cross-point screw-driver to set your preferred spring force:Turn to the right (clockwise) = spring force harder;Turn to the left (anti-clockwise) = spring force softer.

Brass stud Plastic pillar

Changing the mode of the dual-axis proportional stick units

Either stick can be converted from self-neutralising to non self-neutralising (ratchet) action. First open the transmitter as already described.If you wish to switch the standard self-neutralising ac-tion to non self-neutralising, use this procedure:

1. Locate the brass stud supplied in the set, and screw it to the left or right stick unit as required using a 4 mm box spanner (see double arrow in the picture below).

2. Use a pair of tweezers to dis-connect the spring from the neutralising arm of the appro-priate stick unit, raise the lever and disconnect this too.

Neutralising lever and spring

Operating notes

Plastic pillar

Brass stud

Ratchet spring

17Operating notes

Changing the frequency band and spot frequency

The mx-24s transmitter is fi tted as standard with a PLL-SYNTHESIZER RF module. The spot frequen-cy (channel) is selected using the rotary control, i. e. plug-in crystals are no longer required at the transmit-ter.The Synthesizer module also features an integral dual-conversion frequency scanner which is used to check whether your preferred channel is already in use or not; it can also be employed to determine the vacant channels on your particular frequency band.

A detailed description of the method of using the Synthesizer module and selecting spot frequencies is found on pages 24 and 25 in the section entitled “Using the transmitter for the fi rst time – frequency scanner and channel selection”.

The set spot frequency is displayed on-screen. A se-curity system prevents the transmitter radiating an RF signal when initially switched on. The RF module must fi rst be activated in the software, which provides an additional gain in safety.At present two separate transmitters are available: for the 35 / 35B MHz band and the 40 / 41 MHz band:

Transmitters alone:Order No. 4730.77 for the 35 / 35B* MHz bandOrder No. 4748.77 for the 40 / 41* MHz band

* Channels 281 and 282 on the 35 MHz band, and all channels on the 41 MHz band, are not approved for use in Germany; see also the Frequency Table on page 206. The same table shows which channels are approved for use with the various types of model, i. e. model aircraft, model boats and RC cars.

The channels approved for use in individual countries are shown in the Frequency Table on page 206 (infor-mation not guaranteed).The receiver must be operated on the same channel and the same frequency band as the transmitter.It is possible to use this transmitter to control any GRAUPNER PLL Synthesizer receiver as well as ear-

lier crystal-controlled GRAUPNER receivers, provided that they are compatible with the transmitter modes PCM20, SPCM20, PPM18 or PPM24.If you wish to use earlier crystal-controlled GRAUP-NER receivers, it is essential to use genuine GRAUP-NER FMsss plug-in crystals designed for the appro-priate frequency band (see page 206). The receiver crystal is marked “R” (Receiver), and should be inser-ted fi rmly into the opening in the receiver.

Important note:The RF Synthesizer module is connected to the mx-24s transmitter by means of two sockets. If the RF module is not plugged in correctly, the transmitter will switch directly to the basic display when switched on. The screen will then display the fl ashing message “C––” instead of a channel number, indicating that the RF module is not ready for use.

#01 0:00h SPCM20

10.9V 0:05h C- -0 0 0 0

Stop watch

Flight tim

0 000 00::

Changing the frequency bandIf you wish to switch from the 35 / 35B MHz band to the 40 / 41 MHz band or vice versa, all you have to do is replace the SYNTHESIZER RF module in the transmitter:Order No. 3853.35 for the 35 / 35B MHz bandOrder No. 3853.40 for the 40 / 41 MHz band

18 Operating notes

DSC socketDirect Servo Control

Model name#01 0:30h SPCM20H-J.Sandbrunner

10.2V 0:30h0 0 0 0

Stop watchFlight tim

0 000 00::

DSC

3. Connect the other end of the connecting lead to the desired device, taking into account the opera-ting instructions supplied with that equipment.

4. If you wish to use the Diagnosis lead, Order No. 4178.1, do not connect it directly to the receiver. First connect the lead to a receiver battery using a Y-lead (3936.11 or 3936.32), then connect this to the receiver’s battery input socket instead of the receiver battery. The end with the barrel plug can then be connected to the appropriate socket on the back of the transmitter.

Once the transmitter is connected to the recei-ver as described above, you can check the con-trol functions or make changes to settings even if another pilot is using “your” frequency. Since in this state (power = “OFF”) the transmitter does not broadcast a radio signal, you can, for examp-le, prepare your model ready to fl y without causing interference to other modellers. Another advan-tage is that the transmitter’s current drain is redu-ced, since the transmitter’s RF section is not acti-ve in this mode of operation. The use of Diagnosis mode therefore extends the operating time of the transmitter battery considerably.

Important:Ensure that all the cables are fi rmly plugged in.

Note regarding fl ight simulators:The range of fl ight simulators available commercial-ly is now very wide, and you may fi nd that it is neces-sary to swap over the contacts at the barrel plug or the DSC module. This work must be carried out by a

The original function of this socket was for “Direct Servo Control”, and that’s why the abbreviation is still in use. However, it is now much more versatile than simply providing a means of controlling servos by ca-ble. The two-pole DSC socket of the mx-24s is now also used as the Teacher or Pupil socket in a Trainer system (see page 150), and as an interface for fl ight simulators.

For the DSC connection to work you must check the following:1. Carry out any adjustments required in the approp-

riate menus:

If you are connecting the transmitter to a fl ight si-mulator, or if you are using the mx-24s transmit-ter as a Pupil transmitter in a Trainer system, then you must set the transmission mode to “PPM18” in the “Modulation” line of the »Base setup model« menu. However, if you wish to connect a Diagnosis lead (Order No. 4178.1), the “Modulation” must be selected to suit the receiver.

2. Always leave the transmitter’s On / Off switch in the “OFF” position in such cases, because otherwise the RF section of the transmitter module will not be switched off (no RF signal) even when the DSC lead is plugged in. This is particularly im-portant if you are using a Diagnosis lead or a Trai-ner lead, because your transmitter may otherwise cause interference to other pilots. Only when the mx-24s transmitter is in Teacher mode should the transmitter be switched on before the Trainer lead is connected (see page 150).

Connect the appropriate two-pole lead to the transmitter’s DSC socket. This action renders the transmitter and the LCD screen ready for use, cir-cumventing the channel select process. At the same time the screen shows the message “DSC” instead of the usual display of the selected trans-mission channel.

GRAUPNER Service Centre.

Caution:Certain receivers – such as the R16SCAN – fea-ture a battery socket to which a servo can also be connected via a Y-lead. It is not possible to use a DSC lead with this type of receiver.

19For your notes

20 Description of transmitter

Transmitter aerial(ten-sectiontelescopic) Piezo buzzer

Proportional controlsTwo proportional controls are mounted on the sides of the transmitter as standard. A centre detent ensu-res reproducible centre settings. In this case they are described in the corresponding menus as : right-hand control “CTRL 9”, left-hand control “CTRL 10”.

Operating buttons:ENTER Input buttonESC Back buttonCLEAR Erase buttonHELP Help button

LCD screen (see page 22 for more details)The thin protective fi lm over the screen surface can be peeled off using your fi ngers if you wish.Contrast adjustment: from the basic display press the rotary control and rotate it at the same time; al-ternatively press the rotary control and press the CONTROL 5 or 6 buttons, if these are not already in use for other purposes.Warning indicators : If battery voltage falls below the set threshold • if there is a Trainer system mal-function • if Channel 1 is too close to full-throttle when the transmitter is switched on • if the Fail-Safe settings are not correct • power-on warning (checking a switch position).

ON / OFF switch

Note:Always switch the transmitter on fi rst, followed by the receiver. After a fl ight: switch the recei-ver off fi rst, followed by the transmitter.

Rotary control, providing two-level control

Description of transmitterFront panel

Switches between individual lines within a menu when held pressed in. When held pressed in turn the rotary control at the top end of the cylinder for a better grip.

A brief press on the top end of the rotary control chan-ges the input fi eld, or confi rms your input. Pressing the HELP button with the rotary control held pressed in switches directly to the »Servo display« menu from the basic display and most menus.

If rotated in its normal (non-pressed) state, the rota-ry control selects your chosen item from the list in the multi-function menu. Once you have called up a menu point, the rotary control also changes the entered va-lue in a highlighted fi eld (light characters on dark back-ground) which appears at the bottom edge of the screen. Any alterations you make take effect immedia-tely. When not pressed in, turn the rotary control at the bottom end of the cylinder for a better grip.

Transmitter neckstrap lug

Digital trimsFor fi ne adjustment of servo (travel neutral) position. A brief push produces a single increment of offset (the increment size is variable in the “Stick mode” menu). The screen displays the trim positions.

Increment / Decrement buttonsTwo proportional controls as standard: every time the button is pressed, the travel of the associated ser-vo changes by 1% relative to the pre-set servo travel. INC = positive direction, DEC = negative direction. These controls are numbered as follows: right-hand button “CTRL 5”, left-hand button “CTRL 6”. These two buttons can be used as an alternative to the rota-ry control if they are not already in use for other pur-poses.

Stick unitsTwo dual-axis stick units providing four independent control functions. Variable-length sticks. The control functions (i. e. stick mode) can be assigned within the “Base setup model” menu, e. g. throttle left or right. The throttle stick can also be set to be self-neutrali-sing or ratchet action: see page 16.

SwitchesEight external switches as standard (SW = switch), of whichtwo-position: SW 1, 2, 3, 4, 7, 8 (switch 8: self-neutralising)three-position: SW 5 + 6, 9 + 10. The three-position switches are also used as transmitter controls to provide three-position servo tra-vels. In this case they are described in the corresponding menus as : right-hand switch “CTRL 7”, left-hand switch “CTRL 8”.

21

1

2 3

4

56

Description of transmitter

Note:If you intend to work on the interior of the trans-mitter, remember not to switch the transmitter on. Disconnect the transmitter battery from the po-wer socket. Take great care not to touch soldered joints with any metallic object.

Back panel

Opening the transmitter caseUndo the six recessed screws in the rear face of the transmitter using a cross-point screwdriver (size PH1). Be sure to read the section on page 16 before you proceed!

Synthesizer RF and Scan ModuleThe frequency band can be changed quickly and ea-sily by carefully withdrawing the RF module using the two side-mounted lugs. Note: plug-in crystals are not necessary due to the PLL Synthesizer technology employed in the transmitter.The channel is selected under software control imme-diately after you switch the transmitter on; see page 25. The new form of DUAL-CONVERSION scanning receiver is an integral part of the RF module. This en-ables you to check which channels in the vicinity of the transmitter are already in use; see page 24.When you re-install the module, ensure that the con-tact pins are not bent.

Charge socketPlease read the notes on battery charging on pages 12 … 13.Polarity:

Diagnosis socket (DSC*)A special lead is available under Order No. 4178.1 which connects the mx-24s transmitter directly to a suitable receiver. If the transmitter is switched off, plugging the lead in automatically switches it on. At the same time the RF module remains disabled, with the result that no signal is transmitted via the aerial.The DSC socket can also be used as a Teacher or Pupil socket in a Trainer system; for more details ple-ase refer to page 18 and the description of the »Tea-cher / pupil« menu on page 150.

Teacher / PC module, Order No. 3290.22An optional module is available which converts the mx-24s transmitter into an opto-electronic Teacher unit for use in a Trainer system. For Trainer mode ope-rations you will also need to connect a light-pipe (opti-cal cable) to the appropriate socket on the transmitter; this is available as an optional accessory. The second socket on the module is for data transfer between two mx-24s transmitters, or between an mx-24s and a PC. The accessories required for this are also listed in the Appendix.

Battery compartmentIf you need to remove the battery, press on the two corrugated areas with both thumbs, then slide the battery compartment cover in the direction of the ar-row.

* DSC = Direct Servo Control

SYNTHESIZER transmitter RF mo-SYNTHESIZER transmitter RF mo-dules for the dules for the mxmx-24s transmitter-24s transmitterOrder No. Order No. 3853.353853.35 35 MHz band 35 MHz bandOrder No. Order No. 3853.40 3853.40 40/41 MHz band40/41 MHz band

22 Description of screen

ENTER (Input button):Switches to multi-function listCalls up a menuESC (Escape button):Returns step by step from any menu to the basic displayCLEAR (Erase button):Resets altered values to default settingsHELP (Help button):Calls up a brief help message re-lating to any menu

Model name(max. 10 characters)

Model memory 1 … 40

User’s name(max. 15 characters)

Model ope-rating time

Superimposed warning messages*

Stopwatch in min:sec (count-up / count-down)

Flight time in min:sec (count-up / count-down)

Battery voltage, shown by a dynamic bar display. If the battery voltage falls below a

particular (selectable) threshold (see page 155), a warning appears on the screen ac-

companied by an audible alert signal. Transmit-ter operating time. This is

automatically reset to zero

when the bat-tery is rechar-

ged.

Display diagram for all four digital trim levers with numerical and direction indicators: “�” or “�”. Special cut-off trim for C1 (see page 34).For each trim lever separately the “shadow” indicates whether the trim operates glo-bally (= shadow) or separately for each fl ight phase (this parameter is set in the »Stick mode« menu, see pages 76 / 77). Exception: the C1 trim always operates globally.

The rotary control can be operated on two levels. At the basic transmitter display it is used to ad-just screen contrast when held pressed in, or:Press the rotary control and adjust screen cont-rast using CTRL 5 or 6 – unless these buttons are already assigned to ano-ther function.

GRAUPNER logo, alternatively the fl ight pha-se name. Different fl ight phases are selected by operating user-assigned switches.

Description of screen

Batt must be re- charged!!

Charge battery*

Current channel number.

The num-ber fl as-

hes if the RF module is switched

off.

(Note: an additional timer can also be activated.)

Model type Fixed-wing or Helicopter

Notes:* If the transmitter battery voltage is too low, the message “Currently not possible,

battery voltage too low” appears in the »Model select« and »Copy / Erase« me-nus.

** For safety reasons this warning can only be disabled for non-powered fi xed-wing models: in this case select the »Model type« menu (see page 70) and enter “none” in the “Motor” line.

Unlock by rotary and CLR

Button pad lock

Button pad lockHold rotary control pressed in + CLEAR button.

Thr too high!

Throttle stick too advanced**

No pupil signal

Problem with Trainer mode

Fail Safesetupt.b.d.

Only in PCM20, SPCM20 and

APCM24 modes

!Warning!

Power-on war-ning for selectab-

le switch

23Using the transmitter for the fi rst time

Using the transmitter for the fi rst timePreliminary notes, selecting the language

Preliminary notes

When your mx-24s transmitter is delivered it is set by default to SPCM20 mode, which suits receivers of the “smc” type.In addition to SPCM-20 mode the following alternati-ve modes are also available:

• PCM20 mode for all GRAUPNER/JR “mc” and “DS mc” type receivers.

• PPM18 mode for all GRAUPNER/JR “FM-PPM” type receivers.

• PPM24 mode for the GRAUPNER/JR DS 24 FM S receiver.

• PPM10 mode for GRAUPNER/JR FM receivers with up to five servo outputs, e. g. SR6SYN or XP10FM.

• APCM20 mode for all GRAUPNER/JR “amc” type receivers.

The ability to switch transmission modes means that the mx-24s transmitter can operate all GRAUPNER receiving systems supplied to date, i. e. all receivers supplied with PPM-FM and PCM transmitters (with the exception of the FM6014 / PCM18).If you do not intend using a receiver of the “smc” type with the transmitter, the fi rst step is therefore to set the type of modulation to suit your receiver. If you se-lect an incompatible mode, the receiver will not re-spond to the transmitter.The transmission mode can be set in the “Modulati-on” line of the »Base setup model« menu, and the as signment of the four stick functions in the “Stick mode” line (see pages 64 and 66) for the current mo-del memory, or in the »General basic settings« menu (description: page 154) for all future model me-mories.

Which crystals can be used?The mx-24s requires no plug-in crystals. The trans-mission channel is selected by software: see the follo-wing page.

Is the battery charged?When you take receipt of your mx-24s transmit-ter, the battery will be in the discharged state, so you must fi rst charge it as described on pages 12 … 13. If you do not do this, the battery will soon fall below the pre-set threshold voltage, and you will see and hear a warning signal to remind you to recharge it. The low voltage threshold can be set to any value in the range 9.3 to 11.0 V in the “Battery Warning Thres-hold” line of the »General basic settings« menu. The default set-ting is 9.3 V.

Aerial fi tted?Never switch the transmitter on unless the aeri-al is screwed in. Even for prolonged testing you should always fi t the aerial and extend it fully, otherwise the transmitter may malfunction, with pos-sible damage to the RF module.When you wish to control a model it is fundamen-tally essential to screw the ten-section telesco-pic aerial into the transmitter and extend it fully. Transmitter fi eld strength is at a minimum in an ima-ginary line extending straight out from the tip of the transmitter aerial. It is therefore fundamentally misgui-ded to “point” the transmitter aerial at the model with the intention of obtaining good reception.

Selecting the language

The mx-24s allows you to select any of the following four languages:

• German• English• French• Italian

The language is selected by holding the HELP button pressed in while you switch the transmitter on; the fol-lowing display appears:

D GB F I

The rotary control can now be used to select the desi-red language. Confi rm your choice with a brief press on the rotary control, or by pressing the ENTER but-ton.All settings are retained in full if you switch to a different language.

Batt must be re- charged!!

24

Using the system for the fi rst timeFrequency Scanner and Channel Select

Frequency scanner

The SYNTHESIZER RF module is equipped with a dual-conversion frequency scanner. This module en-ables the user to scan the vicinity for occupied chan-nels on the frequency band of your RF module before it is activated.Before you switch the transmitter on, please check that the SYNTHESIZER module is fi rmly seated in the back of the transmitter. If this is not the case, the transmitter will switch directly to the basic display when switched on, and the screen will show the fl a-shing display “C– –” instead of a channel number.

Model name#01 0:30h SPCM20H-J.Sandbrunner

10.9V 0:10h C0 0 0 0

Stop watch

Flight tim

0 000 00::

For safety reasons, every time you switch the trans-mitter on you must fi rst confi rm to the integral Syn-thesizer module that you wish to use the set frequen-cy. This confi rmation takes the form of a security que-ry, intended to prevent you switching the system on accidentally when it is set to the wrong channel. The software displays the message: “RF off / on”. The last set channel is initially highlighted (highlighted = black background) and fl ashes:

C61RF off

SCAN ---NO

switch on

YES

Channel

The integral scanner immediately searches all chan-nels on the current frequency band, regardless of the set channel. If another transmitter is already acti-ve on the pre-set channel – in this case “61” – a mes-

sage appears on the screen to alert you, and at the same time the internal piezo sounder emits a warning sound. The current signal strength is indicated by an on-screen bar diagram:

C61RF off

NO SCAN

IN USE !!Channelswitch on

YES

In the centre – above the “ ” symbol – the signal strength of the currently set channel is displayed, to right and left of it the signals present on the two adja-cent channels.(In our example channel 61 is the lowest channel in the 35 MHz band, so no signal bar is displayed to the left of it.)In our example it is clear that channel 61 is already in use. This means that you must search for another unoccupied channel before activating the RF modu-le. This is accomplished by switching to the SCAN screen page using the rotary control:

---------------------- ----------61 65 70 75 80 182 186 191

On this screen you will see a list of all the channels which are accessible using the RF module current-ly installed in the transmitter. The scanner automati-cally and repeatedly searches the frequency band for further signals.In this example we can see that channel “190” is also in use in addition to channel “61”. The signifi cantly weaker signals – in this case on channels 62, 65, 189 and 191 – may be due to a variety of sources, such

as weak signals from very distant radio control sys-tems, or crosstalk effects from radio control systems in the immediate vicinity. If you think this might be the case, walk a few metres away from the other radio control transmitters, and observe whether the signal strength diminishes rapidly with increasing distance. Under certain circumstances, especially when other transmitters are very close by, what seem to be “un-accountable signals” may be displayed on other chan-nels.

Important notes:• Please note that it is possible to switch the RF

module on even if the message “IN USE !!” ap-pears on the screen. However, if you do switch on, then you will endanger your own model as well as the models of other pilots due to a channel clash (two transmitters on the same frequency).

• The range of the mx-24s scanner is limited, which means that it may not always detect the signals from relatively distant radio control transmitters. You should therefore not rely on the scanner picking up signals from other mo-del pilots if they are standing some way off; this applies in particular if the terrain is uneven and line-of-sight contact is limited.

• The indicated signal strength of other radio control system transmitters depends to a con-siderable extent on the conditions prevailing at the model fl ying site, and also on the trans-mitted power and aerial length of other trans-mitters, the distance between the mx-24s and other transmitters, and the direction of the mx-24s aerial relative to other transmitter aerials. The sensitivity of the integral scanner also vari-es according to the extent to which the mx-24s transmitter aerial is extended.

• At present channel 80 is followed by channels 281 and 282, which are not approved for use in

Using the system for the fi rst time

25Using the system for the fi rst time

Germany; see the channel select list in the next column.

Selecting the channel

Select a vacant spot frequency, e.g. (in this case) channel 65, after establishing that the low-level signal indicated on the display is only due to crosstalk ef-fects from a transmitter in the vicinity. Press the ESC button to return to the previous screen display, and switch to Channel Select “�” using the rotary control:

C61RF off

NO SCAN

IN USE !!Channel

YES

switch on

Press the rotary control or ENTER, then select the desired channel – in this case 65 – from the list using the rotary control:

C61 C65 C66C67C73C79C184C190

C62 C63 C64C68 C69 C70 C71 C72C74 C75 C76 C77 C78C80 C281 C282 C182 C183C185 C186 C187 C188 C189C191

Press the ENTER button or the rotary control to ter-minate the channel select process.If you now wish to activate the RF module with this channel, use the rotary control to move to “YES” and press ENTER (or press the rotary control briefl y); this action switches on the RF module on the new chan-nel:

C65RF off

NO YES SCAN

Channelswitch on

The screen immediately switches to the basic display, which now shows the number of the active channel in highlighted form:

Model name#01 0:30h SPCM20H-J.Sandbrunner

10.9V 0:10h C650 0 0 0

Stop watch

Flight tim

0 000 00::

The transmitter is now ready for use.The following channels are available:

Frequency band Channels*

35/35B MHz band 61 … 80 / 281, 282 also 182 … 191

40/41 MHz band 50… 92 / 400 … 420

* Channels 281 and 282 in the 35 MHz band, and all channels in the 41 MHz band, are not approved for use in Germany. Please refer to the frequency table on page 206, which lists the chan-nels valid in the European continent at time of going to press (information not guaranteed).

You must now switch the transmitter off, then on again, in order actually to switch to another channel.The basic procedure for the initial programming of a new model memory is described on page 58, and in the section starting on page 158 in the programming examples.

W A R N I N G:NEVER, UNDER ANY CIRCUMSTANCES, SWITCH THE TRANSMITTER OFF WHEN YOU ARE FLYING A MODEL AIRCRAFT! IF YOU DO, YOU RUN A SE-RIOUS RISK OF LOSING THE MODEL, AS YOU WILL BE HIGHLY UNLIKELY TO BE ABLE TO RE-ACTIVATE THE RF SIGNAL QUICKLY ENOUGH WHEN YOU SWITCH ON AGAIN, SINCE THE TRANSMITTER ALWAYS RESPONDS WITH THE SECURITY QUERY “RF SIGNAL ON YES / NO” WHEN SWITCHED ON.

26

Batt.

Ser

vos

12

34

56

78

9

Installation notes

Note:If you wish to use a re-ceiver battery and a speed controller with integral BEC* system simultaneously, it is usually necessary to disconnect the positi-ve (red) wire from the 3-pin plug. This varies from controller to controller, so please read the instructions supplied with the unit.

Use a small screwdriver carefully to raise the centre lug of the plug (1), withdraw the red wire (2) and wrap the exposed contact with insulating tape to prevent possible short-circuits (3).

*Battery Elimination Circuit

Please read the installation notes relating to the re-ceiver, the receiver aerial, and the servos on the follo-wing page.If the receiver is of the type requiring an interchange-able plug-in crystal, the channel number of the recei-ver must be identical to the channel number set on the transmitter. In this case it is only permissible to use the plug-in crystals marked “R” (for Receiver) as shown in the table on page 206. No receiver crystal is required if you are using a GRAUPNER PLL Syn-thesizer receiver. According to the receiver type, the desired channel number is set either directly on the receiver using the channel selector, or by means of a frequency scan; see the instructions supplied with the receiver.GRAUPNER receivers are fi tted with polarised so-ckets, so that the servos and power supply cannot be connected the wrong way round; you will fi nd that the plugs are slightly chamfered on one edge to match the sockets. Connect the battery to an ON / OFF switch harness (see the main GRAUPNER FS cata-logue), and connect the switch to the socket on the receiver marked “Batt”.If you use the DS 24 FM S or amc24DSCAN recei-ver you can control up to twelve servos, speed cont-rollers etc. directly. Servos 1 to 12 can be controlled using the two dual-axis sticks and – after appropria-te programming – any other (proportional) controls or switches present on the mx-24s transmitter. The two latter types of controls can be assigned to inputs 5 … 12 in the software; see the »Transmitter control ad-just« menu, pages 78 / 80. However, all servos can also be accessed via mixer functions; see the »Free mixers« menu on page 135.

1

2 3

red

Receiving system(not included in the set)

ReceiverReceiverbatterybattery

receiverAerial

Switch harness

27Installation notes

Installation notes

Installation notes

Your receiving system must be installed correctly in the model. The following are a few suggestions when using GRAUPNER equipment:

1. Wrap the receiver in (anti-static) foam rubber at least 6 mm thick. Fix the foam round the recei-ver using rubber bands to protect it from vibration, hard landings and crash damage.

2. The receiver aerial must be secured in the model, so that there is no chance of it becoming tangled in the propeller or control surfaces. However, ne-ver deploy the aerial in an exactly straight line, but angle it: e. g. run it straight to the tailplane, then leave the fi nal 10 - 15 cm trailing freely, as this avoids reception “blind spots” when the model is in the air. If this is not possible, we recommend that you lay out part of the aerial wire in an S-shape in-side the model, as close to the receiver as possib-le.

3. All switches must be installed in a position where they will not be affected by exhaust gases or vibra-tion. The switch toggle must be free to move over its full range of travel.

4. Always install servos using the vibration-damping grommets and tubular metal spacers supplied. The rubber grommets provide some degree of protec-tion from mechanical shocks and severe vibration. The drawing on the right shows the correct me-thod of mounting a servo. The metal spacers are fi tted into the rubber grommets from underneath. Don’t over-tighten the servo retaining screws, as this will compress the grommets and thereby redu-ce the vibration protection they afford. The system offers good security and effective vibration protec-tion for your servos, but only if the servo retaining screws are fi tted and tightened properly.

5. The servo output arms must be free to move over their full arc of travel; ensure that no part of the

Servo mounting lug

Retaining screw

Rubber grommet

Brass tubular spacer

mechanical linkage can obstruct the servo in its movement. It is also mandatory to ensure that the servo is not stalled mechanically at any point in its travel. If this is the case, re-connect the mechani-cal linkage to reduce the linear travel, or reduce the servo travel at the transmitter. This is carried out in the option “Travel reduction” in the »Servo adjustment« menu.

The sequence in which the servos are connected to the receiver is dictated by the model type. Please see the socket assignments listed on pages 37 and 43.Be sure to read the safety notes on pages 4 … 6.

Servo mounting

If the receiver is ever switched on when the transmit-ter is off, the servos may carry out uncontrolled move-ments. You can avoid this by keeping to the following order when switching the system on:

Always switch the transmitter on fi rst,followed by the receiver.

And when switching the system off:

Always switch the receiver off fi rst,followed by the transmitter.

When programming the transmitter you must always ensure that any electric motors in the system cannot possibly burst into life accidentally, and that an I. C. engine fi tted with an automatic starter cannot start unintentionally. In the interests of safety it is always best to disconnect the fl ight battery, or cut off the fuel supply, before carrying out any programming work.

Range checkingBefore every session you should always check that each working system is functioning correctly, and car-ry out a range check with the model on the ground. The transmitter aerial should be fi tted but collapsed completely. Carry the aerial a suitable distance from the model, operating the controls all the time: each function should work smoothly and correctly during this test. If your model is powered, repeat the check with the motor running to ensure that it does not cau-se interference.

28

Defi nition of termsControl functions, transmitter controls, function inputs, control channels, mixers, switches, control switches, fi xed switches

Defi nition of terms

To make it easier for you to understand the mx-24s manual, we present at this stage two pages of defi ni-tions of terms which crop up again and again in the remainder of the text, together with a basic fl ow chart of the course of the signal from the transmitter con-trol to the point where it is broadcast from the trans-mitter aerial.

Control functionThe term “control function” can be thought of as the signal which is generated in order to control a par-ticular function – initially independent of the course of the signal in the transmitter. In the case of fi xed-wing model aircraft, throttle, rudder and aileron repre-sent control functions, whereas collective pitch, roll-axis and pitch-axis are typical of those used to con-trol model helicopters. The signal of a control func-tion may be assigned directly to a control channel, or to several control channels via mixers. A typical ex-ample of the latter is a pair of separate aileron ser-vos, or two roll-axis or pitch-axis servos in a model helicopter. In particular, the control function includes the infl uence of the travel of the mechanical transmit-ter control on the corresponding servo. This can be expanded or compressed by means of software; it is also possible to modify the characteristics of the tra-vel from linear at one end of the scale to extreme ex-ponential at the other.

Transmitter control (CTRL)The term “transmitter control” refers to the mechani-cal elements on the transmitter which are operated directly by the pilot. Their movements in turn produce corresponding movements in the servos, speed con-trollers etc. at the receiver end. Transmitter controls include the following:• The two dual-axis stick units for the control func-

tions 1 to 4; these four functions can be interchan-ged in any way you like through software, e. g. throttle left or right, without having to re-connect the servos. The dual-axis stick function for thrott-le or airbrake control is often known as the C1

(Channel 1) control.• The two proportional controls

located on the sides of the case, which are always referred to as controls number 9 (right-hand “rotary slider”) and 10 (left-hand “rotary slider”) at various points in the program.

• The two transmitter controls termed CONT-ROL 5 and 6. On the mx-24s these have a dual function:a) If these two transmitter controls are not assi-

gned to any of the inputs in the »Control ad-just« menu (see pages 78 and 80), they can be used as INCrement / DECrement buttons for adjusting values in the “+” (INC) and “-” (DEC) directions, as an alternative to the ROTARY control.

b) If they are assigned as transmitter controls in the »Control adjust« menu, they change the position of the associated servo by a 1% incre-ment (relative to the currently set servo travel – see the »Servo adjustment« menu) every time they are pressed. The posi-tions are superimposed on the basic screen display im-mediately the buttons are pressed, or when you press the rotary control. This is ideal, for example, for set-ting the camber-changing fl aps to different positions in individual fl ight phases. If they are held pressed in for a longer time, the rate of change alters automatically – made audible by a faster sequence of beeps. You will also hear an audible signal when the buttons reach the centre position.

Note:The position of these two transmitter controls is always stored separately for each fl ight pha-se, provided that they have been assigned to

one of the inputs 5 … 12 in the »Control ad-just« menu.

• However, the servos can also be swit-ched between three different fi xed posi-tions (forward - centre - back) by means of the three-position switches termed CONTROL 7 and 8. They can also be switched between two positions (forward - back) using any of the remaining switches (SW = abbreviation for switch), e. g. from the one servo end-point to the other. The individual positions which a servo takes up at each switch position can be set individually (see the »Control adjust« menu, pages 78 and 80, and the »Servo adjustment« menu, page 74).

The transmitter control or switch which operates each one of the servos 5 … max. 12 is freely programmab-le, without restriction.

Important note:In the default state of the transmitter software all these inputs are set to “free”, i. e. they are not as-signed to any functions as standard.

The numbers printed on the transmitter are intended exclusively to help you keep track of the program-ming procedure. Only in the Helicopter menu is the right-hand side-mounted proportional control (CON-TROL 9) already assigned to the “Throttle limit func-tion”; see page 82. In the Helicopter menu, inputs 6, 7 and 12 are also assigned to “Throttle”, “Gyro” and “Throttle limit” respectively, since helicopter-specifi c functions are controlled using these inputs.Physically and terminologically each transmitter cont-rol terminates where it reaches the …

Function inputThis is an imaginary point in the signal path, and must not be considered the same as the point on the circuit board where the transmitter control is connec-ted. In fact, the line “Stick mode” of the menu »Model type« and the menu »Control adjust« infl uence the sequence “down-stream” of these connections, i. e. it

PCM20ner

h C65 0 0

Stop

Flight

dame

29

D/R EXPO

D/R EXPO

D/R EXPO

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

RF

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

1

2

3

4

is possible – and indeed likely – that there will be dif-ferences between the number of the transmitter con-trol and the number of the subsequent control chan-nel.

Control channelThere is a point in the signal path where the signal contains all the information required to control a par-ticular servo. Whether it emanates directly from a transmitter control or indirectly via a mixer, we now describe this as a control channel. This signal is ge-nerated individually for each servo, and then leaves the transmitter via the RF module in order to control the corresponding servo in the model.

MixersThe signal fl ow chart includes a wide range of mixer functions. Their purpose is to enable a control func-tion to branch at the mixer input, so that it can affect multiple servos. The mixer programs provided by the software are extremely wide-ranging and versatile. Please refer to the section of this manual starting on page 110, which describes the numerous mixer func-tions in full detail.

Switches (SW)Earlier we saw that the two-position and three-po-sition switches provided by the mx-24s are able to move their associated servos to two or three pre-de-fi ned positions. However, all these switches are also designed to be used for switching program options, e. g. for starting and stopping timers, switching mi-xers on and off, toggling Trainer mode etc.. For this reason the two three-position switches are also de-scribed as “SW 5 + 6” and “SW 9 + 10”. The switch SW 8 – top right, rear – is a self-neutralising unit.Each switch can be assigned as many functions as you wish. The linking of several switches in “AND” or “OR” combinations (see the »Logical switches« menu on page 97) enables them to be used in very complex superimposed arrangements. Numerous ex-amples are described later in this manual.

Defi nition of terms

Control function

Control channel

Aer

ial

Ser

vo a

dju

stm

ent:

rev

erse

- c

entr

e -

trav

el -

lim

it

mx-

24s-

Pro

gram

me

For example:

Model type

Helicopter type

Control switches

Logical switches

Phase settings

Phase assignment

Non-delayed channels

Wing mixers

Helicopter mixers

Free mixers

MIX active in phase

MIX only channel

Dual mixers

2-po

sitio

n sw

itch

3-po

sitio

n sw

itch

For switching mixers, auto-rotation, fl ight phases etc.

Function input

Channel 1 curve

Dual-axis stick unit

Dual-axis stick unit

Transmitter control (digital button) 5

Transmitter control (digital button) 6

Transmitter control 7 (3-position switch)

Transmitter control 8 (3-position switch)

Transmitter control 9 (right-hand side-mounted

rotary control)

Free assignment of transmitter controls 1, 5 … 10 and of all swit-ches (SW) by software

Stic

k m

ode

1 …

4U

nres

tric

ted

tran

smitt

er c

ontr

ol a

ssig

nmen

t, in

puts

5 …

12

Tran

smit

ter

con

tro

l set

tin

gs:

offs

et -

con

trol

trav

el -

tim

e

Tran

smitt

er c

ontr

ols

By

defa

ult t

rans

mitt

er c

ontr

ols

5 …

12 a

re d

e-co

uple

d in

the

softw

are

– (e

xcep

tion:

T

hrot

tle li

mite

r co

ntro

l)

Tran

smitt

er c

ontr

ol in

puts

1 …

4

can

be in

terc

hang

ed in

the

»Bas

e se

tup

mo

del

« m

enu.

Tran

smitt

er c

ontr

ols

1 an

d 5

… 1

0 ca

n be

ass

igne

d to

in-

puts

5 …

12

in a

ny o

rder

in

the

»Co

ntr

ol a

dju

st«

men

u.

Mix

er in

put

Mix

er o

utpu

t

Transmitter control 10 (left-hand side-mounted

rotary control)

Signal fl ow chart

or

30 Transmitter buttons and rotary control

Transmitter control switchesSometimes it is desirable to switch a function on or off at a particular position of another transmitter con-trol, e. g. at a defi ned position of one of the dual-axis sticks. Typical examples are switching a stopwatch on and off, extending spoilers automatically, and many others.The mx-24s software includes a total of eight soft-ware “switches” of this type, termed “G1 … G8”. All you have to do is defi ne the switching point on the travel of the transmitter control; this just requires pushing a button. The direction of switching can be determined in the software by operating the associa-ted transmitter control at the stage when the control switch is assigned.In the »Control switches« menu, pages 78 and 80, you will fi nd that two frequently needed control swit-ches are already pre-programmed: both of them on the throttle stick (“Control 1”) with a switching point at -75% (G1) and +75% travel (G2). Naturally, transmitter control switches can also be combined in order to solve more complex problems; they can also be used in conjunction with the physi-cal switches which have already been described.A series of instructive examples makes it child’s play to program these functions: please refer to the pro-gramming examples starting on pages 94, 170, ...

Fixed switches FXI and FXThis type of switch turns a function on permanently – e. g. a timer (closed fi xed switch) or off permanent-ly (open fi xed switch). These two fi xed switches are part of a range of “expanded switches”, to which the logical switches also belong. They can be program-med in any of the menus in which the following win-dow is superimposed when an assignment is made (see page 32 for more details):

Move desired switchto ON position(ext. switch: ENTER)

Operating buttons

The transmitter is programmed using just four but-tons situated to the left of the screen, in conjunction with the crucial element: the “3-D rotary control” to the right of the screen, the functions of which are descri-bed on the following page.

Operating buttons:• ENTER The fi rst time you press the ENTER button you

move from the basic screen display to the multi-function menus. You also press ENTER to call up a selected menu.

• ESC = ESCAPE

Pressing the ESC button takes you one step back at the function select stage, and continues to re-turn you through the system until you reach the basic display.

• CLR = CLEAR

At the programming stage, pressing CLEAR re-sets an altered parameter to the default value. CLEAR is also used to leaf backwards through the pages within the Help system.

• HLP = HELP

At any point in the programming process you can press this button to call up a brief Help text which informs you how to use the individual menu in which you are currently located. Within the Help text you can leaf forwards through the screen pa-ges by pressing the HELP button again, and leaf through backwards using the CLEAR button.

Basic operationsButton pad, hotkeys for fast acccess, functions of the rotary control ENTER, ESC, CLEAR, HELP, contrast adjustment, button pad lock

Hotkeys, functions of the rotary control

The basic method of using the rotary control has al-ready been described on page 20. Here we show an example of using the rotary control in a practical ap-plication.First switch the transmitter on (the method of selec-ting a channel and using the scanner have already been described in the section starting on page 24). Now just press the ENTER button, so that the RF mo-dule remains switched off. You are now at the basic screen display.

Note:If the two digital buttons CONTROL 5 and / or 6 have not already been assigned to other purposes, e. g. in the case of a brand-new transmitter or a newly initia-lised model memory, these buttons have exactly the same effect as turning the rotary control.

• Adjusting screen contrast

Model name#01 0:00h SPCM20H-J.Sandbrunner

10.9V 0:05h C650 0 0 0

Stop watch

Flight tim

0 000 00::

Press and Press and rotaterotate

You can adjust the screen display to suit the am-bient conditions by pressing and turning the rota-ry control.

• Switching the button pad lock on and offModel name

#01 0:05h SPCM20H-J.Sandbrunner

10.9V 0:30h C650 0 0 0

Stop watch

Flight tim

0 000 00::

+ CLEAR

A key symbol to the left of the GRAUPNER/JR logo indicates that the button pad is locked. You can unlock or lock the button pad by pressing the CLEAR button whilst holding the rotary control pressed in.

31

• Quick-SelectHold rota-Hold rota-ry control ry control pressed inpressed in

All codes

!

Base servo sett.SwitchesTimersSpecial funct.

MemoryTransm. controlsFlight phasesMixersGlobal functions

From the multi-function list you can move to a “pro-gram structure summary” with a long press on the rotary control. In the interests of clarity, this sum-mary shows the menus grouped together logically.

Continue to hold the rotary control pressed in, and select the desired block of menus. As soon as you release the rotary control again, the on-screen list will include only those menus associated with the category type.

• Slot time The slot time can be stopped by pressing the ESC

button with the rotary control pressed in, and then reset by pressing the CLR button.

• Menu settings A brief press on the rotary control or ENTER takes

you to a menu, while pressing ESC takes you back again.

Now select a line within a menu:BASIC SETTINGS, MODEL

Stick modeInfoModel name

Modulation

Press and Press and rotaterotate

Call up an input fi eld:Brief Brief presspress

BASIC SETTINGS, MODEL

Stick modeInfoModel name

ModulationSEL

1

Fast access hotkeys, additional functions of the rotary controlHotkeys for: servo display, model select, multi-function list, quick-select and slot time; using the rotary control for menu settings• Servo Display hotkey

� � � � � � � � � � � � � � � �

� � � � � � � � � � � � ��� �

� � � � � � � � � � � � � � � �

� � � � � � � � � � � �

� � � � � � � � � � � �

� � � � � � � � � � �

+ HELP

During the programming process you can move directly to the »Servo display« menu (see page 156) from the basic display and from virtually any menu by pressing the HELP button with the rotary control pressed in.

This display shows the servo travels, taking into account all mixer and set-up values.

Pressing the rotary control again immediately re-turns you to your starting point.

• Model Select hotkey

+ ENTER

Graubele02 Soarmaster 2:45h03 DV20KATANA 5:46h still in test04 Starlet 50 8:31h05 ��� free

01

06

1:25h PCM20 1675GrPPM18 070707

trim: new adj.

��� free���

���

From the basic display you can move directly to the »Model select« menu (see page 59) by pres-sing the ENTER button with the rotary control pressed in.

• Calling up the multi-function list from the basic display

Base setup model

Model selectSuppress codes

Servo adjustmentControl adjustChannel 1 curve

Copy / EraseSuppress modelsModel typeStick modeDual Rate / ExpoSwitch display

SelectSelectmenumenu

A brief press on the rotary control or ENTER takes you to the multi-function list, while ESC takes you back again.

Select the menu you wish to use by turning the ro-tary control (or using CONTROL 5 or 6).

Transmitter buttons and rotary control

Change a value:BASIC SETTINGS, MODEL

Stick modeInfoModel name

ModulationSEL

2

RotateRotate

Confi rm input and quit:

BASIC SETTINGS, MODEL

Stick modeInfoModel name

Modulation2

SEL

Brief Brief presspress

If you can see function fi elds in the bottom line in addition to the SEL fi eld, you can access them by turning the rotary control.

Press ESC to return step by step to the previous page.

32

Assigning transmitter controls and switches

The mx-24s offers maximum fl exibility in terms of as-signing the standard transmitter controls to particular functions.Since the method of assigning transmitter controls and switches is the same in all the relevant menus, we shall explain the basic programming at this point, so that you can concentrate on the specialised con-tent when reading the detailed descriptions of the in-dividual menus.

In the »Control adjust« menu …… (see pages 78 / 80) you can assign Control 1, and any other transmitter controls designated “CTRL”, or switches designated “SW”, to the transmitter inputs 5 … 12 in order to control servos. The screen displays the following window:

Now just operate one of the following transmitter con-trols (CTRL) or switches (SW):

Notes:The software only detects the two INC / DEC buttons 5 + 6 after a few “beeps”. This means that you must hold them pressed in the up or down direction until the assignment is displayed on-screen. If there is in-suffi cient travel for this, simply move the control in the opposite direction.

Assigning transmitter controls, switches and control switchesBasic procedure, meaning of the fi xed switches “FX”

In the »Control switch« menu …… (see page 94) this message is superimposed:

Important note:If you wish to assign the transmitter controls (es-pecially CONTROL 5 + 6), it is ESSENTIAL to as-sign them to one of the inputs 5 to 12 beforehand; this is carried out in the »Control adjust« menu.

In addition to the transmitter controls mentioned abo-ve (see left column), you can also select one of the four dual-axis stick functions simply by moving the stick physically forward or back, or to right or left.

Assigning switchesThe switch symbol appears in the bottom line of the screen at all points in the programming procedure where switches can be assigned.If you move to this fi eld using the rotary control, the switch symbol fi eld changes to highlighted (black background):

This is how you assign one of the switches:1. Brief press on the rotary control

2. The following fi eld appears on the screen:

Now simply select the switch you wish to use and move it to the “ON” position, following the instruc-tions in the window; this completes the assignment process, and the switch appears on the screen for

the relevant menu. A switch symbol adjacent to the switch number shows the current status of the associated switch.

The three-position switches designated CTRL 7 and 8 and also SW 5 / 6 and 9 / 10 can be used purely as switches as well as for the purpose of transmitter controls, which means that a total of ten switches (“SW 1 … 10”) is available to you for any purpose.

Note:The position to which you eventually move the switch (in order to assign it) is accepted by the transmitter as the ON position. For this reason you should move the external switch to your intended OFF position before you activate the switch sym-bol.

3. Changing the direction of switching

If the switch turns out to work in the wrong direc-tion, you can correct it as follows: move the switch to the desired OFF position, select the switch sym-bol once more, and assign the switch again, this time with the direction of switching you prefer.

4. Erasing switches

First activate the switch symbol as described un-der Point 2, then press the CLEAR button.

Assigning from the “Expanded switches” listIn various menus it is possible to assign the switches designated “SW”. These menus are defi ned by the appearance of the following superimposed window …

In these menus it is also possible to assign any of the so-called “expanded switches”.This is accomplished by following the instructions in

Switch assignment

Move desired switchor control adj.

Move desired switchto ON position(ext. switch: ENTER)

Move desiredcontrol adj.

CTRL5 + 6

CTRL 7 + 8or SW 1 ... 10

CTRL9 + 10

Throttle stick C1

Move desired switchto ON position(ext. switch: ENTER)

33Switch assignment / Function fi elds

Using the transmitter control switches “G1 … G8”For some special functions it may be preferable to trigger the switching action at a particular position of a transmitter control, rather than manually using a normal switch (SW). Of course, you can vary the posi-tion of the control when the switch is triggered.Eight switches of this type, termed control switches G1 ... G8, are available for this purpose; their swit-ching direction can be reversed (inverted) in the »Control switches« menu; see page 94.

How to assign a control switchStarting from the selected (and therefore highlighted) switch symbol ( ) in the appropriate menu, just operate the desired transmitter control when the win-dow …

… is superimposed on the screen.The direction of movement when you assign the con-trol also determines the switching direction “Switch open / closed”. A switch symbol after the assignment indicates the switch status: “ ” or “ ”.However, if the switching direction is not correct, the solution is to press the CLEAR button to erase the control switch when the window shown above is su-perimposed, and then re-assign the control switch with the new switching direction, as described above.

Note:All the switches described thus far can also be assigned to multiple functions. Please take care to avoid ACCIDENTALLY assigning several func-tions to one switch where they could interfe-re with each other. We recommend that you write down the switch functions you have assigned.

Move desired switchto ON position(ext. switch: ENTER)

the window, i. e. by pressing the ENTER button: a new window now appears showing a list containing the two fi xed switches “FX” and the logical switches “L1 … L8” and “L8i … L8i”:

Turn the rotary control to select the desired switch; if you reach the end of the second line you will see the switches L3i to L8i superimposed:

Fixed switchesThe two FX switches turn a function either on (“FXI”) or off (“FX ”) permanently.

Logical switchesUsing the logical switches – see »Logical switches« menu, page 97 – you can link together two switches and / or control switches logically in an “AND” or “OR” manner. The software provides a total of eight logical switches “L1 … L8” (plus a further eight inverted logi-cal switches, with the opposite switching direction).

However, the outcome of one of these logical swit-ched functions can equally well be used as a swit-ched function in a further logical switch arrangement. See the appropriate menu for more details of this.

Gewünschten Schalteroder Geber betätigen(erw. Schalt.: ENTER)

Logical / fixed switchFX L1 L2FXI L3 L4

L5 L6 L7 L8 L1i L2i

In certain menus you will see function fi elds in the bottom line of the screen; they can be called up using the rotary control:

TOG ASYSYMSEL STO CLR ENT �

• TOG: Include / suppress menus

• SEL (select): Select

• : Switch symbol fi eld (assigning swit-ches, control switches and logical switches)

• STO (store): Store (save) (e. g. transmitter control position)

• CLR (clear): Erase (e. g. curve reference point)

• SYM: Adjust values symmetrically

• ASY: Adjust values asymmetrically

• ENT (enter): Only in the »Code lock« menu

• �: Switch to second page (next menu) within a menu

Function fi elds

SEL, STO, CLR, SYM, ASY, , TOG, �, ENT

Gewünschten Schalteroder Geber betätigen(erw. Schalt.: ENTER)FXIL5 L6 L7 L8 L1i L2iL3i L4i L5i L6i L7i L8i

Logical / fixed switch

34

Digital trimsDescription of function, and C1 cut-off trim

Digital trims with visual and audible indicators

Both the dual-axis stick units are fi tted with digital trim systems. When you give the trim lever a brief push (one “click”), the neutral position of the associated stick channel changes by one increment. If you hold the trim lever in one direction, the trim value changes continuously in the corresponding direction with incre-asing speed. The trim increment can be set to any va-lue in the range “1” to “10” in the »Stick mode« menu (see pages 76 / 77), corresponding to servo travel of around 0.2% … 3% per click. The current position and numerical trim value are displayed on the screen.The degree of trim offset is also “audible”, as the pitch of the tone changes to refl ect the setting. When you are fl ying a model, you can fi nd the trim centre posi-tion easily without having to look at the screen: if you over-run the centre setting, the trim stays in the cen-tre position for a moment before continuing.The current trim values are automatically stored when you switch from one model memory to another.The digital trims can also be stored globally or se-parately for each fl ight phase within a model memo-ry, with the exception of the “C1” (Channel 1) trim, which is the throttle / airbrake trim on a fi xed-wing model. The “global” or “phase” setting is selected in the »Stick mode« menu (see pages 76 / 77). Note that the C1 trim is always set to “global” in the softwa-re, i. e. it acts independently of any fl ight phases you may have set.In the basic display this pre-set is indicated by a form of “shadow” at the trim display bars:

• Shadow present = global,

• Shadow suppressed = fl ight phase specifi c.In the model memory to which the following screen-shot relates two trims have been set separately for each fl ight phase (“phase” setting):

Model name#01 0:05h SPCM20H-J.Sandbrunner

10.9V 0:10h C650 0 0 0

Stop watch

Flight tim

0 000 00::

1. Fixed-wing model aircraft The C1 trim features a special function which

makes it easy to re-locate the correct idle setting of an internal-combustion engine – provided that you have selected “Throttle min. forward or back” in the “Motor” line of the »Model type« menu (see page 70). If not, the cut-off trim is permanently disabled.

Initially you use the trim lever in the usual way to select a reliable idle setting for the motor. If you move the C1 trim lever to its end-point in the direc-tion of “motor cut-off”, pushing the lever in a single movement, a marker appears on the screen at the last position. You can now return to the correct idle setting for starting the motor simply by pushing the trim one click in the direction of “open throttle”.

Notes:

• Since this trim function only takes effect in the “Motor stopped” direction, the screen image shown above changes if you alter the thrott-le minimum position of the C1 stick from “back”

(as shown in the screen-shot above) to “for-ward” in the “Motor” line of the »Model type« menu.

• Naturally you can assign the C1 stick to the left-hand dual-axis stick unit if you prefer; see the »Base setup model« menu, described on page 64.

2. Model helicopters In Helicopter mode the C1 trim has another fea-

ture in addition to “cut-off trim”, as described under “Fixed-wing model aircraft” above; this time in con-junction with the “Throttle limit function”: using a “throttle limit slider” the throttle servo travel can be limited in the direction of full throttle. For more de-tails of this please turn to page 82.

Note regarding helicopters:The C1 trim only affects the throttle servo and not the collective pitch servos; it also works only in the direction of idle. Please note that the helicopter throttle servo must be connected to receiver out-put 6 (see Receiver socket assignment on page 43).

Digital trims

0:30h SPCM20ndbrunner

0:30h V65 28100 0

Stop

Flight

0 000 00::

om Modèle

Current trim position

Trim valueTrim direction indicator

C1 trim leverLast C1 trim position

Idle

dire

ctio

n

CM20r

K65 28100 0

Stop w

Flight

0 000 00::

le

Marker indicates the last C1 trim position (idle setting)

Throttle limit slider

Trim position at which the motor is cut

35For your notes

36

Fixed-wing models

Fixed-wing models

This program provides straightforward, carefully tailo-red support for conventional models with up to two ai-leron servos and four fl ap servos, V-tail models, fl ying wings and deltas with two elevon (aileron / eleva-tor) servos and up to four fl ap servos. However, the vast majority of power model and gliders belong to the “normal” tail type with one servo each for eleva-tor, rudder, ailerons and throttle (or electronic speed controller, or airbrakes on a glider). There is also the special model type “2 EL Sv 3+8” which automatically provides a means of connecting two elevator servos to channels 3 and 8.If the model has a V-tail instead of a standard tail con-fi guration, you should select the “V-tail” type in the »Model type« menu, as this mixes together the ele-vator and rudder functions in the required way, i. e. each tail control surface is actuated by a separate servo, and both assume superimposed elevator and rudder functions.If your model features two separate aileron servos, the aileron travels can be set up with differential mo-vement, i. e. the down-travel can be set independent-ly of the up-travel. Finally the program caters for cam-ber-changing fl aps which can be operated, for ex-ample, by the transmitter control assigned to input “6” in the »Transmitter control adjust« menu.The “fl ap differential” function can be used to provide differential travel when the fl aps are programmed to

follow the aileron function.For deltas and fl ying wings it is easy to set up mixed elevons, i. e. the aileron and elevator functions can be carried out by common control surfaces at the trailing edge of the right and left wing. The program contains the appropriate mixer functions for the two servos as standard.Up to eight fl ight phases can be programmed in each of the forty model memories provided by the mx-24s (see the »Phase settings« and »Phase assign-ment« menus). A copy facility is provided, making the setting of individual fl ight phases much easier (see the »Copy / Erase« menu).Four timers are available at all times when fl ying. Ad-ditional timers and a lap counter with stopwatch func-tion can also be displayed on-screen, separately for each fl ight phase (»Timers (general)« and »Flight phase timers« menus). The screen also displays the transmitter operating time and the time which has elapsed for each model memory.Phase-specifi c trims can be stored for fl aps, ailerons and elevator (see the »Phase trim F3B« menu).The digital trim positions can be stored either globally or separately for each fl ight phase – with the excepti-on of the C1 trim. The digital motor-cut trim provides a simple means of re-locating the correct idle thrott-le setting.

“Dual Rate” and “Exponential” can be programmed for aileron, rudder and elevator, giving two modes of con-trol in each fl ight phase.As an option, a transmitter control (C1 stick, side-mounted proportional control, INC / DEC buttons or switch) can be assigned to inputs 5 … 8, separately for each fl ight phase (see »Control adjust« menu).In addition to eight freely assignable linear mixers, the program offers four curve mixers (see »Free mixers« menu), four dual mixers (see »Dual mixers« menu) and fl ight phase specifi c eight-point curves (see »Channel 1 curve«) for channel 1 (throttle / brake).The »Wing mixers« menu presents you with a list of pre-defi ned mixers and coupling functions from which you can choose; the list varies according to the num-ber of wing-mounted servos you have entered.1. Multi-fl ap menu: control of camber-changing fl aps

as ailerons. Infl uence of aileron trim on fl aps when operated as ailerons, fl ap differential, travel of the fl ap function of all pairs of ailerons and fl aps, aile-rons operating as camber-changing fl aps. Elevator 3 � 6 fl ap mixer.

2. Airbrake settings: Butterfl y (Crow), differential re-duction, elevator curve

3. Aileron 2 � 4 rudder mixer4. Flap 6 � 3 elevator mixer

left

right

Brake � Flap

Brake � Elevator

Airbrake-Funktion 1

left

right

Rudder/ElevatorV-tail

Brake � FL, FL2

Brake � Elevator

Brake � AileronAil

FL1

FL2

Ail

FL1

FL2

Ail

Flap

Flap

Ail

Ele

v.�

Ailer.

Elev

. �Flap

Flap � Elev.

Ailer. � Rudder

Fla

p�

Ailer.

Aile

r.

� Flap

Ailer. � Rudd.

Fl

ap � Elev.

Ele

v.

� Flap

Aile

r.

� Flap

Elevator � Aileron

Aileron � Rudder

Flap, Flap 2 � Elevator

Elev. � Flap, Flap 2

Aile

ron

�

Flap, Flap 2

FL

1F

L

2 � Ail

Ail

�F

L1 , FL2

FL

1,

F L 2 � Ail

Option: two pairs of flaps FL1, FL2

37Fixed-wing models

In the following section you will fi nd the receiver so-cket sequence which is required for your model, star-ting with “standard models” with no more than two control surfaces per wing panel. For a six-fl ap model please turn to page 38. For an eight-fl ap model you need a receiver with at least ten servo outputs (twelve is even better); the receiver socket sequence for this is described on page 184.

Receiver socket sequence for models with up to four control surfaces per wing panelThe servos MUST be connected to the receiver out-puts in the following order:

Models with the “normal” and “V-tail” tail type

Models with the “Delta / Flying wing” tail type

If the model features a second rudder servo, it should be connected to output 5. A dual mixer (»Dual mi-xers« menu – see page 144) of the “� 5� �RU�” type has to be programmed so that the rudder stick operates the second rudder in parallel with the fi rst rudder; differential travel of the two rudders is also possible with this arrangement.

D U A L M I X E RM i x e r RU 0%M i x e r

Diff.SEL �

�

5? ? ? ? 0%

SEL

M i x e r ? ? ? ? 0%

SEL

123

Tips:The dual mixer shown above permits the pair of rud-ders or spoilers to be employed as airbrakes using a transmitter control assigned to input 5 in the »Trans-mitter control adjust« menu, e. g. one of the side-mounted proportional controls. If you would like to move the neutral point to one of the two end-points of the transmitter control, you must set the transmitter control offset to -100% or +100%; see also page 78.

Models with the “2 EL Sv 3+8” tail type

Second elevator servo

Free, or aux. function, or right fl ap servo

Free, or aux. function or fl ap servo / left fl ap servo

Right aileron servo

Rudder servo

Elevator servo

Aileron servo or left aileron servo

Airbrake or throttle or speed controller (electric model)

Batt987654321

Free, or aux. function

Battery

Rec

eive

r

Note:Outputs not required should simply be left unused. Please note the following points in particular:

• If your model features only one aileron servo, re-ceiver output 5 (right aileron) should either be left unused or employed for an auxiliary function.

• If your model features only one fl ap servo, recei-ver output 7 (for the right fl ap) and outputs 9 and 10 for the inboard pair of fl aps should either be left unused or employed for auxiliary functions.

PPM receivers of other makes

If you are using a PPM-FM receiver made by ano-ther manufacturer* in a model which was previously fl own using a non-Graupner transmitter, and you wish to operate it with a GRAUPNER transmitter, e. g. the mx-24s for Trainer mode operations, it may be ne-cessary to re-connect servos to the receiver outputs in the order stated on the previous page. Alternatively you can carry out the appropriate adjustments in the »Receiver output swap« menu, see page 153. You may also need to adjust servo travels and directions of rotation; this is always carried out in the »Servo adjustment« menu; see page 74.

Free, or aux. function

Free, or aux. function, or right fl ap servo

Free, or aux. function or fl ap servo / left fl ap servo

Right aileron servo

Right V-tail servo

Left V-tail servo

Aileron servo or left aileron servo

Airbrake or throttle or speed controller (electric model)

Batt987654321

Free, or aux. function

Battery

Rec

eive

r

Free, or aux. function

Free, or aux. function, or right fl ap servo

Free, or aux. function or fl ap servo / left fl ap servo

Free, or aux. function (right rudder)

Rudder

Right elevon servo

Left elevon servo

Airbrake or throttle or speed controller (electric model)

Batt987654321

Free, or aux. function

Battery

Rec

eive

r

Battery

Free, or aux. function

Free, or aux. function, or right fl ap servo

Free, or aux. function or fl ap servo / left fl ap servo

Right aileron servo

Rudder servo

Elevator servo

Aileron servo or left aileron servo

Airbrake or throttle or speed controller (electric model)

Batt987654321

Free, or aux. function

Rec

eive

r

* GRAUPNER does not guarantee that GRAUPNER radio cont-rol systems will work correctly in conjunction with receiving sys-tems and radio control equipment made by other manufacturers.

38

Fixed-wing models

38 Fixed-wing models

Receiver socket sequence for models with six control surfaces per wing panel and PPM24 or APCM24 receivers

Models with the “normal” and “2 EL Sv 3+8” tail type

Models with the “V-tail” tail type

The receiver socket sequence is the same as the “normal” type with the difference that the two V-tail servos are connected as listed below:

Models with the “Delta / Flying wing” tail type

Deltas / fl ying wings with two ruddersSee the set-up notes on the previous page.

82 56 1 7

34

left

right

8

7

3

2

6

14PPM24, APCM24

Receiver socket sequence for models with six control surfaces per wing panel and PCM20 or SPCM20 receiversWhen using a PCM transmission link, the control data is compressed before being transmitted, and if you use a PCM or SPCM receiver the servos connec-ted to sockets 9 and / or 10 may be slightly less than smooth-running (see also page 137). This effect may be particularly noticeable with a six-fl ap model if the servos for the second pair of fl aps are to be controlled by the aileron stick (as set up in the “Multi-fl ap menu” of the »Wing mixers« menu). For this reason it is es-sential to assign the inboard fl ap servos 9 + 10 to re-ceiver outputs 1 + 8 in the »Receiver output swap« menu if you are using a PCM or SPCM receiver. For more details see the later section “PCM and SPCM receiver output”.

Models with the “normal” and “V-tail” tail type

82 56 1 7

34

Battery

Right fl ap 2

Right fl ap

Flap or left fl ap

Right aileron

Rudder or right V-tail

Elevator or left V-tail

Aileron or left aileron

Left fl ap 2

Batt

987654321

10Free, or aux. function or throttle

Free, or aux. function

Rec

eive

r

PCM20, SPCM20

Battery

Free, or second elevator, or aux. function

Right fl ap

Flap or left fl ap

Right aileron servo

Rudder servo

Elevator servo

Aileron servo or left aileron servo

Airbrake or throttle or speed controller (electric model)

Batt

987654321

101112

Left fl ap 2

Right fl ap 2

Rec

eive

r

Free, or aux. function

Free, or aux. function

Battery

Free, or aux. function

Right fl ap

Left fl ap

Free, or right rudder

Rudder or left rudder

Right elevon

Left elevon

Airbrake or throttle or speed controller (electric model)

Batt

987654321

101112

Left fl ap 2

Right fl ap 2

Rec

eive

r

Free, or aux. function

Free, or aux. function

PPM24, APCM24

Flap or left fl ap

Right aileron servo

Right V-tail servo

Left V-tail servo

Aileron servo or left aileron servo

Airbrake or throttle or speed controller (electric model)

654321

Rec

eive

r

3939Fixed-wing models

Models with the “Delta / Flying wing” tail type

Deltas / fl ying wings with two ruddersSee set-up notes on the preceding double page, right-hand side.

left

right

8

7

3

2

6

14

Battery

Right fl ap 2

Right fl ap

Left fl ap

Free, or right rudder, or aux. function

Rudder or left rudder

Right elevon

Left elevon

Left fl ap 2

Batt

987654321

10Free, or aux. function or throttle

Free, or aux. function

Rec

eive

rInterchanging receiver outputs with PCM20 and SPCM20 receivers

The receiver assignment stated below should be used for both tail types in order to avoid servos 9 and 10 running jerkily. Carry out the following steps in the »Receiver output swap« menu:

• assign servo 9 to output 1, and,

• assign servo 10 to output 8.Moreover, if you …

• … assign servo 1 to output 9, then receiver output 9 is available for other purposes, perhaps for air-brakes, or for throttle using the throttle / airbrake stick, and

• … assign servo 8 to output 10, then a servo con-nected to output 10, if present, can be operated by a transmitter control assigned to input 8 (»Trans-mitter control adjust« menu), typically for cont-rolling an auxiliary function.

Servos connected to these two outputs (9 + 10) do run smoothly provided that they are not affected by mixers.The »Receiver output swap« menu (page 153) should therefore be programmed as follows:

R e c e i v e r O u t p u tServo

10 8

10SEL

9 Output 1ServoServoServoServoServoServoServoServoServo

234567

18

9

765432Output

OutputOutputOutputOutputOutputOutputOutputOutput

PCM20, SPCM20

Tip:You should also select this “PCM sequence” for a six-fl ap wing if you are using a PPM receiver with only eight or nine servo sockets.

Important notes:• If you re-assign the receiver outputs, please note

that any subsequent changes, such as servo tra-vel adjustment, Dual Rates / Expo, mixers etc., must still refer to the basic receiver sequence.

• If you swap over the receiver outputs, please note that the Fail-Safe programming (“hold” or “pos.”) in SPCM20 and APCM24 mode always relates to the default receiver socket numbers; in PCM20 mode, battery fail-safe always affects receiver output 1.

How are the pairs of ailerons and fl aps cont-rolled?

1. Both pairs of fl aps are controlled with the aile-ron function using the aileron stick

• By default, the aileron stick only controls the two aileron servos 2 + 5. Values other than zero for the fl aps FL and (if present) FL2 can be entered individually in the “Multi-fl ap menu” of the »Wing mixers« menu.

2. The ailerons are controlled by the fl ap function using input 6 (e. g. using the INC / DEC buttons CTRL 5 or 6)

• By default, a transmitter control which is as-signed to “Input 6” in the »Control adjust« menu controls the flaps and (if present) FL2 with 100% travel. Values other than zero for the ailerons, and – if wished – reduced travels for the flaps, can be entered individually in the “Multi-flap menu” of the »Wing mixers« menu.

• If you choose “2 AIL 2 FL” in the “Ailerons / fl aps” line of the »Model type« menu, a trans-mitter control assigned to “Input 7” is de-cou-pled in the software in order to avoid control er-

4040 Fixed-wing models

Fixed-wing models

Different methods of installing servos and control lin-kages may make it necessary to reverse the direction of rotation of some servos when programming.The following table provides useful information on this:

Model type

Servo rota-ting in wrong

directionRemedy

V-tail Rudder and ele-vator reversed

Reverse servos 3 + 4 in the »Servo adjustment« menu

Rudder correct, elevator reversed

Swap over servos 3 + 4 at receiver

Elevator correct, rudder reversed

Reverse servos 3 + 4 in »Servo adjustment« menu, and swap over servos at receiver

Delta, fl ying wing

Elevator and aile-rons reversed

Reverse servos 2 + 3 in »Servo adjustment« menu

Elevator correct, ailerons reversed

Reverse servos 2 + 3 in »Servo adjustment« menu, and swap over servos at receiver

Ailerons correct, elevator reversed

Swap over servos 2 + 3 at receiver

In the “Program descriptions” all menus which are re-levant to fi xed-wing models are marked with an “aero-plane” symbol:

This means that you can easily skip irrelevant menus when programming a fi xed-wing model aircraft.

rors. This means that this input can be used for fl ight phase specifi c auxiliary functions; see the programming example “8-fl ap wing”, starting on page 184.

• For reasons of safety, a transmitter control as-signed to “Input 10” is also de-coupled in the software if you choose “2 AIL 4 FL” in the “Aile-rons / fl aps” line of the »Model type« menu.

Tips:• In the “Multi-fl ap menu” of the »Wing mixers«

menu the fl ap positions can be entered for all pairs of wing fl aps (AILE, FLAP and FL2), separately for each fl ight phase. However, you can also enter the same settings at any time in the »Phase trim F3B« menu … where you can also set up a pha-se-specifi c elevator trim function.

• If you prefer, the flap function for all pairs of wing flaps (AILE, FLAP and FL2) can also be opera-ted using the “throttle / airbrake stick”, provided that this is not already in use for another purpo-se. To accomplish this all you need to do is assign “Transmitter control 1” to Input 6 in the »Transmit-ter control adjust« menu. However, if you prefer to operate the flaps using a switch, you can equal-ly well assign one of the two-position or three-po-sition switches (SW) fitted to the mx-24s to “Input 6”.

4141For your notes

42 Model helicopters

Model helicopters

The continued development of model helicopters and helicopter components, such as gyros, speed gover-nors, rotor blades etc., has led to the current positi-on where helicopters are capable of sophisticated 3-D aerobatics. In contrast, the beginner to helicopter fl ying needs a simple set-up so that he can quickly get started on the initial stages of hovering practice, and then gradually work up to more complex models which exploit all the options provided by the mx-24s.The helicopter program of the mx-24s can cope with all current model helicopters equipped with 1 ... 4 ser-vos for collective pitch control.Each model memory can include seven fl ight phases plus auto-rotation (see the »Transmitter control ad-just«, »Phase settings« and »Phase assignment« menus).As with fi xed-wing model aircraft, the standard timers are included in the basic display, and additional timers and a lap counter with stopwatch function can be se-lected separately for each fl ight phase (»Timers (ge-neral)« and »Flight phase timers«).Apart from the collective pitch / throttle trim, all the digital trims can optionally be stored separately for each fl ight phase (“phase” setting) or “globally”, i. e. applying to all fl ight phases. The digital C1 trim provi-des a simple means of returning to a pre-set idle set-ting.

The transmitter control assignment for inputs 5 ... 8 can also be set separately for each fl ight phase (see the »Transmitter control adjust« menu).During the test-fl ying phase the copy fl ight phase function can be particularly helpful (see the »Copy / Erase« menu).“Dual Rate” and “Exponential” are available for roll, pitch-axis (elevator) and tail rotor, and they can be coupled together and programmed to provide two set-tings in each fl ight phase.It is possible to set up eight freely assignable line-ar mixers, and four curve mixers can be programmed and switched on and off separately in each fl ight pha-se in the »MIX active in phase« menu. Four dual mi-xers are also available.Eight-point curves are provided in the »Helicopter mixers« menu for the collective pitch, throttle and tail rotor mixers, variable separately for each fl ight phase, generating non-linear mixer characteristics. Two sepa-rate swashplate mixers are also provided for the roll and pitch-axis functions. Independently of this feature, the control curve for the Channel 1 stick can also be defi ned using up to eight points, separately for each fl ight phase. These advanced features are not nee-ded by the beginner, who will usually start simply by setting the hover point to coincide with the stick tra-vel centre.

Pre-programmed mixers in the »Helicopter mixers« menu:1. Collective pitch curve (with eight-point curve)2. Channel 1 � throttle (with eight-point curve)3. Channel 1 � tail rotor (with eight-point curve)4. Tail rotor � throttle (with eight-point curve)5. Roll � throttle6. Roll � tail rotor7. Pitch-axis � throttle8. Pitch-axis � tail rotor9. Gyro suppression10. Swashplate rotation11. Swashplate limitThe “Throttle limit” function (Input 12 in the »Trans-mitter control adjust« menu) provides an effecti-ve means of starting the motor in any fl ight phase. By default, transmitter control 9 – the right-hand side-mounted proportional control – is assigned to input 12, and the position of this “throttle limiter” determi-nes the maximum throttle servo position, i. e. the side-mounted proportional control governs the motor over the idle range. The programmed throttle curves only take effect when the proportional control is moved to-wards full-throttle.

CollectivePitch Curve

SwashplateRotation

Roll ThrottlePitch-Axis ThrottleChannel 1 Throttle

Roll Tail RotorPitch-Axis Tail RotorChannel 1 Tail Rotor

Channel 1 Tail Rotor

Tail Rotor Throttle

43Model helicopters

Receiver socket sequence:

The servos MUST be connected to the receiver out-put sockets in the following sequence:

Outputs not required should simply be left unused.For more details on the different types of swashplate please refer to the »Helicopter type« menu descri-bed on page 72.If you are using a PPM-FM receiver made by ano-ther manufacturer* in a model which was previously fl own using a non-Graupner transmitter, and you wish to operate it with a GRAUPNER transmitter, e. g. the mx-24s for Trainer mode operations, it may be ne-cessary to re-connect servos to the outputs in the or-der stated earlier. Alternatively you can carry out the adjustments in the »Receiver output swap« menu, see page 153. You may also need to adjust servo tra-vels and directions of rotation; these adjustments are always carried out in the »Servo adjustment« menu; see page 74.

Notes:• Compared with the receiver channel sequence of

earlier GRAUPNER radio control systems, servo socket 1 (collective pitch servo) and servo socket 6 (throttle servo) have been interchanged.

• If you are using the mx-24s but do not want to abandon separate collective pitch trim, you will need to set up a suitable mixer in the »Free mi-xers« menu, e. g. an 8 � 1 mixer, and program a symmetrical mixer input of around 25%. Now move to the »Transmitter control adjust« menu and assign the left-hand side-mounted proportio-nal control CTRL 10 (still free as standard) to mi-xer input “8”; alternatively you could assign one of the two INC / DEC buttons CTRL 5 or 6, if the-se controls are not already in use for other purpo-ses. The advantage of the latter is that their set-tings are stored separately for each fl ight phase; see also page 28.

However, in the interests of safety we also recom-mend that you de-couple the assigned transmit-ter control from input 8 in the »Mix only channel« menu, so that the same transmitter control cannot also operate a servo connected to receiver output 8. See also Example 3 on page 141.

Different methods of installing servos and control lin-kages may make it necessary to reverse the direction of rotation of some servos when programming. You can correct this by using the servo reverse facility lo-cated in the »Servo adjustment« menu, see page 74.In the “Program descriptions” all menus which are re-levant to model helicopters are marked with a “heli-copter” symbol:

This means that you can easily skip irrelevant menus when programming a model helicopter.

* GRAUPNER does not guarantee that GRAUPNER radio cont-rol systems will work correctly in conjunction with receiving sys-tems and radio control equipment made by other manufacturers.

Battery

Free, or speed governor

Free, or gyro gain

Motor speed (throttle servo or speed controller)

Free, or pitch-axis (2) servo (4-point linkage)

Tail rotor servo (gyro system)

Pitch-axis (1) servo

Roll (1) servo

Collective pitch or roll (2) or pitch-axis servo (2) servo

Batt

987654321

10Free, or aux. function

Free, or aux. function

Rec

eive

r

44

Brief programming instructionsfor all fi xed-wing and helicopter programs

Brief programming instructions

MemoriesMemories• • Model select Selects a free or occupied model memory 1 … 40. An icon for fi xed-wing ( ) or helicopter ( ) makes it easier

to select the model, as does the information entered in the “Info” line of the »Base setup model« menu.59

• • Copy / Erase Erase a model memoryCopy contents of one model memory to another memoryCopy from / to mx-24s and PCCopy individual fl ight phases within one model memoryBack-up all models to a PC

60

• • Suppress Codes Suppress functions from the multi-function select list within a memory; used for settings which are not to be alte-red, or which are not required.

62

• • Suppress models Suppress model memories from the list shown in the »Model select« menu, e. g. in order to exclude models which are not in airworthy condition; also makes the list easier to use.

62

Basic settingsBasic settings• Base setup model Model name: Max. 10 characters (letters, numbers, special symbols). Characters are selected from a ta-

ble using the rotary control.Info: Max. 15 characters per model memory. Appears next to the model name in the »Model se-

lect« menu. Characters are selected as described above.Stick mode: 1: Elevator, rudder: left and throttle / brake, aileron: right 2: Throttle / brake, rudder: left and aileron, elevator: right 3: Aileron, elevator: left and throttle / brake, rudder: right 4: Throttle / brake, aileron: left and elevator, rudder: rightModulation: PCM20 for all “mc” or “DS mc” type PCM receivers (512 steps / max. 10 servos) SPCM20 for all “smc” type SPCM receivers (1024 steps / max. 10 servos) PPM18 for all PPM-FM receivers to date except DS 24 FM (max. 9 servos) PPM24 for “DS 24 FM S” PPM FM receiver (max. 12 servos) PPM10 for PPM-FM receivers with no more than fi ve outputs APCM24 for all “amc” type APCM receivers (1024 steps / max. 12 servos)Volume: Vary volume of the alarm timer, range 1 to 16.Auto timer reset: Yes / no determines whether all timers (except “Model time” and “Battery time”) are to be re-

set to the starting value when the transmitter is switched on.Power-on warning: When the transmitter is turned on, the software interrogates the switched state of a freely

selectable switch (SW 1 … 8, control switch or logical switch), and a warning message is superimposed on the basic display if appropriate.

64

DisplayMenu Brief description of menu and operating notes Page

45

Auto-trim: To use “Auto-trim” all you have to do is hold the model in the desired attitude using the sticks, then operate the selected “Auto-trim” switch – preferably the momentary switch SW8: this action automatically corrects the trims by the requisite amount. The correction takes effect over about one second, during which period the sticks can be moved back to centre so that the new trims do not suddenly alter the model’s attitude.

• Base setup model Model name: Max. 10 characters (letters, numbers, special symbols). Characters are selected from a ta-ble using the rotary control.

Info: Max. 15 characters per model memory. Appears next to the model name in the »Model se-lect« menu. Characters are selected as described above.

Stick mode: 1: Pitch-axis, tail rotor: left and motor / coll. pitch, roll: right 2: Motor / coll. pitch, tail rot: left and pitch-axis, roll: right 3: Pitch-axis, roll: left and motor / coll. pitch, tail rotor: right 4: Motor / coll. pitch, roll: left and pitch-axis, tail rotor: rightModulation: PCM20 for all “mc” or “DS mc” type PCM receivers (512 steps / max. 10 servos) SPCM20 for all “smc” type SPCM receivers (1024 steps / max. 10 servos) PPM18 for all PPM-FM receivers to date except DS 24 FM (max. 9 servos) PPM24 for “DS 24 FM S” PPM FM receiver (max. 12 servos) PPM10 for PPM-FM receivers with no more than fi ve outputs APCM24 for all “amc” type APCM receivers (1024 steps / max. 12 servos)Autorotation: An assigned switch activates the auto-rotation fl ight phase. This has priority over all other

fl ight phase switches and the auto-rotation C1 pos. switch.Autorot. C1 Pos.: Alternative method of switching to auto-rotation by setting a switching point on the C1 stick;

activated using STO. A switch is required!Marker key: With an assigned switch (preferably the momentary switch SW8) it is possible to set a mar-

ker in fl ight which affects all C1 stick curves. This is shown as a dotted vertical line in the curves included in the »Helicopter mixers« menu.

Volume: Vary the volume of the alarm timer, range 1 to 16.Auto timer reset: Yes / no determines whether all timers (except “Model time” and “Battery time”) are to be re-

set to the starting value when the transmitter is switched on.Power on warning: When the transmitter is turned on, the software interrogates the switched state of a freely

selectable switch (SW 1 … 8, control switch or logical switch), and a warning message is superimposed on the basic display if appropriate.

Auto-trim: To use “Auto-trim” all you have to do is hold the model in the desired attitude using the sticks, then operate the selected “Auto-trim” switch - preferably the momentary switch SW8. This action automatically corrects the trims by the requisite amount. This correction takes

66

Brief programming instructions

DisplayMenu Brief description of menu and operating notes Page

46

effect over about one second, during which period the sticks can be moved back to centre so that the new trims do not suddenly alter the model’s attitude.

• Model type Motor on C1: Direction of effect of the C1 function, throttle minimum “back”, “forward” or “none”. The C1 trim acts only “back” or “forward” respectively, or over the full travel.

Tail type ailerons / camber-changing fl aps

“normal”“V-tail”“Delta / fl ying wing”“2 EL Sv 3+8”

optionally max. two aileron servos and four fl ap servosoptionally max. two aileron servos and four fl ap servosmax. two elevon servos and four fl ap servostwo elevator servos plus optionally max. two aileron servos and four fl ap servos

Brake: the mixers in the “Brake settings” sub-menu, which is found in the »Wing mixers« menu, can optionally be controlled by a transmitter control assigned to “Input” 1, 7, 8 or 9. The mixer neutral point (offset) can also be selected. If this is not placed at the end of the tra-vel, the remainder of the travel is a dead zone.

70

• Helicopter type Swashplate type: select the number of servos (1 ... 4) for collective pitchLinearis. swashpl.: “YES” prevents unwanted side-effects such as collective pitch changes when roll com-

mands are given, or tension between the pushrods when four swashplate servos are in-stalled.

Rotor direction: “right” (clockwise) or “left” (anti-clockwise) as seen from above.Pitch min: minimum collective pitch angle, channel 1 control “forward” or “back”, see also »General

basic settings” menu.Expo throttle lim.: “Throttle limit” can be set to exponential (-100% … +100%) in the »Transmitter control

adjust« menu.Thr. limit warning: variable warning threshold for the “Throttle too high” warning when the transmitter is swit-

ched on.

72

• • Servo adjustment Servo direction: left or rightOffset setting: offset centre point within range -125% to +125%Servo travel: symmetrical or asymmetrical, range 0 to 150%Servo travel limit: symmetrical or asymmetrical, range 0 to 150%. Typical application: if servo travel is me-

chanically restricted.

74

Transmitter controlsTransmitter controls• Stick mode Trim: “global” the trims affect all fl ight phases (trim symbol in the basic display shows “shadow”).

“phase” the trims for aileron, elevator and rudder can be set to operate separately for each fl ight phase (trim symbol in the basic display shows no “shadow”).

Tr.step: adjustment of the increment (step) size for all four digital trim levers, range 1 to 10 (standard = 4).

76

Brief programming instructionsfor all fi xed-wing and helicopter programs

46 Brief programming instructions

DisplayMenu Brief description of menu and operating notes Page

4747Brief programming instructions

time: symmetrical or asymmetrical reduction of speed of transmitter control travel. Adjustment range: 0 … 9.9, e. g. for scale sequences, delayed motor acceleration etc..

• Stick mode Trim: “global”: the trims for roll, pitch-axis and tail rotor affect all fl ight phases (trim symbol in the basic display shows “shadow”).

“phase”: the trims for roll, pitch-axis and tail rotor can be set to operate separately for each fl ight phase (trim symbol in the basic display shows no “shadow”).

“Thr lim”: the collective pitch / throttle trim is controlled by the throttle limiter. “Thr AR”: the collective pitch / throttle trim takes effect in the Auto-rotation phase.Tr.step: adjustment of the increment (step) size for all four digital trim levers, range 1 to 10 (standard = 4).time: symmetrical or asymmetrical reduction of transmitter control transit speed. Available range: 0 ... 9.9

sec., e. g. for scale processes, “soft” motor acceleration etc..

77

• Control adjust Assignment and de-coupling (display = “free”) of transmitter controls (INC / DEC buttons “CONTROL 5 + 6”, 3-po-sition switches “CONTROL 7 + 8” and side-mounted proportional controls “Controls 9 + 10”), switches SW 1 … 4, 7 and 8, plus optionally also the C1 stick. Inputs 5 … 8 are programmable separately for each fl ight phase, but in-puts 9 … 12 only once in each model memory.offset: the centre point of the transmitter control can be offset within the range -125% to +125%.travel: variable control travel, symmetrical or asymmetrical between -125% and +125%; direction of control’s

effect can also be reversed.time: symmetrical or asymmetrical reduction of transmitter control transit speed. Available range: 0 ... 9.9 sec.,

e. g. for scale processes, “soft” motor acceleration etc..

78

• Control adjust Assignment and de-coupling (display = “free”) of transmitter controls (INC / DEC buttons “CONTROL 5 + 6”, 3-po-sition switches “CONTROL 7 + 8” and side-mounted proportional controls “Controls 9 + 10”), switches SW 1 … 4, 7 and 8, plus optionally also the C1 stick. Inputs 5 … 8 are programmable separately for each fl ight phase, but in-puts 9 … 12 only once in each model memory.

Note:Input 12 is reserved for the “throttle limit” function. The assigned transmitter control only operates the throttle ser-vo in addition to servo 12. For this reason servo 12 can only be accessed via a mixer using the »Mix-only chan-nel« function. Application of “throttle limit”: see page 82. Transmitter control 9 (the right-hand proportional control) is assigned to this in the software.

offset: the centre point of the transmitter control can be offset within the range -125% to +125%.travel: variable control travel, symmetrical or asymmetrical between -125% and +125%; direction of control’s

effect can also be reversed.time: symmetrical or asymmetrical reduction of transmitter control transit speed. Available range: 0 ... 9.9 sec.,

e. g. for scale processes, “soft” motor acceleration etc..

80

DisplayMenu Brief description of menu and operating notes Page

48 Brief programming instructions

Brief programming instructionsfor all fi xed-wing and helicopter programs

• • Dual Rate / Expo Affects control functions aileron, elevator and rudder, or roll, pitch-axis and tail rotor. DUAL RATE and EXPO are programmable separately for each fl ight phase.DUAL RATE: altered control travel within the range 0 to 125% of normal control travel. Can be switched bet-

ween two settings in fl ight using switch, control switch or logical switch.EXPO: sets an exponential control curve without changing total travel. Variable rate of progression within

the range -100% to +100%; can be switched between two settings for each fl ight phase using switch, control switch or logical switch.

Asymmetrical DUAL RATE or EXPO curves can be set up if the control switch is programmed to the stick centre position in the »Control switch« menu, and the stick is moved in the corresponding direction.

86 / 88

• • Channel 1 curve Defi nes the characteristic curve of the throttle / airbrake function or motor / collective pitch stick, separately for each fl ight phase:The momentary stick position of the transmitter control for the input channel is indicated on the screen by a verti-cal bar. (“Input” shows the associated % value. “Output” gives the corresponding value of the control output).Between the two extreme points “L” (low) and “H” (high) up to six additional curve reference points can be defi ned, provided that you previously erase the default reference point “1” in the centre position. These points can be posi-tioned along the control travel when “Point ?“ appears on the screen. Press the rotary control, then set the desi-red “point” value in the highlighted fi eld using the rotary control. The points are automatically numbered from 1 to 6. To re-position points L, 1 … 6 or H subsequently, move the associated transmitter control to select the appropri-ate reference point, or “jump” to it with the rotary control pressed in (trim point function). Press the CLEAR button to erase points 1 … 6 again. Pressing the left-hand ENTER button switches a curve-rounding algorithm “on” and “off”.

90 / 92

SwitchesSwitches• • Switch display When an external switch or control switch is operated, this display shows the associated switch number and

switch position.93

• • Control switch Assign the transmitter controls 1 … 10 to the control switches 1 … 8 in column 2. Pressing STO (press the rota-ry control) in column 3 stores the current control position as the switching point. Reverse the switching direction in column 4, and assign a switch to override a control switch in column 5. Column 6 displays the switch status. By default G1 is already programmed at -75% and G2 at +75% of the C1 stick travel.

94

• • Logical switch Two switches (SW 1 … 8) and / or transmitter controls or even logical switches can be linked together logically using “AND” or “OR” combinations. A total of eight logical switches can be defi ned.

“AND” function: logical switch only closed when both individual switches are closed;“OR” function: logical switch closes when one of the two individual switches is closed.

97

Flight phasesFlight phases• Phase settings Up to eight fl ight phases can be programmed and named individually for each model memory. The associated 100

DisplayMenu Brief description of menu and operating notes Page

49Brief programming instructions

fl ight phase switches are defi ned in the »Phase assignment« menu.Name: up to ten user-defi ned phase names are available in addition to sixteen standard names. The

additional names can be defi ned individually in the »General basic settings« menu. The as-signed names are shown in the basic display, and in all programs which are fl ight phase spe-cifi c.

Fl.ph.Tim.: the switches for all these timers are assigned in the »Flight phase timers« menu.Clk 1 … 3: can be set in the »Flight phase timers« menu as stopwatches or alarm timers.Lap: in the basic display a “lap timer” appears next to the lap counter. Each press on the (momen-

tary) switch assigned in the “Lap time / elapsed time” line of the »Flight phase timers« menu increases the value of the lap counter display, records the intervening lap time, and fi nally re-starts the lap timer. Time display up to 59.9 seconds in 1/10 second increments; after 60 se-conds in min : sec.

“Time1”: records only those times for which the switch assigned in the “Lap time / time tab” line of the »Flight phase timers« menu is “closed”. The frequency of switch operations is shown in the basic display. This counter fi eld is highlighted as soon as the switch for the Time1 timer is “opened”, i. e. the timer is stopped.

“Time2”: this timer stores both the “off” and “on” times of the ON / OFF switch assigned in the “Lap time / time tab” line of the »Flight phase timers« menu, i. e. each time the switch is operated the timing restarts and the counter is incremented by 1.

Reading out the lap counter, Time1 or Time2 in the basic display:Set the timer switches to OFF, or stop the timer with ESC. The lap count or the counter of Time1 or Time2 is displayed highlighted on the screen. The individual times can now be read out using the rotary control. Fi-nally press CLEAR in order to reset the counter and the times.

Motor: this column only appears if you have already selected “Throttle min. forward / back” in the “Motor on C1” line of the »Model type« menu. If this is the case, you can select whether the motor is controlled by the C1 stick (“yes”) or the braking system (set up in the »Wing mixers« menu) is controlled by the C1 stick (“no”), separately for each fl ight phase.

Sw. time: at this point you can set a transition time (0 ... 9.9 sec) which applies when you switch into this phase from any other. This provides a smooth transition between fl ight phases.

Meaning of the symbols in the right-hand column:� indicates the phase assigned to each switch position. This is Phase 1 by default if no other swit-

ches are assigned, or if all phase switches are at the base position.

+ a switch position is provided for this phase in the »Phase settings« menu.

– the phase is not in use.

DisplayMenu Brief description of menu and operating notes Page

50

Brief programming instructionsfor all fi xed-wing and helicopter programs

• Phase settings The name of the auto-rotation phase cannot be changed, but up to seven other fl ight phases can be programmed and named for each model memory. The auto-rotation switch is defi ned in the »Base setup model« menu, the re-maining phase switches in the »Phase assignment« menu.Name: up to ten user-defi ned phase names are available in addition to nine standard names. The ad-

ditional names can be defi ned individually in the »General basic settings« menu. The assig-ned names are shown in the basic display, and in all programs which are fl ight phase specifi c.

Fl.ph.Tim.: the switches for all these timers are assigned in the »Flight phase timers« menu.Clk 1 … 3: can be set in the »Flight phase timers« menu as stopwatches or alarm timers.Lap: in the basic display a “lap timer” appears next to the lap counter. Each press on the (momen-

tary) switch assigned in the “Lap time / elapsed time” line of the »Flight phase timers« menu increases the value of the lap counter display, records the intervening lap time, and fi nally re-starts the lap timer. Time display up to 59.9 seconds in 1/10 second increments; after 60 se-conds in min : sec.

“Time1”: records only those times for which the switch assigned in the “Lap time / time tab” line of the »Flight phase timers« menu is “closed”. The frequency of switch operations is shown in the basic display. This counter fi eld is highlighted as soon as the switch for the Time1 timer is “opened”, i. e. the timer is stopped.

“Time2”: this timer stores both the “off” and “on” times of the ON / OFF switch assigned in the “Lap time / time tab” line of the »Flight phase timers« menu, i. e. each time the switch is operated the timing restarts and the counter is incremented by 1.

Reading out the lap counter, Time1 or Time2 in the basic display:Set the timer switches to OFF, or stop the timer with ESC. The lap count or the counter of Time1 or Time2 is displayed highlighted on the screen. The individual times can now be read out using the rotary control. Fi-nally press CLEAR in order to reset the counter and the times.

Sw. time: at this point you can set a transition time (0 ... 9.9 sec) which applies when you switch into this phase from any other; this provides a smooth transition between fl ight phases. However, when auto-rotation is selected, the delay is always zero; the time delay set under Auto-ro-tation is only effective when you leave auto-rotation.

Meaning of the symbols in the right-hand column:� indicates the phase assigned to each switch position. This is Phase 1 by default if no other swit-

ches are assigned, or if all phase switches are at the base position.

+ a switch position is provided for this phase in the »Phase settings« menu.

– the phase is not in use.

102

• • Phase assignment One of the eight available fl ight phases (seven for helicopters) which have been named in the »Phase settings« menu can be assigned to any combination of up to six switches, termed “A” to “F”.

104

50 Brief programming instructions

DisplayMenu Brief description of menu and operating notes Page

5151Brief programming instructions

In the basic setting all switches always generate “Phase 1”; the same applies to non-assigned switch combinati-ons.The switches assigned under “A” and “B” have special priorities:

Switch “A” in the ON position the fl ight phase assigned to this switch always has priority over all other fl ight pha-ses (= fl ight phases for switch positions “B” to “F”).

Switch “B” in the ON position with the exception of the priority assigned under “A”, the associated fl ight phase has priority over all other fl ight phases assigned to switches “C” to “F”.

Caution:Model helicopters: the auto-rotation phase always has absolute priority over all assignments “A” … “F” set up in this menu.

• Phase trim F3B Depending on the model type selected in the »Model type« menu (see page 70), a minimum of one control sur-face function (EL) and a maximum of four control surfaces (EL, AIL, FL, FL2) are available for phase-specifi c trim settings.

105

• • Non-delayed chan The delay when a new fl ight phase is selected can be switched off for individual channels, separately for each fl ight phase. Examples: motor OFF with electric models, activating and disabling heading lock with gyro systems.

105

TimersTimers• • Timers (general) “Model time”: reset with a brief press on the rotary control with the CLR fi eld active (timer switchable).

“Batt. time”: automatic reset when battery is recharged; can also be reset by pressing CLR.“Top / Centr”: various names can be assigned to these two timers. If you select “Stopwatch” and “Motor time”,

the timer continues to run as long as the switch assigned on the right of the screen is set to ON. If you assign the names “Flight time” and “Slot time”, the timer is started by operating an assigned switch (preferably the momentary switch SW8) and stopped by pressing the ESC button or ESC with the rotary control held pressed in. CLEAR resets all previously stopped timers in the basic display to the appropriate starting value.

“Timer” column: preset 0:00 means a count-up timer; time preset via rotary control (maximum 180 min 59 sec) ge-nerates a count-down timer (fl ashing colon in the basic display); the recorded time is highlighted after “zero”.

“Alarm” column: timing and sequence of warning beeps when the alarm timer approaches and passes through zero (max. 90 sec.).

106

• • Fl. phase timers An additional fl ight phase specifi c timer is superimposed on the screen in place of the GRAUPNER/JR logo. This timer is assigned in the »Phase settings« menu. These “fl ight phase timers” are controlled using the On / Off switch assigned in this menu. A previously stopped timer is reset to the starting value from the basic display by pressing CLEAR.

108

DisplayMenu Brief description of menu and operating notes Page

52

Clk 1 ... 3:“Timer” column: preset 0:00 means a count-up timer; time preset via rotary control (maximum 180 min

59 sec) generates a count-down timer (fl ashing colon in the basic display); the time is highlighted after “zero”.

“Alarm” column: timing and sequence of warning beeps when the alarm timer approaches and passes through zero (max. 90 sec.).

Lap counter / time table: all you have to do is assign one of the ON / OFF switches SW 1 … 7 or the momenta-ry switch SW8. In the basic display a “Timer” appears at the same time as the “counter”. The timer is selected and assigned separately for each fl ight phase in the »Phase set-tings« menu, where you will also fi nd a description of the individual timers.

MixersMixers• Wing mixers The revised wing mixer menu now provides for control of six-fl ap models. The range of actual functions which are

available depends on the type of model selected in the »Model type« menu.Multi-fl ap menu: fl ight phase specifi c setting of mixer functions for the ailerons (AILE) and the two pairs of

camber-changing fl aps (FLAP = middle pair of fl aps and FL2 = inboard pair of fl aps). �AI�: in this line you set the effect of the aileron stick on the ailerons (AILE) and fl ap pairs

(FLAP, FL2). Ail-tr: this is where you set the effect of the aileron trim on the pairs of control surfaces. The

setting is also affected by the values you have set in the »Stick mode« menu. Diff.: aileron differential travel settings for all three pairs of control surfaces. Fl.pos.: fl ight phase specifi c fl ap positions for all three pairs of control surfaces. �FL�: in this line you determine the effect of the fl ap control, as selected in the »Transmitter

control adjust« menu, on the ailerons and fl aps. El � Fl: this linear mixer sets the effect of the fl aps when an elevator command is given; the set-

ting is usually asymmetrical.Brake settings: the brake settings can only be set once for each model memory, and even then only if

you have selected “none” in the “Motor on C1” line of the »Model type« menu, or if “no” has been selected for the fl ight phase concerned in the “Motor” column of the »Phase settings« menu if you have selected “Throttle min. forward / back” in the “Motor on C1” line.

In the »Model type« menu you can also select one of the inputs 1, 7, 8 or 9 as the con-trol for the airbrake function. Inputs 7 and 8 can also be assigned a transmitter control in the »Transmitter control adjust« menu, separately for each fl ight phase. The prefi xes at the travel setting (+ or -) defi ne the direction of operation (forward or back); alterna-tively the offset value in the “Brake” line of the »Model type« menu can be used.

110

Brief programming instructionsfor all fi xed-wing and helicopter programs

Brief programming instructions52

DisplayMenu Brief description of menu and operating notes Page

5353Brief programming instructions

Note / Recommendation: If you program the offset value in »Model type« to about 90%, then the remainder of

the transmitter control travel between the selected offset and full travel has no effect. Crow: positions the control surface pairs AILE, FLAP and FL2 for the desired braking effect

(generally AILE up and FLAP, FL2 down). Diff. reduct.: reduces the differential set in the multi-fl ap menu according to the airbrake defl ection.

Mechanical differential can also be eliminated if the entered Diff. red. value is greater than the Diff. value set in the multi-fl ap menu.

Elevat. curve: eight-point mixer designed to compensate for pitch trim changes when the brake func-tion is operated.

Aileron 2 � 4 rudder: switchable mixer which causes the rudder to follow the aileron movement to a variable extent.

Elevator 3 � 6 fl aps: appears only if you select “1 AIL 1 FL” in the “Aileron / camber fl aps” line of the »Model type« menu. This linear mixer defi nes the effect of the fl aps on the elevator; the setting is usually asymmetrical.

Flaps 6 � 3 elevator: switchable mixer which causes the elevator to follow the fl ap movement to a variable ex-tent; the setting is usually asymmetrical.

• Helicopter mixer Flight phase specifi c programminga) eight-point curves for “collective pitch”, “channel 1 � throttle” and “channel 1 � tail rotor”; set as in the

“Channel 1 curve” menu; andb) linear mixer inputs (0 … 100%) for the mixers “tail rotor � throttle”, “roll � throttle”, “roll � tail rotor”,

“pitch-axis � throttle” and “pitch-axis � tail rotor”.Gyro suppression: fl ight phase specifi c suppression of gyro effect when a tail rotor command is given (0

… 199%), varying with the position of the tail rotor stick. The effect of values above 100% is to provide total suppression before full defl ection of the tail rotor.

Swashplate rotation: (virtual) rotation of the swashplate in both directions (-90° … +90°).Swashplate limiter: travel limit, applies only when pitch-axis and roll commands are applied simultaneous-

ly (adjustment range 100 … 149% and “off”).In the auto-rotation phase the following adjustments are available:

eight-point collective pitch curve and throttle position AR (-125% … +125%), tail rotor AR (-125% … +125%), plus gyro suppression and swashplate rotation.

122

• • Free mixers Linear mixers 1 … 8 or curve mixers 9 … 12 are selected with the rotary control pressed in.The mixer input (any control function) “from” and the output “to” are determined in the “from / to” column using the associated SEL function and the rotary control. If a constant control function is required as input, e. g. motor ON / OFF, then select the letter “S” in the “from” column, and assign a mixer switch in column 4. Note: without an assig-

135

DisplayMenu Brief description of menu and operating notes Page

54 Brief programming instructions

Brief programming instructionsfor all fi xed-wing and helicopter programs

ned switch this type of mixer delivers a constant signal only.Preceding mixers (“�” symbol) and / or the trim (“Tr” of sticks 1 … 4) are included when the mixer input is set in the “Type” column. Search for appropriate symbol “�”, “Tr” or “Tr �” using the rotary control. Optionally all mixers can be assigned a switch.Setting of mixer inputs and directions for linear mixers:Change screen page in the “Setting” column with a brief press on the rotary control. Select ASY or SYM and set desired mixer input between 0 and +/-150% using the rotary control. For asymmetrical setting, select page using the input transmitter control (vertical line in the graph) and for switched channel “S” with associated switch.Setting of non-linear mixer curves for curve mixers 9 … 12:Between the two end-points “L” (Low) and “H” (High) up to six additional curve points can be defi ned. Basic notes on operation can be found in the description of the »Channel 1 curve« menu on pages 90 / 92.Shifting the offset point (mixer neutral point):Use the transmitter control to move the bar in the graph to the desired position, select STO and press the rotary control briefl y. The offset point is returned to the centre position using the bottom CLR function.

Notes:DUAL RATE may limit the movement range of the vertical line. Mixers may also have been suppressed in the »MIX active in phase« menu.

• • MIX active/phase The mixers 1 … 12 can be disabled separately for each fl ight phase. In the »Free mixers« menu they are then suppressed separately for each fl ight phase.

142

• • MIX-only channel This function is used to separate the link between transmitter controls 1 … 12 and the associated servo, i. e. the transmitter control only continues to affect the relevant channel as a mixer input. In this case the de-coupled servo is only accessible via mixers.

142

• • Dual mixer Four mixers designed for coupling two channels in such a way that they work in the same and opposed directions.Example: differential rudder travel on a V-tail. In this case “�EL�” is defi ned as the “same-direction” function, and “�RU�” as the “opposite” function. In this case it is essential to enter “normal” under Tail type in the »Model type« menu!

144

• Swashplate mixer Mixer inputs for collective pitch, roll and pitch-axis can be set individually (-100% … +100%), except for helicop-ters with one servo for collective pitch control. CLEAR resets altered values to the default of +61%.

Note:Ensure that servos are not mechanically obstructed or stalled if you set large values at this point.

145

Special functionsSpecial functions• • Fail-safe adjust In PCM20 mode:

“Time”: all servos to “hold” mode, or enter a delay time (1, 0.5 or 0.25 sec.) using the rotary control, after 146

DisplayMenu Brief description of menu and operating notes Page

55Brief programming instructions

which servos 9 and 10 take up the neutral position, and servos 1 … 8 take up the positions they had at the time the STO fi eld was last operated.

“Battery F.S.”: three possible servo positions can be selected (-75%, 0%, +75%) plus “off” for the servo connec-ted to output 1 for fi xed-wing models and helicopters.

In SPCM20 mode:Servos 1 … 8 can be programmed individually to hold-mode or position mode. Store position using STO. Servos 9 and 10 remain in hold mode.

148

In APCM24 mode:Servos 1 … 12 can be programmed individually to hold-mode or position mode. Store position using STO.

149

• • Teacher/pupil After assigning a switch (preferably the momentary switch SW8), control functions 1 … 10 can be transferred to a Pupil transmitter. Since the model is basically controlled by the Teacher transmitter, all model programming is also carried out at the Teacher transmitter. The control functions of the Pupil transmitter must act directly on the con-trol channels, i. e. the receiver outputs, without the infl uence of any mixers or other settings. The modulation of the Pupil transmitter must be set to PPM18 or PPM24, regardless of the settings at the Teacher transmitter. Stick mode, throttle / collective pitch reverse and idle trim should be set up on the Pupil transmitter to suit the pupil’s preferences.

150

• • Rx. output swap Interchanging the receiver outputs. All the remaining coupling and mixer functions, servo adjustments etc. are un-affected by this, i. e. they do not need to be changed if you alter the receiver output sequence.Exception: Fail-Safe is always defi ned by the receiver sockets alone.

153

Global functionsGlobal functions• • Basic settings Owner’s name: max. 15 characters (letters, numbers, special symbols). Use the rotary control to select

characters from the symbol table on the second screen page.Preset stick mode: the stick mode selected at this point is adopted as standard for all model memories, but

can be changed if desired.Preset modulation: PCM20 for all “mc” or “DS mc” type PCM receivers (512 steps) SPCM20 for all “smc” type SPCM receivers (1024 steps) PPM18 for all PPM-FM receivers to date except DS 24 FM PPM24 for “DS 24 FM” PPM FM receiver PPM10 for PPM-FM receivers with no more than fi ve servo outputs APCM24 for all “amc” type APCM receivers (1024 steps)Preset min. pitch: defi nes the collective pitch minimum position of the C1 stick – “forward” or “back”.Display light: sets the duration of the screen backlighting. The options are 30, 60, 120 seconds or “un-

limited”.Power-on beep: switches the mx-24s identifi cation melody on and off

154

DisplayMenu Brief description of menu and operating notes Page

56 Brief programming instructions

Brief programming instructionsfor all fi xed-wing and helicopter programs

Battery warning: warning threshold can be set to any value in the range 9.3 to 11 Volts in 1/10 Volt incre-ments.

Own phase name: up to ten additional phase names, each with up to seven characters, can be created by the user; these can then be selected as alternatives to the pre-programmed phase na-mes in the »Phase settings« menu.

Note:The presets for “stick mode”, “modulation” and “collective pitch min.” are automatically adopted when you set up a new model memory, but can then be changed separately for that memory in the »Base setup model« menu, if wished.

• • Servo display The servo outputs can be checked on-screen, taking into account all coupling and mixer functions etc., when you operate the corresponding transmitter controls (useful aid when programming). Direct access (“Hotkey” from the basic display and from virtually all menus by pressing the HELP button with the rotary control pressed in).

156

• • Servo test Select the desired inputs 1 … 8 individually using the rotary control for an automatic servo test. Activate or disable the test with a brief press on the rotary control. The test takes into account all mixer functions, servo settings etc..The servo speed can be determined with a (repeated) brief press on the rotary control after selecting the arrow symbol at bottom right of the screen (six stages, range 0.5 to 3.0 seconds).Pressing the ENTER button switches the test on or off.

156

• • Code lock A four-character code number between 0000 and 4444 can be entered using the four side buttons, or erased with a short press of the rotary control (CLR) and subsequently corrected. Confi rm the code by pressing th ENTER button. Next time you switch the mx-24s on, access to the multi-function menu remains blocked until you enter the correct code.

157

DisplayMenu Brief description of menu and operating notes Page

57For your notes

58

Detailed description of programmingReserving a new memory

If you have already read through to this point in the manual, you will undoubtedly have made your fi rst attempt at programming the system already. Even so, it is important to describe each menu here in detail, to ensure that you have comprehensive instructions for each application you are likely to encounter. In this section we start with the procedure for setting up a “free” model memory prior to “programming” a new model:

Program description

Carry out the essential steps of selecting a langua-ge and selecting a channel – the latter is necessary each time you switch the transmitter on – as descri-bed on pages 23 and 25. The basic display now ap-pears on the screen. Adjust the screen contrast if ne-cessary by pressing and turning the rotary control.

From the basic display press ENTER, or press the rotary control briefl y, to shift to the “Multi-function menu”. You can return to the basic screen at any time by pressing ESC.If necessary select the »Model select« menu from the list using the rotary control. Now press ENTER or the rotary control to move on to the »Model select« menu.As delivered, the transmitter’s fi rst model memo-ry is initialised with the model type “Fixed-wing mo-del”, whereas the remaining memories – entitled “���free���” – are not yet in use. If you wish to program a fi xed-wing model, you can press ESC to leave the »Model select« menu and immediately start programming the model parameters … or alter-natively select one of the vacant model memories and press ENTER or the rotary control.If you opt for the second alternative, you will be re-quested to determine the basic model type, i. e. either “fi xed wing model” or “model helicopter” – see pictu-res at bottom left. Use the rotary control to select the desired model type icon, then press the rotary cont-rol or the ENTER button. The screen switches back to the basic display.If you wish to start with a helicopter, select one of the model memories named “���free���” and press ENTER or the rotary control briefl y. You will now be requested to determine the basic model type, i. e.

either “fi xed wing model” or “model helicopter” – see pictures at bottom left. Use the rotary control to select the helicopter icon, and press the rotary control or the ENTER button. This initialises the selected model me-mory with the “helicopter” model type, and you can start programming the data for your helicopter in this model memory.Changing to another model type for this model me-mory is now only possible if you fi rst erase the model memory (»Copy / Erase« menu, page 60).

Note:If some of the transmitter’s model memories are al-ready occupied, the model name entered in the »Base setup model« menu (see pages 64 / 66) ap-pears against the corresponding model memory, to-gether with the model’s operating time and brief infor-mation about it (if you have already entered this).

Caution:• All the transmitter’s functions are barred, and the

transmitter does not broadcast a signal, until you confi rm the model type you have selected. If you switch off the transmitter before you set the mo-del type, the screen automatically switches to the screen display shown at the bottom when turned on again. You must always defi ne a model type!

• If the following warning display appears on the screen …

… then you have programmed a power-on war-ning for a fi xed-wing model aircraft in the “Base setup model” menu.

ENTER ESC

Model name#01H-J.Sandbrunner

10.2V 0:30h C620 0 0 0

Stop watchFlight tim

0 000 00::0:30h SPCM20

Model select Copy / EraseSuppress codes

Servo adjustmentControl adjust

Suppress modelsModel typeBase setup modelStick modeDual Rate / Expo

Channel 1 curve Switch display

02030405 ���

01

06 ���

��� free ���

��� ���

��� ���

0:00

���

���

freefreefreefree

Select model type (free model memory)

ENTER ESC

ENTER

!Warning!

59Program description: Model memories

• If the following warning message appears on the screen …

… move the throttle stick back in the direction of idle.

• If the following message appears on the screen …

… please read the section on the »Fail-safe« menu starting on page 146.

There are four basic methods of assigning the prima-ry control functions to the two dual-axis sticks. The pri-mary control functions are: aileron, elevator, rudder and throttle or airbrakes for a fi xed-wing model aircraft, and roll, pitch-axis (elevator), tail rotor and throttle / collective pitch for a model helicopter. Which of these arrangements you use depends on the individual mo-del pilot’s preferences. This function is set in the “Stick mode” line for the currently active model in the »Base setup model« menu (see pages 64 / 66) …

BASIC SETTINGS, MODELModel nameInfoStick modeModulation SPCM20

��

< >< >

SEL

1

… and is stored as the default setting for future mo-dels in the »General basic settings« menu (see page 154).

GENERAL BASIC SETTINGSOwners namePre-set stick modePre-set modulationPre-set min. pitch

��

1SPCM20forwrd

< >

SEL

Repeat this procedure with the “Modulation” line which you will fi nd below it: in this line you set the mo-dulation required for the current model in the »Base setup model« menu (pages 64 / 66), and in the »Ge-neral basic settings« menu (page 154), so it makes sense to enter the modulation you most commonly use as the default for future models.At this point we wish to point out that the default set-ting for control channels 5 … 12 is that, for the “fi xed wing” model type, they are not assigned to transmitter controls at all; the purpose of this is to provide maxi-mum possible fl exibility, and at the same time to avoid the danger of mis-using the controls accidentally. The same applies to control channels 5 … 11 for the “Heli-copter” model type.This means that the system, as delivered, only ope-rates the servos connected to receiver outputs 1 … 4 using the two dual-axis sticks, whereas servos con-nected to sockets 5 … max. 12 remain steadfastly at their centre position. If you have set up a newly initi-alised model helicopter, servos 6 and 12 will also re-spond to the controls. In both model types this state only changes when you have entered the appropria-te settings.A description of the basic steps required to program a fi xed-wing model can be found in the programming examples starting on page 158; for helicopters this section starts on page 196.In contrast, the following description of the menus fol-lows the sequence of the multi-function menu list.

Thr too high!

Fail Safesetupt.b.d.

Model select

Model select 1 ... 40

Graubele02 Soarmaster 2:45h03 DV20KATANA 5:46h still in test04 Starlet 50 8:31h05 ��� free

01

06

1:25h PCM20 1675GrPPM18 070707

trim: new adj.

��� free���

���

The transmitter can store up to forty complete sets of model settings, including the digital trim values set by the four trim levers. The trims are automatically stored, which means that the settings you have care-fully established through test-fl ying are not lost when you swap models.If you have entered a model name in the »Base se-tup model« menu (pages 64 / 66), the name appears after the model number together with the model type in pictogram form, the model’s operating time and the “Info” relating to that model (if you have entered data).Use the rotary control to select from the list the mo-del you wish to use. Confi rm your selection by pres-sing the rotary control, or press ENTER. Pressing ESC takes you back to the multi-function menu wit-hout switching models.

Notes:• If the warning message “throttle too high” appears

when you switch models, the throttle stick “C1” is set too far in the direction of full throttle.

• If the message “Set Fail-Safe” appears when you switch models, you should check your Fail-Safe set-tings. This only applies if the transmitter is set to PCM20, SPCM20 or APCM24 transmission mode.

• If the battery voltage is too low, it may not be pos-sible to switch model memories for safety reasons. In this case the screen displays an appropriate message.

60

Copy / Erase

Model copy and fl ight phase copy function

Erase modelCopy model –> modelCopy MX24 –> externalCopy external –> MX24Copy flight phaseBack-up all models –> PC

=>=>=>=>=>=>

��

This menu is used for:• erasing model memories,• copying internally from one model memory to ano-

ther,• copying a model memory from one mx-24s trans-

mitter to another,• copying from the mx-24s to an industry-standard

PC,• copying individual fl ight phases within a single mo-

del memory,

• backing up all occupied model memories in the mx-24s to an industry-standard PC.

To connect the transmitter to a PC you will need the PC interface lead, Order No. 4182.9, or the USB-PC interface lead, Order No. 4185, both of which are con-nected to the Trainer / PC module, Order No. 3290.22, in order to transfer model data to the PC. There the data should be saved on a hard disc or some other form of data medium. Later – if necessary – the data can be loaded back into the transmitter (or another transmitter). Full details of these procedures are in-cluded with the leads.To transfer data between two mx-24s transmit-ters, both transmitters must be fi tted with the Trainer / PC module, Order No. 3290.22. You will also need the copy lead, Order No. 4179.2, to make the actual transfer.

60 Program description: Model memories

First select the desired option with the rotary control pressed in, then call it up by pressing ENTER or the rotary control:

Erase model

Graubele02 Soarmaster 2:45h03 DV20KATANA 5:46h still in test04 Starlet 50 8:31h

01 1:25h PCM20 1675GrPPM18 070707

trim: new adj.

Select model to be erased:

Select the model to be erased using the rotary cont-rol. Pressing ESC returns you to the previous screen page. Press ENTER or the rotary control to shift to the next screen page:

Model really 01 Graubeleto be erased?

NO YES

Select “NO” or “YES” using the rotary control and confi rm your choice by pressing ENTER or the rota-ry control.

Caution:The erasure process is irrevocable. All data in the model memory is erased permanently!

If you wish to erase the currently active model memo-ry in the basic display, you will immediately be asked to defi ne the model type “Heli” or “fi xed-wing”. Howe-ver, if you erase any of the occupied but non-active model memories, then the message “���free���” appears in the Model select menu.

Caution – essential information:Be sure to connect the PC or the second transmitter to your mx-24s using the interface or copy lead before you switch on the mx-24s transmitter(s). When the process is completed, switch the transmitter(s) off before you disconnect the lead!

Copy leadOrder No. 4179.2

PC interface leadOrder No. 4182.9

orUSB-PC interface lead

Order No. 4185

mx-24s mx-24s

mx-24s

61

Copy model � model

Graubele02 Soarmaster 2:45h

04 Starlet 50 8:31h

01 1:25h PCM20 1675GrPPM18 070707

trim: new adj.

Copy from Model:

03 DV20KATANA 5:46h still in test

Select the model to be copied in the “Copy from mo-del” window, and confi rm by pressing ENTER or the rotary control. A further window “Copy to model” ap-pears, where you have to enter the destination me-mory and confi rm your choice, or interrupt the pro-cess by pressing the ESC button. A model memory which is already occupied can be overwritten. In the interests of safety you have to confi rm the copy pro-cess once more.

Model really

03 DV20KATANA 06 ��� free���

to be copied?

NO YES

�

Note:As an alternative to initialising a vacant model memo-ry and re-programming the model data “from scratch”, you may fi nd it preferable to use the “Copy model” op-tion, if, for example, you wish to set up a model with complex programming, but the same type of model - or one which is at least similar in terms of program-ming features is already present in the transmitter. This procedure might well be sensible if the next step – the unavoidable one of adjusting and checking the copied data – appears in prospect to be less daunting than programming a new model “from the ground up”.

Copy mx24 � external

Select the model memory in the “Copy from model” window, then confi rm the copy process to a PC or a second mx-24s transmitter.

Model really

03 DV20KATANA

be copied to PC or other transmitter?

NO YES

The progress of the copy process is indicated by a horizontal bar.

Copy external � mx24

Select the destination memory in the “Copy to model” window, and confi rm the input as already described. Once again, you are requested to confi rm the copy process from a PC or from another transmitter:

Model really

05

be loaded from PC or other transmitter?

NO YES

MEGA STAR

The transfer process then has to be initiated from the second transmitter or the PC.

Note:If no valid connection with a PC or another transmitter exists, interrupt the copy process by switching off the receiving transmitter, then switch it on again.

61Program description: Model memories

Copy fl ight phase

Copy1 Normal 2 Thermal357

68

4Speed

from phase:

Use the rotary control in the “Copy from phase” menu to select the fl ight phase 1 … 8 (fi xed-wing models) or 1 … 7 (model helicopters) to be copied, confi rm your choice by pressing ENTER or the rotary control, then select the destination in the new window “Copy to phase” before confi rming your choice. For safety’s sake you will be requested to confi rm your choice once more.

Back-up all models � PC

All models to bebacked up to PC?

NO YES

This option automatically transfers all occupied model memories in sequence to the PC for backing-up, in contrast to the “Copy mx24s � external” command.

Note:If the transmitter battery is too low, the transmitter blocks all copy and erase functions in the interests of safety. An appropriate message then appears on the screen.

6262 Program description: Model memories

Suppress codesSuppressing menus from the multi-function list

Model select Copy / Erase

Servo adjustmentSuppress modelsModel typeStick modeDual Rate / Expo

Base setup model

Control adjustChannel 1 curve

Suppress : TOG

In this menu you can suppress any functions in the multi-function list which are not required for the cur-rently active model, or which must not be changed.For example, if you are programming different fl ight phases, it is advisable to suppress all global settings such as »Base setup model«, »Model type« etc.. The multi-function list can then be restricted to just a few menus, and it is much easier to make sense of the function select list. Suppressing the menus does not disable those functions; it just means that they can no longer be accessed directly.Use the rotary control to select the function to be sup-pressed, then press the rotary control briefl y to sup-press it – or re-activate it if it is already suppressed.

Tip:If you do not wish to block access to the multi-func-tion list in any way, the safe method is to remove the »Code lock« menu from the multi-function list using this »Suppress codes« menu.

Suppress models

Suppressing specifi c model memories

Graubele02 Soarmaster 2:45h03 DV20KATANA 5:46h still in test04 Starlet 50 8:31h05 ��� free ���

01 1:25h PCM20 1675GrPPM18 070707

trim: new adj.

Suppress : TOG

Model memories which are seldom needed, or which you do not wish to access for other reasons, can be suppressed from the model select list. This also helps to make the model select process easier.Use the rotary control to select the model to be sup-pressed (or included again), and reverse its status with a brief press on the rotary control.The “cancelled” model memories will now no longer appear in the »Model select« menu.

6363For your notes

64

Base setup model

Basic model-specifi c settings

BASIC SETTINGS, MODELModel nameInfoStick modeModulationVolumeAuto timer resetPower on warning

�?

< >< >

Auto trim

SPCM201

6yes

Before you start programming fl ight-specifi c parame-ters, some basic settings must be entered which app-ly only to the currently active model memory. Start by selecting the menu line in the usual way with the rota-ry control pressed in.

Model name

You can enter up to ten characters to defi ne a mo-del name. Switch to the next screen page (�) with a brief press of the rotary control; here you can enter the model name by selecting characters from a sym-bol list:

Model name A >--

! “ # $ % & ´ ( ) * + , - . / 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 : ; < = > ?@ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ[¥]^_` a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o p q r s t u v w x y z { } ~ c

NÇüéâäàåçêëèïî ìÄÅÉæÆôöòûùÿÖÜ

<DV20K

Use the rotary control to select the fi rst character in the symbol fi eld, which is shown highlighted (black background). A brief press on the rotary control (or turning it when pressed in) shifts to the next position in the name, where you can select the following cha-racter.Pressing CLEAR inserts a space at that point.Hold the rotary control pressed in to move to each character within the name. The next space is indica-ted by a double arrow <--> in the bottom line.

Program description: Basic settings

The model name appears in the basic display, and also in the »Model select« and »Copy / Erase« me-nus.

Info

A brief item of extra information – maximum length fi f-teen characters – can also be entered for each mo-del, using the same procedure as described under “Model name”. This information then appears as a supplement in the revised »Model select« menu.

Stick mode

Basically there are four possible ways of arranging the principal control functions on the two dual-axis sticks: the primary functions are aileron, elevator, rud-der and throttle (or airbrakes) for a fi xed-wing model. Which of these possible options you select depends on your individual preferences and fl ying style.

When you select “Stick mode”, you will see SEL at the bottom edge of the screen. Press the rotary con-trol, and the current stick mode appears highlighted. Now use the rotary control again to select one of the options 1 to 4.CLEAR resets this function to stick mode “1”.

Modulation

Select this line, then press and turn the rotary cont-rol to select the required transmission mode, or mo-dulation. The modulation you set takes effect at once, i. e. you can immediately test the signal transmission to the receiver.Pressing CLEAR switches to “SPCM20” modulation.The mx-24s differentiates between six different types of modulation:PCM20: System resolution of 512 steps per chan-

nel, for “mc” or “DS mc” type PCM recei-vers, for up to ten servos.

SPCM20: Super PCM modulation with high system resolution of 1024 steps per control func-tion, for “smc” type receivers, for up to ten servos.

PPM18: Most widely used transmission mode (FM or FMsss) for all other GRAUPNER PPM-FM receivers, for up to nine servos.

PPM24: PPM multi-servo transmission mode for simultaneous operation of twelve servos; for the “DS 24 FM S” receiver only.

PPM10: High-speed PPM transmission mode for Pico receivers with up to fi ve servos, as used in RC cars, slow-fl y models, small helicopters, etc..

APCM24: Super PCM modulation with high system resolution of 1024 steps per control func-tion, for “amc” type receivers, for up to twelve servos.

Full-throttle

Rud

der R

udderMotor idle

Down-elevator

Up-elevator

Aile

ron A

ileron

Down-elevator

Up-elevator

Rud

der R

udder

Full-throttle

Motor idle

Aile

ron

Aileron

»MODE 1«(Throttle right)

»MODE 2«(Throttle left)

Full-throttle

Aile

ron

Aileron

Motor idle

Down-elevator

Up-elevator

Rud

der R

udder

Down-elevator

Up-elevator

Aile

ron A

ileron

Full-throttle

Motor idle

Rud

der R

udder

»MODE 3«(Throttle right)

»MODE 4«(Throttle left)

65

Note:If you operate virtually all your models using the same stick mode, and perhaps also with the same modu-lation, it makes sense to select these preset values in the global »General basic settings« menu (page 154). These two presets are automatically adopted when you open a free model memory, but you can still change them to suit a particular model if you wish.

Volume

When you select this line and give a brief press on the rotary control, you can adjust the volume of the audible signal of the ALARM TIMER(S) (»Timers (general)« menu and »Flight phase timers« menu) within the range 1 (very quiet) to 16 (very loud); this adjustment is available separately for each model.CLEAR resets the volume to the default value of “6”.

Auto timer reset

Selecting “yes / no” in this line determines whether all timers are automatically reset when you switch the transmitter on. This does not apply to the “Model time” and “Transmitter operating time” timers.

Power-on warning

If you assign a switch, a control switch or one of the logical switches (see »Logical switches« menu, page 97) in this line, the software will interrogate the corresponding switch or control position when you turn the transmitter on, and a warning message will be superimposed on the basic display if necessary. In combination with the logical switches virtually any switch setting can be called up in this way when you switch the transmitter on.

Program description: Basic settings

Model name#01 0:30h SPCM20H-J.Sandbrunner

10.2V 0:30h C620 0 0 0

StopFlight

0 000 00::!Warning!

A triple warning beep sounds when the message is displayed.Typical applications:

• Electric motor on / off?

• Undercarriage retracted / extended?

• Correct fl ight phase activated?

• …

Auto Trimm

The “Auto-trim” option provides a fast, straightforward method of trimming a model, e. g. as part of an initi-al test-fl ight, or after (major) repairs or similar modifi -cations.Usually the sticks are used on their own during this type of test-fl ight, until the desired stable fl ight condi-tion is achieved. The pilot then attempts more or less simultaneously to operate the trim levers to “reduce the load” on the sticks.This is precisely the situation where the “Auto-trim” option comes into play: once you have used the pri-mary stick functions 2 … 4 (aileron, elevator and rud-der) to bring the model to a stable fl ight attitude, you simply operate the switch assigned to the “Auto-trim” function – ideally the momentary switch SW8 – ONCE. The moment the switch is operated, the soft-ware detects the deviations of the sticks from neutral, and adopts them as the new trim values. However, this does not occur instantly, but with a transition pe-riod of about one second. During this period the pilot should return the sticks to the normal (neutral) positi-on, to avoid an abrupt change in the model’s attitude.

Notes:• The Auto-trim function for ailerons is disabled if

you select “2 AIL 2 FL” or “2 AIL 4 FL” in the “Aile-rons / fl aps” line of the »Model type« menu; this is designed to avoid complex inter-actions which can otherwise occur with multi-fl ap models.

• Please ensure that the aileron, elevator and rud-der sticks are at their proper neutral position when you assign the switch, otherwise any deviations from the neutral position will be adopted as the current trim values in the trim memory.

• Since the effect of the Auto-trim function is cu-mulative EVERY TIME you operate the assigned switch, it is important for safety reasons to disable the selected Auto-trim switch again after the con-clusion of an “Auto-trim” fl ight, otherwise there is a risk that you may operate the “Auto-trim” function accidentally, and thereby inadvertently store the wrong settings.

66

Base setup model

Basic model-specifi c settings

BASIC SETTINGS, MODELModel nameInfoStick modeModulation

VolumeAuto timer resetPower on warning

�

< >< >

Auto trim

SPCM20

Autorot. C1 Pos.Autorotation

Marker key0%

1

6yes

Before you start programming fl ight-specifi c parame-ters, some basic settings must be entered which app-ly only to the currently active model memory. Start by selecting the menu line in the usual way with the rota-ry control pressed in.

Model name

You can enter up to ten characters to defi ne a mo-del name. Switch to the next screen page (�) with a brief press of the rotary control; here you can enter the model name by selecting characters from a sym-bol list:

Model name >--

! “ # $ % & ´ ( ) * + , - . / 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 : ; < = > ?@ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ[¥]^_` a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o p q r s t u v w x y z { } ~ c

NÇüéâäàåçêëèïî ìÄÅÉæÆôöòûùÿÖÜ

<Starle

Use the rotary control to select the fi rst character in the symbol fi eld, which is shown highlighted (black background). A brief press on the rotary control (or turning it when pressed in) shifts to the next position in the name, where you can select the following cha-racter.Pressing CLEAR inserts a space at that point.Hold the rotary control pressed in to move to each

character within the name. The next space is indica-ted by a double arrow <--> in the bottom line.The model name appears in the basic display, and also in the »Model select« and »Copy / Erase« me-nus.

Info

A brief item of extra information – maximum length fi f-teen characters – can also be entered for each mo-del, using the same procedure as described under “Model name”. This information then appears as a supplement in the revised »Model select« menu.

Stick mode

Basically there are four possible ways of arranging the principal control functions on the two dual-axis sticks: the primary functions are roll, pitch-axis (ele-vator), tail rotor and throttle / collective pitch. Which of these possible options you select depends on your in-dividual preferences and fl ying style.

When you select “Stick mode” you will see SEL at the bottom edge of the screen. Press the rotary control, and the current stick mode appears highlighted. Now use the rotary control to select one of the options 1 to 4.CLEAR resets the function to stick mode “1”.

Modulation

Select this line, then press and turn the rotary cont-rol to select the required transmission mode, or mo-dulation. The modulation you set takes effect at once, i. e. you can immediately test the signal transmission to the receiver.Pressing CLEAR switches to “SPCM20” modulation.The mx-24s differentiates between six different types of modulation:PCM20: System resolution of 512 steps per chan-

nel, for “mc” or “DS mc” type PCM recei-vers, for up to ten servos.

SPCM20: Super PCM modulation with high system resolution of 1024 steps per control func-tion, for “smc” type receivers, for up to ten servos.

PPM18: Most widely used transmission mode (FM or FMsss) for all other GRAUPNER PPM-FM receivers, for up to nine servos.

PPM24: PPM multi-servo transmission mode for simultaneous operation of twelve servos; for the “DS 24 FM S” receiver only.

PPM10: High-speed PPM transmission mode for Pico receivers with up to fi ve servos, as used in RC cars, slow-fl y models, small helicopters, etc..

APCM24: Super PCM modulation with high system resolution of 1024 steps per control func-tion, for “amc” type receivers, for up to twelve servos.

66 Program description: Basic settings

min. Pitch

Tail

roto

r Tail rotor

max. Pitch

Pitch-axis

Pitch-axis

Rol

l Roll

Pitch-axis

Pitch-axis

Tail

roto

r Tail rotor

min. Pitch

max. Pitch

Rol

l Roll

min. Pitch

Rol

l Roll

max. Pitch

Pitch-axis

Pitch-axis

Tail

roto

r Tail rotor

Pitch-axis

Pitch-axis

Rol

l Roll

min. Pitch

max. Pitch

Tail

roto

r Tail rotor

»MODE 1«(Pitch right)

»MODE 3«(Pitch right)

»MODE 2«(Pitch left)

»MODE 4«(Pitch left)

67

Note:If you operate virtually all your models using the same stick mode, and perhaps also with the same modu-lation, it makes sense to select these preset values in the global »General basic settings« menu (page 154). These two presets are automatically adopted when you open a free model memory, but you can still change them to suit a particular model if you wish.

Autorotation

During an auto-rotation descent the main rotor is not driven by the motor; it is kept spinning only by the air-fl ow through the rotor plane caused by the speed of the descent, in a similar manner to a windmill. The ro-tational energy stored in the still spinning rotor can be exploited to allow the machine to fl are out and be “sa-ved”, but this can only be accomplished once.Auto-rotation allows full-size and model helicopters to land safely in a crisis, i. e. if the power plant should fail. The pre-condition for a successful “auto” landing is a well-trained pilot who is thoroughly familiar with his fl ying machine. Fast reactions and a good eye are also required, as the rotational energy in the rotor can only be used once to fl are out.

When the auto-rotation manoeuvre is called at a com-petition, the motor must be stopped. However, for practice purposes it is advantageous to keep the mo-tor running at idle when you are practising this mano-

euvre, so that you can apply full-throttle instantly if a critical situation should arise.The auto-rotation switch is used to switch to the auto-rotation fl ight phase, in which the controls for “Thrott-le” and “Collective pitch” are separated, and all mixers which include the throttle servo are switched off. The associated parameters are set in the »Helicopter mi-xers« menu (see page 122); see also the following section “How Autorot C1 Pos. works”.This fl ight phase is assigned the name “Autorot”, which cannot be changed. It is included in the basic display and in all fl ight phase dependent menus (see page 98 for list).

Defi ning the auto-rotation switchPress the rotary control and assign a switch to this function as described on page 32. This switch has absolute priority over all other fl ight phase swit-ches.

Autorot. C1 position

Alternatively the auto-rotation fl ight phase can be ac-tivated by setting a switching point on the throttle / collective pitch stick C1. If you select this line on the screen, the memory fi eld STO appears.Move the C1 stick to the desired switching position, and press the rotary control: the current value is dis-played. The task is completed by assigning an activa-tion switch in the right-hand column.

If you operate (close) this activa-tion switch, the program switches to “Auto-rotation” as soon as the stick is moved be-low the set switching point, and remains in this fl ight

67Program description: Basic settings

phase, regardless of the C1 position, until the activa-tion switch – in our example No. 2 – is moved back to “OFF”.“Auto-rotation C1 pos.” has priority over all other fl ight phase switches.The associated parameters for• collective pitch servos• throttle servo• tail rotor servo• any set swashplate rotation• and gyro adjustmentare adjusted in the »Helicopter mixers« menu (see page 122).All other menus relating to auto-rotation are grouped together in the table on page 98.

Marker key

When you operate the marker button in the “Collecti-ve pitch” curve, and in the “Channel 1 � throttle” and “Channel 1 � tail rotor” mixer curves in the »Helicop-ter mixers« menu, a marker is placed at the current collective pitch stick position in the form of a dotted line. This marker is helpful when it comes to placing curve points, e. g. the hover point, at the correct posi-tion during fl ight-testing.A switch must be assigned, preferably the momenta-ry switch SW8.

Example:You may be aiming to place the hover point at the centre of the throttle / collective pitch stick in the “Ho-ver” fl ight phase, but fi nd during fl ight-testing that the hover point is still above the centre point of the stick travel. Press the marker switch in this position, and then look at the collective pitch curve in the »Helicop-ter mixers« menu (see page 122) once you have lan-ded the model again:

Approach angles in varying wind con-ditions.

45°

60°

75°

Approach angle::

In strong wind

In moderate wind

In calm conditions

Move the C1 stick to the desired position

SIC SETTINGS, MODELden SPCM20

C1 Pos.on

1

STO–85% 2

68

Pitch

InputCurve

OU

TP

UT

-- +

1

100

«Hover »off Point

-30%-30%

Output?

The solid vertical line indicates the current stick posi-tion. Its location in this example is at a control travel of -30% (= input), and it also supplies an output signal of -30% (= output) because the control curve is (at this stage) linear.In contrast, the dotted vertical line indicates the stick position at which you pressed the marker button.Move the stick to this mark, in order to read off the in-put and output values for the found hover point. Read off the marker points on the other two mixer curves in the same way. You can now modify these three cur-ves, if necessary in a mutual way, in order to correct the hover point. In this simple example the curve point “1” in the centre of the curve can be raised to the starting point for the hover which you have found from the collective pitch graph.

Volume

When you select this line and give a brief press on the rotary control, you can adjust the volume of the audible signal of the ALARM TIMER(S) (»Timers (general)« menu and »Flight phase timers« menu) within the range 1 (very quiet) to 16 (very loud); this adjustment is available separately for each model.CLEAR resets the volume to the default value of “6”.

Auto timer reset

Selecting “yes / no” in this line determines whether all timers are automatically reset when you switch the transmitter on. This does not apply to the “Model time” and “Transmitter operating time” timers.

68 Program description: Basic settings

Power-on warning

If you assign a switch, a control switch or one of the logical switches (see »Logical switches« menu, page 97) in this line, the software will interrogate the corresponding switch or control position when you turn the transmitter on, and a warning message will be superimposed on the basic display if necessary. In combination with the logical switches virtually any switch setting can be called up in this way when you switch the transmitter on.

Model name#02H-J.Sandbrunner

9.6V 1:30h C620 0 0 0

Stop.Flight!Warning!

0 000 00::0:40h SPCM20

A triple warning beep sounds when the message is displayed.Typical applications:

• Electric motor on / off?

• Undercarriage retracted / extended?

• Correct fl ight phase activated?

• …

Auto Trimm

The “Auto-trim” option provides a fast, straightforward method of trimming a model, e. g. as part of an initi-al test-fl ight, or after (major) repairs or similar modifi -cations.Usually the sticks are used on their own during this type of test-fl ight, until the desired stable fl ight condi-tion is achieved. The pilot then attempts more or less simultaneously to operate the trim levers to “reduce the load” on the sticks.This is exactly where the “Auto-trim” option comes into play: once you have used the primary stick func-tions 2 … 4 (roll, pitch-axis and tail rotor) to bring the

model to a stable fl ight attitude, you simply operate the switch assigned to the “Auto-trim” function – ideal-ly the momentary switch SW8 – ONCE. The moment the switch is operated, the software detects the de-fl ections of the sticks from neutral, and adopts them as the new trim values. However, this does not occur instantly, but with a transition period of about one se-cond. During this period the pilot should return the sticks to the normal (neutral) position to avoid an ab-rupt change in the model’s attitude.

Notes:• Please ensure that the roll, pitch-axis and tail rotor

sticks are at their proper neutral position when you assign the switch, otherwise any deviations from the neutral position will be adopted as trim values in the trim memory.

• Since the effect of the Auto-trim function is cu-mulative EVERY TIME you operate the assigned switch, it is important for safety reasons to disable the selected Auto-trim switch again after the con-clusion of an “Auto-trim” fl ight, otherwise there is a risk that you may operate the “Auto-trim” function accidentally, and thereby inadvertently store the wrong settings.

6969For your notes

70

Model type

Defi ning the fi xed-wing model type

Program description: Basic settings

M O D E L T Y P E

Tail typeAileron/camber flapsBrake

SEL

Offset +100% Input 1

Normal1 AIL

��

Motor on C1 None

In this menu you defi ne the “type” of the model to be programmed. When you do this, you also automatical-ly defi ne all the characteristic mixers, coupling func-tions etc. for the selected model type for subsequent programming. Select the line with the rotary control pressed in, and choose the required option by giving it a brief press:

Motor on C1“None”: The model is a glider, with no motor.

The warning message “Throttle too high” (see pages 22 and 59) is disab-led, and the “Brake settings” sub-menu in the »Wing mixers« menu (see section starting on page 110) is available without restriction.

“Thr. min back”: The idle position of the throttle / air-brake stick (C1) is back, i. e. towards the pilot.

The “Brake settings” sub-menu in the »Wing mixers« menu (see section starting on page 110) is only availab-le if you have entered “no” in the cur-rently active fl ight phase in the “Mo-tor” column of the »Phase settings« menu (see page 100).

“Thr. min front”: The idle position of the throttle / air-brake stick (C1) is forward, i. e. away from the pilot.

The “Brake settings” sub-menu in the »Wing mixers« menu (see section starting on page 110) is only availab-

le if you have entered “no” in the cur-rently active fl ight phase in the “Mo-tor” column of the »Phase settings« menu (see page 100).

Notes:• The C1 trim only acts at the idle end of the ran-

ge, i. e. only at the “back” or “forward” end of the stick travel. You can check the setting in the »Ser-vo display« menu.

• Cut-off trim: this special function is described on page 34.

• If you are programming an electric-powered mo-del and wish to control both the motor and the bra-ke system (set in the “Brake settings” sub-menu of the »Wing mixers« menu) using the C1 stick, then set “Throttle min. forward / back” and the bra-ke offset to suit your preferences, and then conti-nue reading in the “Motor column” section in the »Phase settings« menu on page 100.

Tail type

“normal”: By far the majority of fi xed-wing mo-del aircraft have a “normal tail”. For example, this includes all powered models and gliders with a cruciform tail (cross-tail) in which each of the functions elevator, rudder and thrott-le (or speed controller or airbrakes) is operated by one servo. The softwa-re also includes ready-made mixers which can cope with a maximum of two aileron servos and four fl ap ser-vos. See the section starting on page 110.

“V-tail”: The elevator and rudder controls are operated by two control surfaces set in a V-shape, each controlled by a separate servo. The two-way coup-ling function for the rudder and ele-

vator control systems is automatical-ly carried out by the transmitter soft-ware. The ratio of rudder to eleva-tor travel can be adjusted using the »Dual Rate / Expo« menu (page 86), while the servo travels can be adjus-ted in the »Servo adjustment« menu (page 74).

If you also wish to be able to apply differential to the rudder travels, then the V-tail should be set up using the »Dual mixers« menu (see page 144) instead. In this case it is essential to set the tail type to “normal” at this point.

“Delt/fl .wing”: The standard arrangement is for aile-ron and elevator control to be achie-ved by means of one left and one right “aileron servo”. However the re-vised »Wing mixers« menu (see page 110) also provides a convenient method of programming deltas and fl ying wings with more than two wing-mounted control surfaces; this is ac-cessed under the “Delta / fl ying wing” model type.

Important note:If your model has more than two wing fl aps, It is ESSENTIAL to program the elevator function by setting the “El � Fl” line of the “Multi-fl ap menu” of the »Wing mixers« menu; see the centre column on page 117.

“2 EL Sv 3+8”: This option is designed for model aircraft with two elevator servos.

When you move the elevator stick, the servo connected to receiver out-put 8 moves in parallel with the stan-

71Program description: Basic settings

dard elevator servo. The elevator trim lever affects both servos.

In this mode a transmitter control which is assigned to input 8 in the »Transmitter control adjust« menu is de-coupled from servo “8”; this is for safety reasons.

Please read the notes in the section starting on page 37 regarding receiver output sequences.

Ailerons / camber-changing fl aps

In this menu point you set the number of aileron and fl ap servos installed in the model to be programmed.

Available options: Control channel used

“1 AIL” 2

“2 AIL” 2 + 5

“1 AIL 1 FL” 2 / 6

“2 AIL 1 FL” 2 + 5 / 6

“2 AIL 2 FL” 2 + 5 / 6 + 7

“2 AIL 4 FL” 2 + 5 / 6 + 7 / 9 + 10

The functions required, and the methods of setting them up, vary according to the selected number of wing fl aps; they are programmed in the »Wing mi-xers« menu (see page 110).

Tips:• In the »Wing mixers« menu (page 110) the fl ap

settings can be trimmed for all pairs of wing cont-rol surfaces (AIL, FL and FL2), separately for each fl ight phase.

• The fl ap function of all pairs of wing control sur-faces (AIL, FL and FL2) can also be operated using the “Throttle / airbrake stick”, provided that this is not already in use for another purpose, e. g. for particular brake settings; see »Wing mixers« menu (page 110). To implement this all you need to do is assign “Control 1” to input 6 in the »Trans-

mitter control adjust« menu (see page 78). If you prefer to use a switch to control the fl aps, we re-commend a two-position or three-position trans-mitter switch.

• Additional wing-mounted servos can be integra-ted into the programming in a very simple manner using the »Dual mixers« menu (see page 144). For more details please refer to the programming example on page 184.

Brake

This function is likely to interest electric-powered mo-del enthusiasts, and pilots of glow-powered models which are also fi tted with landing fl aps.The mixers described in the “Brake settings” line of the »Wing mixers« menu can be controlled using the C1 stick (“Input 1”), one of the side-mounted proporti-onal controls, or one of the switches connected to “In-put 7, 8 or 9” (see the »Transmitter control adjust« menu). The setting is entered in the usual way using the rotary control.In most cases the setting will be left at the default of “Input 1”, and the brake will be controlled using the non self-neutralising C1 stick. However, the use of in-put 7, 8 or 9 enables you to operate the brake using an alternative auxiliary control if the C1 stick is alrea-dy in use for another purpose. Inputs 7 and 8 are also included in the fl ight phase specifi c control switching group in the »Transmitter control adjust« menu, which makes it possible, for example, to disable the brakes in individual fl ight phases, if you so desire.The mixer neutral point (“Offset”) can be shifted to any point you wish: move the transmitter control for input 1, 7, 8 or 9 to the position at which the landing fl aps are to be at neutral, then select STO to defi ne this as the “Offset” point:

STO

Offset +90%

Normal2 AIL

SEL

O D E L T Y P E

er flapsInput 1

None

If the Offset point is not located right at the end of the control travel, the remaining travel is a “dead zone”, i. e. it no longer affects any of the mixers set up un-der “Brake settings” in the »Wing mixers« menu. This dead zone ensures that all the brake settings re-main at “neutral” even if the airbrake control is moved slightly away from its end-point. At the same time the effective travel of the transmitter control is automati-cally expanded back to 100%.

Note:If you wish to control a brake system and a “Motor at C1” alternately using the C1 stick, then set up “Brake” and “Motor” to suit your preferences in this menu – as already mentioned under “Motor on C1” – and then set the “Motor” column in this column of the »Pha-se settings« menu (see page 100) to “yes” or “no” for each fl ight phase as required.

Tip:The servo assigned to operate wing-mounted airbra-kes is best connected to the receiver output which is controlled by the brake input channel, i. e. we re-commend that you connect the airbrake servo to the (vacant) receiver output 8, if you have selected Input 8 for “Brake”, etc.. If a second airbrake servo is pre-sent, the simplest method of actuating it is to use a free mixer.

100%

90%

72

Helicopter type

Defi ning the helicopter model type

H E L I T Y P ESwashplate type 1 ServoLinearis. swashpl. noRotor directionPitch min.Expo throttle lim.Thr. limit warning

SEL

leftforwrd

0%- 70%

��

In this menu you defi ne the “type” of the model to be programmed. When you do this, you also automatical-ly defi ne all the characteristic mixers, coupling func-tions etc. for the selected model type for subsequent programming. Select the line with the rotary control pressed in, and choose the required option by giving it a brief press:

Swashplate type

Several programs are provided for controlling the swashplate. Which of these you activate varies accor-ding to the number of servos which are used to cont-rol the collective pitch function in your helicopter.Hold the rotary control pressed in and select the “Swashplate type” line. After a brief press on the rota-ry control, select the number of servos in the highligh-ted fi eld.The servos must be connected to the receiver outputs in the sequence described on page 43.“1 servo”: The swashplate is tilted by one roll

/ pitch-axis servo. Collective pitch is controlled by one separate servo.

“2 servos”: The swashplate is moved axially by two roll servos for collective pitch con-trol; pitch-axis control is de-coupled by a mechanical compensating rocker (HEIM mechanics).

“3Sv (2 roll)”: Symmetrical three-point swashplate linkage using three linkage points ar-ranged equally at 120°, actuated by

one pitch-axis servo (front or rear) and two roll servos (left and right). For col-lective pitch control all three servos move the swashplate axially.

“3Sv (2p.ax)”: Symmetrical three-point linkage as above, but rotated through 90°, i. e. one roll servo on one side, and two pitch-axis servos front and rear.

“4Sv (90°)”: Four-point swashplate linkage using two roll and two pitch-axis servos.

Pressing CLEAR resets the swashplate type to “1 servo”. The swashplate mixer ratios are set in the »Helicopter mixers« menu, in the same way as swashplate rotation.

Note:If none of the swashplate mixers is correct for your model, you can adjust one of them to suit your own swashplate type in the »Helicopter mixers« menu under “Swashplate rotation”.

Swashpl. type: 4 servos (90°) 2 pitch-axis / 2 roll

25

1

3

Swashplate type: 3 servos (2 Roll)

3

1

2

Swashplate type: 3 servos (2 pitch-axis)

3

2

1

Swashplate type: 2 servos

2

1

Swashplate type: 1 servo

2

72 Program description: Basic settings

Linearis. swashpl.

Entering “yes” prevents unwanted side-effects with the swashplate linkage, such as collective pitch chan-ges when a roll-axis command is given, or tension between the swashplate servo linkages. Such stress can occur if the servos concerned do not generate identical travels due to differences in servo travel set-tings.The results of the linearisation process require some familiarisation, because the servo travel is reduced slightly at small defl ections in order to linearise the ro-tational travel of the servo arm overall.

Rotor direction

In this line you enter the direction of rotation of the main rotor:“left”: viewed from above, the main rotor rotates

7373Program description: Basic settings

anti-clockwise.“right”: viewed from above, the main rotor rotates

clockwise.Pressing CLEAR switches rotor direction to “left”.

The program requires this information in order to set up the mixers to work in the correct “sense”; this ap-plies to the following mixers which compensate for ro-tor torque and motor power:»Helicopter mixers« menu: Channel 1 � tail rotor, Tail rotor � throttle, Roll � throttle, Roll � tail rotor, Pitch-axis � throttle, Pitch-axis � tail rotor.

Pitch min.

At this point you can set up the direction of operation of the throttle / collective pitch stick to suit your prefe-rence. This setting is crucial if all the other options in the helicopter program are to work properly in so far as they affect the throttle and collective pitch function, i. e. the throttle curve, idle trim, channel 1 � tail rotor mixer, etc..

right-hand rotation left-hand rotation

The meaning is as follows:“forwrd”: Minimum collective pitch when the collec-

tive pitch stick (C1) is forward (away from you);

“back”: Minimum collective pitch when the collecti-ve pitch stick (C1) is back (towards you).

Pressing CLEAR sets this parameter to “forwrd”.

Notes:• The C1 trim always affects the throttle servo only.

If you need to trim the collective pitch servo only, use the procedure described in Example 3 on page 141.

• Most helicopter pilots operate all their models using the collective pitch stick in the same sen-se, and if this applies to you, we suggest that you choose this preset value in the global »General basic settings« menu (page 154). This preset is automatically adopted when you open a free mo-del memory with the “Helicopter” model type, but you can still change it to suit a particular model if you wish.

• A function known as the “throttle limiter” (see page 82) is set by default; this limits the travel of the throttle servo in the direction of maximum throttle, acting separately from the collective pitch servos. This point can be programmed in the »Transmit-ter control adjust« menu for Input 12.

Pitch

Expo throttle limit

The “Throttle limit” function is described in the »Transmitter control adjust« menu (see page 82); note that an exponential curve can be assigned to it by setting the rate of progression within the range -100% to +100% using the rotary control. This is sen-sible if, for example, the throttle limiter is required to regulate the idle set-ting at the same time. For further details on the throttle limiter see the »Transmitter control adjust« menu, page 80.

Example of two exponenti-al curves for the throttle limit,

using 100% servo travel: solid line: negative expo values;

dotted line: positive expo va-lues.

�

� �

�

� �

� �

� � �

� � �

�

� � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � �

Control travel

Thr

ottle

lim

it co

ntro

l tra

vel

Thr. limit warning

If the throttle stick is too far advanced when the trans-mitter is switched on, you will see a warning message on the screen:

You can adjust the critical position of the throttle ser-vo within the range 0% and -100% using the “Throttle limit warning” line; the warning is triggered above the set point. The preset collective pitch minimum position of the stick – i. e. “forward” or “back” – is used as the reference point for the throttle threshold.The default setting is -70% of control travel.Pressing CLEAR resets the display to the default va-lue.

Thr too high!

74

Column 3 “cent.”

The facility to offset the servo travel centre is intended for adjusting servos whose centre setting is not stan-dard (servo centre point at 1.5 ms), and also for slight adjustments, e. g. when adjusting the neutral point of a model’s control surfaces.The neutral position can be shifted within the range -125% to +125% of normal servo travel within the ma-ximum servo travel of +/-150%, regardless of the trim lever position and any mixers you have set up. The centre setting affects the associated servo directly, re-gardless of all other trim and mixer settings.Pressing CLEAR resets the value to “0%”.

Column 2 “Rev”

The direction of servo rotation can be adjusted to suit the actual installation in your model. This means that you don’t need to concern yourself with servo direc-tions when installing the mechanical linkages in the model, as you can reverse them if necessary. The di-rection of rotation is indicated by the symbols “=>” and “<=”. Be sure to set the direction of servo rotation BEFORE you adjust the remaining options!CLEAR resets the direction of rotation to “=>”

Servo adjustment

Setting servo direction, centre, travel and limit

Servo 1 => 0% 100% 100% 150% 150%Servo 2 => 0% 100% 100% 150% 150%Servo 3 => 0% 100% 100% 150% 150%Servo 4 => 0% 100% 100% 150% 150%

RevSEL SYM ASY SYM ASY �

cent. – travel + – limit +SEL

In this menu you can adjust parameters which only affect the servo connected to a particular receiver output, namely the direction of servo rotation, neutral point, servo travel and (if required) travel limit.

Basic procedure:1. Hold the rotary control pressed in and select the

appropriate servo (1 to 12).

2. Turn the rotary control to select SEL, SYM or ASY in the bottom line, prior to making the adjustments required.

3. Press the rotary control: the corresponding input fi eld is highlighted (dark background).

4. Set the appropriate value using the rotary control.

5. Finally press the rotary control again to end the in-put process.

Important:The numbers in the servo designations refer to the receiver output socket to which a particular servo is connected. These numbers do not necessarily coinci-de with the numbering of the transmitter control func-tion inputs; indeed any agreement would be pure-ly accidental. The sophisticated programs of the mx-24s mean that the numbers are unlikely to be the same in any case. For example, changing the stick mode does not affect the numbering (i. e. receiver so-cket sequence) of the servos.

As a basic rule, always start with the servo setting in the left-hand column!

Program description: Basic settings

Servo centre offset

Servo travel

-125%

Centre adjustment +125%

normalreversed

reversed

normal

75

Column 5 “- limit +”

The servo travels generated by superimposed mixers are cumulative, and at the extremes these can ex-ceed the normal permissible limits. This also applies when other parameters are adjusted, such as signi-fi cant centre offset plus enlarged travel. All GRAUP-NER/JR servos have a reserve of an additional 50% beyond normal travel, so the transmitter normally li-mits servo travel to 150% to avoid mechanical dama-ge due to the servos striking their end-stops.In some cases it may be advisable to set the limiter to restrict servo travel to a lower value, for example, if there are mechanical limits in the linkage; this should only be carried out if the control travels normally re-quired in fl ight will not be reduced unnecessarily by restricting servo travel in this way.

Example:A servo may be controlled by two transmitter cont-rols through different mixers. For model-specifi c re-asons a maximum servo travel of no more than 100% is possible, because – for example – the rudder would foul the elevator at more than 100% travel. As long as only one transmitter control is used, this presents no problem. Diffi culties only arise if the signals add up to more than 100% when both transmitter controls (e. g. aileron and rudder) are moved simultaneously. In this case the strain on the mechanical linkages could be severe, perhaps with catastrophic results.

To avoid this danger it is important to limit the servo travel individually. In our example – the rudder – this would be a value just below 100%, as we have estab-lished that it fouls the elevator at 100% travel.

For symmetrical travel limiting, select the SYM fi eld and set a value within the range 0 and +150% of nor-mal. For an asymmetrical setting select the ASY fi eld, then press the rotary control briefl y and use the rota-ry control again to set the travel limit values in each highlighted fi eld. For an asymmetrical setting move

the associated transmitter control to each end-point in turn; the highlighted fi eld then switches between the negative and positive directions. (CLEAR = 150%.)

The graph shows the servo travel limited to 90%, with a travel setting of +150%.

Program description: Basic settings

Column 4 “- travel +”

In this column you can adjust servo travel symmetri-cally or asymmetrically (different each side of neutral). The adjustment range is 0 … +150% of normal ser-vo travel. The reference point for the set values is the setting in the “Centre” column.To set a “symmetrical” travel, i. e. to adjust travel equally on both sides of neutral, select SYM; se-lect ASY to set asymmetrical travel. In the latter case move the associated transmitter control (stick, INC / DEC button, side-mounted proportional control, or switch) to the appropriate end-point; when you press the rotary control the highlighted servo travel fi eld switches between the left fi eld (negative direction) and the right fi eld (positive direction).Pressing CLEAR resets the changed parameter to 100%.

Important:In contrast to the »Transmitter control adjust« menu this value affects the servo directly, regardless of how the control signal for this servo is generated, i. e. either directly by a stick channel, or by means of any type of mixer function.

�

� �

�

� �

� �

� � �

� � �

�

� � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � �

Ser

vo tr

avel

Transmitter control travelt

The graph alongside shows an example of asymmetrical servo travel, with a travel setting of -50% and +150%.

�

� �

�

� �

� �

� � �

� � �

�

� � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � �

Transmitter control travel

Ser

vo tr

avel

7676 Program description: Transmitter controls

Stick mode

Settings for transmitter sticks 1 to 4

Channel 1 Aileron 0.0s 0.0sElevator 0.0s 0.0sRudder 0.0s 0.0s

Tr.step SYM ASYSEL

globalglobalglobalglobalTrim

4444

0.0s 0.0s

– time +�

�

This menu is intended for fi xed-wing models only, and is used to determine the trim effect of the four digital trim levers, and to “slow down” the effect of sticks 1 to 4 if desired.Move to the relevant line with the rotary control pressed in. Select the appropriate function fi eld, press the rotary control briefl y, then enter the desired set-ting in the highlighted fi eld using the rotary control.

“Trim” column

With the exception of “Channel 1”, the trim effect of the digital trim levers can be switched from “global” to “phase” and vice versa.“global”: The setting of the trim lever affects the cor-

responding model over all the programmed fl ight phases, i. e. its effect is “global”.

“phase”: The setting of the trim lever affects the mo-del differently in each fl ight phase, and the settings are automatically stored when you switch fl ight phases, so that the established setting is again available when you switch back.

Pressing CLEAR resets this parameter to “global”.

“Tr.step” column

The four digital trim levers shift the neutral point of the relevant stick function by one increment every time you push (“click”) the trim lever in either direction. The size of the increment can be varied in this menu; the maximum trim value is always about +/-30% of the control travel, regardless of the number of trim incre-ments applied.Hold the rotary control pressed in to select the appro-priate line. Press the rotary control briefl y, then set a value within the range 1 to 10.(pressing CLEAR = 4)

“- time +” column

In the “Time” column it is possible to infl uence the speed of movement of servos controlled by sticks 1 to 4; the response speed is variable separately for each stick. The associated servo or servos still follow the travel of the transmitter control, but with a correspon-ding delay. This time delay affects the transmitter con-trol signal directly, and therefore infl uences all servos controlled by the particular transmitter control at the same rate.The time can be programmed SYMmetrically (for both sides) or separately for each direction of movement (ASY); the available range is 0 to 9.9 seconds. For asymmetrical adjustment move the stick to the appro-priate side, so that the highlighted fi eld – in which the desired value is to be entered – alternates between the two directions.(CLEAR = 0.0 s.)

Typical application:If Channel 1 controls the aircraft’s motor, then it may make sense to program an asymmetrical time delay in order to avoid the abrupt application of full-throttle. In contrast, safety considerations dictate that it should always be possible to stop the motor “immediately” (no delay).

7777Program description: Transmitter controls

Stick mode

Settings for transmitter sticks 1 to 4

Pitch/thrRoll 0.0s 0.0sPitch ax. 0.0s 0.0sTail rot. 0.0s 0.0s

Tr.step SYM ASYSEL

Thr LimglobalglobalglobalTrim

4444

0.0s 0.0s

– time +�

� SEL

This menu is intended for model helicopters only, and is used to determine the trim effect of the four digital trim levers, and to “slow down” the effect of sticks 1 to 4 if desired.Move to the relevant line with the rotary control pressed in. Select the appropriate function fi eld, press the rotary control briefl y, then enter the desired set-ting in the highlighted fi eld using the rotary control.

“Trim” column

The set-up variations available at this point are tailo-red to the requirements of model helicopters, which is why it is possible in the “Pitch / throttle” line to switch between the following points:“Thr Lim”: The C1 trim works as an idle trim if the

motor is controlled using the “Throttle li-mit” function for the starting procedure (see the »Transmitter control adjust« menu (page 82).

“Thr AR”: The C1 trim works as an idle trim only in the “Autorot” fl ight phase.

In principle the AR throttle position is set (permanently) in the »Helicopter mi-xers« menu (page 122), but it can be “varied” using the idle trim lever, e. g. for auto-rotation practice.

Pressing CLEAR resets this parameter to “Thr Lim”.In contrast, the trim effect of the associated digital trim levers can be switched from “global” to “phase” in the “Roll”, “Pitch-axis” and “Tail rotor” lines, and vice versa.

“global”: The setting of the trim lever affects the corresponding model over all the pro-grammed fl ight phases, i. e. its effect is “global”.

“phase”: The setting of the trim lever affects the model differently in each fl ight phase, and the settings are automatically stored when you switch fl ight phases, so that the established setting is again available when you switch back.

Pressing CLEAR resets this parameter to “global”.

“Tr.step” column

The four digital trim levers shift the neutral point of the relevant stick function by one increment every time you push (“click”) the trim lever in either direction. The size of the increment can be varied in this menu; the maximum trim value is always about +/-30% of the control travel, regardless of the number of trim incre-ments applied.Hold the rotary control pressed in to select the appro-priate line. Press the rotary control briefl y, then set a value within the range 1 to 10.(pressing CLEAR = 4)

“- time +” column

In the “-time+” column it is possible to infl uence the speed of movement of servos controlled by sticks 1 to 4; the response speed is variable separately for each stick. The associated servo or servos still follow the travel of the transmitter control, but with a correspon-ding delay. This time delay affects the transmitter con-trol signal directly, and therefore infl uences all servos controlled by the particular transmitter control at the same rate.The time can be programmed SYMmetrically (for both sides) or separately for each direction of movement (ASY); the available range is 0 to 9.9 seconds. For asymmetrical adjustment move the stick to the appro-

priate side, so that the highlighted fi eld – in which the desired value is to be entered – switches between the two directions.(CLEAR = 0.0 s.)

Typical application:At the swashplate linkage point in the »Helicopter type« menu (see page 72), for example, a “pitch-axis” (elevator) command will move all three servos if the linkage type is set to “3Sv (2 roll)”. However, the servo in the centre has to cover a longer travel than the two servos acting on the shorter levers.

If a fast pitch-axis command is given, the servo in the centre will reach its end-point later than the two other servos acting on the shorter levers. The result is a brief collective pitch movement. If the time for the pitch-axis function is reduced to the point where it corresponds at least to the transit speed of the centre servo, then all three servos will always reach the desi-red point simultaneously. Therefore if you set a delay value for “Collective pitch” (C1), it is possible to obtain absolutely identical transit speeds for the three collec-tive pitch servos. The delay times required for this are typically only a few tenths of a second.

78

Control adjust

Settings for transmitter control inputs 5 to 12

Program description: Transmitter controls

Input 5 0% +100%+100% 0.0 0.00% +100%+100% 0.0 0.00% +100%+100% 0.0 0.00% +100%+100% 0.0 0.0

SYM ASYASYSYMSEL � SEL«normal »

freeInput 6Input 7Input 8

freefreefree

–travel+ –time+offset

In addition to the four dual-axis stick units for the con-trol functions 1 to 4, the mx-24s transmitter is equip-ped as standard with various auxiliary controls. In de-tail these are:

• Two INC / DEC buttons: CONTROL 5 and 6• Two three-position switches: CONTROL 7 + 8, or

SW 5 + 6 and SW 9 + 10• Two side-mounted proportional controls: CONT-

ROL 9 + 10• Five two-position switches: SW 1 to 4, 7• One two-position momentary switch: SW 8In this menu these transmitter controls can be assi-gned freely to any function input (see page 28), with absolutely no restriction. A side-effect of this arrange-ment is that one transmitter control can also be set to operate several function inputs simultaneously, e. g. inputs 11 and 12.Inputs 5 to 8 can also be assigned differently for each fl ight phase, provided that you have defi ned fl ight phases in the »Phase settings« menu (page 100) and the »Phase assignment« menu (page 104). In this case the names assigned to each fl ight phase are displayed in the bottom line of the screen, e. g. “normal”. In contrast, inputs 9 to 12 can only be occu-pied once in each model memory (1 to 40). A trans-mitter control assigned to one of these inputs there-fore has the same effect in all fl ight phases.

Note:The position of the two INC / DEC buttons 5 + 6 in in-puts 5 … 12 is still stored separately for each fl ight phase (see also page 28).

The transmitter controls mentioned above can be as-signed to the fl ight phase specifi c inputs 5 to 8 and inputs 9 to 12, which can only be assigned once in each model memory, and the same is true of the C1 stick (transmitter control 1). This can be useful, for example, if you wish to be able to control a second throttle servo in parallel with the fi rst in order to cont-rol a twin-engined model, or a second airbrake servo on a glider, without major programming effort.

Basic procedure:1. Select the appropriate transmitter control 5 to 12

with the rotary control pressed in.2. Turn the rotary control to select SEL, SYM or ASY

in the bottom line of the screen, so that you can carry out the adjustments you wish to make.

3. Press the rotary control: the input fi eld you wish to modify is highlighted (black background).

4. Carry out the adjustment using the rotary control, or by moving the desired switch or transmitter con-trol.

5. Press the rotary control to conclude the input pro-cess.

6. Repeat the procedure in the other fl ight phases, if relevant.

Column 2 “Control or switch assignment”

Select one of the transmitter inputs 5 to 12 with the rotary control pressed in.Use the rotary control to select the left-hand SEL fi eld, or – if SEL is already highlighted – activate the assignment facility with a brief press on the rotary control:

Input 5 0% +100%+100% 0.0 0.00% +100%+100% 0.0 0.00% +100%+100% 0.0 0.00% +100%+100% 0.0 0.0

offset SYM ASYASYSYMSEL � SEL

«normal »

freeInput 6Input 7Input 8

freefreefree

–travel+ –time+

Move desired switchor control adj.

Now move the desired transmitter control (C1 stick, CTRL 5 to 10), or the selected switch (SW 1 to 4, 7 or 8), noting that the two INC / DEC buttons 5 + 6 are only detected after a few “beeps”; this means that you must hold them pressed in for slightly longer than nor-mal. If the travel is no longer suffi cient for this, move the control in the opposite direction. In the case of the assigned two-position switches it is only possible to switch “to and fro”, e. g. motor ON and OFF. Natural-ly, the two three-position switches also provide a cen-tre position.

Tip:When assigning switches please take care to set the appropriate direction of switching. It is also a good idea to switch all inputs not currently required to “free”, to eliminate the risk of operating them acciden-tally using transmitter controls which are not meant to be in use.

The screen now displays either the number of the transmitter control or the switch number, together with a switch symbol which indicates the switch status; e. g.:

Input 5 0% +100%+100% 0.0 0.00% +100%+100% 0.0 0.00% +100%+100% 0.0 0.00% +100%+100% 0.0 0.0

offset SYM ASYASYSYMSEL � SEL

«Normal »

Cnt.Input 6Input 7Input 8

freefree

–travel+ –time+

67

To erase a switch or transmitter control, wait for the following display:

Input 5 0% +100%+100% 0.0 0.00% +100%+100% 0.0 0.00% +100%+100% 0.0 0.00% +100%+100% 0.0 0.0

offset SYM ASYASYSYMSEL � SEL

«Normal »

Cnt.Input 6Input 7Input 8

freefree

–travel+ –time+

67 Move desired switch

or control adj.

then press the CLEAR button.

79

Column 3 “offset”

The centre point of each transmitter control, i. e. its zero point, can be changed in this column; the adjust-ment range is -125% to +125%.Pressing CLEAR resets the offset value to 0%.

Column 4 “-travel+”

In this column you set the control travel within the ran-ge -125% to +125%. At the same time you can use the software to reverse the direction of effect of the transmitter control. In contrast to altering servo travel, changing the transmitter travel setting affects all mi-xer and coupling inputs, i. e. all servos which are infl u-enced by the transmitter control concerned.Control travel can be adjusted symmetrically (SYM) to both sides, or asymmetrically (ASY). In the latter case you must move the stick in the appropriate direction before altering the setting. When the fi eld is highligh-ted, you can change the setting for that side of centre using the rotary control.Pressing CLEAR resets the control travel to 100%.

Tip:If you hold the rotary control pressed in and press the HELP button, the screen switches to the »Servo dis-play« menu, where you can check the new settings directly. Pressing the rotary control or the ESC button again returns you to your starting point.

Column 5 “-time+”

A delay within the range 0 to 9.9 sec. can be pro-grammed for all function inputs 5 … 12, either sym-metrically or asymmetrically, in a similar manner to the facilities in the »Stick mode» menu (see page 76). Use the rotary control to select SYM or ASY in the right-hand column, then press the rotary control.If you opt for an asymmetrical delay setting, you must move the transmitter control in question to the appro-priate end-point (or move the switch in the correct di-

rection), so that you can set the delay separately for each side of neutral using the rotary control.

Note:Please refer to the section entitled “Controlling timed sequences” on page 182 for more ideas on how to use sequences of this type.

Applications:1. Retractable undercarriage with wheel doors (cont-

rolled by two servos):• Extend: doors fast, wheels slow;• Retract: wheels fast, doors slow.

Example:Wheel doors: Servo 11Wheels: Servo 12

0% +100%+100% 0.0 0.0

10% +120%+ 95% 2.5 0.00.0 2.5

ASYSYM ASYSYMSEL�

«Normal »SEL

0%

-15% +106%+110%

+100%+100% 0.0 0.0Input freeInput

88

InputInput 12

11109

offset –travel+ –time+

free

You can also adjust the behaviour of servos 11 and 12 using the transmitter control menu points “Off-set” and “Travel”.

2. The C1 stick is to be used alternately for control-ling an electric motor and airbrakes on a powered glider.

The (minimum) features should be as follows: • Speed controller: Receiver output 1 • Ailerons: Receiver outputs 2 + 5 • Elevator: Receiver output 3 • Airbrakes: Receiver output 6 (If output 6 is already in use for another purpo-

se, the next vacant receiver output socket must be used for the airbrake servo.)

In the »Model type« menu select “Motor on C1 forward / back” and “2 AIL” to suit your prefe-

rences, and leave or place the airbrake stick at “In-put 1”. Set the appropriate Offset value, again in line with your preferences (i. e. forward / back).

Now program (initially) two fl ight phases with the names, say, “normal” and “landing”. In the »Phase settings« menu set the “Motor” to “no” in the ap-propriate line of the “Landing” fl ight phase.

In the »Transmitter control adjust« leave the fl ight phase specifi c input 6 at “free” in the “normal” fl ight phase, but turn the rotary control to adjust the Offset value of Input 6 in the direction of + or - until the airbrakes are “retracted” again.

Now move to the “Landing” fl ight phase, assign “Transmitter control 1” to Input 6, but leave the Off-set value at 0%. You may need to reverse the ac-tion of the transmitter control in the “Travel” column by setting the prefi x to “-”.

Use a similar procedure in the fl ight phase speci-fi c »Wing mixers« menu to enter the settings for the two mixers “Brake � 5 aileron” and “Brake � 3 elevator”, and check the brake offset setting for these mixers in the »Model type« menu.

Program description: Transmitter controls

80 Program description: Transmitter controls

Control adjust

Settings for transmitter control inputs 5 to 12

0% +100%+100% 0.0 0.0Throt 0% +100%+100% 0.0 0.0Gyro 0% +100%+100% 0.0 0.0

0% +100%+100% 0.0 0.0

SYM ASYASYSYMSEL � SEL

Input freefreefreefree

7Input

6

offset –travel+ –time+8

5

In addition to the four dual-axis stick units for the con-trol functions 1 to 4, the mx-24s transmitter is equip-ped as standard with various auxiliary controls. In de-tail these are:

• Two INC / DEC buttons: CONTROL 5 and 6• Two three-position switches: CONTROL 7 + 8, or

SW 5 + 6 and SW 9 + 10• Two side-mounted proportional controls: CONT-

ROL 9 + 10• Five two-position switches: SW 1 to 4, 7• One two-position momentary switch: SW 8In this menu these transmitter controls can be assi-gned freely to any function input (see page 28), with absolutely no restriction. A side-effect of this arrange-ment is that one transmitter control can also be set to operate several function inputs simultaneously, e. g. inputs 11 and 12.Inputs 5 to 8 can also be assigned differently for each fl ight phase, provided that you have defi ned fl ight phases in the »Phase settings« menu (page 102) and the »Phase assignment« menu (page 104). In this case the names assigned to each fl ight phase are displayed in the bottom line of the screen, e. g. “normal”. In contrast, inputs 9 to 12 can only be occu-pied once in each model memory (1 to 40). A trans-mitter control assigned to one of these inputs there-fore has the same effect in all fl ight phases.

Note:The position of the two INC / DEC buttons 5 + 6 in in-puts 5 … 12 is still stored separately for each fl ight phase (see also page 28).

The transmitter controls mentioned above can be as-signed to the fl ight phase specifi c inputs 5 to 8 and inputs 9 to 12, which can only be assigned once in each model memory, and the same is true of the C1 stick (transmitter control 1).

Basic procedure:1. Select the appropriate transmitter control 5 to 12

with the rotary control pressed in.

2. Turn the rotary control to select SEL, SYM or ASY in the bottom line of the screen, so that you can carry out the adjustments you wish to make.

3. Press the rotary control: the input fi eld you wish to modify is highlighted (black background).

4. Carry out the adjustment using the rotary control, or by moving the desired switch or transmitter con-trol.

5. Press the rotary control to conclude the input pro-cess.

6. Repeat the procedure in the other fl ight phases, if relevant.

Column 2 “Control or switch assignment”

Select one of the transmitter inputs 5 to 12 with the rotary control pressed in.Use the rotary control to select the left-hand SEL fi eld, or – if SEL is already highlighted – activate the assignment facility with a brief press on the rotary control:

0% +100%+100% 0.0 0.0Throt 0% +100%+100% 0.0 0.0Gyro 0% +100%+100% 0.0 0.0

0% +100%+100% 0.0 0.0

SYM ASYASYSYMSEL � SEL

Input freefreefreefree

7Input

6

offset –time+

5

8

Move desired switchor control adj.

–travel+

Now move the desired transmitter control (C1 stick, CTRL 5 to 10), or the selected switch (SW 1 to 4, 7 or 8), noting that the two INC / DEC buttons 5 + 6 are

only detected after a few “beeps”; this means that you must hold them pressed in for slightly longer than nor-mal. If the travel is no longer suffi cient for this, move the control in the opposite direction. In the case of the assigned two-position switches it is only possible to switch “to and fro”, e. g. motor ON and OFF. Natural-ly, the two three-position switches also provide a cen-tre position.

Tip:When assigning switches please take care to set the appropriate direction of switching. It is also a good idea to switch all inputs not currently required to “free”, to eliminate the risk of operating them acciden-tally using transmitter controls which are not meant to be in use.

The screen now displays either the number of the transmitter control or the switch number, together with a switch symbol which indicates the switch status; e. g.:

0% +100%+100% 0.0 0.0Throt 0% +100%+100% 0.0 0.0Gyro 0% +100%+100% 0.0 0.0

0% +100%+100% 0.0 0.0

SYM ASYASYSYMSEL � SEL

Input 1freefree

Cnt.7

Input

6

offset –travel+ –time+«Normal »5

5

8

To erase a switch or transmitter control, wait for the following display:

0% +100%+100% 0.0 0.0Throt 0% +100%+100% 0.0 0.0Gyro 0% +100%+100% 0.0 0.0

0% +100%+100% 0.0 0.0

SYM ASYASYSYMSEL � SEL

Input 1freefree

Cnt.7

Input

6

offset –travel+ –time+«Normal »5

5

8

Move desired switchor control adj.

then press the CLEAR button.

81Program description: Transmitter controls

Column 3 “offset”

The centre point of each transmitter control, i. e. its zero point, can be changed in this column; the adjust-ment range is -125% to +125%.Pressing CLEAR resets the offset value to 0%.

Column 4 “-travel+”

In this column you set the control travel within the ran-ge -125% to +125%. At the same time you can use the software to reverse the direction of effect of the transmitter control. In contrast to altering servo travel, changing the transmitter travel setting affects all mi-xer and coupling inputs, i. e. all servos which are infl u-enced by the transmitter control concerned.Control travel can be adjusted symmetrically (SYM) to both sides, or asymmetrically (ASY). In the latter case you must move the stick in the appropriate direction before altering the setting. When the fi eld is highligh-ted, you can change the setting for that side of centre using the rotary control.Pressing CLEAR resets the control travel to 100%.

Tip:If you hold the rotary control pressed in and press the HELP button, the screen switches to the »Servo dis-play« menu, where you can check the new settings directly. Pressing the rotary control or the ESC button again returns you to your starting point.

Column 5 “-time+”

A delay within the range 0 to 9.9 sec. can be pro-grammed for all function inputs 5 … 12, either sym-metrically or asymmetrically, in a similar manner to the facilities in the »Stick mode» menu (see page 76). Use the rotary control to select SYM or ASY in the right-hand column, then press the rotary control.If you opt for an asymmetrical delay setting, you must move the transmitter control in question to the appro-priate end-point (or move the switch in the correct di-

rection), so that you can set the delay separately for each side of neutral using the rotary control.

Note:Please refer to the section entitled “Controlling timed sequences” on page 182 for more ideas on how to use sequences of this type.

Application: “retractable undercarriage:• Extend: slow• Retract: fast (or vice versa)

0% +100%+100%

+100%offset

SEL ASYSYM SYMSEL–travel+ –time+

0%0%0%

+100%+100%+100%+100%+100%

0.0 0.02.5 0.00.0 0.00.0 0.0

«Normal »�

� ASY

7

Thr.l

InputInputInput

Cnt. 9free

free9101112

You can check the result of your settings by calling up the »Servo display« menu.

“Throt 6” line

In the Helicopter program it is also possible in princip-le to assign any of the transmitter controls (rotary pro-portional controls, INC / DEC buttons) and switches to the individual inputs.However, please note here that some of the inputs available in the »Transmitter control adjust” menu are already assigned to helicopter-specifi c functions, and therefore are not available for use in other ways.For example, the receiver sequence table on page 43 shows that the throttle servo (or the speed control-ler of an electric-powered helicopter) must always be connected to receiver output “6”, as control channel “6” is reserved for motor power control.However, in contrast to a fi xed-wing model aircraft the throttle servo or speed controller is not directly controlled by the throttle stick or any other transmit-ter control, but instead by a complex mixer system – see the »Helicopter mixers« menu, starting on page

122. Moreover the “Throttle limit function” also has an infl uence on this mixer system; this is described on the next page.Assigning a transmitter control or switch in the “Throttle” line, or to its supplementary control signal, would unnecessarily “confuse” this complex mixer system. For this reason the “Throttle” input MUST be left set to “free”.

“Gyro 7” line

If the gyro you wish to use features proportional gain (sensitivity) control, then its gyro effect can be pre-set within the range +/-125% separately for each fl ight phase; this is entered in the “Gyro” line of the »Heli-copter mixers« menu.The gyro gain settings should initially be selected se-parately for each fl ight phase in the »Helicopter mi-xers« menu. Based on these settings, gyro gain can be varied using a transmitter control assigned in the “Gyro 7” line of this menu; this could be one of the two INC / DEC buttons CTRL 5 or 6; the centre position of the transmitter control corresponds to the setting se-lected in the »Helicopter mixers« menu (see page 122). If the transmitter control is moved from this cen-tre point in the direction of full travel, gyro gain incre-ases proportionally; it diminishes when moved in the opposite direction. This arrangement provides a fast, straightforward method of adjusting gyro gain to suit changing weather conditions, even in fl ight, or to esta-blish an optimum setting through fl ight-testing.In software terms you can even limit the gyro gain range in both directions by adjusting transmitter cont-rol travel.

82 Program description: Transmitter controls

Control adjustThrottle limit functionThrottle limit: Input 12 (throttle limit and C1 trim, throttle limit and Expo throttle limit)

The meaning and application of “Throttle limit”

In contrast to fi xed-wing models, the power output of the motor or engine in a model helicopter is not con-trolled directly using the C1 stick, but only indirectly via the throttle curve settings set up in the »Helicop-ter mixers« menu. (For separate fl ight phases you can set different throttle curves using fl ight phase pro-gramming.)

Note:In the case of a model helicopter with a speed gover-nor (regulator), this device assumes the task of cont-rolling motor power.

Generally speaking, for this reason the motor of a he-licopter never even approaches idle speed in “normal” fl ying operations; this applies whether throttle control is by conventional means or is based on a speed go-vernor. The net result is that the motor can neither be started nor stopped effi ciently without some additio-nal means of intervention.That is why Input “12” is reserved for the “Throttle li-mit” function in the »Control adjust« menu of the He-licopter program. Using a separate transmitter control – by default the right-hand side-mounted proportional control – the setting of the throttle servo connected to receiver output 6 can be limited to any level you wish, i. e. you can use it to reduce the “throttle” setting to idle, or alternatively even close the carburettor com-pletely. On the other hand the throttle servo can only follow the throttle curve and open up to its full-throttle position if the throttle limit control has “released” the full servo travel.The value set on the (right-hand) “+” side of the “-tra-vel+” column must therefore always be set to a high level, so that the maximum setting of the throttle li-mit control never restricts the full throttle setting which can be obtained using the throttle curve. This usually means a value in the range +100% to 125%:

0% +100%+100%

Thr.l +125%offset

SEL � ASYSYM ASYSYMSEL

–travel+ –time+

0%0%0%

+100%+100%+100%+100%+100%

0.0 0.00.0 0.00.0 0.00.0 0.0

«normal »

InputInputInput

Cnt. 9

freefreefree

9101112

In contrast, the value on the left-hand side of the “-travel+” column should be set in such a way that the motor runs at a reliable idle when the throttle limiter is at its rear end-point, but without preventing the (digi-tal) C1 stick controlling it. For the time being it is safe to leave this value at 100%.

Basic idle settingStart by moving the throttle limiter – by default the right-hand side-mounted proportional control – to its forward end-point, and check that “Throttle limit” is se-lected in the “(Collective) Pitch / throttle” line of the menu …

»Stick mode« (page 77)

Pitch/thrRoll 0.0s 0.0sPitch ax. 0.0s 0.0sTail rot. 0.0s 0.0s

Tr.step SYM ASYSEL

globalglobalglobalTrim

4444

0.0s 0.0s

–time+�

� SEL

Thr Lim

… and that a standard throttle curve is in force, as shown in the “Channel 1 � throttle” sub-menu of the menu …

»Helicopter mixer«, (page 122)

Channel 1

InputCurve

off 1

OU

TP

UT

-- +

110

0

«normal »

-100%OutputPoint

Throttle

-100%-100%

If this is not the case, the result can be unpleasant in-teractions between the various options which infl u-ence the throttle servo.Finally move the throttle / collective pitch stick trim le-ver to centre.Now adjust your throttle servo, preferably mechani-cally and if necessary also using the travel adjust-ment facility for servo 6 in the »Servo adjustments« menu, so that it reaches both full-throttle and idle, and is able to stop the motor reliably when the digital trim is operated.To conclude this basic set-up procedure, move the throttle limit control to the idle end-stop, and move to the »Transmitter control adjust« menu. Adjust the value in the “Throttle limit 12” line on the “left-hand” “-” side of the “-travel+” column until the throttle limiter no longer affects the idle range set by the C1 trim le-ver, e. g.:

0% +100%+100%

Thr.l +125%offset

SEL � ASYSYM ASYSYMSEL

–travel+ –time+

0%0%0%

+100%+100%+100%+100%

0.0 0.00.0 0.00.0 0.00.0 0.0

«normal »

InputInputInput

Cnt. 9

freefreefree

+125%+85%

9101112

Throttle limit in conjunction with the digital trim:

If you move the C1 trim in a single movement from the established idle position of the motor to the “Motor stopped” end-point, a marker is left at the point of the previous idle position, and another at the end of the trim travel – see following illustration. Starting from this marker, a single click in the Idle direction imme-diately restores the motor’s original idle setting; see also page 34.With the throttle limiter set up correctly as described, all you have to do before you start the motor is to move the throttle limiter in the direction of motor idle, and set the throttle / collective pitch stick to around centre.

83Program description: Transmitter controls

Note:Later, after setting up the throttle curve to suit the mo-del (see page 124), it should not be possible to af-fect the throttle servo with the throttle / collective pitch stick when the throttle limiter is set up in this form and closed.

The throttle servo now responds to the position of the C1 trim lever only. You may need to adjust the settings until a clean transition occurs. After starting the motor you should check that you can actually stop it again reliably using the C1 trim lever.At the fl ying fi eld, move the throttle limiter s l o w l y to the forward end-point, to avoid a sudden opening of the carburettor. At this setting the throttle servo can be controlled in the usual way using the throttle / coll-ective pitch stick.

This variable “limiting” of throttle travel certainly pro-vides a convenient method of starting and stopping the motor, but it also offers the possibility of recording the fl ight time. To accomplish this all you have to do is program a control switch close to the full-throttle point of the throttle limit slider, and then assign an On / Off switch to the timer.At the same time the throttle limiter provides an addi-tional level of safety. For example, just imagine what could happen if you were carrying the helicopter to the take-off site with the motor running – but without the throttle limiter set – and you accidentally moved the C1 stick …

That is why the software alerts you if you switch the transmitter on with the carburettor too far open: you will hear an audible warning, and the following mes-sage appears on the screen:

CAUTION:Setting the “Throttle limit 12” input to “free” does not switch the throttle limit function off; instead it sets the limiter to “half-throttle”.

Notes:• You can use the »Servo display« menu to ob-

serve the infl uence of the throttle limit slider. This menu is accessed by pressing the HELP button whilst holding the rotary control pressed in. Pres-sing the ESC button or the rotary control returns you to your starting point.

• Bear in mind that servo output 6 controls the throttle servo on the mx-24s.

• If you connect a servo to output 12, it can be used independently for other purposes by means of mi-xers, provided that you separate the servo from the transmitter control at function input 12 in the »MIX only channel« menu; see page 142.

• The throttle restriction set by the throttle limiter is shown as a horizontal bar in the graphic represen-tation of the throttle curve on the second display page of the “Channel 1 � throttle” option of the »Helicopter mixers« menu (see page 124). The output signal of the throttle servo cannot be higher than that defined by the position of the horizontal bar:

The appropriate graph was anticipated here: in the above example the throttle limit control is set to -60%, and therefore restricts the travel of the throttle servo to around -60% of full travel.

Time delay for the throttle limiter

0% +100%+100%

+125%offset

SEL � ASYSYM ASYSYMSEL

–time+

0%0%0%

+100%+100%+100%+100%

0.0 0.00.0 0.00.0 0.0

«normal »9 +125%+85% 0.0 4.0Thr.l

–travel+

InputInputInput

Cnt.

freefreefree

9101112

The throttle limiter could cause an abrupt opening of the throttle, and to avoid this it is advisable to as-sign an asymmetrical time delay to the throttle limiter (Input 12) when the control is moved towards its for-ward end-point. This applies in particular if you intend to use a switch to control the throttle limiter instead of the side-mounted proportional control, CONTROL 9.This is the procedure for defi ning a delay time: move the throttle limit control forward towards full-throttle, then use the rotary control to select the ASY fi eld un-der the “-time+” column. After a brief press on the ro-tary control you can enter an appropriate time delay – e. g. four seconds – by rotating the control. A further brief press on the rotary control concludes the entry process.

Point ?

OU

TP

UT

– +

1

100

-60%-60%

«normal »

Channel 1

InputCurve

offOutput

Throttle

Throttle limiter position

Thr too high!

ModmeSPCM20nner

0h K62 28100 0

Stop

Flight

0 000 00

Marker line indicates the last C1 trim position (idle setting)

Throttle limit slider

Trim position at which the motor was stopped

Centre point

84

Throttle limit in conjunction with “Thr AR” in the »Stick mode« menuAs already explained on page 77, the digital trim of the throttle / collective pitch stick is only active in the “Autorot” fl ight phase. This applies when you select “Thr AR” in the “(Collective) Pitch / Throttle” line of the menu …

»Stick mode“ (page 77)

Pitch/thrRoll 0.0s 0.0sPitch ax. 0.0s 0.0sTail rot. 0.0s 0.0s

Tr.step SYM ASYSEL

globalglobalglobalTrim

4444

0.0s 0.0s

– time +�

� SEL

Thr AR

As a result the C1 trim lever can be used neither to control the motor’s idle in the “normal” fl ight phases, nor to stop the motor. It is important to have adequa-te adjustment facilities, so we recommend the use of “Expo throttle limit” in this situation.The sub-menu for this is found in the menu …

»Helicopter type« (page 72)

Pitch min.

SEL

+100%- 70%

��

H E L I T Y P ERotor direction left

forwrdExpo throttle lim.Thr. limit warning

… where the exponential curve characteristic is set up. Here the control characteristics of the throttle li-mit transmitter control can be adjusted so that it pro-vides fi ne control of the idle setting, and can also stop the motor.

Note:The method of setting the Expo throttle limit charac-teristic is described in full in the »Helicopter type« menu on page 72.

In this case you should move the throttle limiter right back – in contrast to the previously described setting – and adjust the “-” side of the “-travel+” column in the “Throttle limit 12” line to the point where the throttle li-miter completely closes the carburettor. This means that the motor is reliably stopped when the transmitter control is in this position.Now move the throttle limit slider to its centre detent, and change the % value of the “Expo throttle limit” line in the »Helicopter type« menu (see page 72) until the carburettor is in a position suitable for star-ting the motor. Now start the motor, and adjust the va-lue if necessary until the motor runs at a reliable idle in this position of the throttle limit control.At the other end of the scale, increase the value on the Plus side of the “-travel+” column to +125%, as al-ready described, so that the full-throttle position of the throttle servo is also reliably released by the throttle li-miter.Finally use the rotary control to set an ASYmmetri-cal time delay of, say, 4.0 seconds, so that the motor picks up speed gradually even if you move the slider forward too quickly. You should select the time pre-set in accordance with the extent to which the carbu-rettor is opened in the direction of minimum collecti-ve pitch. The set value has to be fi ne-tuned by practi-cal testing.

The display could therefore look like this:

0% +100%+100%

+125%offset

SEL � ASYSYM SYMSEL

–time+

0%0%0%

+100%+100%+100%+100%+105%

0.0 0.00.0 0.00.0 0.00.0 4.0

ASY

9Thr.l–travel+

InputInputInput

Cnt.

freefreefree

9101112

Notes:• A combination of “Throttle limit” and “Expo throttle

limit” is also possible, although it is not often explo-

84 Program description: Transmitter controls

ited. The potential problem is that the C1 trim and the throttle limiter could interfere with each other if set up incorrectly.

• Of course, an alternative method of setting the motor to a low idle for starting would be to switch fl ight phases (see »Phase settings« and »Pha-se assignment« menus, page 102 … 104). You could then use the “Channel 1 � throttle” mixer in the »Helicopter mixers« menu (see page 122) to ensure that the motor is at idle in the collective pitch minimum position. However, this alternative method is seldom used. We recommend instead that you should immediately start using the thrott-le limiter and get used to the new system; see also page 82..

8585For your notes

86 Program description: Transmitter controls

Dual Rate / Expo

Adjustment of control characteristics for aileron, elevator and rudder

Aileron 100%ElevatorRudder

DUAL EXPO

SELSEL �

100%0%0%0%100%

The Dual Rate function provides a means of swit-ching to reduced control travels for aileron, elevator and rudder (control functions 2 … 4) in fl ight via an external switch; the D/R values can be set separate-ly for each fl ight phase. A separate menu (»Channel 1 curve«) is provided for setting up a curve for control function 1 (throttle / brake). This curve can feature up to eight separately programmable points, and is set up in the “Channel 1 curve” menu.The control travels for each switch position can be set to any value within the range 0 to 125%, separate-ly for each direction. Dual Rate works in a similar way to transmitter control travel adjustment in the »Trans-mitter control adjust« menu, but the Dual Rate func-tion does not affect the servo directly; instead it af-fects the corresponding control function, regardless of whether that function controls a single servo or mul-tiple servos via any number of complex mixer and coupling functions.The exponential control characteristic works in a diffe-rent way: if values greater than 0% are set, exponen-tial provides fi ne control of the model around the cen-tre position of the primary control functions (aileron, elevator and rudder), without forfeiting full movement at the end-points of stick travel. If you set values lower than 0%, travel is increased around the neutral posi-tion, and diminishes towards the extremes of travel. The degree of “progression” can be selected within the range -100% to +100%; 0% equates to normal (i. e. linear) control characteristics.A further application for exponential is to improve the linearity of rotary-output servos, which are the stan-

dard nowadays. The movement of the control surface is inevitably non-linear with a rotary servo, as the li-near movement of the output disc or lever diminishes progressively as the angular movement increases, i. e. the rate of travel of the control surface diminishes steadily towards the extremes, dependent upon the position of the linkage point on the output disc or le-ver. You can compensate for this effect by setting an Expo value greater than 0%, with the result that the angular travel of the output device increases dispro-portionately as stick travel increases.Like Dual Rates, the Expo setting applies directly to the corresponding control function, regardless of whether that function controls a single servo or mul-tiple servos via any number of complex mixer and coupling functions. Like the Dual Rate function, Expo can also be switched on and off in fl ight if a switch is assigned to it, and can also be programmed separa-tely for different fl ight phases.Since switches can be assigned to the Dual Rate and Expo functions with complete freedom, it is also pos-sible to operate several functions using one and the same switch. The result of this is that Dual Rates and Expo can be controlled simultaneously using a sing-le switch, and this can be advantageous – especially with very high-speed models.The graphic screen displays the curve characteristics directly. When you select the appropriate menu line, the central vertical line follows the movement of the stick concerned, so that you can easily observe how the curve value changes relative to the defl ection of the transmitter control.

Different Dual Rate and Expo settings in fl ight phasesIf you have set up different fl ight phases in the »Pha-se settings« and »Phase assignment« menus, the assigned fl ight phase name – e. g. “normal” – is dis-played at bottom left of the screen. Operate the ap-

propriate switch to move between fl ight phases.

Dual Rate function

If you wish to switch between two possible D/R set-tings, select the fi eld and assign a switch, one of the control switches (by moving the corresponding transmitter control), or - if necessary - even one of the logical switches L1 … L8 or L1i … L8i as described in the section “Assigning control switches” …

100%

DUAL EXPO

SELSEL �

100%0%0%0%100%

«Normal »

AileronElevatorRudder

Move desired switchto ON position(ext. switch: ENTER)

… on page 32. If you use one of the “G” switches, the position of the stick or other transmitter control serves as the switch. In this case it is essential to move to the »Control switches« menu (see page 94) or the »Logical swit-ches« menu (see page 97) and assign the control switch or logical switch to the transmitter control you wish to use. Whichever switch you assign, it will ap-pear in the screen display together with a switch sym-bol which indicates the direction of operation when you move the switch.Select the left-hand SEL fi eld to change the Dual Rate value, and use the rotary control in the highligh-ted fi eld to set the values for each of the two switch positions separately, e. g. in the “normal” fl ight phase:

DUAL EXPO

SELSEL �

100%0%0%0%100%

«Normal »

2 125%AileronElevatorRudder

The Dual Rate curve is shown simultaneously in the

87Program description: Transmitter controls

graph (pressing CLEAR = 100%).

Examples of different Dual Rate values:

Caution:In the interests of safety the Dual Rate value should always be at least 20% of total control travel.

Exponential function

If you wish to switch between two possible settings, select the fi eld and assign one of the availab-le switches, as described on page 32. The assigned switch appears in the screen display together with a switch symbol which indicates the direction of operati-on when you move the switch.For example, the system enables you to fl y with a li-near curve characteristic in the one switch positi-on, and to pre-set a value other than 0% in the other switch position.To change the Expo value, fi rst select the right-hand SEL fi eld, then use the rotary control in the highligh-ted fi eld to set separate values for each of the two switch positions, e.g. in the “normal” fl ight phase:

100% 2 +100%

«Normal »

SELSEL �

100% 0%100% 0%

DUAL EXPO

AileronElevatorRudder

The Expo curve is displayed simultaneously in the graph. (Pressing CLEAR = 0%).

Examples of different Expo values:

In these examples the Dual Rate value is 100% in each case.

Combination of Dual Rate and Expo

If you have assigned Dual Rates and Expo to the same switch, both functions are switched simultane-ously, e. g.:

Asymmetrical setting of Dual Rate and Expo

If you wish to set asymmetrical Dual Rate and / or Expo values, i. e. varying according to the direction of stick movement, you must move to the »Control switches« menu and assign, say CONTROL 3 (ele-vator stick) to one of the control switches G1 … G8, but leave the switching point at the neutral point of the stick. Now return to the »Dual Rate / Expo« menu and select the corresponding control function, in this case “Elevator”. Activate “Switch assignment”, and move the transmitter control you just selected.Move the elevator stick to the appropriate end-point, and enter the Dual Rate and / or Expo value for each side of neutral, e. g. for …

“up-elevator”:

100%100% + 30%

«Normal » DUAL EXPO

SELSEL ��

100% 0%

0%G3G3

AileronElevatorRudder

and “down-elevator”:

0%90% G3 + 0%

«Normal » DUAL EXPO

SELSEL ��

100%G3

100% 0%

AileronElevatorRudder

The dotted vertical line shows the current position of the elevator stick.

�

� � �

� � �

�

� � � �� � � � � �

� � � �

� � � �

�

� � �

� � �

�

� � � �� � � � � �

� � � �

� � � �

� � � �� � � � � �

�

� � �

� � �

�

� � � �

� � � �

Dual Rate = 100% Dual Rate = 50% Dual Rate = 20%

Ser

vo tr

avel

Ser

vo tr

avel

Ser

vo tr

avel

Stick defl ection Stick defl ection Stick defl ection

Expo = +100% Expo = +50% Expo = -100%

Ser

vo tr

avel

Ser

vo tr

avel

Ser

vo tr

avel

Stick defl ection Stick defl ection Stick defl ection

� � � �� � � � � � � � � �� � � � � � � � � �� � � � � �

�

� � �

� � �

�

� � � �

� � � �

�

� � �

� � �

�

� � � �

� � � �

�

� � �

� � �

�

� � � �

� � � �

Expo = +100%, D/R = 125% Expo = +100%, D/R = 50% Expo = -100%, D/R = 50%

Ser

vo tr

avel

Ser

vo tr

avel

Ser

vo tr

avel

Stick defl ection Stick defl ection Stick defl ection

88 Program description: Transmitter controls

Dual Rate / Expo

Control characteristics for roll, pitch-axis, tail rotorControl characteristics for roll, pitch-axis, tail rotor

Roll 100%Pitch ax.Tail rot.

DUAL EXPO

SELSEL �

100%0%0%0%100%

The Dual Rate function provides a means of swit-ching to reduced control travels for the roll, pitch-axis (elevator) and tail rotor servos (control functions 2 ... 4) in fl ight via an external switch; the D/R values can be set separately for each fl ight phase. A separa-te menu (»Channel 1 curve«) is provided for setting up a curve for control function 1 (throttle / collective pitch), or separately for throttle and collective pitch in the »Helicopter mixers« menu. This curve can fea-ture up to eight separately programmable points, and is set up in the “Channel 1 curve” menu.The control travels for each switch position can be set to any value within the range 0 to 125%, separate-ly for each direction. Dual Rate works in a similar way to transmitter control travel adjustment in the »Trans-mitter control adjust« menu, but the Dual Rate func-tion does not affect the servo directly; instead it af-fects the corresponding control function, regardless of whether that function controls a single servo or mul-tiple servos via any number of complex mixer and coupling functions.The exponential control characteristic works in a dif-ferent way: if values greater than 0% are set, expo-nential provides fi ne control of the model around the centre position of the primary control functions (roll, pitch-axis and tail rotor), without forfeiting full travel at the end-points of stick travel. If values lower than 0% are set, travel is increased around the neutral posi-tion, and diminishes towards the extremes of travel. The degree of “progression” can be selected within the range -100% to +100%; 0% equates to normal (i. e. linear) control characteristics.

A further application for exponential is to improve the linearity of rotary-output servos, which are the stan-dard nowadays. The movement of the control surface is inevitably non-linear with a rotary servo, as the li-near movement of the output disc or lever diminishes progressively as the angular movement increases, i. e. the rate of travel of the control surface diminishes steadily towards the extremes, dependent upon the position of the linkage point on the output disc or le-ver. You can compensate for this effect by setting an Expo value greater than 0%, with the result that the angular travel of the output device increases dispro-portionately as stick travel increases.Like Dual Rates, the Expo setting applies directly to the corresponding control function, regardless of whether that function controls a single servo or mul-tiple servos via any number of complex mixer and coupling functions. Like the Dual Rate function, Expo can also be switched on and off in fl ight if a switch is assigned to it, and can also be programmed separa-tely for different fl ight phases.Since switches can be assigned to the Dual Rate and Expo functions with complete freedom, it is also pos-sible to operate several functions using one and the same switch. The result of this is that Dual Rates and Expo can be controlled simultaneously using a sing-le switch, and this can be advantageous – especially with very high-speed models.The graphic screen displays the curve characteristics directly. When you select the appropriate menu line, the central vertical line follows the movement of the stick concerned, so that you can easily observe how the curve value changes relative to the defl ection of the transmitter control.

Different Dual Rate and Expo settings in fl ight phasesIf you have set up different fl ight phases in the »Pha-se settings« and »Phase assignment« menus, the

assigned fl ight phase name – e. g. “normal” – is dis-played at bottom left of the screen. Operate the ap-propriate switch to move between fl ight phases.

Dual Rate function

If you wish to switch between two possible D/R set-tings, select the fi eld and assign a switch, one of the control switches (by moving the corresponding transmitter control), or if necessary even one of the logical switches L1 … L8 or L1i … L8i as described in the section “Assigning control switches” …

100%

«Normal »

SELSEL �

100%0%0%0%100%

DUAL EXPO

RollPitch ax.Tail rot.

Move desired switchto ON position(ext. switch: ENTER)

… on page 32. If you use one of the “G” switches, the position of the stick or other transmitter control serves as the switch. In this case it is essential to move to the »Control switches« menu (see page 94) or the »Logical switches« menu (see page 97) and assign the control switch or logical switch to the transmit-ter control you wish to use. Whichever switch you as-sign, it will appear in the screen display together with a switch symbol which indicates the direction of ope-ration when you move the switch.Select the left-hand SEL fi eld to change the Dual Rate value, and use the rotary control in the highligh-ted fi eld to set the values for each of the two switch positions separately, e.g. in the “normal” fl ight phase:

DUAL EXPO

SELSEL �

100%0%0%0%100%

«Normal »

2 125%RollPitch ax.Tail rot.

89Program description: Transmitter controls

The Dual Rate curve is shown simultaneously in the graph (pressing CLEAR = 100%).

Examples of different Dual Rate values:

Caution:In the interests of safety the Dual Rate value should always be at least 20% of total control travel.

Exponential function

If you wish to switch between two possible settings, select the fi eld and assign one of the availab-le switches to the function, as described on page 32. The assigned switch appears in the screen display to-gether with a switch symbol which indicates the direc-tion of operation when you move the switch.For example, the system enables you to fl y with a li-near curve characteristic in the one switch positi-on, and to pre-set a value other than 0% in the other switch position.To change the Expo value, fi rst select the right-hand SEL fi eld, then use the rotary control in the highligh-ted fi eld to set separate values for each of the two switch positions, e. g. in the “normal” fl ight phase:

100% 2 +100%

«Normal »

SELSEL �

100% 0%100% 0%

DUAL EXPO

RollPitch ax.Tail rot.

The Expo curve is displayed simultaneously in the

graph. (Pressing CLEAR = 0%.)

Examples of different Expo values:

In these examples the Dual Rate value is 100% in each case.

Combination of Dual Rate and Expo

If you have assigned Dual Rates and Expo to the same switch, both functions are switched simultane-ously, e. g.:

Asymmetrical setting of Dual Rate and Expo

If you wish to set asymmetrical Dual Rate and / or Expo values, i. e. varying according to the direction of stick movement, you must move to the »Control switches« menu and assign, say CONTROL 3 (pitch-axis / elevator stick) to one of the control switches G1 ... G8. After this move to the »Dual Rate / Expo« menu and select the corresponding control function, in this case “pitch-axis”. Now activate “Switch assign-ment”, and move the transmitter control you just se-lected.Move to the SEL fi eld of the “DUAL” or “EXPO” co-

lumn, move the “pitch-axis” stick to the appropriate end-point, and enter the Dual Rate and / or Expo va-lue for each side of neutral using the rotary control in the highlighted fi eld, e. g. for …“pitch-up”:

100%100% + 30%

«Normal » DUAL EXPO

SELSEL ��

100% 0%

0%G3G3

RollPitch ax.Tail rot.

and “pitch-down”:

0%90% G3 + 0%

«Normal » DUAL EXPO

SELSEL ��

100%G3

100% 0%

RollPitch ax.Tail rot.

The dotted vertical line shows the current position of the pitch-axis stick.

�

� � �

� � �

�

� � � �� � � � � �

� � � �

� � � �

�

� � �

� � �

�

� � � �� � � � � �

� � � �

� � � �

� � � �� � � � � �

�

� � �

� � �

�

� � � �

� � � �

Dual Rate = 100% Dual Rate = 50% Dual Rate = 20%

Ser

vo tr

avel

Ser

vo tr

avel

Ser

vo tr

avel

Stick defl ection Stick defl ection Stick defl ection

Expo = +100% Expo = +50% Expo = -100%

Ser

vo tr

avel

Ser

vo tr

avel

Ser

vo tr

avel

Stick defl ection Stick defl ection Stick defl ection

� � � �� � � � � � � � � �� � � � � � � � � �� � � � � �

�

� � �

� � �

�

� � � �

� � � �

�

� � �

� � �

�

� � � �

� � � �

�

� � �

� � �

�

� � � �

� � � �

Expo = +100%, D/R = 125% Expo = +50%, D/R = 50% Expo = -100%, D/R = 50%S

ervo

trav

el

Ser

vo tr

avel

Ser

vo tr

avel

Stick defl ection Stick defl ection Stick defl ection

90 Program description: Transmitter controls

Channel 1 curve

Control characteristic for throttle / airbrakes

?

OU

TP

UT

-- +

1

100

-60%-60%

InputCurve

off PointOutput

Channel 1 C U R V E

In most cases the throttle response or the effect of the airbrakes or spoilers is not linear, and in this menu you can set up a curve to compensate for the non-linearity. The menu enables you to change the control characteristic of the throttle / airbrake stick, re-gardless of whether this control function directly af-fects the servo connected to control channel 1, or af-fects multiple servos via various mixers.If you have specifi ed different fl ight phases in the »Phase settings« and »Phase assignment« menus (see pages 100, 104), this option can be set up se-parately for each fl ight phase. The fl ight phase name is always superimposed at bottom left of the screen, e. g. “normal”.The control curve can be defi ned by up to eight points, termed “reference points” in the following sec-tion, which can be placed at any position along the stick travel. The on-screen graph considerably simpli-fi es the process of setting and adjusting the reference points. Nevertheless we recommend that you start by using fewer reference points.In the basic software set-up three reference points defi ne a linear “curve” as the base setting, namely the two end-points at the bottom end of the stick travel “L” (low = -100% travel) and the top end of the stick tra-vel “H” (high = +100% travel), together with point “1”, which is exactly in the centre of the stick travel.First switch to the desired fl ight phase, if necessary.

Setting and erasing reference points

You will fi nd a vertical line in the graph, and you can shift this between the two end-points “L” and “H” by moving the relevant transmitter control (throttle / air-brake stick). The current stick position is also dis-played in numerical form in the “Input” line (-100% to +100%). The point at which this line crosses the curve is ter-med the “Output”, and can be varied at the reference points within the range -125% to +125%. The cont-rol signal generated in this way affects all subsequent mixer and coupling functions. In the example above the stick is at -60% control travel and also generates an output signal of -60%, since the curve is linear.Between the two end-points “L” and “H” and the stan-dard centre point 1 in the middle you can now set a maximum of four reference points. However, if you fi rst erase point 1 in the centre of the transmitter cont-rol travel, you can enter up to six reference points, but please note that the distance between adjacent refe-rence points must be no less than about 25%.Now move the stick, and as soon as the highlighted question mark ? appears, you can place a reference point at the corresponding stick position by pressing the rotary control.The order in which you place the (maximum) six points between the end-points “L” and “H” is not sig-nifi cant, as the reference points are automatically re-numbered continuously from left to right in any case.

Example:

«Normal »

InputCurve

off PointOutput

Channel 1 C U R V E

Note:In this example the stick is located in the immediate vicinity of the right-hand reference point “H”. That is why the “point” value “+100%” is highlighted (black background).

If you wish to erase one of the set reference points 1 to max. 6, move the stick close to the reference point in question. The reference point number and the as-sociated reference point value now appear in the “Point” line; press the CLEAR button to erase that point.

Example – erasing reference point 3:

«Normal »

InputCurve

off PointOutput

Channel 1 C U R V E

When the point has been erased, the highlighted question mark ? re-appears after “Point”.

«Normal »?

InputCurve

off PointOutput

Channel 1 C U R V E

Changing the reference point values

Move the stick to the reference point “L (low), 1 ... 6 or H (high)” which you wish to change. The number and the current curve value of this point are displayed on the screen. You can now use the rotary control (or one of the INC / DEC buttons, if “free”) to change the momentary curve value in the highlighted fi eld within the range -125% to +125%, without affecting the ad-jacent reference points.

91Program description: Transmitter controls

Example:

«Normal »

InputCurve

off PointOutput

Channel 1 C U R V E

As an example the reference point “2” has been set to +90% in this screen-shot.Pressing the CLEAR button erases the reference point.

Note:If the stick is not set to the exact reference point, ple-ase note that the percentage value in the “Output” line always refl ects the actual momentary stick position.

Alternatively you can skip in the upward or downward direction straight to reference points that have already been set by turning the rotary control when pressed in; the number of the addressed point 1 … max. 6 is always highlighted in the graph. When you release the rotary control, the reference point can then be altered as described previously, completely independently of the position of the transmitter control.

«Normal »3 +55

InputCurve

off PointOutput

Channel 1 C U R V E

Trim pointQuit = ESC

Pressing the ESC button concludes this trim point function.

Rounding off the Channel 1 curve

In the following example the reference points have been set as follows, as described in the previous sec-tion: Reference point value 1 to +50%, Reference point value 2 to +90%, and Reference point value 3 to +0%.

«Normal »

InputCurve

off PointOutput

Channel 1 C U R V E

This “jagged” curve profi le can be rounded off auto-matically simply by pressing a button. Press the EN-TER button next to the “curve symbol” :

«Normal »

InputCurve

on PointOutput

Channel 1 C U R V E

Note:The curves shown here are only for demonstration purposes, and by no means represent realistic thrott-le / airbrake curves. “Real world” examples of this ap-plication can be found in the programming examples on pages 164 and 193.

Example: reversing a transmitter control:To reverse the direction of a transmitter control, e. g. the airbrake control, so that the airbrakes are retrac-ted when the stick is “back” (towards you) and exten-ded in the “forward” position, you simply need to pro-duce the “mirror-image” of the Channel 1 curve. Raise point “L” to +100% and lower point “H” to -100%. The

following example shows how to reverse a simple li-near control curve:

«Normal »

InputCurve

off PointOutput

Channel 1 C U R V E

«Normal »

InputCurve

off PointOutput

Channel 1 C U R V E

Of course, the better method of reversing the direc-tion of the C1 control is to pre-set the “Throttle mi-nimum position” in the »Model type« menu, as this also reverses the direction of effect of the C1 trim; see page 70.

normal

reversed

92 Program description: Transmitter controls

Channel 1 curve

Control characteristic for the throttle / collective pitch curve

?

OU

TP

UT

-- +

1

100

-60%-60%

InputCurve

off PointOutput

Channel 1 C U R V E

In most cases the throttle response or the collecti-ve pitch response is not linear, and in this menu you can set up a curve to compensate for the non-linea-rity. The menu also enables you to change the cont-rol characteristic of the throttle / collective pitch stick, regardless of whether the control function operates a single servo or multiple servos via various mixers.If you have specifi ed different fl ight phases in the »Phase settings« and the »Phase assignment« menus (see pages 100, 104), this option can be set up separately for each fl ight phase. The fl ight pha-se name is always superimposed at bottom left of the screen, e. g. “normal”.The control curve can be defi ned by up to eight points, in the following section termed “reference points”, which can be placed at any position along the stick travel. The on-screen graph considerably simpli-fi es the process of setting and adjusting the reference points. Nevertheless, we recommend that you start by using fewer reference points.Please note that the curve characteristic you set here acts as the input signal on particular mixers in the »Helicopter mixers« menu; see page 122:

In the basic software set-up three reference points defi ne a linear “curve” as the base setting, namely the two end-points at the bottom end of the stick travel “L”

(low = -100% travel) and the top end of the stick tra-vel “H” (high = +100% travel), together with point “1”, which is exactly in the centre of the stick travel.

Important note:It is important that you leave both end-points of the “Channel 1 curve” at +/-100%, otherwise you may not be able to exploit the full extent of the curve in the subsequent curve mixers located in the »Helicopter mixers« menu.

First switch to the desired fl ight phase, if necessary.

Setting and erasing reference points

You will fi nd a vertical line in the graph, and you can shift this between the two end-points “L” and “H” by moving the relevant transmitter control (throttle / col-lective pitch stick). The current stick position is also displayed in numerical form in the “Input” line (-100% to +100%).The point at which this line crosses the curve is ter-med the “Output”, and can be varied at the reference points within the range -125% to +125%. This cont-rol signal affects the throttle and collective pitch ser-vos, and all subsequent mixer and coupling functions. In the example above the stick is at -60% control tra-vel and also generates an output signal of -60%, sin-ce the curve is linear.Between the two end-points “L” and “H” and the stan-dard centre point 1 in the middle you can now set a maximum of four reference points. However, if you fi rst erase point 1 in the centre of the transmitter cont-rol travel, you can enter up to six reference points, but please note that the distance between adjacent refe-rence points must be no less than about 25%.Now move the stick, and as soon as the highlighted question mark ? appears, you can place a reference point at the corresponding stick position by pres-sing the rotary control. Up to six further points can be placed between the extreme points “L” and “H”, but

the order in which you place them is not signifi cant, as the reference points are automatically re-numbe-red continuously from left to right in any case.

Example:

«Hover »

InputCurve

off PointOutput

Channel 1 C U R V E

Note:In this example the stick is located in the immediate vicinity of the right reference point “H”. That is why the “point” value “+100%” is highlighted (black back-ground).

If you wish to erase one of the set reference points 1 to max. 6, move the stick close to the reference point in question. The reference point number and the as-sociated reference point value now appear in the “Point” line. Press the CLEAR button to erase that point.

Example – erasing reference point 3:

«Hover »

InputCurve

off PointOutput

Channel 1 C U R V E

When the point has been erased, the highlighted question mark ? re-appears after “Point”.

»Helicopter mixers«Pitch stick Collective pitch

C1 � Throttle

C1 � tail rotor

C1Curve

93Program description: Transmitter controls

?«Hover »

InputCurve

off PointOutput

Channel 1 C U R V E

Changing the reference point values

Move the stick to the reference point “L (low), 1 ... 6 or H (high)” which you wish to change. The number and the current curve value of this point are displayed on the screen. You can now use the rotary control to change the momentary curve value in the highlighted fi eld within the range -125% to +125%, without affec-ting the adjacent reference points.

Example:

«Hover »

InputCurve

off PointOutput

Channel 1 C U R V E

As an example the reference point “2” has been set to +90% in this screen-shot. Pressing the CLEAR button erases the reference point.

Note:If the stick is not set to the exact reference point, ple-ase note that the percentage value in the “Output” line always refers to the actual momentary stick position.

Alternatively you can skip straight to reference points that have already been set in the upward or downward direction by turning the rotary control when pressed in; the number of the addressed point 1 … max. 6 is always highlighted in the graph. When you release the rotary control, the reference point can then be altered as described previously, completely independently of the position of the transmitter control.

3 +55«Hover »

InputCurve

off PointOutput

Channel 1 C U R V E

Trim PointQuit = ESC

Pressing the ESC button concludes this trim point function.

Rounding off the Channel 1 curve

In the following example the reference points have been set as follows, as described in the previous sec-tion: Reference point value 1 to +50%, Reference point value 2 to +90%, and Reference point value 3 to +0%.

«Hover »

InputCurve

off PointOutput

Channel 1 C U R V E

This “jagged” curve profi le can be rounded off auto-matically simply by pressing a button. Press the EN-TER button next to the “curve symbol” :

«Hover »

InputCurve

on PointOutput

Channel 1 C U R V E

Note:The curves shown here are only for demonstration purposes, and by no means represent realistic thrott-le / collective pitch curves.

Switch display

Display of the switch settings

9 10

G1 G2 G3 G4 G5 G6 G7 G8

Switch

ContrlSwitch

This function enables you to check the various switch functions, and provides an overview of the switches installed in your transmitter, together with the pro-grammable control switches.When you operate a switch, the number of that switch becomes obvious on-screen because its normal OFF symbol changes to an ON symbol, and vice versa. Closed (ON) switches are always highlighted, i. e. on a black background, to make them more readily noticeable.The same applies to the control switches G1 … G8: when you operate the associated transmitter control (i. e. the one already assigned in the »Control swit-ches« menu) you can immediately see the number of the control switch and the direction of switching.

Note:The numbering 1 to 10 of the external switches shown here equates to the numbers printed on the transmitter case. However, the switch numbers have no signifi cance at all for the purpose of programming.

94

Control switch

Programming control switches

Program description: Switches

C O N T R O L S W I T C HG1 Cnt. –75%G2G3G4

SEL �

free

=> G1+75% =>

0% =>0% =>

G2G3G4

Cnt.

STO SEL

11

free

Many auxiliary functions are best controlled automati-cally by a particular (freely programmable) position of a transmitter control or stick, rather than by a conven-tional switch.

Typical applications:

• Switching an on-board glowplug energizer on and off according to the throttle position or motor speed. In this case the switch for the plug energi-zer is controlled by a mixer at the transmitter.

• Switching a stopwatch on and off in order to time the motor run of an electric motor.

• Switching a “combi-switch” mixer (coupled aile-ron / rudder, “Aileron 2 � 4 rudder”) on and off au-tomatically when airbrakes are extended, for ex-ample, to allow you to match the model’s angle of bank to the slope of the ground when landing on a ridge, as the mixed rudder would affect the model’s heading if the mixer were still active.

• Changing various settings on the landing ap-proach when the throttle stick is reduced below a pre-set switching point; the settings could be: lo-wering landing fl aps, altering the elevator trim, and / or triggering specifi c Dual Rate, Exponential and Differential settings. In column 5 a switch can also be assigned separately, to allow you to disable / activate the control switch.

The mx-24s program features eight of these control switches, designated G1 to G8, of which the two fi rst ones are already assigned as follows: by default G1 is triggered at -75% and G2 at +75% of the travel of the C1 stick (throttle / brake or throttle / collective pitch).

G1 and G2 can therefore be included without restric-tion in the free programming of the switches, i. e. they can be assigned to a function.The software gives you the opportunity to assign switches at all points in the program where their use makes sense. At these points you can select and as-sign one of a maximum of ten transmitter switches or one of the control switches G1 … G8 simply by ope-rating the switch or moving the transmitter control to which a control switch is assigned. In this case the di-rection of switching is always determined by the di-rection of movement, i. e. when you move the approp-riate switch or transmitter control, the software always interprets the new position, i. e. the one to which you move it in order to assign it, as the ON setting.The control switches can be used in combination with a separate switch (see below) to generate more com-plex switch combinations.

The basic procedure:1. If no transmitter control is assigned, only one SEL

fi eld will be displayed in the bottom line of the screen.

2. Hold the rotary control pressed in, and select the control switch 1 to 8 you wish to use.

3. Press the rotary control briefl y.4. Move the appropriate transmitter control.5. Press the rotary control to conclude the select pro-

cedure.6. You will now see additional fi elds (STO, SEL, )

which you can select by turning the rotary control.7. Move the transmitter control to the desired swit-

ching point.8. Press the rotary control.9. Select the setting using the rotary control.10. Press the rotary control to end the input procedu-

re.11. Press the ESC button to leave the menu.

Assigning a transmitter control to a control switch

Select the appropriate line 1 to 8 with the rotary con-trol pressed in. After another brief press on the ro-tary control (to activate transmitter control assign-ment), the following message is superimposed on the screen:

Cnt. –75%

SEL

free

=>+75% =>

0% =>0% =>

Cnt.Move desired

��

free

C O N T R O L S W I T C H

control adj.G1G2G3G4

G1G2G3G4

For our example we will now assign the right-hand side-mounted proportional control (CONTROL 9) to the control switch “G3”. Move this control from for-ward to back (G3 is to be closed when the throttle li-miter releases the throttle). As soon as this is detec-ted, additional fi elds appear at the bottom edge of the screen:

� SEL

–75% =>+75% =>

0%0%

=>=>

STO� SEL

Cnt.

119

C O N T R O L S W I T C HG1 Cnt.G2G3G4

G1G2G3G4

Cnt.

free

Important note:The two INC / DEC buttons (Controls 5 and 6) can only be assigned to a control switch if they have PRE-VIOUSLY been assigned to an input in the »Trans-mitter control adjust« menu.

95Program description: Switches

Resetting a control switch to “free”

If you wish to reset a control switch to “free”, press the CLEAR button at this display:

� SEL

–75% =>+75% =>

0%0%

=>=>

STO� SEL

Cnt.

119

C O N T R O L S W I T C HG1 Cnt.G2G3G4

G1G2G3G4

Cnt.

free

Move desiredcontrol adj.

Defi ning the switching point

Move the highlighted fi eld to the STO column (STO = store, save).Move the selected transmitter control to the position where the switching point is to be located, i. e. the ON / OFF switch point, then give the rotary control a brief press. The current position is displayed: in our examp-le this is “+85%”. The switching point can be altered at any time with another press on the rotary control.

Note:It is not a good idea to place a switching point at the end of a transmitter control’s travel, as there can then be no guarantee that the function will be switched re-liably.

In this example the control switch “G3” is open as long as control 9 (the throttle limiter for a helicopter) is below the +85% control travel point. It closes as soon as the switching point is exceeded, i. e. in the range between +85% and the top end-point.

Tip:If you now assign, say, a stopwatch to this G3 switch

in the »Timers (general)« menu, the timer will start running when you move the (throttle limit) slider to the forward end-point, and vice versa. This assignment may well be of practical use with model helicopters in order to record the motor run time.

Determining the direction of operation of the con-trol switch

In the 4th column the direction of operation of the control switch can be reversed using the rotary con-trol; it is shown in a highlighted fi eld. You need to se-lect the right-hand SEL fi eld using the rotary control before you reverse the direction. Press the rotary con-trol briefl y:

� SEL

–75%+75% =>+85%

0%

=>

=>� SEL STO

<=free

119

Cnt.Cnt.Cnt.

C O N T R O L S W I T C HG1G2G3G4

G1G2G3G4

Turn the rotary control to select the desired direction of switching in the highlighted fi eld.Pressing CLEAR resets the direction of switching to “=>”.The current status of the control switch is indicated in the extreme right-hand column by the switch symbol.

In the example shown here, with the switching point reversed, the control switch “G3” is closed (ON) when the transmitter control is below +85% travel; it opens as soon as the switching point is exceeded, i. e. in the range between +85% and the upper end-point.

SEL

–75% =>+75% =>+85%

0%=>=>

STO

O L S W I T C HG1G2G3G4

SEL

–75%+75% =>+85%

0%

=>

=>

L STO

<=

119

O N T R O L S W I T C HG1G2G3G4

“G3”open

“G3”closed

Defi ning the switching point:

Move the transmitter control to the ap-propriate position and press the rotary control briefl y.

Notes:• If you assign a control switch, e. g. G3, to multiple

functions, it is important to remember that the swit-ching direction set here applies to all G3 switches.

• The switched state can also be reversed by rever-sing the transmitter control in the »Transmitter control adjust« menu.

Combining a control switch with one of the swit-ches SW 1 … 10

Any control switch can be over-ridden by another switch, so that, for example, in particular fl ight situati-ons the function can be switched independently of the transmitter control position (and therefore of the cont-rol switch).Move to the fi eld in the 5th column. In the simp-lest case select one of the switches SW 1 … 10, as described on page 32 in the section entitled “Assi-gning transmitter controls and switches”. The num-ber of this switch, e. g. No. 2, appears on the screen in the second column from the right, together with a switch symbol which indicates the momentary state of the switch (on / off):

� SEL

–75%+75% =>+85%

0%

=>

=>� SEL STO

<= 2

Cnt.

free

Cnt.Cnt.

119

C O N T R O L S W I T C HG1G2G3G4

G1G2G3G4

As long as this switch is open, the control switch “G3” in the right-hand column is active, i. e. it switches at the set switching point. If the switch is closed, the control switch remains constantly closed, regardless of the position of the transmitter control and the direc-tion of switching:

96 Program description: Switches

� SEL

–75%+75% =>+85%

0%

=>

=>� SEL STO

<= 2

119

C O N T R O L S W I T C HG1 Cnt.G2G3G4

G1G2G3G4

Cnt.

freeCnt.

Combining two control switches

For more complex applications it may also be neces-sary to over-ride this control switch with a second control switch.

Example:Control function 3 (= CONTROL 3) has been assig-ned to the control switch “G4”. The switching point is at its centre point, i. e. at 0%. Assign one of the two side-mounted proportional controls, e. g. the left-hand control 10, to the control switch “G5”. The switching point of this transmitter control might be at +50%.

� SEL

=>+75%+85%

0% =>=>

� SEL+50%

G5

STO

193

10

<= 2

Cnt.

C O N T R O L S W I T C HG2 Cnt.G3G4G5

G2G3G4G5

Cnt.Cnt.

Assuming that the switching directions are as sta-ted in the 4th column of the screen, the control switch “G4” is now closed as long as the stick (Cnt. 3) and / or “transmitter control 10” are beyond the switching point.

“G5” closed “G4” always closed, re-gardless of the position of transmitter control 3

“G5” open “G4” closed when transmit-ter control 3 is “forward”

SEL

=>

=>=>

<= 2G5

G5

S W I T C HG2G3G4

SEL

=>

=>=>

G5G5

<= 2

S W I T C HG2G3G4

This comprehensive range of switching facilities offers plenty of scope for special applications in the whole fi eld of model fl ying.

Notes:• The switching directions vary according to the op-

tion you have selected at “Throttle min. back / for-ward” and / or “Collective pitch min. back / for-ward”, as set in the »Model type« and »Helicop-ter type« menus.

• If you are using a three-position switch (CON-TROL 7 or 8) to operate the control switch, you must fi rst program the switching point by means of a proportional control, e. g. using one of the side-mounted proportional controls or one of the INC / DEC buttons:

Start by assigning the “substitute” proportional control in the 2nd column, and set the switching point in such a way that the one position of the

three-position switch will reliably exceed that va-lue, e. g. -10% or +10%. If you neglect this, the switching function will not be reliable, as the cont-rol switch is only triggered when the signal signifi -cantly exceeds or falls below the set value. The fi -nal stage is to reverse the control assignment, and re-assign the three-position switch which you actu-ally intend to use.

Transmitter control positions, and control switch posi-tions:

97Program description: Switches

Logical switch

Combining switches

L O G I C A L S W I T C H E SL1L2 L2L3L4

SEL

AND

ANDAND

L1

L3L4

��

AND

This function provides a means of linking two swit-ches, control switches and / or logical switches, or any combination of them, in an “AND” or “OR” circuit. In total the software allows eight logical switches “L1 … L8” to be programmed.The result of such a logical switch function – explai-ned later in this section – can be used as a further switching function. The switches required to set up a logical link of this type are assigned in the usual way using the two switch symbol fi elds, i. e. by moving the appropriate switch or transmitter control from the OFF to the ON position, and by selecting an expanded switch using the rotary control after pressing ENTER:

L1L2 L2L3L4

SEL

UND

UNDUND

L1

L3L4

��

UNDGewünschten Schalteroder Geber betätigen(erw. Schalt.: ENTER)

Logical / fixed switchFX L1 L2FXI L3 L4

L5 L6 L7 L8 L1i L2i

L O G I C A L S W I T C H E S

Possible applications for such links:

• Several functions which are normally switched inde-pendently of each other are to be grouped together so that they can be brought to a defi ned base set-ting when the user operates an “emergency switch”.

• The operation of a particular function is required to switch another function, e. g. switching to the “nor-mal” fl ight phase when a braking system is deploy-ed; see example on page 178.

• Defi ning linked situations in which a power-on warning is triggered; see the »Base setup mo-del« menu.

“AND” / “OR”

The “AND” or “OR” link is selected using the rotary control after activating the SEL fi eld.

“AND” function: a logical switch is only closed if both switches are closed.

“OR” function: a logical switch is closed if either of the two assigned switches is closed.

To enable these logical switches to be used in practice, the switch select list is expanded to inclu-de these special switches in those menus where swit-ches can be selected:

Note:The screen-shot printed below clearly shows the dif-ference between AND and OR switches by the switch positions:

Gewünschten Schalteroder Geber betätigen(erw. Schalt.: ENTER)

Logical / fixed switchFX L1 L2FXI L3 L4

L5 L6 L7 L8 L1i L2i

ENTER

Gewünschten Schalteroder Geber betätigen(erw. Schalt.: ENTER)FXIL5 L6 L7 L8 L1i L2iL3i L4i L5i L6i L7i L8i

Logical / fixed switch

Press ENTER if you wish to move to the ex-panded switches.

Now use the rotary con-trol to search for the desired fi xed switch “F” or logical switch “L”. In addition to the logical switches “L1 to L8” the list also includes the in-verted switches “L1i to L8i”.

L1L2 4 L2IL3 L1L4

SEL

AND13 OR

ANDAND

2 L1

L2 L3L4

��

L O G I C A L S W I T C H E S

“L3” is only closed if both switches “L1” and “L2” are closed. This means: the two switches 1 and 2 must be closed, and at the same time either switch 3 or 4.

Note regarding inverted switches:If you select an inverted switch at the switch assign-ment stage – e. g. “L1i” instead of “L1” – then the di-rection of switching is simply reversed, i. e. if a parti-cular switch is required to activate, say, a mixer when switched on, then the same switch with the suffi x “i” (= inverted) will activate this function when it is switched off. More complex applications can be addressed, for example, if you set up one and the same switch to turn one function on, but at the same time to turn a second function off, and vice versa. Very sophistica-ted switching arrangements can be produced in con-junction with the logical switches.

Move desired switchto ON position(ext. switch: ENTER)

98

How do I program a fl ight phase?The meaning of fl ight phase programming

Program description: Flight phases

General notes on fl ight phase programming

Often there are particular stages in a fl ight where you always need to use particular settings: perhaps diffe-rent fl ap positions for launch and landing with a fi xed-wing aircraft, or different collective pitch and throttle settings for hover and auto-rotation with a helicopter. The mx-24s enables you to store these different set-tings in separate fl ight phases, and call them up auto-matically using a switch or even a control switch.Another very useful application for fl ight phases is the fl ight-testing procedure with a new model: you can set up different fl ight phases containing alternative con-trol surface settings, then switch between them in fl ight in order to establish the most effective set-up for the model in question.

The basic programming procedure is carried out in three stages

1. First you have to set up the different fl ight pha-ses, i. e. you assign names to phases 1 … max. 8, which are then included in all the phase-speci-fi c menus and in the basic screen display. It is also possible to program a time frame for a “soft” transi-tion into the next phase, so that the model moves smoothly from one phase to the next, rather than abruptly.

For fi xed-wing model aircraft these settings are programmed in the »Phase settings« menu. In the Helicopter program you start in the »Base se-tup model« menu if you wish to set up an auto-rotation facility, otherwise you also start program-ming in the »Phase settings« menu.

2. In the second stage you set up the required “pha-se switches” in the »Phase assignment« menu.

3. Once these preliminary steps have been comple-ted, you can move to the specifi c phase menus and start programming the settings for the indivi-dual fl ight phases, as shown in the tables below.

List of fi xed-wing menus which are variable sepa-rately for each fl ight phase:

Menu page»Control switch« (Eingang 5 … 8) 78

»Dual Rate / Expo« 86»Channel 1 curve« 90»Phase settings« 100

»Phase assignment« 104»Phase trim F3B« 105

»Non-delayed channels« 105»Wing mixers« 110

»MIX active in phase« 142

List of helicopter menus which are variable sepa-rately for each fl ight phase:

Menu page»Control switch« (Eingang 5 … 8) 80

»Dual Rate / Expo« 88»Channel 1 curve« 92»Phase settings« 102

»Phase assignment« 104»Non-delayed channels« 105

»Helicopter mixer« 122»MIX active in phase« 142

All the other menus are model-specifi c, i. e. they can-not be programmed separately for different fl ight pha-ses. All changes you make in the other menus app-ly equally to all fl ight phases for that specifi c model. In some cases you may wish to remove the non-specifi c menus from the multi-function list when programming fl ight phases; this is done in the »Suppress Codes« menu (see page 62). A practical example of fl ight phase programming can be found on page 174.

99For your notes

100 Program description: Flight phases

Phase settings

Setting up fl ight phases

The mx-24s enables you to program up to eight groups of settings within any one model memory; the settings typically differ from each other in order to ca-ter for different stages of a fl ight. The grouped set-tings are termed fl ight phases, and are programmed in the corresponding menus.Depending on the setting “Throttle min. forward / back” or “none” in the “Motor on C1” line of the »Mo-del type« menu …

M O D E L T Y P E

Tail typeAileron/camber flapsBrake

SEL

Offset +100% Input 1

Normal1 AIL

��

Motor on C1 None

… your transmitter’s screen will show one of the follo-wing two variants:

• Motor on C1 “none”

Phase 1Phase 2 0.1sPhase 3 0.1s -Phase 4

NameSELSEL

�normal 0.1sThermik

Fl.ph.Tim Sw. time0.1s

�� SEL

-

-

• Motor on C1 “Throttle min. forward / back”

Phase 1Phase 2 0.1sPhase 3 0.1s -Phase 4

NameSELSEL

�normal 0.1sThermik

Timer Sw. time0.1s

�� SEL

-

-

SELMotor

yesyesyesyes

Setting up fl ight phasesWhen setting up fl ight phases for fi xed-wing models you start in this menu point, where individual phases are assigned names, and transition times can be set to provide a smooth transition from one phase into

the next. In practice we have certainly found that tran-sition times longer than the default 0.1 second are desirable, but the optimum setting varies according to your model and its set-up. You can assign names and transition times to multiple phases at this stage even if you don’t intend to make use of them at pre-sent, because you do not decide which of the “occu-pied” phases will actually be activated until you move to the »Phase assignment« menu, as described on page 104.The right-hand “Status” column shows whether swit-ches have already been assigned to the phases 1 … 8, and what the current status of the switches is:

Symbol Meaning– No switch assigned+ Phase can be called up by switch

�Indicates the currently active phase number

Note:A useful aid when programming different fl ight phases is the “Copy fl ight phase” option, which you will fi nd in the »Copy / Erase« menu. The fi rst step is to estab-lish the parameters for a particular fl ight phase; you then copy these settings into the next fl ight phase, where they can be modifi ed to meet the requirements of the new stage of fl ight.

“Name” column

Press the rotary control and select the most suitab-le phase name for phases 1 to 8 (if required for your particular model) from the on-screen list. In additi-on to these standard names you can defi ne a maxi-mum of ten of your own phase names in the »Gene-ral basic settings« menu (see page 154).The sequence of phases 1 to 8 is of no signifi cance; you do not even have to make the numbers concur-rent. However, you should always start with “Phase 1”, as this is the “Normal phase”, which is always ac-

tive if:

• no phase switch has been programmed in the »Phase assignment« menu, and

• no phase has been assigned to particular switch combinations.

The phase name “normal” would therefore be a sen-sible choice for “Phase 1”. The names themselves have absolutely no technical signifi cance in terms of programming; their only purpose is to help you to identify them in the course of further programming, and to know which fl ight phase is switched on at any one time. For this reason the names are shown in all the fl ight phase specifi c menus, and are also included in the transmitter’s basic display.

“Flight phase timer” and “Timer” column

In addition to the standard timers in the basic screen display, further timers are available which can be set up in the “Flight phase timers” menu (see page 108).

Timer select list:Clk 1, Clk 2, Clk 3, Lap, Time1, Time2.The fl ight phase timers “Clk 1 … 3” and “Time1” and “Time2” only run in the fl ight phase to which they have been assigned in this menu. In other fl ight pha-ses they are stopped (and suppressed), and the start / stop switches assigned to them have no effect.In contrast, the lap-counter continues to run once started, even if you switch to a different fl ight pha-se, although it can be stopped from any fl ight phase using the ESC button.Obviously you can record lap times with “Lap” using a switch (SW), but the meaning of the two timers “Time1” and “Time2” is as follows:

Time1 This timer only records times for which a switch, control switch or logical switch assi-gned in the “Lap time / Tim tab” line of the »Flight phase timers« menu is “closed” (see page 108). The basic display shows the num-

101Program description: Flight phases

ber of times the switch has been operated. This counter fi eld appears highlighted when the switch for the Time1 timer is “open”, i. e. when the timer is stopped:

DV20KATANA#03H-J.Sandbrunner

9.5V 2:30h C620 0 0 0

Stop watchFlight timTime1

«Aerobat»22.1s

0 000 00::

02

2:30h SPCM20

If desired, the rotary control can then be used to read out the sequence of recorded times.

Application: Typically for recording motor “on” times, assu-

ming that the same switch controls the motor.

Time2 “Time2” records both the “Off” and the “On” ti-mes of the associated switch, i. e. the timer restarts every time the switch is operated, and the counter is incremented by “1”.

You can stop any time count without opera-ting the switch itself by pressing the ESC but-ton. Operating the switch in turn increases the counter by 1, and restarts the Time2 timer.

If you wish to read out the time memory using the rotary control, you must fi rst halt the Time2 timer by pressing the ESC button.

Application: This timer would be used typically to record

the pure gliding times between power pha-ses, in addition to the motor run times.

Pressing CLEAR at the basic display resets stopped timers.

Note:Please note: if you have programmed the “Auto ti-mer reset” function in the »Base setup model« menu (see page 64) to “yes”, then these timers are reset when you switch the transmitter on.

“Motor” column

(see left-hand page if suppressed)

• “yes” The motor connected to receiver output 1 is controlled by the C1 stick (throttle / brake stick).

The brake system set up in the »Wing mi-xers« menu is switched off:

B R A K E S E T T I N G S

��

off

• “no” The motor connected to receiver output 1 is de-coupled from the C1 stick (throttle / bra-ke stick), and is automatically kept at its OFF position as determined by the “Throttle min. forward / back” setting.

The brake system set up in the »Wing mi-xers« menu is switched on, and is cont-rolled by the C1 stick.

AILE FLAP FL2

Crow 0% 0%Diff. reduct. 0% 0% 0% Elevat. curve

��

0%

=>

B R A K E S E T T I N G S

Note:The range of set-up options varies accor-ding to the number of wing servos selec-ted in the “Aileron / fl ap” line of the »Model type« menu.

“Switch time” column

When you switch between fl ight phases, it is advisab-le to program a “soft” transition INTO (!) the next pha-se; this is done by entering a transition time in this column; the range available is 0 to 9.9 seconds. The mx-24s also allows you to set different transition ti-mes for switching from, say, Phase 1 to Phase 3, and from Phase 3 to Phase 1.After a brief press on the rotary control you can select a transition time within the range 0 to 9.9 seconds in the highlighted value fi eld.(Pressing CLEAR = 0.0 sec)

Example:

Phase 1Phase 2 3.0sPhase 3 5.0sPhase 4

SEL

�

Normal 4.0sLaunch

0.1s

�� SEL

-Landing

++

SELName Fl.ph.Tim. Sw. time

The set transition time from any other phase into Pha-se 1 “normal” is 4.0 seconds, but the transition time is 5.0 seconds if you switch from, say, Phase 1 to Pha-se 3.

Unequal transition times, as shown in our examp-le, can be useful when switching between widely dif-fering fl ight phases, such as between aerobatics and normal fl ight.

Note:The “transition time” set here applies uniformly to all fl ight phase specifi c settings, and also to all mixers activated in the »Wing mixers« menu; see page 110. This avoids abrupt changes between phase-specifi c mixers. However, if you wish individual servos to be switched without delay, simply defi ne them accordin-gly in the »Non-delayed channels« menu; see page 105.

102

Phase settings

Setting up fl ight phases

AutorotPhase 1 0.1sPhase 2 0.1s -Phase 3

SELSEL

�Autorot 0.1sThermik

0.1s

�� SEL

-

-–�

Name Fl.ph.Tim. Sw. time

The mx-24s enables you to program up to seven groups of settings plus the auto-rotation fl ight phase within any one model helicopter memory. Auto-rotati-on is set up in the »Base setup model« menu. The settings typically differ from each other in order to ca-ter for different stages of a fl ight; these grouped set-tings are termed fl ight phases, and are programmed in the corresponding menus.

Setting up fl ight phasesWhen setting up fl ight phases for model helicopters you start in this menu point, where individual phases are assigned names, and transition times can be set to provide a smooth transition from one phase into the next. In practice we have certainly found that tran-sition times longer than the default 0.1 second are desirable, but the optimum setting varies according to your model and its set-up. You can assign names and transition times to multiple phases at this stage even if you don’t intend to make use of them at pre-sent, because you do not decide which of the “occu-pied” phases will actually be activated until you move to the »Phase assignment« menu, as described on page 104.The right-hand “Status” column shows whether swit-ches have already been assigned to the phases 1 … 7, and what the current status of the switch is:

Symbol Meaning– No switch assigned+ Phase can be called up by switch

�Indicates the currently active phase number

Note:A useful aid when programming different fl ight phases is the “Copy fl ight phase” option, which you will fi nd in the »Copy / Erase« menu. The fi rst step is to estab-lish the parameters for a particular fl ight phase; you then copy these settings into the next fl ight phase, where they can be modifi ed to meet the requirements of the new stage of fl ight.

“Name” column

The fi rst line, and therefore the fl ight phase with top priority, is reserved for auto-rotation; see the »Base setup model” menu. For this reason the name of the phase cannot be changed.Press the rotary control and select the most suitab-le phase name for phases 1 to 7 (if required for your particular model) from the on-screen list. In addition to these standard names you can defi ne up to ten of your own phase names in the »General basic set-tings« menu (see page 154).The sequence of phases 1 to 7 is of no signifi cance; you do not even have to make the numbers concur-rent. However, you should always start with “Phase 1”, as this is the “Normal phase”, which is always ac-tive if:

• no phase switch has been programmed in the »Phase assignment« menu, and

• no phase has been assigned to particular switch combinations.

The phase name “normal” would therefore be a sen-sible choice for “Phase 1”. The names themselves have absolutely no technical signifi cance in terms of programming; their only purpose is to help you to identify them in the course of further programming, and to know which fl ight phase is switched on at any one time. For this reason the names are shown in all the fl ight phase specifi c menus, and are also included in the transmitter’s basic display.

“Flight phase timer” column

In addition to the standard timers in the basic screen display, further timers are available which can be set up in the »Flight phase timers« menu (see page 108).

Timer select list:Clk 1, Clk 2, Clk 3, Lap, Time1, Time2.The fl ight phase timers “Clk 1 … 3” and “Time1” and “Time2” only run in the fl ight phase to which they have been assigned in this menu. In other fl ight pha-ses they are stopped (and suppressed), and the start / stop switches assigned to them have no effect.In contrast, the lap-counter continues to run once started, even if you switch to a different fl ight pha-se, although it can be stopped from any fl ight phase using the ESC button.Obviously you can record lap times with “Lap” using a switch (SW), but the meaning of the two timers “Time1” and “Time2” is as follows:

Time1 This timer only records times for which a switch, control switch or logical switch as-signed in the “Lap timer / timer” line of the »Flight phase timers« menu is “closed” (see page 108). The basic display shows the num-ber of times the switch has been operated. This counter fi eld appears highlighted when the switch for the Time1 timer is “open”, i. e. when the timer is stopped:

S t a r l e t 5 0#04H-J.Sandbrunner

9.5V 2:40h C620 0 0 0

Stop watchFlight timTime1

«Aerobat»25.8s

0 000 00::

09

2:40h SPCM20

If desired, the rotary control can then be used to read out the sequence of recorded times.

102 Program description: Flight phases

103103Program description: Flight phases

Application: Typically for recording phases of fl ight with

increased motor speed, assuming that the same switch is used to move between pha-ses.

Time2 “Time2” records both the “Off” and the “On” ti-mes of the associated switch, i. e. the timer restarts every time the switch is operated, and the counter is incremented by “1”.

You can stop any time count without opera-ting the switch itself by pressing the ESC but-ton. Operating the switch in turn increases the counter by 1, and restarts the Time2 timer.

If you wish to read out the time memory using the rotary control, you must fi rst halt the Time2 timer by pressing the ESC button.

Application: This timer would be used typically to record

the time required to complete fl ight tasks which follow immediately after one another.

Pressing CLEAR at the basic display resets stopped timers.

Note:Please note: if you have programmed the “Auto ti-mer reset” function in the »Base setup model« menu (see page 64) to “yes”, then these timers are reset when you switch the transmitter on.

“Switch time” column

When you switch between fl ight phases, it is advisab-le to program a “soft” transition INTO (!) the next pha-se; this is done by entering a transition time in this column; the range available is 0 to 9.9 seconds. The mx-24s also allows you to set different transition ti-mes for switching from any of phases 1 … 7 to, say, phase 3, than for into Phase 1.However, for safety reasons there is ALWAYS zero delay when switching into the auto-rotation fl ight pha-

se. The arrow “�” in the “Transition time” column in-dicates that a delay time can be selected OUT OF (!) auto-rotation INTO (!) another phase.After a brief press on the rotary control you can select a transition time within the range 0 to 9.9 seconds in the highlighted value fi eld.(Pressing CLEAR = 0.0 s.)

Example:

AutorotPhase 1 3.0sPhase 2 1.0sPhase 3

SEL

�

Autorot 2.0sNormal

0.1s

�� SEL

-Aerobat

++

SEL

–�

Name Fl.ph.Tim. Sw. time

“Autorot”: the set transition time from this phase into any other phase is 2.0 seconds. In the reverse direction the transition time is always 0.0 seconds.

“Phase 1”: the transition time into this phase from any of the phases 2 … 7 is 3.0 seconds, i. e. a smooth transition.

“Phase2”: the transition time into this phase from any of the phases 1 or 3 … 7 is 1.0 se-conds.

Unequal transition times, as shown in our examp-le, can be useful when switching between widely dif-fering fl ight phases, such as between aerobatics and normal fl ight.

Note:The “transition time” set here applies uniformly to all fl ight phase specifi c settings, and also to all mi-xers activated in the »Helicopter mixers« menu; see page 122. This avoids abrupt changes between pha-se-specifi c mixers. However, if you wish individu-al servos to be switched without delay, simply defi -ne them accordingly in the »Non-delayed channels« menu; see page 105.

104 Program description: Flight phases

Phase assignment

Setting up fl ight phases

P H A S E A S S I G N M E N T

p r i o rA B C D E F

<1 > SEL

combi

The previous menu – »Phase settings« – described the process separately for helicopters and fi xed-wing models. In that menu you have already defi ned na-mes for the fl ight phases. In this menu, which is iden-tical for both model types, you now have to determi-ne the switch or switch combinations which you wish to use to call up each fl ight phase. There is one ex-ception to this rule in the Helicopter menu: you must set one of the two auto-rotation switches in the »Base setup model« menu.

Please note the following priorities:• The auto-rotation phase (Helicopter mode only) al-

ways (!) has precedence, regardless of the switch settings of the other phases. As soon as the auto-rotation switch is operated, this display is superim-posed on the screen:

P H A S E A S S I G N M E N T

p r i o rA B C D E F

<1 > SEL

combi

• Phase switch “A” has priority over all subsequent switch settings “B” to “F”.

• Phase switch “B” has priority over all subsequent switch settings “C” to “F”.

For this reason you should only use switch “A” or switch “B” if you wish to change from any other fl ight phase – apart from auto-rotation in the case of a he-licopter – directly into the phase which is assigned to this switch.

Programming the fl ight phase switches:

The “normal” switches, the software control switches and also the logical switches are assigned in the usu-al way. The sequence of assigning them is unimpor-tant; you simply have to ensure that you assign the “right” switches for your own purposes. In the Helicop-ter program it is essential to check that you do not ac-cidentally assign the auto-rotation switch (set in the »Base setup model« menu) a second time in this menu.

Example: fi xed-wing model for four phases with phase priority

A B C D E F<1 >

SEL2 3 Normal1

P H A S E A S S I G N M E N T

p r i o r combi

Assign the switches using the rotary control, then move to the right-hand SEL fi eld and assign a phase name, as defi ned in the »Phase settings« menu, to each switch position or combination of switch positi-ons, e.g. “1 Normal”, “2 Launch”, “3 Distance”, “4 Lan-ding”.It makes sense to assign the closed (“I”) priority switch “A” to the phase into which you wish to switch directly, regardless of the switch positions “C” … “F”, e. g. into the “Launch” phase, if the same switch is used to turn an electric motor on, or into the “normal” phase … in an emergency, for example. Select the re-maining phases for the open “A” and / or “B” switch (“ ”) and the switch positions “C” … “F”, in whatever arrangement you like – see right-hand table.Theoretically you could assign a fi fth fl ight phase (in the »Phase settings« menu) to the state in which all three individual switches in our example are open. However, our example assumes the use of just four

fl ight phases, so you can leave the default phase name “1 Normal” for this basic switch setting.

Example::

Phase switch & socket Phase number&

phase nameAA BB CC DD EE FF

11 22 33

I o. I o. I 2 Launch

1 Normal

I 3 Distance

I 4 Landing

I I Not in use, i. e. “1 normal” by default

In this example the three two-position switches SW 1, 2 and 3 have been assigned as phase switches. As an alternative to the use of two individual swit-ches (e. g. SW 2 and 3) you could assign one of the two three-position switches (SW 5 + 6 or SW 9 + 10). If you are a frequent user of fl ight phases, this type of arrangement is preferable to individual switches, as it is easier to remember the switch assignments. If you decide to use a three-position phase switch, please note that it should always be assig-ned starting from its centre position.You are now in a position to make the required adjust-ments in all the fl ight phase specifi c menus.

Tips:• You may originally have named more phases than

the number for which you have set up switches, but this is not really a problem, as you can call up the switch assignment process again at any time and revise the arrangement. However, you can also assign names to additional phases at any time, and then assign switches to them.

Autorot

105Program description: Flight phases

• Please check the switch assignments carefully; ensure in particular that you have not already as-signed a particular switch to another function acci-dentally.

Important note:The model settings you entered before you assi-gned the phase switches are now stored in the “1 Normal” fl ight phase, i. e. all fl ight phase spe-cifi c menus are reset to the default values in the other fl ight phases.You can replace these default settings with the data from the “normal” fl ight phase, which you have, of course, already checked and correc-ted by test-fl ying. This is accomplished using the “Copy fl ight phase” command in the »Copy / Era-se« menu; the data can then be modifi ed in the new fl ight phases as required. This avoids the ne-cessity of programming each fl ight phase “from the ground up”.

N O N D E L A Y E D C H A N N E L S

non-delayednormal

1 3 5 7 9 1112

«Normal »

2 4 6 8 10

In the »Phase settings« menu you have (presumab-ly) set up transition times for the shift from one fl ight phase to another. In this menu you can switch the de-lay off again for particular channels, e. g. to activate or disable motor-cut with electric models, heading lock for helicopter gyros etc..Use the rotary control to move the “�” symbol to the corresponding channel, then press the rotary control. The switch symbol changes from “normal” to “non-delayed” , and vice versa.

1 3 5 7 9 1112

«Normal »

2 4 6 8 10

N O N D E L A Y E D C H A N N E L S

non-delayednormal

Non-delayed chan

Channel-specifi c fl ight phase delay

Phase trim F3B

Flight phase specifi c wing fl ap settings

NormalLaunch 0%Landing 0%

�

«Normal » ELEV FL2FLAPAI

0%0% 0% 0%0% 0% 0%0% 0% 0%

This menu provides a phase specifi c trim setting fa-cility for a minimum of just ELEV, and a maximum of ELEV, AI, FLAP and FL2, i. e. up to four control func-tions, according to the settings entered in the “Ai-lerons / fl aps” line of the »Model type« menu (see page 70).“ELEV” column In this column you can set an elevator

trim value which is to be stored separa-tely for each fl ight phase.

“�AI�”, “FLAP”, “FL2” column The values in these columns are iden-

tical to those in the “Fl.pos” (fl ap posi-tion) line of the “Multi-fl ap menu” within the »Wing mixers« menu. For this re-ason any changes always affect the other menu immediately.

The position of the fl ight phase switches, which were earlier defi ned in the »Phase assignment« menu (see left-hand page), determines which line is selec-ted and marked with an asterisk (*) at the left-hand end. At the same time the name of the corresponding fl ight phase is superimposed in the bottom left-hand corner of the screen. You can only enter settings for the currently active fl ight phase.Select the appropriate column using the rotary cont-rol, press the rotary control briefl y, then use the rota-ry control or (if applicable) one of the two INC / DEC buttons to set the required values independently of each other, within the range -125% to +125% (pres-sing CLEAR = 0%).

106

Timers (general)

Timers in the basic display

As standard the basic transmitter display contains four timers. In addition to the transmitter operating time and the model operating time on the left-hand side of the screen you will fi nd an “upper” and a “cen-tre” timer on the right-hand side:

Model name#01H-J.Sandbrunner

10.2V 0:30h C620 0 0 0

Stop watchFlight tim

0 000 00::0:30h SPCM20

An additional timer display can be programmed, de-pending on your settings in the two menus »Flight phase timers« (see page 108) and »Phase set-tings« (see pages 100 / 102). This optional fl ight pha-se timer appears above the GRAUPNER/JR logo or the fl ight phase name:

Model name#01H-J.Sandbrunner

10.2V 0:30h C620 0 0 0

Stop watchFlight timClk 1

«Dist. »

0 000 00::

0.0s

0:30h SPCM20

To set the “upper” and “centre” timers hold the rotary control pressed in and select the appropriate line of the display:

Model timeBatt. time

Stop watchFlight tim

CLR�

2 : 41h5 : 03h

0:00 0s0:00 0s

Timer Alarm

Top :Centr:

“Model time”

This timer displays the total recorded time for the cur-rently active model memory. If you wish, you can as-sign a switch on the right-hand side of the screen, in

Program description: Timers

which case the switch is used to record the time auto-matically: you switch the “Model time” timer on and off when needed. A brief press on the rotary control with the CLR fi eld highlighted resets the display to “0:00h”.

“Battery time”

This operating hours timer records the total time that the transmitter has been switched on since the last time the battery was charged; it is a useful aid in mo-nitoring the state of the transmitter battery. A switch cannot be assigned to this function.This timer is automatically reset to “0:00h” when the transmitter detects that the voltage of the battery is si-gnifi cantly higher than the last time it was switched on, e. g. as a result of a charge process or the instal-lation of a replacement battery.Highlight the CLR fi eld, then a short press on the ro-tary control resets the display to “0:00h”.

“Top” and “Centr”

These two timers (count-up or count-down) are loca-ted in the top right-hand corner of the basic display (see the top two screen-shots on the left-hand side of the page). As an option they can be assigned a diffe-rent name; their function and mode of operation vari-es according to the name you give them.Select the “Top” or “Centr” line:

1:30 90s

AlarmSEL SEL SEL�

�

3 : 33h5 : 55h

Timer0:00

SEL

Model timeBatt. time

Stop watchFlight tim

Top :Centr:

Use the rotary control to activate the left-hand SEL fi eld, and after a brief press on the rotary control se-lect the desired timer function in the highlighted fi eld. Its name is then superimposed in the basic display.

“Stop watch” and “Motor run”

Both these timer variants can be started and stop-ped using any of the available switches. To assign a switch, move to the switch symbol fi eld at the bottom edge of the screen, and carry out the assignment as described on page 32.After you have stopped the timer, pressing CLEAR at the basic display resets it to the programmed starting value; see below in the sections entitled “Alarm” and “Timer”.

“Flight time”

The purpose of this timer is to record the fl ight time, and it can be started using an assigned switch. With the switch open it can be stopped again by pressing ESC at the basic display; press CLEAR to reset it to the starting value once stopped. If you wish to assign a control switch to this timer, you must fi rst defi ne it in the »Control switch« menu, and determine the swit-ching point along the travel of the transmitter control. For example, this might be the start signal when an electric motor is switched on; alternatively you could use the throttle limiter in the case of a model helicop-ter.

“Frame time”

The slot timer is primarily intended for competition pi-lots, to whom a time “slot” is often assigned within which a particular task has to be completed. The ti-mer is started in exactly the same manner as the fl ight timer, but it can only be stopped by pressing the ESC button with the rotary control pressed in, when the timer switch itself is in the OFF position.

Note:Note that the timer switches are also active during the programming procedure.

The “upper” and “centre” timers can be programmed as count-up or count-down timers, regardless of the function name you assign to them.

107Program description: Timers

Switching between “count-up” and “count-down”

Stopwatch mode (count-up timer)If you assign a switch to any of the timers, and then program it to start running at the initial value “0:00”, it will count “up” until max. 999 min. and 59 sec., at which point it will start again at 0:00.

“Timer” (count-down timer)Use the left-hand SEL fi eld in the “Timer” column to set a start time within the range 0 to 180 minutes, and use the right-hand SEL fi eld to set a start time bet-ween 0 and 59 seconds.(Pressing CLEAR = “0” or “00”.)

Procedure:1. Select the SEL fi eld using the rotary control,

2. Brief press on the rotary control,

3. Set the pre-set time in the highlighted min. / sec. fi eld using the rotary control (not pressed in),

4. A brief press on the rotary control concludes the process.

When the assigned switch is operated, the timer starts from this pre-set initial value and counts back-wards (“timer function”). If necessary, pressing CLEAR in the basic display resets the timer to the starting time. When the pre-set time has elapsed, the timer does not stop; instead it continues running so that you can read off the over-run, i. e. the time elapsed after zero.Count-down timers are identifi ed in the basic display by a fl ashing colon (:) between the minutes and the seconds fi elds.

Model name#01H-J.Sandbrunner

10.2V 0:30h C620 0 0 0

Stop watchFlight tim

3112

112:

:::0:30h SPCM20

“Alarm” timer

In the “Alarm” column you can defi ne a time within the range 5 to 90 seconds in 5-second increments. At the set time before zero you will hear an audible signal, eliminating the need for the pilot constantly to check the screen.(Pressing CLEAR = 0 s.)

Audible signal sequence: 90 sec. before zero: every 10 seconds 30 sec. before zero: triple tone 20 sec. before zero: double tone 10 sec. before zero: every second 5 sec. before zero: every second, at higher fre-

quency zero: long tonePress CLEAR with the timer stopped to reset the “Ti-mer”.

Notes:• An example of “Operating the timer via the C1

stick” can be found on page 170.• If you alter the function of a timer, the new mode

only becomes active when you stop the timer and reset it by pressing CLEAR.

• If you have set up multiple flight phases, the ap-propriate flight phase name appears on the screen in place of the GRAUPNER/JR logo.

• A “Flight phase timer” assigned to a flight pha-se in the »Phase settings« menu appears in the vacant line above the GRAUPNER/JR logo. For more details of this please read the section on the follow ing pages describing the »Flight phase ti-mers« menu.

Resetting stopped timers

Provided that you have already stopped the timers, pressing the CLEAR button in the basic display re-sets them to their starting value.

Note:If the “Auto timer reset” function in the »Base setup model« is set to “yes”, then all timers (except the mo-del time and battery time) are automatically reset to the appropriate starting value when the transmitter is switched on.

Typical application:The “stop watch” and “flight timer” are both to be star-ted simultaneously using the C1 stick as soon as the user-defined switching point is exceeded.

In the »Control switches« menu (see page 94) the two control switches “G1” and “G2” are already pre-configured, with switching points at -75% for “G1” and +75% for “G2”. Simply move the C1 stick to the positi-on at which the timers are to be switched off.

“Top: stop watch” and “Centre: fl ight timer”.

Activate the switch assignment point in the “Upper” line, then move the C1 stick beyond the switching point in the direction of switch “on”. On the right of the screen you will now see “G1” or “G2”, depending on the direction of the movement. Move the C1 stick back to the starting point, and repeat the assignment in the “Centre” line:

0s

AlarmSEL SEL SEL�

�

3 : 43h6 : 05h

Timer0:00

SEL

0:00 G1G1

Model timeBatt. time

Stop watchFlight tim

Top :Centr:

The stopwatch will now stop when the stick is below the switching point, and resume running above the switching point. In contrast, the flight timer, which also started running when the set switching point was ex-ceeded, can only be stopped by pressing the ESC button. It can then be reset to the starting value by pressing CLEAR.

108108 Program description: Timers

FL. phase timers

Selecting and setting

Timer 1Timer 2Timer 3 0:00Lap time/Tim tab

Timer AlarmSELSEL SEL�

�

0s0:00 0s0:00 0s

In the »Phase assignment« menu (see page 104) we have already explained how one of these timers, together with the “lap counter” or “Time1” or “Time2”, is assigned to a fl ight phase. The characteristics of these timers were also described in the same sec-tion. The additional timer selected for a specifi c fl ight phase is then included in the basic display above the GRAUPNER/JR logo or the name of the fl ight phase.In this menu you can program “Clk 1 … 3” as stop-watches, i. e. count-up timers, or as timers or alarm ti-mers, i. e. count-down timers, and assign any switch you like to the timer – as with the other timer variants.The fl ight phase timers “Clk 1 … 3” and “Time1” and “Time2” only operate in the fl ight phase to which they are assigned. In the basic display they are also super-imposed accordingly. In other fl ight phases they are stopped (and suppressed), and the assigned start / stop switch has no effect.In contrast, the lap counter, once started, continues running even if you switch fl ight phases (see below), although it can be stopped from any fl ight phase by pressing the ESC button.

Clk 1, 2 und 3

These timers are started and stopped by means of a switch, control switch or logical switch. To set one up, use the rotary control to select the switch symbol on the right, then set the desired switch after a brief press on the rotary control. Once again, assigning a control switch offers you the opportunity to opera-te the timer using a stick or other proportional trans-mitter control. The switching point along the travel of

the transmitter control is determined in the »Control switches« menu (see page 94).Please note that the timer switches are also active in programming mode.

Switching between “count-up” and “count-down” mode

Stopwatch mode (count-up timer)In this mode the timer starts at the initial value “0:00” (min:sec) when you operate the assigned switch. If it reaches the maximum time of 999 min. and 59 sec., it will re-start at 0:00.

“Timer” (count-down timer)If you activate the appropriate SEL fi elds below “Ti-mer” using the rotary control in the left-hand highligh-ted fi eld, and enter a time in minutes (maximum 180 minutes), and / or in the right-hand fi eld a time in se-conds (maximum 59 seconds), then the timers run backwards (“Timer” function) starting from this initi-al value when you operate the assigned switch. When the pre-set time has elapsed, the timer does not stop; instead it continues running so that you can read off the over-run, i. e. the time elapsed after zero.Pressing CLEAR resets the input values in the cur-rently active fi eld to zero.Count-down timers are identifi ed in the basic display by a fl ashing colon (:) between the minutes and the seconds fi elds.

“Alarm” timer

In the “Alarm” column you can defi ne a time within the range 5 to 90 seconds in 5-second increments. At the set time before zero you will hear an audible signal, eliminating the need for the pilot constantly to check the screen. The sequence of beeps is stated on the previous page.(Pressing CLEAR = 0 sec.)

Note:If you alter the function of a timer, the new mode only becomes active when you stop the timer and press CLEAR to reset it.

Like the two standard timers above it, this third ti-mer is reset to the starting value of “0:00” or the Timer start value when you press the CLEAR button, simul-taneously in all fl ight phases, even if it has not been stopped separately in the other fl ight phases.

Typical display:

S o a r m a s t e r#05H-J.Sandbrunner

9.5V 2:30h C620 0 0 0

Stop watchFlight timClk 1

«Normal »1 35

1 3512 23

:::

0:50h SPCM20

In this case “Clk 1” was assigned to the “normal” fl ight phase in the »Phase assignment« menu (see page 104).

Lap time / time tables

Only one switch has to be set in the “Lap time / time tables” line. All the other softkey functions are sup-pressed. We suggest that you select the momentary switch SW 8 at this point: every time you press it, the lap count is incremented, and at the same time the time elapsed during this lap is automatically stopped and recorded. The momentary switch simultaneously starts the stopwatch for the next lap. The screen dis-plays lap times up to max. 59.9 seconds in 1/10 se-cond increments; above this in min:sec.“Time1” and “Time2” operate in the same manner; for more details please read the section describing the »Phase settings« menu point.At the end of the fl ight, press the ESC button at the basic display in order to stop the timer and read out the data.

109109Program description: Timers

The basic display shows the lap count and / or the number of times the switch was pressed in highligh-ted form. The rotary control can now be used to select each lap and each operation of the switch, and read off the associated times.Pressing the CLEAR button resets the timer to “00” and erases the stored times, but only if you previously stopped the timers.

Notes:• If you have selected a normal switch to operate

the lap counter, please note that this switch must be set to “OFF” before you press the ESC button.

• If you forget to switch off the lap counter in a pha-se which is not currently active, simply press the ESC button.

S o a r m a s t e r#05 0:52h SPCM20H-J.Sandbrunner

9.5V 2:32h C620 0 0 0

Stop watchFlight timLap

«Aerobat6.4s:

0 002 23::

13»

The upper timer is intended to work as a stopwatch. It starts at “0:00” (min:sec), and is started and stopped again using the assigned switch.The centre timer, bearing the name “Flight time”, acts as an alarm timer (fl ashing colon). This timer can be started using any switch, and stopped again by pres-sing the ESC button.The third timer – “Lap counter” – was assigned to the “Aerobat” fl ight phase in the »Phase assignment« menu. In this example the model is on its 13th lap, which has lasted 6.4 seconds thus far.

110

What is a mixer?Basic function

Wing mixers

Setting up the wing fl ap system

Program description: Mixers

In many models it is often desirable to use a mixer to couple various control systems, e. g. to link the aile-rons and rudder, or inter-connect two servos where two control surfaces are actuated by separate servos. In all these cases the signal which fl ows directly from a transmitter stick to the associated servo (the “out-put” – i. e. at the control function input: see sketch) is “bled off” at a particular point, and the derived signal is then processed in a defi ned way so that it affects another receiver output.

Example: controlling two elevator servos from the elevator stick:

The mx-24s transmitter software contains a lar-ge number of pre-programmed coupling functions as standard, which are designed to mix together two (or more) control channels. In our initial example the mi-xer required is supplied “ready-made”, and just has to be activated in the software by accessing the “Tail” line of the »Model type« menu, where you would se-lect “2 EL Sv 3+8”.In addition to these pre-programmed mixers the soft-ware also includes eight freely programmable line-ar mixers, four curve mixers and four dual mixers (see below) in the fi xed-wing and helicopter programs, all of which can be used in each of the forty model me-mories.For more information please refer to the general no-tes on “free mixers” in this manual, in the section star-ting on page 134.

3 3

8

Ser

vo4,

8V

C57

7B

est.-

Nr.

4101

Ser

vo4,

8V

C57

7B

est.-

Nr.

4101

Transmitter control

Control function input

Control channel (receiver output)

Mixer

Servo 1

Servo 2

W I N G M I X E R SMulti-flap menuBrake settingsAileronFlaps

«Normal »��

=>=>

2–>4 rudder 0%6–>3 elevator 0% 0%

The sub-menus and options available in the fi xed-wing menu structure vary solely according to the number of aileron and fl ap servos which you have en-tered in the »Model type« menu (see page 70), i. e. the list only contains those set-up options which are possible for your model confi guration. This helps to keep the menu easy to understand, and also avoids potential programming errors.For example, if you set “2 AIL” (without fl aps), the dis-play changes from that shown above to this one:

«Normal »��

Brake settings

AileronElevator

=>

2–>4 rudder 0%3–>5 aileron 0% 0%

Aileron differential 0%

W I N G M I X E R S

Apart from the options grouped together under “Bra-ke settings”, all the options can be programmed se-parately for each fl ight phase. If you have set up mul-tiple fl ight phases in the »Phase settings« (see page 100) and »Phase assignment« (see page 104) me-nus, and have assigned names to them, the name of the current fl ight phase will be displayed at the bottom of the screen, e.g. “normal”.

Tips:• The transmitter control for the airbrake mixers can

be re-programmed in the »Model type« menu (see page 70) from channel 1 to channel 7, 8 or 9. The offset can also be determined at the same point.

• Note that a transmitter control assigned to in-

put 7 in the »Transmitter control adjust« menu will be de-coupled by the software if two cam-ber-changing fl aps are defi ned; this is inten-ded to eliminate the danger of errors and mal-functions.

The same applies to inputs 7 and 10 if you se-lect “2 AIL 4 FL”.

• If you wish to set up a Butterfl y (Crow) braking system, with the ailerons raised and the fl aps (if present) lowered, move to the “Brake settings” sub-menu and enter the appropriate settings in the “Crow” line.

• If you wish to use the C1 stick to control both an electric motor and a Butterfl y (Crow) system, you should use the facilities provided in the »Phase settings« menu; see the example on page 167.

• We also suggest that you use the opportuni-ty to set up switch times for a “smooth” change-over from one fl ight phase to the next. This option is available in the »Phase settings« menu (see page 100).

• If your model features multiple wing fl aps and a “Crow / Butterfl y system” (see below), but without (conventional) airbrakes, then Output 1, which is generally free, can be separated from cont-rol function 1 (throttle / brake stick) in the »MIX only channel« menu (see page 142), and used for another purpose with the help of a “free mixer” (see page 135).

• If you simply select “2AIL” in the »Model type« menu (see page 70), the fl ight phase specifi c fl ap function for the ailerons can be obtained by ente-ring a suitable offset for Input 5 in the »Transmit-ter control adjust« menu (see page 78).

• We recommend that you make use of the Servo Display facility, where you can directly check the results of your settings. This is available from virtu-ally any menu position by pressing the HELP but-ton with the rotary control pressed in.

111Program description: Mixers

Basic programming procedure:1. Hold the rotary control pressed in, and select the

mixer line.

Depending on the mixer, the bottom line of the screen now displays either the symbol for “next page” (�), or SEL or SYM and ASY (for setting mixer ratios separately for each side of centre), as well as .

2. Select one of these fi elds using the rotary control.

3. Press the rotary control briefl y.

Depending on the line you have selected, you will now either move to the next page, where the pro-cedure is the same, or the highlighted fi eld will move to the selected line in which you can set the desired values.

4. Use the rotary control to set the degree of differen-tial or the mixer ratio, or assign the switch.

Either negative or positive parameter values can be set; this allows you to reverse the direction of servo rotation if necessary, i. e. if one of the cont-rol surfaces operates in the wrong “sense”.

(Pressing CLEAR = resets to default value.)

5. Press the rotary control briefl y to leave the menu.

Assigning switches

As an option, the wing mixers “Aileron 2 � 4 rudder”, “Elevator 3 � 6 fl ap” and “Flap 6 � 3 elevator” can be assigned a switch or an expanded switch, so that they can be turned on and off in fl ight. If you call up this line you will see the (by now) familiar switch sym-bol .

Transition delay

The delay time, or transition time, which is set in the »Phase assignment« menu (see page 104) separa-tely for each fl ight phase, is designed to avoid abrupt changes of wing fl ap settings when you switch bet-ween the fl ight phases.

Mixer neutral point (offset)

By default the neutral point (“offset”) of all the mixers in the “Brake settings” sub-menu is the position of the transmitter control at which the airbrakes are retrac-ted.The input (1, 7, 8 or 9) and the offset are determined in the “Brake” line of the »Model type« menu; see page 70. If you select “Input 1”, please note that you should fi rst enter your preferred “Throttle min.” posi-tion as “forward / back” in the “Motor” line before you determine the offset point.

Note:If the offset is not positioned right at the end of the travel of the transmitter control, then the remainder of the travel is a “dead zone”, i. e. the transmitter control no longer has any infl uence on any of the mixers in the “Brake settings” sub-menu. The mixer travel is au-tomatically expanded back to 100%.

The neutral point of all other mixers in the »Wing mi-xers« menu is at the zero position of the transmitter control (control centre), i. e. they have no effect at that point. At full travel the set value is mixed in.

Mixer functionsThe following section discusses the individual opti-ons offered by the »Wing mixers« menu, separately for models with one, two and multiple wing fl aps. Ho-wever, we preface this with a few notes on differential travel for ailerons and fl aps.

Aileron differential

For aerodynamic reasons, the drag generated by the down-going aileron is greater than that produced by the up-going aileron when an aileron command is gi-ven. This differential drag causes a yawing motion around the vertical axis, in the opposite direction to the desired turn. That is why this effect is also known as “adverse yaw”. Power models generally have re-latively short moment arms which negate this effect,

but it is much more pronounced in model gliders with high aspect ratio wings, and usually has to be coun-tered by giving a simultaneous rudder defl ection in the opposite direction to the yaw. However, this in turns causes additional drag and therefore lowers the aircraft’s effi ciency.Electronic differential aileron travel is one answer, but it can only be used if a separate servo is installed for each aileron. Aileron differential reduces the angu-lar travel of the down-going aileron relative to that of the up-going aileron, and this reduces aileron drag and therefore the adverse yaw. The aileron servos are usually installed directly in the wings for this purpose; this arrangement produces shorter mechanical lin-kages, which in turn help to reduce slop, and should ensure reliable, reproducible aileron travels.Mechanical solutions are also possible, but they usu-ally have to be “designed in” when the model is built, and in any case signifi cant mechanical differential tends to create additional slop in the control system. Electronic differential offers several important advan-tages.For example, the degree of differential can be adjus-

ted at any time without affecting the travel of the up-going aileron. In the extreme case it is possible to

0% (Normal)

50% (Differential)

100% (Split)

112 Program description: Mixers

suppress the down-aileron defl ection completely, i. e. only the up-going aileron moves at all, and this arran-gement is sometimes called the “split” setting. Split ai-lerons not only tend to suppress adverse yaw, but can even generate positive yaw, which means that the model yaws slightly in the direction of the turn when an aileron command is given. In the case of large mo-del gliders smooth turns can then be fl own using ai-lerons alone, which is usually by no means the case with other arrangements.The adjustment range of -100% to +100% makes it possible to set the correct direction of differential re-gardless of the direction of rotation of the aileron ser-vos. “0%” corresponds to a normal linkage, i. e. no dif-ferential, while “-100%” or “+100%” represents the “split” function.For aerobatic fl ying low absolute values are required, to ensure that the model rotates exactly along its lon-gitudinal axis when an aileron command is given. Mo-derate values around -50% or +50% are typical for making thermal turns easier to fl y. The split setting (-100%, +100%) is popular with slope fl yers, where ailerons alone are often used for turning the model.

Note:Although negative values can be programmed to re-verse the direction of servo rotation, this is not usually necessary if the correct channels are used.

Camber-changing fl ap differential

In the “�AI�” line of the multi-fl ap menu (see below) you can set the extent to which the fl aps follow the ai-lerons when an aileron command is given; this is en-tered as a percentage value. For this reason fl ap dif-ferential has the same effect as aileron differential, i. e. it reduces the travel of the down-going fl ap when an aileron command is given.The adjustment range of -100% to +100% makes it possible to set the correct direction of differential. A “0%” value corresponds to a normal linkage, i. e. the

servo travel is the same up and down. A setting of “-100%” or “+100%” means that the down-travel of the fl aps is reduced to zero when an aileron command is given, i. e. it creates the “split” set-up.

Note:Negative values are not usually necessary if the cor-rect channels are used.

Model type: “1 AIL”If you enter “1 AIL” in the “Ailerons / fl aps” line of the »Model type« menu (see page 70), the transmitter’s “Wing mixer menu” will look similar to the screen-shot below:

��

Brake settingsAileron

=>2–>4 rudder 0%

W I N G M I X E R S

A brief press on the rotary control from the fi rst line of this page takes you to the following sub-menu …

Brake settings

Note:The “Brake settings” menu is switched “off” if you en-tered “Motor on C1 forward / back” in the »Model type« menu (see page 70), and leave “yes” for the currently active fl ight phase in the “Motor” column of the »Phase settings« menu (see page 100). You may therefore need to switch fl ight phases:

B R A K E S E T T I N G SElevat. curve =>

Since it is impossible to set up a butterfl y (crow) sys-

tem or aileron differential if your model is only fi tted with a single aileron servo, this menu offers no further set-up options apart from a “pointer” to the “Elevat. curve” sub-menu. For this reason we give the rotary control a brief press and immediately move on:

Brake

Input +50%Output 0%

off

OU

TP

UT

-- +

100Elevator

Point ?Curve

If you have the feeling that you will need to set pitch trim compensation when the airbrakes are extended, you can program an automatic elevator mixer at this point.For details on setting up a curve mixer please refer to page 90, where the »Channel 1 curve« mixer is dis-cussed.

Aileron 2 � 4 rudder

SEL��

Brake settingsAileron

=>2–>4 rudder 0%

W I N G M I X E R S

This mixer causes the rudder to “follow” automatically when an aileron command is given.Select the SEL fi eld, and give the rotary control a brief press. You can now set the desired value for this function using the rotary control. The mixer direction must be chosen to ensure that the rudder moves in the same direction as the up-going aileron.If you assign a switch to this function in the right-hand column, you will be able to switch the mixer on and off in fl ight.The available range of values is -150% to +150%,

113Program description: Mixers

while pressing CLEAR resets the value to 0%.This setting can only be carried out symmetrically re-lative to the neutral point of the aileron stick.A value of around 50% is generally an excellent star-ting point.

Model type: “1 AIL 1 FL”If you enter “1 AIL 1 FL” in the “Ailerons / fl aps” line of the »Model type« menu (see page 70), the transmitter’s “Wing mixer menu” will look similar to the screen-shot below:

��

Brake settingsAileron

=>2–>4 rudder 0%

Flaps 6–>3 elevator 0% 0%Elevator 3–>6 flaps 0% 0%

W I N G M I X E R S

A brief press on the rotary control from the fi rst line of this page takes you to the following sub-menu …

Brake settings

Note:The “Brake settings” menu is switched “off” if you en-tered “Motor on C1 forward / back” in the »Model type« menu (see page 70), and leave “yes” for the currently active fl ight phase in the “Motor” column of the »Phase settings« menu (see page 100). You may therefore need to switch fl ight phases:

Crow

FLAP��

B R A K E S E T T I N G S

Elevat. curve =>0%

With the selected model type you can now enter a suitable value in the “Butterfl y” line in order to lower the fl aps when you operate the brake control, which is

generally the C1 stick.To set up this function, fi rst move the brake control to its “brake” end-point, press the rotary control briefl y, then set a suitable value. To obtain an adequate bra-king effect you should lower the fl aps as far as pos-sible, i. e. to the limit set by the mechanical linkage.A brief press on the rotary control takes you from this screen page to the “Elevat. curve” sub-menu:

Brake

Input +50%Output 0%

off

OU

TP

UT

-- +

100Elevator

Point ?Curve

If you have the feeling after the fi rst fl ight that you al-ways needed to use up-elevator to compensate for a pitch trim change when the airbrakes were extended, you can program an automatic elevator mixer at this point.For details on setting up a curve mixer please refer to page 90, where the »Channel 1 curve« mixer is dis-cussed.

Aileron 2 � 4 rudder

SEL��

Brake settingsAileron

=>2–>4 rudder 0%

Flaps 6–>3 elevator 0% 0%Elevator 3–>6 flaps 0% 0%

W I N G M I X E R S

This mixer causes the rudder to “follow” automatically when an aileron command is given.Select the SEL fi eld, and give the rotary control a brief press. You can now set the desired value for this function using the rotary control. The mixer direction must be selected to ensure that the rudder moves in the same direction as the up-going aileron.

If you assign a switch to this function in the right-hand column, you will be able to switch the mixer on and off in fl ight.The available range of values is -150% to +150%, while pressing CLEAR resets the value to 0%.This setting can only be carried out symmetrically re-lative to the neutral point of the aileron stick.A value of around 50% is generally an excellent star-ting point.

Elevator 3 � 6 fl aps

SYM ASY��

Brake settingsAileron

=>2–>4 rudder 0%

Flaps 6–>3 elevator 0% 0%Elevator 3–>6 flaps 0% 0%

W I N G M I X E R S

This mixer causes the fl aps to defl ect when an ele-vator command is given. The mixer direction must be selected to ensure that up-elevator causes a down-fl ap defl ection, and down-elevator causes up-fl ap.Set up in this way, the fl aps support the effect of the elevator, making the model more agile around the la-teral (pitch) axis.Select SYM in order to set symmetrical travels for up- and down-elevator, or ASY for different travels either side of neutral.The available range of values is -150% to +150%, while pressing CLEAR resets the value to 0%.If you assign a switch to this function in the right-hand column, you will be able to switch the mixer on and off in fl ight.The “usual” values for this mixer are in the low two-di-git range.

114 Program description: Mixers

Flaps 6 � 3 elevator

SYM ASY��

Brake settingsAileron

=>2–>4 rudder 0%

Flaps 6–>3 elevator 0% 0%Elevator 3–>6 flaps 0% 0%

W I N G M I X E R S

This mixer is used to set elevator (pitch-trim) com-pensation when a fl ap command is given. It is typical-ly used to adjust the model’s airspeed automatically when the fl aps are lowered.If you have assigned a transmitter control or a switch to Input 6 in the »Transmitter control adjust« menu (see page 78), then it will also affect this mixer.Symmetrical or asymmetrical settings relative to the neutral point of the fl ap control are possible by selec-ting SYM or ASY.The available range of values is -150% to +150%, while pressing CLEAR resets the value to 0%.If you assign a switch to this function in the right-hand column, you will be able to switch the mixer on and off in fl ight.The usual values for this mixer are in the single-digit range.

Model type: “2 AIL”If you enter “2 AIL” in the “Ailerons / fl aps” line of the »Model type« menu (see page 70), the transmitter’s “Wing mixer menu” will look similar to the screen-shot below:

«Normal »��

Brake settings

Aileron

=>

2–>4 rudder 0%3–>5Elevator 0% 0%

Aileron differential 0%

aileron

W I N G M I X E R S

A brief press on the rotary control from the fi rst line of this page takes you to the following sub-menu …

Brake settings

Note:The “Brake settings” menu is switched “off” if you en-tered “Motor on C1 forward / back” in the »Model type« menu (see page 70), and leave “yes” for the currently active fl ight phase in the “Motor” column of the »Phase settings« menu (see page 100). You may therefore need to switch fl ight phases:

AILE��

CrowB R A K E S E T T I N G S

Elevat. curveDiff. reduct.

0%0%

=>

With the selected model type you can now enter sui-table values in the “Crow” and “Differential reduction” lines for the AILE column. These options should be exploited by fi rst moving the “brake” control (see the description of the »Model type« menu on page 70; this is usually the C1 stick) to its “brake” end-point. Now move to the “Butterfl y” line and press the rotary control briefl y: set a value which causes the ailerons to defl ect up as far as possible. However, if you are

using conventional airbrakes as the main brake, the up-defl ection should be much lower.

Note:Check whether the servos strike their end-stops at the extremes of travel; if they do, the stalled servos will draw a very heavy current. You can reliably pre-vent this happening by setting a suitable limit value in the “-Limit+” column of the »Servo adjustment« menu (see page 74).

Now move to the “Diff. reduction” line and set a %-value which is the same as or larger than the (aile-ron) differential which you set one screen “earlier” (or which you are about to set).This suppresses differential aileron travel when the brakes are deployed, and should ensure that you still have adequate aileron response when the ailerons are raised for braking.From the bottom line (“Elev. curve”) of the screen a brief press on the rotary control takes you on to the screen where the “Brake � elevator” mixer is set up.

--7%

OU

TP

UT

-- +

100

1-7%-19%

Brake

InputOutput

off

Elevator

PointCurve

1

If you have the feeling after the fi rst fl ight that you al-ways needed to use up-elevator to compensate for a pitch trim change when the airbrakes were extended, you can program an automatic elevator mixer at this point.For details on setting up a curve mixer please refer to page 90, where the »Channel 1 curve« mixer is dis-cussed.

115Program description: Mixers

Aileron differential

SEL��

Brake settings

Aileron

=>

2–>4 rudder 0%0% 0%

Aileron differential 0%

3–>5Elevator aileron

W I N G M I X E R S

The adjustment range of -100% to +100% makes it possible to set the correct direction of differential re-gardless of the direction of rotation of the aileron ser-vos. “0%” corresponds to a normal linkage, i. e. no dif-ferential, while “-100%” or “+100%” represents the “split” function.

For aerobatic fl ying low absolute values are required, to ensure that the model rotates exactly along its lon-gitudinal axis when an aileron command is given. Mo-derate values around -50% or +50% are typical for making thermal turns easier to fl y. The split setting (-100%, +100%) is popular with slope fl yers, when ai-lerons alone are often used for turning the model.

Note:Although negative values can be programmed to re-verse the direction of servo rotation, this is not usually necessary if the correct channels are used.

0% (Normal)

50% (Differential)

100% (Split)

Aileron 2 � 4 rudder

SEL��

Brake settings

Aileron

=>

2–>4 rudder 0%0% 0%

Aileron differential 0%

3–>5Elevator aileron

W I N G M I X E R S

This mixer causes the rudder to “follow” automatically when an aileron command is given.Select the SEL fi eld, and give the rotary control a brief press. You can now set the desired value for this function using the rotary control. The mixer direction must be selected to ensure that the rudder moves in the same direction as the up-going aileron.If you assign a switch to this function in the right-hand column, the mixer can be switched on and off in fl ight.The available range of values is -150% to +150%, while pressing CLEAR resets the value to 0%.This setting can only be carried out symmetrically re-lative to the neutral point of the aileron stick.A value of around 50% is generally an excellent star-ting point.

Elevator 3 � 5 aileron

SYM ASY��

Brake settings

Aileron

=>

2–>4 rudder 0%0% 0%

Aileron differential 0%

3–>5Elevator aileron

W I N G M I X E R S

This mixer causes both ailerons to defl ect when an elevator command is given.The mixer direction must be selected to ensure that up-elevator causes a down-aileron defl ection, and down-elevator causes up-aileron. Set up in this way, the ailerons support the effect of the elevator, making the model more agile around the lateral (pitch) axis.

Select SYM in order to set symmetrical travels for up- and down-elevator, or ASY for different travels either side of neutral.The available range of values is -150% to +150%, while pressing CLEAR resets the value to 0%.If you assign a switch to this function in the right-hand column, the mixer can be switched on and off in fl ight.The “usual” values for this mixer are in the low two-di-git range.

116116 Program description: Mixers

Model type: “2 AIL 1 / 2 / 4 FL”If you enter “2 AIL 1 FL” in the “Ailerons / fl aps” line of the »Model type« menu (see page 70), the transmitter’s “Wing mixer menu” will look similar to the screen-shot printed below:

0% 0%0%

��

0%

Multi-flap menuBrake settings

AileronFlaps

=>=>

2–>4 rudder6–>3 elevator

Aileron differential

W I N G M I X E R S

If you enter “2 AIL 2 FL” or “2 AIL 4 FL” in the “Ai-lerons / fl aps” line of the »Model type« menu (see page 70), the transmitter’s “Wing mixer menu” will look similar to the screen-shot below:

Multi-flap menuBrake settingsAileronFlaps

«Normal »��

=>=>

2–>4 rudder 0%6–>3 elevator 0% 0%

W I N G M I X E R S

All the available parameters can be adjusted separa-tely for each fl ight phase, regardless of the combinati-on of aileron and fl ap servos you have selected.

Tip:We recommend that you make use of the Servo Dis-play facility, where you can check the results of your settings. This is available from virtually any menu po-sition by pressing the HELP button with the rotary control pressed in.

Before we address the details of this menu we would like to provide a brief explanation of the different ap-pearances of the multi-fl ap menu:

Model type: “2 AIL 1 FL”

If you have connected the servos to the receiver in the order described in the section starting on page 37, and have selected them as shown in the »Model type« menu (see page 70), then the abbreviations “AIL” and “FL” refer to the wing fl aps as shown below:

AILleft

FL FL AILright

Since the options available in the wing mixer menu and its sub-menus vary according to the number of fl ap servos which you have entered in the »Model type« menu (see page 70), the list only contains tho-se set-up options which are possible for your model confi guration.For this reason, if you have pre-selected “2 AIL 1 FL”, both the options for superimposing the aileron func-tion on the fl aps are suppressed, as are all the set-up options in the (right-hand) column “FL2”.

Fl.pos 0% 0%FL 0% 0% +100% +100%

El–>Fl 0% 0% 0% 0%

AILESEL SEL�

�

FLAP

A further difference is that the settings for “Aileron dif-ferential” are not found in the “multi-fl ap menu”, as with “2 AIL 2/4 FL”, but one level higher in the »Wing mixers« menu – see the screen-shot at top left.

Model type: “2 AIL 2 FL”

If you have connected the servos to the receiver in the order described in the section starting on page 37, and have selected them as shown in the »Model type« menu (see page 70), then the abbreviations “AIL” and “FL” refer to the wing fl aps as shown below:

AILleft

FL FLright

AIL

Since the options available in the wing mixer menu and its sub-menus vary according to the number of fl ap servos which you have entered in the »Model type« menu (see page 70), the list only contains tho-se set-up options which are possible for your model confi guration.For this reason, if you have pre-selected “2 AIL 2 FL”, all the set-up options for the second pair of fl aps are suppressed in the (right-hand) column “FL2”.

AI +100% 0%Ail–tr 0% Diff. 0% 0%Fl.pos 0% 0%

FL 0% 0% +100% +100% El–>Fl 0% 0% 0% 0%

AILESEL SEL�

�

+100%

FLAP

117117Program description: Mixers

Model type: “2 AIL 4 FL”

If you have connected the servos to the receiver in the order described in the section starting on page 37, and have selected them as shown in the »Model type« menu (see page 70), then the abbreviations “AIL”, “FL” and “FL2” refer to the wing fl aps as shown below:

AILleft

FLleft

FL2left

FL2right

FLright

AILright

Since the selection of “2 AIL 4 FL” represents the maximum possible number of wing-mounted servos, all the set-up options for all the wing fl aps are now available without restriction in the Wing mixer menu and its sub-menus.

+100% 0% 0%0% 0%

0% 0% 0% 0% 0%

0% +100%+100%0% 0% 0% 0%

SEL SEL SEL��

+100%

FL2

0% +100%+100%0%

0% 0%

AIAil–trDiff.Fl.pos

FLEl–>Fl

AILE FLAP

Models of the Delta / Flying wing type with more than two wing fl aps

If you have selected the “Delta / fl ying wing” tail type, and selected the number of wing fl aps in the “Aile-rons / fl aps” line of the »Model type« menu as sta-ted in the description at that point, then normally the two ailerons will not move when you give an elevator command, and nor will the inner fl aps (FL) and FL2 (if present). The reason for this is that the default mixer input for all wing fl aps is 0%, as can be seen in the “El � Fl” mixer in the multi-fl ap menu shown here:

+100% 0% 0%0% 0%

0% 0% 0% 0% 0%

0% +100%+100%0% 0% 0% 0%

SYM��

+100%

0% +100%+100%0%

0% 0%

ASY SYM ASY SYM ASYFL2AILE FLAP

AIAil–trDiff.Fl.pos

FLEl–>Fl

You must therefore start by defi ning the desired ele-vator effect in the “El � Fl” line. Please note that it is essential to set the correct direction of operation of the elevators.

Note:The “Brake settings” sub-menu (see next double page) is also suitable for setting up the butterfl y (crow) function with deltas and fl ying wing models. However, the fi ne-tuning of the travels of the fl ap pairs AIL, FL and (if present) FL2 should be carried out in such a way that the pitch-trim moments caused by one pair of fl aps compensate for the opposite mo-ments caused by the other pair of fl aps. For examp-le, the “up” effect of ailerons when defl ected up is compensated by a corresponding “down” effect of the camber-changing fl aps when they are lowered.

Multi-fl ap menu

“�Al�” (Aileron � fl ap)

(suppressed if “2 AIL 1 FL” is selected)

+100% 0% 0%0% 0%

0% 0% 0% 0% 0%

0% +100%+100%0% 0% 0% 0%

SEL SEL SEL��

+100%

FL2

0% +100%+100%0%

0% 0%

AIAil–trDiff.Fl.pos

FLEl–>Fl

AILE FLAP

In this line you can set the extent in percentage terms to which the pair of wing fl aps “FLAP”, and – if pre-sent – “FL2”, follow when an aileron command is gi-ven. This value can be entered separately for each fl ight phase. (In the “AILE” column it is also possible to adjust the defl ection of the ailerons.)In all of the (maximum) three columns the parameters can be varied within the range -150% to +150% after the appropriate value fi elds have been activated.Pressing CLEAR resets altered entries to the default values, as shown in the screen-shot above.Please note that fl aps should not follow the (mecha-nical) travel of the ailerons to more than about 50%. It also makes sense to set the travel of the inboard fl aps (FL2) to an even smaller value.

“Ail-tr” (Aileron trim � fl ap)

(suppressed if “2 AIL 1 FL” is selected)

+100% 0% 0%0% 0%

0% 0% 0% 0% 0%

0% +100%+100%0% 0% 0% 0%

SEL SEL SEL��

+100%

0% +100%+100%0%

0% 0% FL2AILE FLAP

AIAil–trDiff.Fl.pos

FLEl–>Fl

In this line you can set the extent in percentage terms

118

makes it possible to set the correct direction of diffe-rential regardless of the direction of rotation of the ai-leron servos.Pressing CLEAR resets differential to the default va-lues.

“Fl.pos” (camber-changing fl ap position)

+100% 0% 0%0% 0%

0% 0% 0% 0% 0%

0% +100%+100%0% 0% 0% 0%

SEL SEL SEL��

+100%

0% +100%+100%0%

0% 0% FL2AILE FLAP

AIAil–trDiff.Fl.pos

FLEl–>Fl

At this point you can set up the camber-changing fl ap positions for all the wing fl aps, separately for each fl ight phase, i. e. you can determine the positi-on which the fl aps take up when you select each fl ight phase. Settings in this line also take effect immediate-ly in the »Phase trim F3B« menu, as both menus are based on the same data sets.The adjustment range of -100% to +100% makes it possible to set the correct direction of travel regard-less of the direction of rotation of the aileron and fl ap servos.

Note:If you use one or multiple transmitter controls in the various fl ight phases, as described in the explanation which follows this section, then these controls also in-terpret the FL positions set at this point as the offset and centre positions. If you are familiar with the fl ight phase specifi c offset shift in the »Transmitter cont-rol adjust« (see page 78) as used in the mc / mx-22(s), please note that this is NOT necessary with the mx-24s.

118 Program description: Mixers

“�Fl�” (Effect of the fl ap control)

In this line you select SYM or ASY in order to deter-mine the extent in percentage terms to which the set-tings of Input 6, carried out in the »Transmitter cont-rol adjust« menu (see page 78), are to affect the fl ap settings of the ailerons and fl aps.

+100% 0% 0%0% 0%

0% 0% 0% 0% 0%

0% +100%+100%0% 0% 0% 0%

SYM��

+100%

0% +100%+100%0%

0% 0%

ASY SYM ASY SYM ASYFL2AILE FLAP

AIAil–trDiff.Fl.pos

FLEl–>Fl

For each pair of wing fl aps it is possible to defi ne a symmetrical or asymmetrical effect. Activate the SYM or ASY fi eld as required. (If you have left the travel settings at +100% in each case in the »Transmit-ter control adjust« menu (see page 78), then values within the range 5 to 20% should generally be suffi -cient at this point.)Please see the note under the heading “Fl.pos” for in-formation on setting offsets.Pressing CLEAR resets altered entries to the stan-dard values of +100% for the two pairs of fl aps, and 0% for the aileron pair.

Note:By default NO transmitter control is assigned to In-put 6. However, you can assign a transmitter control or switch to this input at any time, and thereby set dif-ferent fl ap settings within a fl ight phase; see also ex-ample 2 on page 180.

“El � Fl” (Elevator � fl ap)

This mixer causes the fl aps and ailerons to defl ect when an elevator command is given. The mixer direc-tion must be selected to ensure that up-elevator cau-ses a down-fl ap defl ection, and down-elevator causes

to which the aileron trim is to affect “AILE”, “FLAP” and – if present – “FL2”.The available range of values is -150% to +150%, re-lative to the adjustment range of the trim lever.Pressing CLEAR resets altered entries to the default values, as shown in the screen-shot shown above.

“Diff.” (Differential aileron function)

If “2 AIL 1 FL” is selected, this is found one level hig-her in the »Wing mixers« menu; see the screen-shot at top left on the previous double page.

+100% 0% 0%0% 0%

0% 0% 0% 0% 0%

0% +100%+100%0% 0% 0% 0%

SEL SEL SEL��

+100%

0% +100%+100%0%

0% 0% FL2AILE FLAP

AIAil–trDiff.Fl.pos

FLEl–>Fl

In this line you can set the differential travel of the ai-lerons, and also of the fl aps FLAP and – if present – FL2, assuming that you wish the latter to operate as superimposed ailerons.

0% (Normal)

50% (Differential)

100% (Split)

AIL FL FL2FL2 FL AIL

If you are not clear about the meaning of aileron diffe-rential, please read the explanation at the start of this section on page 111.The available adjustment range of -100% to +100%

119

up-fl ap.

+100% 0% 0%0% 0%

0% 0% 0% 0% 0%

0% +100%+100%0% 0% 0% 0%

SYM��

+100%

0% +100%+100%0%

0% 0%

ASY SYM ASY SYM ASYFL2AILE FLAP

AIAil–trDiff.Fl.pos

FLEl–>Fl

Select SYM in order to set symmetrical travels for up- and down-elevator, or ASY for different travels either side of neutral.The available range of values is -150% to +150%, while pressing CLEAR resets the value to 0%.

Important general note:It is essential to ensure that the control sur-faces and servos do not strike their mechani-cal end-stops (stalled servos) when large travels are set. This is a particular danger with the com-bined functions “�Al�” and “�FL�”. We recom-mend that you make use of the “Travel limit” op-tion which is available in the »Servo adjustment« menu (see page 74).

Brake settingsThe “Brake settings” menu is switched “off” if you en-tered “Motor on C1 forward / back” in the »Model type« menu (see page 70), and leave “yes” for the currently active fl ight phase in the “Motor” column of the »Phase settings« menu (see page 100). You may therefore need to switch fl ight phases.Please note that all the “Brake mixers” described in the following section are global in nature, i. e. they ap-ply equally to all fl ight phases, and cannot be altered for specifi c phases of fl ight. This means that the effect of the brake settings can only be set up optimally to suit one particular fl ight phase.Landing time can be nerve-racking, and to ensu-

119Program description: Mixers

re that you have set the “optimum” fl ight phase when the brake system is activated, the software provides a form of automation. You will fi nd an example of this later, in the section entitled “Using fl ight phases” on page 174.

Crow

AILE FLAP FL2

Crow 0% 0%Diff. reduct. 0% 0% 0% Elevat. curve

��

0%

=>

B R A K E S E T T I N G S

The mixer functions “Brake � AILE, FLAP and – if present – FL2” are actuated by control function 1, 7, 8 or 9, depending on which input you have assigned to the “Brake” function in the »Model type« menu (see page 70).

Note:In the »Model type« menu (see page 70) you should also defi ne the offset, i. e. the direction of operati-on. We suggest that you position the offset at about +90% of stick travel (if the C1 stick is used, this is ge-nerally located at the forward position of the stick). To extend the brakes the stick must therefore be moved back towards the pilot. The remainder of the stick tra-vel of around 10% then has no effect. However, it is not “wasted”, as the control travel is automatically ex-panded to 100% by the software.

Use the select fi elds AILE, FLAP and – if present – FL2 to defi ne the extent and direction to which the corresponding pairs of fl aps are to follow when the airbrake control (control function 1, 7, 8 or 9) is opera-ted. If the model does not feature separate (conventi-onal) airbrakes, leave the corresponding receiver out-put free.The available range of values is -150% to +150%, while pressing CLEAR resets the value to 0%.

a) AILE settings When the model is braked on the landing ap-

proach, both pairs of ailerons should never de-fl ect up by more than about half of their full travel, otherwise there will not be suffi cient aileron throw available to provide roll control on the approach.

AILE

FLAP

FL2

FL2

FLAP

AILE

b) FLAP and FL2 settings When the model is braked on the landing ap-

proach, both pairs of fl aps can be set to defl ect by different amounts, e. g.:

AILE

FLAP

FL2

FL2

FLAP

AILE

AILEFLAP

FL2

FL2

FLAP

AILE

120120 Program description: Mixers

c) Combination of AIL and FL : “Butterfl y” (Crow)

AILE

FLAP

FL2

FL2

FLAP

AILE

In the butterfl y setting (also known as “crow” bra-king) both ailerons defl ect up as already descri-bed, and all the camber-changing fl aps defl ect down as far as possible. This brake setting provi-des glide path control on the landing approach.

Note:When any of the mixer confi gurations (a … c) are de-ployed, and when conventional airbrakes are exten-ded, it is usually necessary to correct the glide angle using the “Elev. curve” mixer described on the right.

“Diff. redukt.” (differential reduction)

0% 0%0% 0% 0%

=>

��

0%

AILE FLAP FL2

CrowDiff. reduct.Elevat. curve

B R A K E S E T T I N G S

Differential travel can be set for all three pairs of wing fl aps, as described earlier in the multi-fl ap menu. However, when an extreme butterfl y (crow) setting is selected, response to aileron commands tends to be serious-ly reduced (see page 114 for an example). To overcome this pro-blem this mixer is used to sup-

press the degree of aileron differential (set in the mul-

ti-fl ap menu) to an increasing extent as the brakes are progressively deployed.A value of 0% means that the “Aileron differential” set at the transmitter remains fully in force. An entry the same as the set %-value of the aileron differenti-al means that the differential is completely eliminated when the butterfl y (crow) function is at maximum tra-vel, i. e. when the fl aps are fully extended. Setting a reduction value greater than the set aileron differenti-al causes “reverse” differential.The adjustment range is +/-150%; pressing CLEAR = 0%.

“Elev. curve” (Brake � elevator)

If the airbrake control – assigned to 1, 7, 8 or 9 in the »Model type« menu (see page 71) – is used to ex-tend the fl aps as already described in the “Brake set-tings” menu, a pitch trim (elevator) correction is gene-rally needed. A brief press of the rotary control takes you on to the following screen:

Brake

Input +50%Output 0%

off

OU

TP

UT

-- +

100Elevator

Point ?Curve

Set-up notes for the Elev. curve (Brake � EL)The offset which you have already set in the »Model type« menu (see page 70) affects this mixer in the following way:The vertical line in the display, which indicates the po-sition of the airbrake control, only moves away from the edge of the graph when the set offset is excee-ded. The airbrake control travel is automatically ex-panded back to 100%, as described in the »Model type« menu.The neutral point of the elevator mixer therefore al-ways remains at the left-hand margin, regardless of

“forward”Brake retracted

“back”Brake extended

the offset you have selected.Now adjust the Elev. curve in the direction of the op-posite end-point to suit the requirements of the mo-del …

--7%

OU

TP

UT

-- +

100

1-7%-19%

Brake

InputOutput

off

Elevator

PointCurve

1

… noting that the method of setting this eight-point curve mixer follows the same principles that apply to the curve mixers described on page 90, relating to the »Channel 1 curve« mixer.

Aileron differential

(Only for “2 AIL 1 FL”: included if you choose “2 AIL 2/4 FL” in the multi-fl ap menu; see previous double page, left-hand side.)

0%�

�

0%

SEL

Multi-flap menuBrake settings

Aileron

=>=>

2–>4 rudderAileron differential

W I N G M I X E R S

In this line you can set the aileron differential for the two aileron servos.If you are unsure about the meaning of differential tra-vel, please read the appropriate explanation at the start of this section on page 111.The adjustment range of -100% to +100% makes it possible to set the correct direction of differential re-gardless of the direction of rotation of the aileron and fl ap servos.Pressing CLEAR resets the value to the default set-ting.

121121Program description: Mixers

Aileron 2 � 4 rudder

SEL��

=>0%

0%0%

Multi-flap menuBrake settingsAileronFlaps

=>

2–>4 rudder6–>3 elevator

W I N G M I X E R S

This mixer causes the rudder to “follow” automatically when an aileron command is given.Select the SEL fi eld, and give the rotary control a brief press. You can now set the desired value for this function using the rotary control. The mixer direction must be chosen to ensure that the rudder moves in the direction of the up-going aileron.If you assign a switch to this function in the right-hand column, you will be able to switch the mixer on and off in fl ight.The available range of values is -150% to +150%, while pressing CLEAR resets the value to 0%.This setting can only be carried out symmetrically re-lative to the neutral point of the aileron stick.A value of around 50% is generally an excellent star-ting point.

Flaps 6 � 3 elevator

SYM��

0%0%0%

ASY

Multi-flap menuBrake settingsAileronFlaps

=>=>

2–>4 rudder6–>3 elevator

W I N G M I X E R S

This mixer is used to set elevator (pitch-trim) compen-sation when a fl ap command is given. Symmetrical or asymmetrical settings relative to the neutral point of the fl ap control are possible.The available range of values is -150% to +150%, while pressing CLEAR resets the value to 0%.

If you have assigned a transmitter control or a switch in the »Transmitter control adjust« menu, as descri-bed under “�Fl�” on page 118, then the sameone also affects this mixer. In this case the settings are entered in the same manner.This mixer can also be switched on and off if a switch is assigned to it.

Tips for operating airbrakes:

AIL

FL

FL

AIL

Servo 1

Servo 9

• If you have installed a servo for operating conven-tional wing-mounted airbrakes in addition to the ai-leron and fl ap servos, the simplest method of con-trolling it is to connect it to that receiver output whose input you have selected for the brake func-tion, i. e. either 1, 7, 8 or 9 – if it is not already in use for some other purpose. If this is not possible, then the alternative is to set up a free mixer which links your chosen brake control channel to the air-brake servo.

• To operate two airbrake servos it is best to leave one servo at Output 1, and to connect the second servo to any vacant output, for example, output 9, which is not fl ight phase specifi c. Now move to the »Transmitter control adjust« menu (see page 78) and assign this to transmitter control 1 (usually correct) – see screen-shot.

Cnt. 0%

ASYSYMSELSEL ASYSYM��

0%0%0%

+100%+100%+100%+100%+100%+100%+100%+100%

0.0 0.00.0 0.00.0 0.00.0 0.0

InputInputInputInput 12

11109

libre1

librelibre

offset –travel+ –time+

The settings for offset, travel etc. should be left at their default values. You can reassure yourself that this works by calling up the »Servo display« menu, which you access by pressing the HELP button with the rotary control pressed in:

1 +100% 2 0%3 0% 4 0%5 0% 6 0%7 0% 8 0%9 +100% 10 0%

11 0% 12 0%

If, for whatever reason, this relatively simple ar-rangement should not prove to be feasible, then an alternative solution is to use two free mixers, perhaps using the »MIX only channel« menu - see page 142.

However, in either case the airbrake travels have to be fi ne-tuned in the »Servo adjustment« menu (see page 74).

122 Program description: Mixers

Helicopter mixer

Mixers variable separately in fl ight phases

This menu describes all the helicopter mixers which can be varied separately in each fl ight phase, with the exception of the mixers for the auto-rotation fl ight phase, which are covered in detail in the section star-ting on page 132. These mixers are used for the basic set-up of a model helicopter.For details of fl ight phase programming please refer to the following menus:

• »Base setup model«, page 66• »Phase settings«, page 102• »Phase assignment«, page 104

Whenever fl ight phases have been assigned, the acti-ve fl ight phase is displayed at the bottom edge of the screen, e. g. “normal”.In each of these fl ight phases – with the exception of the Auto-rotation phase – the typical helicopter mixing and coupling functions shown in the screen-shot abo-ve are available for setting up the model helicopter. These functions are described in the fi rst part of this comprehensive chapter.

General information on mixers (see also pages 110 and 134).

An arrow “�” indicates a mixer. The signal which fl ows directly from a transmitter stick to the associa-ted servo is “bled off” at a particular point, and the de-

rived signal is then processed in such a way that it af-fects another control channel, and eventually another receiver output. For example, if you set up a “Pitch-axis � tail rotor” mixer, the result is that the tail rotor servo follows the movement of the pitch-axis control system when you operate the pitch-axis stick.Eight-point curves are available for the collective pitch curve in all fl ight phases, and for the two mi-xers “Channel 1 � throttle” and “Channel 1 � tail ro-tor”. This means that you can program a non-linear response curve along the travel of the corresponding stick; see also the «Channel 1 curve« menu, page 92.A brief press on the rotary control or the ENTER but-ton takes you to the screen page for setting an eight-point curve; see below. The curve is set up basically in the same way as the Channel 1 curve for helicop-ters, but we will describe it again here in detail to save you having to leaf through the manual.In the remaining lines you can activate the SEL fi eld and use the rotary control in the highlighted fi eld to enter a mixer value. Pressing CLEAR resets the pa-rameter value to 0%. These mixers are used for the basic set-up procedure of your model helicopter.

The basic programming procedure:1. Select the mixer with the rotary control pressed in.

The bottom line of the screen now shows SEL or an arrow �.

2. A brief press on the rotary control with the SEL fi eld highlighted allows you to set the mixer ratios directly: set the mixer value using the rotary con-trol. Otherwise you will need to switch to the se-cond screen page where you can set up the ap-propriate curve mixer. (CLEAR = 0%).

3. A second brief press on the rotary control conclu-des the input process.

4. Press ESC to move back.

Pitch

A brief press on the rotary control or the ENTER but-ton switches to the second screen page:

Pitch

-60%

?

OU

TP

UT

-- +

1

100

«normal »

-60%Input

Curveoff Point

Output

The »Channel 1 curve« menu affects all servos which are infl uenced by the throttle / collective pitch stick, but this display refers only to the control curve of the collective pitch servos.

Note:The output signal of the »Channel 1 curve« acts as an input signal for the collective pitch curve which you program at this point: the vertical line in the diagram, which moves in parallel with the throttle / collective pitch stick, refl ects the actual Channel 1 curve.

The control curve can be defi ned by up to eight points, termed “reference points” in the following sec-tion; they can be placed at any point along the stick travel. The curve can be set up separately for each fl ight phase.Initially, however, fewer reference points are adequa-te for setting up the collective pitch curve. As a basic rule we recommend that you start with just the three standard reference points, which are already pre-set in the basic software set-up. These three points de-fi ne a linear “curve” as the base setting: namely the two end-points at the bottom end of the control travel “L” (low = -100% travel) and the top end of the control travel “H” (high = +100% travel), together with point “1”, which is exactly in the centre of the control travel.

PitchChannel 1Channel 1

Pitch ax.0%

Gyro suppressionSwashplate rotation

«normal »�

=>=>=>

0%0%0%0%

0%0°

Swashplate limiter off

ThrottleTail rot.

Tail rot. ThrottleThrottleRoll

Roll Tail rot.Throttle

Pitch ax. Tail rot.

123Program description: Mixers

The programming procedure in detailIf you have not already done so, switch to the approp-riate fl ight phase, e. g. “normal”, which will appear on the screen.

Setting and erasing reference points

You will fi nd a vertical line in the graph, and you can shift this between the two end-points “L” and “H” by moving the associated transmitter control (throttle / collective pitch stick). The current stick position is also displayed in numerical form in the “Input” line. This va-lue will lie in the range -100% to +100%.The point at which this line crosses the curve is ter-med the “Output”, and it can be varied at the refe-rence points within the range -125% to +125%. This control signal affects only the collective pitch servos. In the example above the stick is at -60% control tra-vel and also generates an output signal of -60%, sin-ce the curve is linear.Between the two end-points “L” and “H” and the de-fault Point 1 in the centre you can now set a maxi-mum of four additional reference points. However, if you fi rst erase point 1 in the centre of the transmit-ter control travel, you can enter up to six additional re-ference points, but please note that the distance bet-ween adjacent reference points must be no less than about 25%.Now move the stick, and as soon as the highlighted question mark ? appears, you can place a reference point at the corresponding stick position by pressing the rotary control.The order in which you place the (maximum) six points between the end-points “L” and “H” is not sig-nifi cant, as the reference points are automatically re-numbered continuously from left to right in any case.

Example:

»Normal «

4

5

+90%+90%

+100%Point

Pitch

InputCurve

offOutput

Note:In this example the stick is located in the immediate vicinity of the right-hand reference point “H”. That is why the “point” value “+100%” is highlighted.

If you wish to erase one of the set reference points 1 to max. 6, move the stick close to the reference point in question. The reference point number and the as-sociated reference point value now appear in the “Point” line; press the CLEAR button to erase that point.

Example – erasing reference point 4:

»Normal «

4

5

+30%+30%+30%4Point

Pitch

InputCurve

offOutput

When the point has been erased, the highlighted question mark ? re-appears after “Point”, and the pre-vious point “5” now becomes point “4”.

Changing the reference point values

Move the stick to the reference point “L (low), 1 ... 6 or H (high)” which you wish to change. The number and the current curve value of this point are displayed on the screen. You can now use the rotary control or one of the “free” INC / DEC buttons to change the mo-mentary curve value in the highlighted fi eld within the range -125% to +125%, without affecting the adjacent reference points.

Example:

0%+100%+100%

»Normal «

Pitch

InputCurve

off PointOutput

As an example the reference point “2” has been set to +100% in this screen-shot.Pressing the CLEAR button erases the reference point.

Note:If the stick is not set to the exact reference point, ple-ase note that the percentage value in the “Output” line always refers to the current stick position.

Alternatively you can skip in the upward or downward direction straight to reference points that have already been set, by turning the rotary control when pressed in; the number of the addressed point 1 … max. 6 is always highlighted in the graph. When you release the rotary control, the reference point can then be altered as described previously, completely independently of the position of the transmitter control.

Kurve0%

+100%+55%3

»Normal «

Pitch

InputCurve

off PointOutput

Trim pointQuit = ESC

Pressing the ESC button concludes this trim point function. It is not possible to erase a reference point while it is still active.

124 Program description: Mixers

Rounding off the collective pitch curve

In the following example the reference points have been set as follows, as described in the last section:

Reference point value 1 to +50%, Reference point value 2 to +90% , and Reference point value 3 to +0%.

»Normal «

Pitch

InputCurve

off PointOutput

This “jagged” curve profi le can be rounded off auto-matically simply by pressing a button. Press the EN-TER button next to the “curve symbol” :

»Normal «

Pitch

InputCurve

on PointOutput

Note:The curves shown here are only for demonstration purposes, and by no means represent realistic collec-tive pitch curves.

Please refer to the programming examples on pages 199 for “real world” applications.The following three diagrams show typical three-point collective pitch curves for different fl ight phases, such as hover, aerobatics and 3-D fl ying.The vertical bar refl ects the current stick position. Ple-ase note that trim values higher than +100% and lo-wer than -100% cannot be displayed on the screen.

Typical collective pitch curves for different fl ight pha-ses:

It can be very helpful to adjust each individual re-ference point independently of the adjacent points using the rotary control or a “free” INC / DEC button.

Note regarding the marker button:If you have set the marker button in the »Base setup model« menu (see page 66), a dotted vertical line appears in this graph when you press the button; this line shows the position of the C1 stick the last time the button was pressed:

-30% -30%

OU

TP

UT

-- +

1

100

?»Normal «

Pitch

InputCurve

off PointOutput

Move the C1 stick (solid line) to the marker line in or-der to be able to read off the input and output values.

For example, if the marker line indicates the momen-tary hover point, and you wish to place this exactly in the centre of the control arc, then all you need to do in this example is to transfer the “Output” value of the marker line to Reference point “1” in the control cen-tre. Alternatively, of course, you could adjust refe-rence point “1” in fl ight using the rotary control or one of the “free” INC / DEC buttons.

Once you have defi ned the collective pitch curve, switch to the fi rst screen page by pressing ESC, and then select the next line (if appropriate):

Channel 1 � Throttle

A brief press on the rotary control or the ENTER but-ton switches to the second screen page.

?

OU

TP

UT

-- +

1

100

-60%-60%

»Normal «

Channel 1

InputCurve

off PointOutput

Throttle

In contrast to the »Channel 1 curve« menu this dis-play refers only to the control curve of the throttle ser-vo, whereas the “Channel 1 curve” affects all the ser-vos which are affected by the throttle / collective pitch stick.Please note that the output signal of the “Channel 1 curve” option acts as input signal for the throttle cur-ve which is programmed at this point: the vertical line in the diagram, which moves in parallel with the thrott-le / collective pitch stick, follows the actual Channel 1 curve.The throttle curve can also be defi ned by up to eight points – termed “reference points” – which are positi-oned along the full stick travel; different curves can be set for each fl ight phase if you so wish.The reference points are defi ned, adjusted and erased in the usual way, as explained in the previous section relating to the collective pitch curve. First de-fi ne the throttle curve with the three points which are already set in the software, i. e. the two end-points “L” and “H” and Point “1” in the control centre, then adjust the motor power curve to match the collective pitch curve:

• In every case the throttle must be fully open at the end-point of the throttle / collective pitch stick (ex-ception: auto-rotation; see below).

• The hover point is normally located at the centre of the control travel, and the throttle setting must

– + – + – +

L HControl travel L HControl travel L HControl travel

Hover Aerobatic 3D flying

125Program description: Mixers

be adjusted relative to the collective pitch curve in such a way that the correct system rotational speed is obtained at this point.

• In the minimum position of the throttle / collecti-ve pitch stick the throttle curve should be set up in such a way that the motor runs at a signifi cantly higher speed compared with the idle setting, with the clutch reliably engaged.

In all fl ight phases the motor is started and stopped using the throttle limiter (see below).

if you are used to a different radio control system which uses two separate fl ight phases for this – “with idle-up” and “without idle-up” – please note that this complication is now superfl uous, and for reasons of safety we strongly recommend that you adopt the new technique.

Note:The method of increasing system rotational speed be-low the hover point is more fl exible and easier to con-trol using the mx-24s program than using “idle-up” as employed in previous mc radio control systems.

Ensure that the throttle limiter is closed before you start the motor, i. e. so that the throttle can only be adjusted within the idle range using the idle trim. Ple-ase be sure to read the safety notes on page 131 which refer to this. If the idle is set too high when you switch the transmitter on, you will see and hear a clear warning!

Model name#02H-J.Sandbrunner

9.5V 2:50h C620 0 0 0

StopFlight

0 000 00::

Thrtoo

high !0:40h SPCM20

The following three diagrams show typical three-point throttle curves for different fl ight phases, such as ho-ver, aerobatics and 3-D fl ying.

Please note that trim values higher than +100% and lower than -100% cannot be displayed on the screen.

Typical throttle curves for different fl ight phases:

Notes on using the “Throttle limit” function:We strongly recommend that you make use of the throttle limit function (»Transmitter control adjust« menu, page 80). When this function is invoked, the throttle servo is completely disconnected from the throttle / collective pitch stick when the throttle li-mit slider is at its bottom end-point; the motor idles and only responds to the C1 trim. This feature enab-les you to start the motor from within any fl ight pha-se. Once the motor is running, move the throttle li-miter to the opposite end-point, so that full control of the throttle servo is returned to the throttle / collec-tive pitch stick. It is important that the throttle limit-er should not restrict the throttle servo at its top end-point; you can avoid this by setting the control travel to 125% in the »Transmitter control adjust« menu.

If you would like to obtain fi ner control of the thrott-le limit control you can also use “Expo throttle limit” (page 73). This gives you the opportunity to locate the idle setting exactly at the centre position of the throttle limit control, which you can easily fi nd by ear and by eye at any time:

Set the throttle limiter to centre, and adjust the va-lue for “EXPO throttle limit” until the motor idles per-fectly, i. e. without moving the side-mounted proportio-nal control from its ratcheted centre position. The mo-tor can then be started without problem in this positi-on. To cut the motor, slide the throttle limit control to

the bottom end-point, i. e. without even touching the C1 cut-off trim.

The limiting action of the throttle limiter is shown by a horizontal bar in the throttle curve graph:

?

OU

TP

UT

-- +

1

100

-70%-70%

»Normal «

Channel 1

InputCurve

off PointOutput

Throttle

The output signal to the throttle servo cannot be grea-ter than the value defi ned by the horizontal bar, in this illustration max. approx. -70%.

Tip:If you wish to record the fl ight time of a (glow-powe-red) model helicopter, you can assign a control switch to the throttle limit slider, and then use this to switch a timer on and off; see page 94.

Note regarding the marker button:If you have set the marker button in the »Base setup model« menu (see page 66), a dotted vertical line will appear in this graph when you operate the assig-ned switch. This line indicates the position of the C1 stick the last time the switch was operated:

-30% -30%

OU

TP

UT

-- +

1

100

?»Normal «

Channel 1

InputCurve

off PointOutput

Throttle

Now you can move the stick in the direction of the marker line, and place it there – or at least in the im-mediate vicinity of another reference point – in or-der to set the desired rotational speed at the current hover point using the rotary control. However, if you wish to place the hover point at the centre of the con-

– + – + – +

L HControl travel L HControl travel L HControl travel

Hover Aerobatic 3D flying(curve rounded off)

126 Program description: Mixers

trol arc, all you need to do is to read off this optimised value and transfer it to the reference point at control centre.

Channel 1 � tail rotor

0%0%0%

OU

TP

UT

-- +

1

100

1»Normal «

Channel 1

InputCurve

off PointOutput

Tail rot.

The purpose of this mixer is to provide static torque compensation. The fi rst step is to ensure that the di-rection of main rotor rotation has been entered cor-rectly in the »Helicopter type« menu, page 72.This mixer should be set up in such a way that the he-licopter does not rotate around the vertical (yaw) axis (i. e. does not deviate from the hover heading) during a long vertical climb or descent, due to the change in torque of the main rotor relative to the hover. At the hover the yaw trim should be set using the digital tail rotor trim lever only. For a reliable torque compensa-tion setting it is essential that the collective pitch and throttle curves have been set up correctly, i. e. that main rotor speed remains constant over the full adjust-ment range of collective pitch.This third eight-point curve applies only to the control curve of the tail rotor servo when the throttle / collec-tive pitch stick is moved, whereas the “Channel 1 cur-ve” (see page 92) infl uences all servos which are af-fected by the throttle / collective pitch stick. Note that the output signal of the “Channel 1 curve” also acts as input signal for the tail rotor curve which is pro-grammed at this point: the vertical line in the diagram, which moves in parallel with the throttle / collective pitch stick, follows the actual Channel 1 curve as set in the »Channel 1 curve« menu.As standard, the software includes a three-point tail

rotor curve with a linear mixer ratio of 30%. Using the method described above, you can modify the mixer by placing additional reference points on the curve, and thereby set asymmetrical mixer ratios above and below the hover point.In the auto-rotation fl ight phase this mixer is auto-matically switched off.

Note regarding the marker button:If you have set the marker button in the »Base setup model« menu (see page 66), a dotted vertical line will appear in this graph when you operate the assig-ned switch. This line indicates the position of the C1 stick the last time the switch was operated:

-30% -30%

OU

TP

UT

-- +

1

100

?»Normal «

Channel 1

InputCurve

off PointOutput

Tail rot.

Move the C1 stick (solid line) to the marker line in or-der to be able to read off and transfer the input and output values, or to optimise this mixer by placing a further reference point at this location.

Tail rotor � throttle

The normal purpose of the tail rotor is to compensa-te for the effect of main rotor torque on the fuselage, but it is also the primary method of controlling the he-licopter around the vertical (yaw) axis. However, if you increase tail rotor thrust by giving a yaw command, motor power must also be increased to avoid a fall-off in system rotational speed.In this menu you set the extent to which the thrott-le follows the tail rotor. The throttle only follows the tail rotor on one side, i. e. to the side where tail ro-tor thrust is increased, and the adjustment range is therefore 0 to +100%. The direction of mixing varies according to the direction of rotation of the main rotor

(left or right), and this must fi rst be set correctly in the »Helicopter type« menu. For left-hand rotation sys-tems, e. g. HEIM/GRAUPNER helicopters, the throttle follows the tail rotor when the tail rotor stick is moved to the left; with right-hand rotation systems: when the stick is moved to the right.In the auto-rotation fl ight phase this mixer is auto-matically switched off.

Set-up notes:To set the mixer value accurately you should fi rst fl y several high-speed pirouettes in the direction of main rotor rotation (i. e. with a HEIM system machine, pi-rouette to the left). Alternatively, hover the helicop-ter in a cross-wind heading on a fairly breezy day, hol-ding in the required large tail rotor defl ection. The mi-xer value should now be adjusted until the rotational speed does not fall off in this situation. For a HEIM system machine this value needs to be around 30%.

Roll � throttle and pitch-axis � throttle

Increasing collective pitch requires a corresponding adjustment to the throttle setting, and the same ap-plies if a major cyclic command is given i. e. if the swashplate is tilted in any direction. In the mx-24s program you can adjust the degree of throttle follo-wing for roll-axis and pitch-axis separately.These mixers offer particular advantages in aero-batic fl ying, e. g. when fl ying a roll: collective pitch va-lues are only moderate, and the throttle therefore only about half-open, but the roll requires major cyc-lic commands, and these require a much higher po-wer input.The mixer values can be varied within the range 0 to +100%; the program automatically sets the correct di-rection of mixing.In the auto-rotation fl ight phase this mixer is auto-matically switched off.

127Program description: Mixers

Roll � tail rotor and pitch-axis � tail rotor

Increasing collective pitch requires a corresponding adjustment to the tail rotor setting, and the same ap-plies if a major cyclic command is given i. e. if the swashplate is tilted in any direction. In the mx-24s program you can adjust the degree of throttle follo-wing for roll-axis and pitch-axis separately.This function can eliminate a problem which is en-countered primarily in extreme aerobatics which invol-ve very large control defl ections in the pitch-axis cont-rol system, e. g. the “Bo-turn” (vertical pull-up followed by tipping over around the pitch-axis) and tight loops. If the torque changes are not corrected by a mixer, the model tends to rotate around its vertical axis to a greater or lesser extent, and this spoils the appearan-ce of the manoeuvre.These two mixers provide static torque compensation when the swashplate is tilted in any direction. The mi-xers work by always increasing tail rotor thrust, star-ting from the centre point of the roll and pitch-axis sticks, i. e. they always affect tail rotor pitch in the same direction regardless of the direction of the com-mand.The mixer value can be varied within the range 0 to +100%.The mixer direction is automatically determined when you defi ne the direction of main rotor rotation in the »Helicopter type« menu, page 72.In the auto-rotation fl ight phase this mixer is auto-matically switched off.

Gyro suppressionRight at the outset we should mention that this func-tion should not and must not be used if your model is fi tted with a modern gyro system. However, ple-ase read the operating instructions supplied with your gyro. This menu has been retained so that the pro-gram can still cater for all requirements and all pilots’ preferences.

In this program segment the effect of the gyro sensor (“gyro”) can be varied according to the tail rotor stick position; this assumes the use of a gyro system who-se gain can be controlled from the transmitter via an auxiliary channel – this is channel 7 for GRAUPNER/JR mc radio control systems. The gyro suppression function reduces gyro gain in a linear progression as the pilot increases the tail rotor defl ection; the rate of suppression is controlled by the mixer value you have set. Without gyro suppression, i. e. a mixer value of 0%, the gyro effect is constant, regardless of the tail rotor stick position.However, gyro gain can be varied proportionally bet-ween minimum and maximum by means of a trans-mitter control assigned to the “Gyro 7” line in the »Transmitter control adjust« menu (see page 80), e. g. one of the two INC / DEC buttons 5 or 6. In this case gyro gain is maximum at full defl ection of the sli-der, and zero at the opposite end-point. Of course, the mx-24s software allows you to limit the range of gyro gain adjustment by altering the setting for trans-mitter control travel to both sides of neutral.At any position of the slider, gyro gain at full defl ec-tion of the tail rotor stick is:

“momentary slider positionminus

gyro suppression value”.When the slider is at the neutral position, a gyro sup-pression value of 100% will reduce gyro gain to zero with increasing tail rotor defl ection, and a value bet-

ween 100% and the maximum 199% suppresses the gyro completely, well before full defl ection of the tail rotor, according to the position of the transmitter cont-rol; see the diagram on the next page.If you are using the GRAUPNER/JR NEJ-120 BB gyro, Order No. 3277, the bottom and top values are adjusted using separate rotary potentiometers: adjus-tor 1 sets the minimum gyro gain in the bottom positi-on of the slider; adjustor 2 sets the maximum gain at the top end-point of the slider; the transition between these two values occurs roughly in the middle of the slider travel.In contrast, the PIEZO 900, PIEZO 2000 and PIEZO 3000 gyro systems feature proportional, infi nitely vari-able adjustment of gyro gain; see below for typical di-agrams.An example of using variable (static) gyro gain would be to exploit maximum stabilisation for normal, slow fl ying, but to reduce gyro gain for fast circuits and ae-robatics. If you wish to use different settings, we re-commend that you program different fl ight phases.

Examples of different gyro settings and set-up notes1. Linear gyro suppression: 0% to 199% In the centre position of the tail rotor stick the gyro

effect which applies is that set using the associa-ted transmitter control. This can be varied proporti-onally between zero (“min”) and maximum (“max”) using one of the INC / DEC buttons or one of the side-mounted proportional controls, provided that the transmitter control travel is not restricted. At full defl ection of the tail rotor stick the effective gyro effect is calculated as follows:

“momentary slider positionminus

gyro suppression value”. i. e. at 0% gyro suppression the gyro gain remains

constant when a tail rotor command is given; at

128 Program description: Mixers

50% suppression gyro gain is reduced to half if the assigned transmitter control is moved to the +50% position (as shown here); and at >150% suppres-sion gain is reduced to zero before full tail rotor defl ection with the slider at this position.

2. Linear gyro suppression with reduced control tra-vel, e. g. -50% to +80% travel. Gyro gain can be varied proportionally within these control limits. Here again, for demonstration purposes the dia-gram shows gyro gain varying according to tail ro-tor defl ection for various values of the gyro sup-pression parameter.

Adjusting the gyro sensor

If you are aiming at setting up a gyro to achieve ma-ximum possible stabilisation of the helicopter around the vertical axis, please note the following points:

• The control system should be as free-moving and accurate (slop-free) as possible.

• There should be no “spring” or “give” in the tail ro-tor linkage.

• You must use a powerful and – above all – fast servo.

When the gyro sensor detects a deviation in yaw, the faster it adjusts the thrust of the tail rotor, the further the gyro gain adjustor can be advanced without the tail of the model starting to oscillate, and the better the machine’s stability around the vertical axis. If the corrective system is not fast enough, there is a dan-ger that the model’s tail will start to oscillate even at low gyro gain settings, and you then have to reduce gyro gain further to eliminate the oscillation.If the model is fl ying forward at high speed, or ho-vering in a powerful headwind, the net result of the stabilising effect of the vertical fi n combined with the gyro’s stabilising infl uence may be an over-reaction which manifests itself in tail oscillation. In order to ob-tain optimum stabilisation from a gyro in all fl ight situ-ations, gyro gain can be adjusted from the transmitter control assigned to Input “7” in conjunction with gyro suppression and / or the two adjustors on the NEJ-120 BB gyro.

Additional notes on gyros with multi-stage variable gyro gain (e.g. NEJ-120 BB)Since you cannot pre-set gyro gain proportionally at the transmitter using the assigned transmitter cont-rol, it makes sense to set the lower level of gyro gain using adjustor 1 (e. g. for aerobatics), and the high-er level of gain using adjustor 2 (e. g. for hovering). In this case you can only switch between these two set values, even if a proportional control is used for func-tion 7, i. e. proportional adjustment is not available.For this reason you should advance adjustor 2 to the point where the model is on the brink of oscillating when hovering in calm conditions, and advance ad-

justor 1 to the point where the model’s tail does not oscillate when the model is at maximum speed and fl ying in a powerful headwind. Depending on the wea-ther conditions and the type of fl ying you wish to do, you can then switch gyro gain to the appropriate set-ting from the transmitter, and set gyro suppression to vary according to movement of the tail rotor control if you wish.

Swashplate rotation

With some rotor head control systems it is necessa-ry to incline the swashplate in a direction which is not the same as the intentional inclination of the rotor pla-ne when a cyclic control command is given. For ex-ample, if your model features the HEIM mechani-cal system and is fi tted with a four-bladed main ro-tor, the control linkage needs to be rotated to the right through 45° by the software so that the pushrods from the swashplate to the rotor head can be set exactly vertical, ensuring that the blade control system works correctly, without unwanted differential effects. This menu point provides for this arrangement, and elimi-nates the need to make mechanical changes to the control linkages. Negative angles equate to a virtual rotation of the rotor head to the left; positive angles a virtual rotation to the right.Pressing CLEAR resets the input value to “0°”.

Swashplate limiting

This function works like a circular mechanical sur-round acting upon the stick which controls the swash-plate, restricting the normally square stick travel to a circular range. If the helicopter is set up in such a way that the travels for roll and / or pitch-axis (elevator) ex-ploit the maximum which is mechanically possible, e. g. for 3-D aerobatic fl ying, then the swashplate will tilt to much greater angles than normal if full roll and pitch-axis commands are applied simultaneously; the calculated maximum is 141%. At this point the swash-plate mechanism may strike its end-stops, and in the

128

� � �

� � �

� �

� � �

� � � �

� � � �

� � � �

� � �

� � � � �

Exemple:+50%

Ran

ge o

f tr

ansm

itter

co

ntro

l 7

left centre right

Stick defl ection tail rotor

G

yro

gain

�

� � �

� � �

� � � �

� � � �

� � � � �

� � � �

� � �

� � � �

Exemple:+80%

left centre right

Stick defl ection tail rotor

G

yro

gain

�

Ran

ge o

f tr

ansm

itter

co

ntro

l 7

129Program description: Mixers 129

Although the throttle and collective pitch control sys-tems are based on separate servos, they are always operated in parallel by the throttle / collective pitch stick (except when the auto-rotation fl ight phase is se-lected). The Helicopter program automatically couples the functions in the required way.In the mx-24s program the trim lever of control func-tion 1 acts only on the throttle servo. However, in the »Stick mode« menu (see page 77) you can determi-ne whether this should be used for idle trimming as part of the throttle limit function, or for idle trimming during the auto-rotation phase (“throttle AR”).The process of adjusting throttle and collective pitch correctly, i. e. setting the power curve of the motor to match the collective pitch setting of the main rotor blades, is the most important aspect of setting up any model helicopter. The software of the mx-24s provi-des independent adjustment facilities for the throttle, collective pitch and tail rotor control curves in addition to the C1 control curve (»Channel 1 curve« menu, page 92), as already described.It is certainly possible to set up curves with a maxi-mum of eight points for these functions, but as a ge-neral rule fewer points are suffi cient. We would always advise that you start with three-point curves, as the program provides them as standard on the second screen page in each case. All you have to do to defi -ne the control curves is adjust the centre setting “1” and the two end-points (“L” (“low”) and “H” (“high”)) for the throttle / collective pitch stick.However, before you set up the throttle and collective pitch function it is important to adjust the mechanical linkages from all the servos accurately, in accordance with the set-up instructions provided by the helicopter manufacturer.

Note:The hover point should normally be set to the centre position of the throttle / collective pitch

Adjusting the throttle and collective pitch curvesA practical procedure

stick. However, for some special cases, e. g. for “3-D” fl ying, you may wish to program hover points which deviate from this norm, for examp-le, one point for normal fl ying may be above the centre, and one point for inverted fl ight below the centre.

Idle setting and throttle curve

The idle setting is adjusted exclusively with the thrott-le limiter closed, normally using the trim lever of the C1 function, but in special cases using the throttle li-miter (side-mounted proportional control) itself.The bottom point “L” (low) setting of the throttle curve defi nes the throttle setting when the helicopter is in a descent, but without affecting the hover setting.This is a case where you can exploit fl ight phase pro-gramming to use different throttle curves – previous-ly termed “idle-up” in earlier mc systems. This incre-ased system rotational speed below the hover point proves to be useful in certain circumstances, for ex-ample for fast, steep landing approaches with greatly reduced collective pitch, and for aerobatics.

Different throttle curves are programmed for each fl ight phase, so that you can use the optimum set-up both for hovering and aerobatics:

• Low system rotational speed with smooth, gentle control response and low noise in the hover.

• Higher speed for aerobatics with motor power set-tings close to maximum. In this case the throttle curve also has to be adjusted in the hover range.

The diagram shows a three-point cur-ve with a slightly altered throttle setting below the reference point “1”. The cur-ve has also been rounded off as descri-bed earlier.

�O

UT

PU

T

– +

L HControl travel

worst case the ball-links could even be forced out of engagement.The software of the mx-24s includes a function which places a limit on the total swashplate travel, i. e. it restricts the tilt angle of the swashplate from 100% (the travel is limited to the value which would be ob-tained with either roll of pitch-axis alone) to 149% (no effective limit), or “off” (the function is completely disabled). The swashplate limit is variable separately for each model and each fl ight phase. (This software solution is much more fl exible than a physical circular surround attached to the stick unit; the latter can only be used in any case if the roll and pitch-axis functions are both controlled by one of the two dual-axis sticks.)The sketch shown alongside illustrates the effect of the limit when it is set to 100%. The travel range indicated by the dotted lines is no longer ac-tive, and takes the form of a “dead zone”.If this function is used, the basic settings for “Dual Rate” should be set to 100%, and Dual Rate values above 100% should not be used. If you set a swashplate li-mit of 100% and use Dual Rates, swashplate move-ment will be restricted even when roll and / or pitch-axis commands are given separately.Adjustment range: 100 … 149% and “off”.

130

exactly in the centre of the stick travel. Roughly at the mid-point of the collective pitch stick the model should lift off the ground and hover at the rotational speed you wish to use. If this is not the case, correct the set-ting as follows:

1. The model does not lift off until the collective pitch stick is above the centre point.a) Rotational speed too low

Remedy: increase the va-lue for the throttle ser-vo parameter at the centre point of the stick travel in the “Channel 1 � throttle” mixer.

Important:Please persevere with this adjustment procedure un-til the model hovers at the correct rotational speed at the centre point of the throttle / collective pitch stick. All the other model settings depend upon the correct setting of this parameter!

The standard set-up

The remainder of the standard adjustment procedure is completed on the basis of the fundamental set-up which you have just carried out, i. e. we assume that the model hovers in normal fl ight at the centre point of the throttle / collective pitch stick with the correct rotational speed. This means that your model helicop-ter is capable of hovering and also fl ying circuits in all phases whilst maintaining a constant system rotatio-nal speed.

The climb setting

The combination of throttle hover setting, collective pitch setting for the hover and the maximum collective pitch setting (“Coll. pitch high”) now provides you with a simple method of achieving constant system rotatio-nal speed from the hover right to maximum climb.Start by placing the model in an extended vertical climb, holding the collective pitch stick at its end-point: motor speed should not alter compared with the ho-ver setting.If motor speed falls off in the climb, when the throttle is already fully open and no further power increase is possible (this assumes that the motor is correctly ad-justed), then you should reduce maximum blade pitch angle at full defl ection of the collective pitch stick, i. e. in the “collective pitch high” position. Conversely, if motor speed rises during the vertical climb, you need to increase the pitch angle. This is effected by selec-ting the point “H” (high) and changing the reference point value using the rotary control.

�O

UT

PU

T

– +

L HControl travel

Hover point

b) Rotational speed too high

Remedy: increase the bla-de pitch value for collecti-ve pitch at the stick centre setting; this is carried out in the “Collective pitch cur-ve” menu.

2. The model lifts off below the centre pointa) Rotational speed too high

Remedy: reduce the thrott-le opening in the “Channel 1 � throttle” mixer at the stick centre point.

b) Rotational speed too low

Remedy: reduce the bla-de pitch value for collecti-ve pitch at the stick centre setting; this is carried out in the “Collective pitch cur-ve” menu.

�O

UT

PU

T

– +

L HControl travel

Hover point

�O

UT

PU

T

– +

L HControl travel

Hover point

�O

UT

PU

T

– +

L HControl travel

Hover point

130 Program description: Mixers

The basic set-up procedure

Although the mx-24s transmitter provides a broad range of adjustment for the collective pitch curve and throttle curve, it is essential that you fi rst adjust all the mechanical linkages in the model in accordance with the information supplied by the helicopter manufactu-rer, i. e. all the system linkages should already be ap-proximately correct in mechanical terms. If you are not sure of this, an experienced helicopter pilot will be glad to help you with this basic set-up.The throttle linkage must be adjusted in such a way that the throttle is just at the “fully open” position at the full-throttle setting. When the throttle limiter is at the idle setting, the C1 trim lever should just be able to close the throttle completely, without the servo stri-king its mechanical end-stop.Take your time, and carry out these adjustments very carefully by correcting the mechanical linkages and / or changing the linkage point on the servo output arm or the throttle lever. Only when you are confi dent that all is well should you start optimising and fi ne-tuning the throttle servo using the transmitter’s electronic fa-cilities.With the basic set-up completed, the motor should be started in accordance with the operating instructions supplied with it. Adjust the idle setting using the trim lever of the throttle / collective pitch stick. The idle po-sition which you set is indicated in the transmitter’s basic screen display by a horizontal bar at the display of the C1 trim lever’s position. Refer to page 34 of this manual for a full explanation of the digital trims.

Caution:Read all you can about motors and helicopters, so that you are aware of the inherent dangers and the cautionary measures required before you attempt to start the motor for the fi rst time!

The following procedure assumes that you wish to set up your helicopter “normally”, i. e. with the hover point

131131Program description: Mixers

Now bring the model back to the hover, which again should coincide with the mid-point of the C1 stick. If you fi nd that the collective pitch stick now has to be moved from the mid-point in the “higher” direction, then you should correct this deviation by increasing the collective pitch angle at the hover until the model again hovers at stick centre. Conversely, if the model hovers below the mid-point, correct this by reducing pitch angle again. You may fi nd that it is also necessa-ry to correct the throttle opening at the hover point.

Continue adjusting these settings until you really do achieve a constant rotational speed over the full cont-rol range between hover and climb.

�O

UT

PU

T

– +

L HControl travel

Hover point

This diagram shows the changes to the collective pitch maximum value “H” only.

�O

UT

PU

T

– +

L HControl travel

Hover point

This diagram shows the change to the hover point only, i.e. collective pitch mi-nimum and maximum have both been left at -100% and +100%.

The descent setting

The descent adjustment should now be carried out by placing the model in a steady descent from forward fl ight at a safe height by fully reducing collective pitch; adjust the collective pitch minimum value (“Collecti-ve pitch low”) so that the model descends at an ang-le of 60 … 80°.

Once the model descends reliably as described, ad-just the value for “Throttle low (L)” so that system ro-tational speed neither increases nor diminishes du-ring the descent. This completes the set-up procedure for throttle and collective pitch.

Final important notes

Before you start the motor, check carefully that the throttle limiter is completely closed, so that the throttle can be controlled by the trim lever alone. If the thrott-le is too far open when you switch on the transmitter, you will see and hear a warning. If you ignore this and start the motor with the throttle too far advanced, the-re is a danger that the motor will run up to speed wit-hout delay after starting, and the centrifugal clutch will immediately engage. For this reason you should:

Always grasp the rotor head fi rmlywhen starting the motor.

However, if you accidentally start the motor with the throttle open, the golden rule is this:

Don’t panic!Hang on to the rotor head regardless!

Don’t let go!Immediately close the throttle, even though there may

be a risk of damaging the helicopter’s drive train, be-cause:

it is vital that YOU ensurethat the helicopter cannot possibly move off

by itself in an uncontrolled manner.The cost of repairing a clutch or even the motor itself is negligible compared with the damage which a mo-del helicopter can cause if its spinning rotor blades are allowed to wreak havoc.

Make sure that nobody else is standing in the primary hazard zone

around the helicopter.You must never switch abruptly from idle to the fl ight setting by suddenly increasing system rotational speed. This causes the rotor to accelerate very quick-ly, resulting in premature wear of the clutch and gear train. The main rotor blades are generally free to swi-vel, and they often cannot keep pace with such swift acceleration; they may respond by swinging far out of their normal position, perhaps resulting in a boom strike.Once the motor is running you should s l o w l y in-crease system rotational speed using the throttle li-miter; if you have assigned an external switch for the throttle limiter, we strongly recommend that you pro-gram a time constant of about fi ve seconds for run-ning up the system rotational speed (opening the throttle limiter), although there should always be zero time delay for closing the throttle limiter. These values are set in the »Transmitter control adjust« menu; see page 80.

This diagram shows the changes to the collective pitch minimum value “L” only.

�O

UT

PU

T

– +

L HControl travel

Hover point

132 Program description: Mixers

PitchThr setting AR –90%Tailrotoroffset ARGyro suppressionSwashplate rotation 0°

«Autorot»

�

=>

0%0%

Swashplate limiter off

The adjustment facilities listed in this display are in-cluded in the Helicopter mixers menu when you switch to the “Auto-rotation” phase or “Auto-rotati-on C1 Pos.”, i. e. one of the two auto-rotation variants must be active (see the »Base setup model« menu, page 66).Auto-rotation allows full-size and model helicopters to land safely in a crisis, i. e. if the motor should fail. It can also be used if the tail rotor should fail, in which case cutting the motor and carrying out an auto-rotati-on landing is the only possible way of avoiding a high-speed uncontrollable rotation around the vertical axis, invariably terminating in a catastrophic crash.During an auto-rotation descent the main rotor is not driven by the motor; it is kept spinning only by the air-fl ow through the rotor disc caused by the fast descent. The rotational energy stored in the still spinning rotor can be exploited to allow the machine to fl are out, but this can only be done once. For this reason “autos” are only likely to be successful if the pilot has plenty of experience in handling model helicopters, and has also set up the functions listed above with great care.Once you have suffi cient experience, you should practise auto-rotation landings at regular intervals, not only so that you can demonstrate your all-round fl ying skill by calling the manoeuvre in competitions, but also so that you are in a position to land the he-licopter undamaged from a great height if the motor should fail. For this purpose the program provides a range of adjustment facilities which are designed to help you fl y your helicopter in its unpowered state.

Helicopter mixer

Auto-rotation settings

Please note that the auto-rotation setting takes the form of a complete eighth fl ight phase, which provi-des access to all the adjustment facilities which can be varied separately for all fl ight phases, i. e. settings for transmitter controls 5 … 8, trims, collective pitch curve settings etc.. Certain special features are also provided which are not available in the powered fl ight phases. These functions are:

Pitch

In powered fl ight the maximum blade pitch angle is li-mited by the motor power which is available; howe-ver, in auto-rotation the pitch angle is only limited by the point at which the airfl ow over the main rotor bla-des breaks away. Nevertheless, to provide suffi cient upthrust even when rotational speed is falling off it is necessary to set a maximum collective pitch value which is greater than normal.Start by setting a value which is about 10 to 20% hig-her than the normal collective pitch maximum, as this will prevent the helicopter ballooning up again during the fl are following the auto-rotation descent. If this happens, the rotational speed of the main rotor will quickly decline to the point where it collapses, and the helicopter ends up crashing to the ground from a con-siderable height.Under certain circumstances the collective pitch mi-nimum setting may also differ from the normal fl ight setting; this depends on your piloting style for nor-mal fl ying. In any case you must set a suffi ciently ge-nerous collective pitch minimum value for auto-rotati-on to ensure that your model can be brought from for-ward fl ight at moderate speed into a descent at an angle of around 60 … 70° when collective pitch is re-duced to minimum. Most helicopter pilots already use such a setting for normal fl ying, and if this applies to you, you can simply adopt the same value.

If the angle is too shallow, increase the value, and vice versa.For auto-rotation the collective pitch stick itself may not be positioned right at the bottom of its travel; in-stead it is typically between the hover position and the bottom end-point, giving the pilot scope for cor-rection if necessary, i. e. the chance to adjust the model’s pitch inclination using the pitch-axis (eleva-tor) control.You can shorten the approach by pulling back on the pitch-axis stick and gently reducing collective pitch, or alternatively extend the approach by pushing forward on the pitch-axis stick and gently increasing collecti-ve pitch.

Throttle setting AR

Disconnecting the throttle servo from collective pitch control:In a competition the pilot is expected to cut the motor completely, but for practice purposes this is certainly not advisable.Instead set the %-value for the throttle so that the mo-tor remains at a reliable idle during auto-rotation, so that you can open the throttle immediately to recover from an emergency. The default setting for this is a value of “-90%”.This (fi xed) value can also be varied using the C1 trim lever, provided that you select “Thr AR” in the “Coll-

Approach angles in varying wind con-ditions.

45°

60°

75°

Approach angle::

In strong wind

In moderate wind

In calm conditions

133Program description: Mixers

ective pitch / throttle” line of the »Stick mode« menu (see page 77). In this case the C1 trim is only active in the auto-rotation fl ight phase. However, its setting can also be altered outside this phase.This pre-set facility is specially designed to provide a simple means of moving on from practice auto-rota-tion landings with the motor running to a fi nal auto-rotation landing with the motor stopped. For this re-ason the C1 trim lever can be brought to a position at which the motor will stop at a suitable moment before the pilot switches to the “Autorot” fl ight phase.

Tail rotor offset AR

For normal fl ying the tail rotor is set up in such a way that it compensates for motor torque when the heli-copter is hovering. This means that it already genera-tes a certain amount of thrust even in its neutral posi-tion. The level of thrust is then varied by the tail rotor control system, and also by the various mixers which provide all manner of torque compensation, while the tail rotor trim is also used to compensate for varying weather conditions, fl uctuations in system rotational speed and other infl uences.However, in an auto-rotation descent the main rotor is not driven by the motor, and therefore there is no torque effect for which compensation is required, i. e. which the tail rotor would have to correct. For this re-ason all the appropriate mixers are automatically swit-ched off in auto-rotation mode. However, the basic tail rotor setting must also be different for auto-rotati-on, as the corrective thrust described above is no lon-ger required.Cut the motor and place the helicopter on the ground in a level attitude. With the transmitter and receiving system switched on, fold both tail rotor blades down and change the blade pitch angle to zero degrees by adjusting the value of the “Tail rotor offset” line. View-ed from the tail, the tail rotor blades should now lie parallel to each other. Depending on the friction and

running resistance of the gearbox it may be that the fuselage still yaws slightly in an auto-rotation descent. The relatively slight torque which causes this effect must then be corrected if necessary by adjusting the tail rotor blade pitch angle. This value will always be a small fi gure between zero degrees and a pitch angle opposed to the direction of tail rotor pitch required for normal fl ight.The adjustment range is -125% to +125%.(Pressing CLEAR = 0%.)

Final note:As you would expect, the mx-24s offers the facility to trim the roll and pitch-axis functions (and especially the tail rotor setting) using the digital trims, which can be set separately in all fl ight phases. This is availab-le in the auto-rotation phase as in the other fl ight pha-ses. See the »Stick mode« menu on page 77.

134 Program description: Mixers

General notes regarding freely programmable mixers

The two menus »Wing mixers« and »Helicopter mi-xers« contain a wide range of pre-programmed cou-pling functions, as described on the preceding pages. The basic meaning of mixers has already been ex-plained on page 110, together with the principle on which they work. In the following section you will fi nd more general information relating to “free mixers”:The mx-24s offers freely programmable mixers in every model memory, whose inputs and outputs can be selected to suit your exact requirements:

• eight linear mixers, numbered 1 to 8;

• four curve mixers, numbered 9 to 12.These twelve mixers are certainly adequate for most applications, but in any case they are invariably suffi -cient when you incorporate the facilities of fl ight pha-se programming. In the »Mix active in phase« menu (see page 142) you can specify which of the twel-ve mixers is active and disabled, separately for each fl ight phase.In the case of the “free mixers”, the signal present at any control function (transmitter control 1 to 12) can be assigned as the input signal of a “free mixer”. Al-ternatively any switch can be assigned as the input si-gnal using what is termed the “switch channel” (see below). The signal present at the control channel and passed to the mixer input is always infl uenced by its own transmitter control and any control characteri-stic you might have set, such as those selected in the »Dual Rate / Expo«, »Channel 1 curve« and »Transmitter control adjust« menus.The mixer output acts upon a freely selectable con-trol channel (1 to max. 12, depending on the type of receiver). Before the signal is passed to the associa-ted servo the only infl uences which can act upon it are those defi ned in the »Servo adjustment« menu, i. e. the servo reverse, neutral point offset, servo tra-vel and servo travel limit functions.One control function can be set up to affect several

mixers simultaneously, if, for example, several mixers are to be arranged to work in parallel. Conversely it is possible for several mixers to affect one and the same control channel. Particularly in the latter case, howe-ver, it is very important to ensure that the servo con-cerned does not strike its mechanical end-stops when several mixer signals accumulate to an excessive ex-tent. For safety’s sake it may well be sensible to set an appropriate travel limit in the »Servo adjustment« menu in such cases.For more complex applications it is even possible to connect multiple mixers in series: in this case it is not the (transmitter) signal at the “output” of a control function which forms the input signal of the “series-wi-red” mixer, but the (mixed) signal “further back” at the “input” of a control channel. The following description of the free mixers includes several examples of such arrangements.In software terms the freely programmable mixer is always switched on by default, but it is possible to as-sign an optional ON / OFF switch to the mixer. Howe-ver, since there are so many functions to which swit-ches can potentially be assigned, you should take care not to assign too many functions to any particu-lar switch.

The important mixer parameters are …… the mixer ratio, which defi nes the extent to which

the input signal acts on the output of the control channel which is programmed as the mixer output.

If you are using linear mixers, the mixer ratio can be set symmetrically for both sides of centre, or asymmetrically. Curve mixers can also be confi gu-red by defi ning up to eight reference points to suit your application; this enables you to implement ex-tremely non-linear curves.

… the neutral point of a mixer, which is also termed the “offset”.

The offset is that point on the travel of a transmit-

ter control (stick, proportional control or switch) at which the mixer has no infl uence on the control channel defi ned as its output. Normally this is the centre point of the transmitter control or switch, but the offset can be placed at any point on the control’s travel. Since there are no restrictions on the design of the curve mixers, setting a mixer neutral point only makes sense with the eight line-ar mixers.

If you do not wish the corresponding mixer output or control channel to respond to its normal transmit-ter control – as, for example, in the case of Output 1 and a model glider not fi tted with airbrakes – then it is possible to separate the transmitter control from the control channel of the mixer output with a simple button-press in the »MIX only channel« menu (see page 142). Here again, the following menu descripti-on provides an explanatory example of the function.

Switch channel “S” as mixer inputOccasionally a constant control signal is all that is re-quired as the mixer input; a typical application would be slight “up-elevator” trim when the parallel-connec-ted aero-tow release is closed.In this case a switch is assigned both to the aero-tow release and the mixer; it is then used not only to open and close the release, but also to pass the desired trim signal to the elevator via the mixer ratio. To iden-tify this special arrangement, this mixer input control function in the program is designated “S” for “Switch channel”.

135Program description: Mixers

Free mixers

Linear and curve mixers

Eight linear mixers …

LinearMIX

typeSELSEL�

�

???? - - - -- - - -- - - -- - - -

??????

??????

1LinearMIXLinearMIXLinearMIX

234

from to Adjust

… and four curve mixers for non-linear characteristic curves are available in each model memory (1 to 40):

SELSEL��

???? - - - -- - - -- - - -- - - -

??????

??????

type from to Adjust

Curve MIX 9Curve MIX10Curve MIX11Curve MIX12

In addition, the »MIX active in phase« menu (page 142) enables you to activate and disable particular mixers separately for specifi c fl ight phases. In the in-terests of clarity the blocked mixers are then sup-pressed in the “Free mixers” menu in the corres-ponding fl ight phase. If a mixer is not shown, ple-ase switch to the appropriate fl ight phase!In this fi rst section we will concentrate on the pro-gramming procedure for the fi rst screen page of the “free mixers”. We will then move on to the method of programming mixer ratios, both for linear mixers and curve mixers, as found on the second screen page of this menu.

Basic programming procedure:1. Select mixer 1 … 12 with the rotary control

pressed in.

2. Defi ne the mixer input “from” and the mixer output “to”.

3. If required, enter a serial mixer link (Type column).

4. Optionally: include the trim levers of the sticks 1 … 4 for the mixer input signal (Type column).

5. Assign a mixer switch if required.

6. Defi ne the mixer ratios on the second screen page.

7. Switch back to the fi rst page by pressing ESC.

“from …” column

After selecting a mixer line and briefl y pressing the ro-tary control, enter one of the control functions 1 … 12 or S in the selected mixer line in the highlighted fi eld of the “from” column, using the rotary control.In the interests of clarity, the control functions 1 … 4 are abbreviated as follows when dealing with the wing mixers:

C1 Throttle / airbrake stick

AI Aileron stick

EL Elevator stick

RU Rudder stick

… and in the Helicopter program:

1 Throttle / collective pitch stick

2 Roll stick

3 Pitch-axis (elevator) stick

4 Tail rotor stick

Note:Don’t forget to assign a transmitter control to the se-lected control function 5 … 12 in the »Transmitter control adjust« menu, as all inputs (with one excep-tion in the “Helicopter” model type) are set to “free” by default.

Switch channel “S”The letter “S” (Switch channel) in the “from” column has the effect of passing a constant input signal to the mixer input, e. g. in order to add a little more “up-elevator” trim when the aero-tow release is closed, as mentioned on the previous page.

After assigning a control function or the letter “S” we move on to the …

“… to” column

… where an additional SEL fi eld now appears. At this point you can defi ne the destination of the mixer, i. e. the mixer output, as one of the control channels. At the same time additional fi elds also appear in the bot-tom line of the screen.

Example:

SEL��

EL6 =>=>C1

8S

EL10EL

Tr4I

C4

7

onoff

=>=>

SELSELSEL

LinearMIX

type

1LinearMIXLinearMIXLinearMIX

234

from to Adjust

In this example four mixers have been defi ned. The second mixer is already familiar to us from the “Bra-ke settings” sub-menu of the »Wing mixers« menu under the name “Elev. curve”. As a general rule you should always use these pre-programmed mixers fi rst if possible. Admittedly, if you need asymmetrical mi-xer ratios on both sides of centre, or wish to program a non-linear curve, or need to offset the mixer neu-tral point, then you should leave the pre-programmed mixers at “0%” and set up one of the free mixers in-stead.

Erasing mixers

If you need to erase a mixer that you have already defi ned, select the appropriate line and use the rota-ry control to move to the SEL fi eld below the “from” column. Activate this with a brief press on the rotary control, so that the highlighted fi eld jumps to the se-lected mixer line, and then simply press the CLEAR button.

136 Program description: Mixers

In this very simple example of a serial mixer, the se-cond mixer affects the transmitter signal of cont-rol function 7, as shown under a), but also the enti-re (mixed) signal present at the servo side of control channel 7, as shown under b). It then passes this sig-nal to control channel 8, taking the set mixer ratio into account. The effect of control “6” therefore extends as far as output “8”. The serial link for additional subse-quent mixers can be continued as far as you like, for example, via a further mixer “8 � 12”, so that the ef-

Mixer switches

In our example, the switches and control switches “4”, “G4” and “7” have been assigned to the three line-ar mixers 1, 2 and 4, as shown in the drawings on the opposite page.The switch symbol shows the actual switched state. The extreme right-hand column shows whether the mixer in question is currently switched “off” or “on”. Mixers to which no switch has been assigned are per-manently switched on.A switch must be assigned to the 4th mixer if you wish to switch between two fi xed mixer values (yet to be defi ned), corresponding to the two end-points of a (proportional) transmitter control. This means that the “switch channel” mixer cannot be switched “on” or “off” like the other mixers.If you intend setting up a control switch (G1 ... G8), please remember that you also have to assign a transmitter control to it BEFOREHAND; this is carried out in the »Control switches« menu. The exception to this rule is the pre-defi ned control switches G1 + G2, which are assigned to the C1 stick by default. The same applies, of course, to the logical switches.

“Type” column

Including the trimIf you are using one of the primary control functions 1 … 4, you can program the trim value of the digital trim lever to affect the mixer input, if you wish. Use the ro-tary control to select “Tr.” in the highlighted fi eld for the mixer in question.The effect of the C1 trim lever on the mixer output va-ries according to the function which has been assi-gned to it in the “Trim” column of the »Stick mode« menu (see page 76). These are the options for fi xed-wing models:

Trim Effect on mixer output

none linear over the full trim lever travel

forward only effective when the C1 stick is for-ward

back only effective when the C1 stick is back

… and for model helicopters:

Trim Effect on mixer output

Thr AR linear over the full trim lever travel

Thr lim Only effective in the minimum position of the assigned throttle limit slider

Serial mixer linksAs has already been explained (see page 134), you can also link mixers together in series. When a seri-al mixer is invoked, the “input signal” of one control channel branches at the point where it is already on its way to the servo, and is sent to a different chan-nel; see page 29. In the “Type” column select the ar-row “�” to set up this link, or “Tr �” if you also wish the trim to act on the mixer input.

Example:Serial connection of mixers according to the following arrangement:

Two mixers (MIX 6 � 7 and 7 � 8):

=>=>

?? ?? - - - -?? ?? - - - -

SEL �� SELSEL

67

78

LinearMIX

type

1LinearMIXLinearMIXLinearMIX

234

from to Adjust

a) without a serial link:

b) … and the same mixers with a serial link:

6 6

7

Ser

vo4,

8V

C57

7B

est.-

Nr.

4101

Ser

vo4,

8V

C57

7B

est.-

Nr.

4101

7

8

Ser

vo4,

8V

C57

7B

est.-

Nr.

4101

PROPCHANNEL

MIX 1

MIX 2

6 6

7

Ser

vo4,

8V

C57

7B

est.-

Nr.

4101

Ser

vo4,

8V

C57

7B

est.-

Nr.

4101

7

8

Ser

vo4,

8V

C57

7B

est.-

Nr.

4101

PROPCHANNEL

MIX 1

MIX 2

137Program description: Mixers

fect of transmitter control signal “6” extends as far as output “12”, again taking its associated mixer ra-tio into account. Of course, each individual mixer can still be controlled via the assigned mixer input cont-rol even when a serial link has been set up. Note that the fi xed-wing and helicopter mixers can also be set up to act as “serial” mixers in this sense.

Additional special features of free mixers

Mixer input = mixer output

If you set up a mixer whose input is the same as its output, e. g. 8 � 8, you can achieve some very spe-cial effects in conjunction with the option of switching a free mixer on and off in any way you like.A typical application for this type of mixer is described on page 182.

Tip:If you separate the relevant control function, in this case “8”, from control channel “8” using the »MIX only channel« menu (see page 142), then the ser-vo response is defi ned only by the mixer ratio (which has not yet been programmed). This enables you to set up linear curves using the mixers 1 … 8, or eight-point control curves for any transmitter control using the curve mixers 9 … 12, as described in the »Chan-nel 1 curve« menu, and also include them in the fl ight phase switching if required. This method of “lin-king” is also switchable, and can even be assigned a time delay in the “-time+” column of the »Transmitter control adjust« menu. For more information on this please see the programming example entitled “Cont-rolling timed sequences” on page 182.

Mixer output affecting default software coup-ling of aileron, camber-changing fl ap or collective pitch servos

• Fixed-wing models: Depending on the number of wing servos set in

the »Model type« menu, outputs 2 and 5 at the receiver are reserved for the aileron servos, out-puts 6 and 7 for the two fl ap servos, and outputs 9 and 10 for the secondary fl ap servos FL2 (if pre-sent).

If you set up mixers to affect this type of coupled function, you must take into account the direction of effect according to the control channel:

Mixer Effect

N.N.* � 2 the servo pair 2 + 5 responds with an aileron function

N.N.* � 5 the servo pair 2 + 5 responds with a fl ap function

N.N.* � 6 the servo pair 6 + 7 responds with a fl ap function

N.N.* � 7 the servo pair 6 + 7 responds with an aileron function

N.N.* � 9 the servo pair 9 + 10 responds with a fl ap function

N.N.* � 10 the servo pair 9 + 10 responds with an aileron function

• Model helicopters: Depending on the helicopter type, collective pitch

control may be provided by a maximum of four servos connected to receiver outputs 1, 2, 3 and 5, and the mx-24s software links them together to provide the functions collective pitch, roll and pitch-axis (elevator). It is not advisable to mix one of the transmitter controls into these already occu-

pied channels using the free mixers available out-side the »Helicopter mixers« menu, as you may inadvertently generate some extremely complex and unwanted interactions. One of the few excepti-ons to this rule is “Collective pitch trim via a sepa-rate transmitter control”, as shown in Example No. 3 on page 141.

Important notes:• It is important to remember when dealing with se-

rial links that the travels of the individual mixers are cumulative when multiple stick commands are made simultaneously, and the danger then exists that the servo concerned may strike one of its me-chanical end-stops. If necessary reduce the servo travel to avoid this; alternatively use the “Travel li-miting” function in the »Servo adjustment« menu, and / or reduce the mixer values.

• When using a PCM transmission link the cont-rol data is compressed before being transmitted, and if you use more than eight servo outputs on a PCM20 receiver, the servos connected to re-ceiver outputs 9 and 10 may be slightly less than smooth-running if the mixers “1 � 9”, “1 � 10” and “2 � 10” are in use.

If you are using a PCM20 receiver, these effects may occur at outputs 9 and 10 if you have pro-grammed mixer combinations in which several servos are operated in parallel by one transmitter control. This does not constitute a malfunction of the radio control system.

• We recommend that you make full use of the »Servo display« menu, which allows you to check the effects of all your settings on a single screen. This menu is accessed by holding the rotary con-trol pressed in and pressing the HELP button. Press the rotary control or the ESC button again to return to your starting point.

* N.N. = Nomen Nominandum (the name to be stated)

138 Program description: Mixers

Mixer ratios and mixer neutral point

Now that we have explained the wide-ranging nature of the mixer functions, the following section describes how to program linear and non-linear mixer curves.For each of the twelve available mixers the mixer cur-ves are programmed on a second page of the screen display. Hold the rotary control pressed in, and se-lect the line for the mixer you wish to adjust, then se-lect the arrow button “�” using the rotary control. A brief press on the rotary control or the ENTER button takes you to the graphic page.

Linear mixers 1 ... 8: setting linear curvesAs an example with a practical application we will de-fi ne a linear mixer curve in the following section desi-gned to solve the following problem:We have a powered model with two fl ap servos con-nected to receiver outputs 6 and 7, which were pro-grammed in the »Model type« menu. The fl aps are to be employed as landing fl aps, i. e. when the associa-ted transmitter control is operated they defl ect down only. However, this fl ap movement requires an eleva-tor trim correction to counteract an unwanted pitch trim change.In the »Transmitter control adjust« menu, assign an unused side-mounted proportional control, e. g. con-trol 9, to input 6. We choose this input because the transmitter control assigned to input 6 by default con-trols the two servos connected to receiver outputs 6 and 7, operating as simple wing fl aps, as you can see from the table on the opposite page.

»Transmitter control adjust« menu:

0% +100%+100% 0.0 0.0Cnt. 9 0% +100%+100% 0.0 0.0

free 0% +100%+100% 0.0 0.00% +100%+100% 0.0 0.0

SYM ASYASYSYMSEL SEL«normal »

��

Input 5Input 6Input 7Input 8

–travel+ –time+offsetfree

free

Note:If you select two fl aps (“2 FL”) in the »Model type« menu, input 7 is automatically blocked to avoid pos-sible malfunctions. However, in the interests of safe-ty we strongly recommend that you make it a matter of course to leave or reset all inputs not currently re-quired to “free”.

Start by moving this transmitter control to the forward end-point, and adjust the landing fl ap linkages so that they are in the neutral (closed) position at this setting. If you move the control back, the fl aps should move down; if not, you must reverse the direction of servo rotation.Now we turn our attention to the fi rst mixer in the screen-shot shown on page 135, which is “6 � EL”; this is designed to provide elevator trim. Switch 4 has been assigned to this mixer:

SEL��

EL6 =>=>C1

8S

EL10EL

Tr4

G4

7

offoff

=>=>

SELSELSEL

LinearMIX

type

1LinearMIXLinearMIXLinearMIX

234

from to Adjust

Use the rotary control to move to the arrow � in the bottom line. A brief press on the rotary control now switches to the second screen page:

Linear MIX 1

off

6 EL

If this display appears, you have not activated the mi-xer by operating the assigned switch – in this case “4”.To correct this, operate the switch:

Linear MIX 1

Mix input0%

OU

TP

UT

-- +

100

STOASYSYM CLR

6 EL

0% 0%Of fse t

The solid vertical line in the graph represents the cur-rent position of the transmitter control assigned to in-put 6. The solid horizontal line shows the mixer ratio, which currently has the value of zero over the who-le stick travel; this means that the elevator will not “fol-low” when the fl aps are operated.The fi rst step is to defi ne the offset (mixer neutral point):The dotted vertical line indicates the position of the mixer neutral point (“offset”), i. e. that point along the control travel at which the mixer has no infl uence on the channel connected to its output. As standard this point is set to the centre position.In our example the neutral position of the fl aps is lo-cated at the forward end-point of the side-mounted proportional control, so we must also shift the mixer neutral point exactly to that point, as no elevator cor-rection is required at that setting. Move control 9 in the direction of +100%, select STO using the rotary control and press the rotary control briefl y. The dotted vertical line now moves to this point – the new mixer neutral point – which always retains the “OUTPUT” value of zero in accordance with the mixer defi nition.As it happens, this setting is diffi cult to show in a screen-shot, so, in the interests of clarity, we will change the “offset” value to only +75%.

0% 0% +75%

OU

TP

UT

-- +

100

STOASYSYM CLR

6Linear MIX 1

Mix input

EL

Of fse t

139Program description: Mixers

(You can reset the mixer neutral point to centre auto-matically by selecting CLR.)

Symmetrical mixer ratios

The next step is to defi ne the mixer values above and below the mixer neutral point, starting from the cur-rent position of the mixer neutral point. Select the SYM fi eld, so that the mixer value can be set sym-metrically relative to the offset point we have just pro-grammed. Press the rotary control briefl y, then set the values in the two left-hand highlighted fi elds within the range -150% to +150%. Remember that the set mi-xer value always refers to the control signal which is passed to the mixer! Setting a negative mixer value reverses the direction of the mixer, while pressing the CLEAR button erases the mixer ratio.The “optimum” value for our purposes will inevitab-ly need to be established through a fl ight testing pro-gramme.

+20% +20% +75%

OU

TP

UT

-- +

100

STOASYSYM CLR

6Linear MIX 1

Mix input

EL

Of fse t

Since we earlier set the mixer neutral point at +75% of control travel, the elevator “EL” will already exhibit a (slight) down-elevator effect at the neutral point of the landing fl aps, and this, of course, is not wanted. To avoid this problem we shift the mixer neutral point back to 100% control travel, as described earlier.If you were now to reset the offset from 75% to, say, 0% control travel, the screen would look like this:

+20% +20% 0%

OU

TP

UT

-- +

100

STOASYSYM CLR

6Linear MIX 1

Mix input

EL

Of fse t

Asymmetrical mixer ratios

For many applications, however, we need to set up different mixer values on either side of the mixer neu-tral point.If you select the ASY fi eld and (in our example) move the side-mounted proportional control in one direc-tion, the mixer ratio for each direction of control can be set separately:

+25% +50% 0%

OU

TP

UT

- +

100

STOASYSYM CLR

6Linear MIX 1

Mix input

EL

Of fse t

Note:If you are setting up a switch channel mixer of the “S � …” type you must operate the assigned switch to achieve this effect. The vertical line then switches between the left and right sides.

Setting the curve mixers 9 … 12These four curve mixers enable you to defi ne ex-tremely non-linear mixer curves by placing up to six (freely positionable) points between the two end-points “L” (low = -100% control travel) and “H” (high = +100%) along the control travel.If you have already read the description of the »Channel 1 curve« menu, or the method of program-ming eight-point curves in the »Helicopter mixers« menu, you can safely skip the following description.

The programming procedure in detailThe control curve is defi ned by up to eight points, known as “reference points”. In the basic setting three reference points are already defi ned: the two end-points “L” and “H” and point “1”, which is exactly in the centre of the curve – see the next screen-shot.The following section applies to “any” mixer to which we wish to assign a non-linear curve characteristic.The examples shown in the following section are only intended for demonstration purposes, i. e. they do not represent realistic mixer curves.

Curve MIX 9

0%?

OU

TP

UT

-- +

1

100

–45%

108

InputCurve

off PointOutput

Setting reference points

When you move the transmitter control assigned to the mixer input – in this case function 8 – a verti-cal line in the graph follows the movement between the two end-points. The current stick position is also displayed in numerical form in the “Input” line. The point at which this line coincides with the current cur-ve is termed the “Output”, and this point can be va-ried within the range -125% to +125% by setting the reference points (see below). This control signal acts upon the mixer output.In the above example, the transmitter control for input 8 is at -45% travel, but the output signal is still 0%, as no value has been entered at this juncture.Between the two end-points “L” and “H” and the de-fault centre point (Point 1) it is possible to set a ma-ximum of four reference points. However, if you fi rst erase reference point “1” in the centre, you can set up to six reference points; please note that the spacing between adjacent reference points must be no less

140 Program description: Mixers

ve value within the range -125% to +125%, without affecting the adjacent reference points.

Example:

+90%

OU

TP

UT

-- +

2 100

1 3+90%0%

108

2

Curve MIX 9

InputCurve

off PointOutput

In this example the reference point “2” is set to +90%.Pressing the CLEAR button erases the marked refe-rence point.

Note:If the stick does not coincide with the exact reference point, please note that the percentage value in the “Output” line always relates to the current stick positi-on, rather than the reference point position.

Alternatively you can skip in the upward or downward direction straight to reference points that have already been set by turning the rotary control when pressed in; the number of the addressed point 1 … max. 6 is always highlighted in the graph. When you release the rotary control, the reference point can then be altered as described previously, completely independently of the position of the transmitter control.

Kurve0%

OU

TP

UT

-- +

2 100

3+90%0%

108

11

Curve MIX 9

InputCurve

off PointOutput

Tr im pointQuit = ESC

Pressing the ESC button concludes this trim point function.

Rounding off the curve

This curve profi le is “jagged”, but it can easily be rounded off automatically simply by pressing a button. Press the ENTER button adjacent to the “curve sym-bol” :

+90%

OU

TP

UT

-- +

2 100

1 3+90%0%

108

2

Curve MIX 9

InputCurve

on PointOutput

You will fi nd typical examples of “real world” applicati-ons amongst the programming examples (pages 182 or 190).

Examples:1. We will assume that you have already assigned

the switch SW 7 to control channel 8 in the »Transmitter control adjust« menu, and are using it to operate the aero-tow release using a servo connected to receiver output 8.

Subsequent aero-tow fl ying has shown that you al-ways have to hold in slight up-elevator during the tow. The solution here is to set up a mixer which applies slight up-elevator trim to the elevator servo connected to receiver output 3 when the aero-tow release is closed. The screen-shot will be familiar from page 135: in this case the fourth linear mixer has been set up for this function, with the switch channel “S” as mixer input. Now move the selected switch to the mixer OFF position …

EL 6IC1 EL =>

8 10S EL 7

SEL �� SELSEL

Tr6

G4on =>off

=>=>

type from to Adjust

LinearMIX 1LinearMIXLinearMIXLinearMIX

234

… and select the � symbol to move to the second

than about 25%.Now move the appropriate transmitter control, and as soon as the highlighted question mark ? appears, you can place a reference point at the corresponding stick position by pressing the rotary control. The order in which you generate the additional points is not sig-nifi cant, as the reference points are automatically re-numbered continuously from left to right in any case.

Example:

0%?

OU

TP

UT

-- +

1

100

2–45%

108Curve MIX 9

InputCurve

off PointOutput

With the transmitter control in this position you could now defi ne the 3rd reference point between “L” and “H”.

Erasing reference points

If you wish to erase one of the set reference points between “L” and “H”, move the stick to the reference point in question. The reference point number and the associated reference point value (“OUTPUT”) are displayed in the “Point” line. Press the CLEAR but-ton to erase the point. The selected reference point is erased, and the numbering of the remaining refe-rence points is updated.Note that the reference points “L” and “H” cannot be erased.

Changing the reference point values

To change the reference point values move the stick to the reference point to be varied: “L, 1 … max. 6 or H”.The screen displays the number of this point and its current curve value. Place the rotary control in the highlighted fi eld, and you can change the current cur-

141Program description: Mixers

page of the screen display. Select STO using the rotary control, then press the rotary control briefl y … the offset value now jumps to +100% or -100%, depending on the switch position you have selec-ted.

Move to ASY using the rotary control, operate the selected switch to the mixer ON position, and en-ter the required mixer input after a brief press on the rotary control.

2. The airborne glowplug energizer of a power mo-del is connected to receiver output 8. The pilot wi-shes to be able to switch the unit on and off by ra-dio, but also to switch it on and off automatically at a particular position of the C1 stick in order to im-prove the motor’s idling characteristics:

The fi rst step is to defi ne a logical switch, in our example “L1”, by combining a switch of your choice with a control switch, e. g. “G1”, which is al-ready pre-defi ned on the C1 stick, using an AND link. (The control switch is assigned by activating the switch assignment, then moving the C1 stick back towards you from its centre position beyond the switching point.) For more information on this please refer to the »Logical switches« menu on page 97.

Leave both the stick and the selected switch in the “ON” position: this means that “L1” is also closed due to the AND link:

L1L2 L2L3L4

SEL

L1

L3L4

��

7 G1L O G I C A L S W I T C H E S

AND

ANDAND

AND

Now comes the second step: defi ne a switch channel mixer “S” to “8” (for example), and assign the previously defi ned – and still closed – “logical switch” to this mixer as the switch; in our example this is “L1”:

SEL��

8S =>L1 on

SELSELSEL

?? ???? ???? ??

- - - -- - - -- - - -

LinearMIX 5LinearMIXLinearMIXLinearMIX

678

from to Adjusttype

Now move to the second page of the screen dis-play and set a SYMmetrical mixer value in such a way that the glowplug energizer is reliably swit-ched “on”, and switched “off” when you move the stick forward past the switching point or operate the assigned switch.

3. The fi nal example applies to model helicopters: In the Helicopter program you wish to assign one

of the (still unused) INC / DEC transmitter but-tons, e. g. CONTROL 5, to the collective pitch trim function. Start by assigning this transmitter cont-rol to, say, input 8 in the »Transmitter control ad-just« menu, and then defi ne a free mixer 8 � 1 with a symmetrical mixer ratio of – typically – 25%. Due to the internal coupling, this transmitter con-trol then acts equally on all of the model’s collec-tive pitch servos without affecting the throttle ser-vo. However, you should also disengage the assi-gned transmitter control from control channel 8 in the »MIX only channel« menu, to ensure that any servo connected to receiver output 8 (in our case) can no longer be operated by this transmitter cont-rol; see also page 43.

Note:Of course, you could also use the left-hand side-mounted proportional control 10, which is unused by default, for the purposes of trimming. Howe-ver, in contrast to the digital INC / DEC buttons this does not store the settings separately for each fl ight phase; see also page 28.

142 Program description: Mixers

MIX active/phase

Mixers variable separately in fl ight phases

MIX-only channel

Separating control functions from control channels for each fl ight phase

LinearMIX

SEL«Normal » ��

6C1

8S

ELEL 10EL

M I X A C T I V E I N P H A S E

no

yesLinearMIXLinearMIXLinearMIX

yes

yes

1234

Curve MIXCurve MIXCurve MIXCurve MIX

SEL«Normal » ��

??

X Y nonoui??

??

????

??

oui

oui

M I X A C T I V E I N P H A S E9

101112

The “free mixers” of the previous menu can be disab-led and activated separately in individual fl ight pha-ses. You can therefore assign particular mixers to indi-vidual fl ight phases without any restrictions.Switch to the fl ight phase in question, and leaf through this menu with the rotary control pressed in. The mixers of the »Free mixers« menu are displayed in the centre column.If you select the SEL fi eld, give the rotary control a brief press, and set the mixer in the right-hand co-lumn to “no”, then it is switched off in the fl ight phase displayed at the bottom, and will not appear in the list in the »Free mixers« menu. If you “lose” a mixer from the list, simply select the fl ight phases in turn until it re-appears … alternatively move to this menu and temporarily re-activate the mixer you are seeking.

M I X O N LY C H A N N E L

MIXonlynormal

1 2 3 5 6 7 8 9 11124 10

In this menu you can interrupt the normal, direct sig-nal fl ow between the control function on the input side and the associated control channel at the output side, i. e. you separate the “classic” connection between transmitter control and servo.A particular use of this facility of the fl ight phase inde-pendent menu might be as a means of reliably kee-ping one of the control channels 5 … 8 “free” in all fl ight phases, as these channels can be assigned to a transmitter control or switch for individual fl ight pha-ses in the »Transmitter control adjust« menu.Of course, the opposite is also possible: a stick, trans-mitter control (CONTROL 5 … CONTROL 10) or switch (SW 1 … 4, 7) which has, we might say, lost its servo – perhaps in specifi c fl ight phases – can also be used as a transmitter control in some other way; for example, as described in the programming ex-amples on the right, and on pages 173 and 182.The stick, transmitter control (CONTROL 5 … CON-TROL 10) or switch (SW 1 … 4, 7) which has “lost its servo” after its channel was set to “MIX only” now only acts on mixer inputs …… and the servo connected to a channel set to “MIX only” can also only be accessed by means of mixers programmed to its control channel. That is why the term “Mix only” (only available via mixers) is used to describe this function.If any channel is set to “Mix only”, it is then possible to exploit both its control function and also its control channel for any special functions you require – com-pletely independently of each other; for more details see the examples at the end of this section.

Using the rotary control, select channel 1 to 12 (�) and give the rotary control a brief press to switch bet-ween “MIX only” ( ) and “normal” ( ).

Typical setting:

1 2 3 5 6 7 8 9 11124 10

M I X O N LY C H A N N E L

MIXonlynormal

Examples:• If you have a model glider which does not feature

airbrakes, the butterfl y (“crow”) function (see page 119) can be set up to act as a landing aid, opera-ted by the C1 stick (for example), as is usual with “normal” airbrakes. The (airbrake) servo normally connected to channel 1 is now generally not pre-sent, but receiver output 1 is still not “free”, as the control signal of the brake stick is present at that point.

In our particular case this control signal is not re-quired, and can be de-coupled from control chan-nel “1”, which “frees” it from the signal of the C1 stick. This is accomplished by setting channel 1 to “MIX only” in the »MIX only channel« menu. It is now possible to use control channel 1, and there-fore also receiver socket 1, in any way for another purpose by means of freely programmable mixers, e. g. to control a speed controller.

• In contrast, if your model features conventional air-brakes and you wish to be able to try out the but-terfl y (crow) system with and without the airbrakes extended, then simply set C1 to “MIX only” and program a free mixer “C1 � C1”, in order to cont-rol the airbrakes via servo 1. This mixer could then be switched on and off by assigning a mixer switch for the purpose.

143For your notes

144 Program description: Mixers

D U A L M I X E RMixer 0%

Diff.SEL �

�

? ? ? ? 0%

SEL

? ? ? ? 0%

SEL

? ? ? ?MixerMixer

123

The four dual mixers are designed for coupling two channels together to provide same-sense “� �” and opposite-sense “� �” mixing, as required for a V-tail, for example. However, these mixers can be used with any channels, with the option of differential travel for the opposed function.In software terms this type of “dual mixer” is imple-mented as standard for fl aperons as well as V-tail, with the two aileron servos connected to receiver out-puts 2 + 5, and the two pairs of fl ap servos to outputs 6 + 7 and 9 + 10. Flaperons are controlled by the ai-leron stick and the transmitter control which is assig-ned to input “6” in the »Transmitter control adjust« menu. Any further “… � 2” mixer which you set up then operates the two ailerons as ailerons, while a “… � 5” mixer operates them as fl aps, i. e. moves them in the same direction. Similarly, a free mixer “… � 6” operates both fl aps as fl aps, while a “… � 7” mixer operates them as ailerons; see page 137.The four dual mixers in this menu can also be used to couple together two other receiver outputs in the same way; a process which would normally require more complex programming involving free mixers.At this point we will give an example of this type of programming (see also the examples on pages 173 and 184):Large scale gliders often feature six wing control sur-faces – sometimes even eight – rather than four, all of which are required to have superimposed aileron / fl ap functions. In our example the two additional wing fl aps are connected to receiver outputs 11 and 12.Start by selecting one of the dual mixers with the ro-

Dual mixer

Same-sense / opposite-sense coupling of two channels

tary control pressed in. After a brief press on the rota-ry control in the left-hand SEL fi eld, enter Output “11” in the highlighted �??� fi eld using the rotary cont-rol, and enter Output “12” in the same way, using the middle SEL fi eld:

12 0%

Diff.SELSEL �

�

11? ? ? ? 0%

SEL

? ? ? ? 0%

D U A L M I X E RMixer MixerMixer

123

Note:The symbols “� �” and “� �” indicate that the corresponding inputs act upon the servos coupled by the mixer in the same and opposed directions re-spectively – they do not indicate the direction of ser-vo rotation! If the second control surface moves in the wrong “sense” (direction), simply interchange the two inputs, or use the servo reverse facility in the »Servo adjustment« menu; see page 74.

In the right-hand column you should now defi ne the “degree of differential”, using the method described in the »Wing mixers« menu (see page 110). The effect of this function is to reduce the travel of the down-go-ing wing fl ap compared with the full travel of the fl ap on the opposite wing when an aileron command is gi-ven. This process generates exactly the dual coupling for servos 11 + 12 which is required for this arrange-ment.(Pressing CLEAR erases the dual mixer, and / or re-sets the degree of differential to 0%.)The two additional servos should now “follow” servos 2 + 5 as ailerons when an aileron command is given, and should follow servos 6 + 7 as fl aps when a fl ap command is given. To operate this combination cont-rol system all you require is two more free mixers: Li-nearMIX 1 links the aileron stick to the two servos 11

and 12, and LinearMIX 2 links input 7 to them.Move to the »Free mixers« menu, defi ne two mixers which are not yet in use, e. g. linear mixers 1 + 2, and set them up in the following manner:

Tr 6

?? ?? - - - -?? ?? - - - -

SEL SEL

AI 127 11

�� SEL

=>=>LinearMIX

type

1LinearMIXLinearMIXLinearMIX

234

from to Adjust

(The mixer “AIL � 12” moves these two servos in op-posite directions “� �”, i. e. as ailerons, while the mixer “7 � 11” moves them in the same direction “� �”.)The mixer settings can now be defi ned on the second display page. If you wish, you can assign a switch to the mixer, as shown in this example.We need to be able to operate the two additional con-trol surfaces as fl aps (as well as ailerons), and this is effected by assigning the same transmitter cont-rol to the fl ight phase specifi c input 8 in the »Trans-mitter control adjust« menu as to input 6 (note that “Input 7” is automatically de-coupled from “servo 7” if you select “2 AIL 2/4 FL” in the “Ailerons / fl aps” line of the »Model type« menu). We recommend that you assign one of the two IN / DEC buttons 5 or 6 as the transmitter control for both inputs, as their positions are stored separately for each fl ight phase – unlike the side-mounted proportional controls.If you want the fl ap control system to be different in each fl ight phase, you will need to adjust the offset value and possibly also the travel in the »Transmitter control adjust« menu. However, the degree of diffe-rential can only be set to one value, since the “Dual mixers” cannot be programmed separately for diffe-rent fl ight phases.

145Program description: Mixers

Tip:You can check all the settings directly by calling up the »Servo display« menu.

Further typical applications:• Model with two rudders, with differential travel and

outward movement as airbrakes (e. g. swept-back fl ying wing):

Dual mixer 1: “� 8�” and “�RU�”, Diff. = -75%. When a rudder command is given, the second

servo, connected to receiver output 8, follows the movement of the fi rst rudder servo (with this me-thod of programming it is possible to set differenti-al travel for the two rudders). In this case the rud-der stick trim lever affects both servos. If the rud-ders are also required to defl ect outwards when the airbrakes are extended, then you should as-sign the C1 stick (transmitter control 1) to Input 8 in the »Transmitter control adjust« menu. Now move to the “Offset” column, and adjust the Offset value until both rudders return to the neutral posi-tion. You may have to “play” a little with the offset and travel settings to obtain the results you desire.

• V-tail with differential rudder travel: In the »Model type« menu you MUST enter the

tail type as “normal” for this application. Dual mixer 1: “�EL�” and “�RU�”, Diff. (typical-

ly) = -75% Both servos operate either as elevators or rudders

according to the way the transmitter controls are moved. The differential travel is only effective when a rudder command is given, in accordance with the channel assignment of the dual mixer. In this case both trim levers are effective. No additional free mixers are required for this arrangement.

SEL

S W A S H M I X E RPitch + 61%Rol lPi tch ax.

�

+ 61%+ 61%

In the »Helicopter type« menu you have already de-fi ned the number of servos which are installed in your helicopter for collective pitch control; see page 72. With this information the mx-24s program automati-cally couples together the functions for roll, pitch-axis and collective pitch as required, so that you do not need to defi ne any additional mixers yourself.If you have a model helicopter which only has a sing-le collective pitch servo, this menu point is – of course – superfl uous, since the three swashplate servos for collective pitch, pitch-axis and roll are controlled inde-pendently of each other. In this case the swashplate mixer menu does not appear in the multi-function list. With all other swashplate linkages employing 2 … 4 collective pitch servos, the mixer ratios and directions are set up by default, as can be seen in the screen-shot above. The pre-set value is 61% in each case, but the value can be varied within the range -100% to +100% if required, after a brief press on the rota-ry control.(Pressing CLEAR = 61%.)If the swashplate control system (collective pitch, roll and pitch-axis) does not respond to the transmit-ter sticks in the way you expected, then the fi rst step should always be to change the mixer directions (+ or -), before you attempt to correct the directions of servo rotation.HEIM mechanics with two collective pitch servos:

• the collective pitch mixer acts on the two collective pitch servos connected to receiver sockets 1 + 2;

• the roll mixer also acts on the two collective pitch

Swashplate mixer

Collective pitch, roll and pitch-axis mixers

servos, but the direction of rotation of one servo is reversed, and

• the pitch-axis mixer acts on the pitch-axis servo alone.

Note:Check carefully that the servos do not strike their me-chanical end-stops if you change the servo mixer va-lues.

146

Fail-safe adjust

Fail-safe in the “PCM20” transmission mode

F A I L S A F E (PCM20)

Timehold

SEL SEL

Battery F.S.off

This menu appears in the multi-function list ONLY IF YOU HAVE SELECTED THE PCM20 TRANSMISSI-ON MODE. This mode of operation must be pre-set in the »Base setup model« menu, which is model me-mory specifi c. The PCM20 transmission mode can be used with all receivers with “mc” in the designation (mc-12, mc-18, mc-20, DS 20 mc, etc.).Fail-safe programming for SPCM20 and APCM24 mo-des will be discussed in the next section.In this menu you can defi ne the behaviour of the re-ceiver when a problem occurs in the radio link bet-ween the transmitter and the receiver, and you can also exploit the option of moving one servo to a parti-cular position when the voltage of the receiver battery falls below a certain value (“Battery Fail-Safe”).

Fail-safe and interference

The operational security of Pulse Code Modulati-on (PCM) is inherently higher than that of simple Pul-se Position Modulation (PPM), since the receiver in-corporates an integral micro-processor which is ca-pable of processing control signals even when picked up in a “dirty” state. Only if the signals are incorrect or garbled due to outside interference does the recei-ver automatically replace the invalid signal with the last received correct signal, which is stored in the re-ceiver. This time-limited “hold-mode” procedure sup-presses brief interference caused by local drops in fi eld strength and similar momentary problems, which otherwise result in the familiar “glitches”.

Caution:We strongly recommend that you exploit the safe-

Program description: Special functions

ty potential inherent in the use of the PCM trans-mission modes PCM, SPCM and APCM by at least setting the throttle to move to idle (glow motor) or the motor to stop completely (electric motor) if Fail-Safe is triggered. If interference should occur with these settings, it is much less likely that the model will wreak havoc and cause personal injury or property damage if the model is on the ground.

If you have selected a PCM transmission mode for the current model memory but have not yet carried out the fail-safe programming, you will see a warning message on the screen when you switch the transmit-ter on. The message remains on-screen in the basic display for a few seconds:

Model name#01 0:35h PCM20H-J.Sandbrunner

9.5V 2:50h C620 0 0 0

SF

0 000 00::

Fai l Safesetupt.b.d.

If a longer period of interference affects the radio link between the transmitter and receiver, the PCM20 operating mode offers two optional types of “FAIL-SAFE” programming; you can select your preferred one using the left-hand SEL fi eld:

1. “Hold” mode If you confi rm the left-hand SEL fi eld with a brief

press on the rotary control, and set “hold” in the highlighted fi eld, when interference strikes, the servos stay continuously at the position corres-ponding to the last valid signal until the receiver picks up another signal which it recognises as va-lid.

2. Variable FAIL-SAFE programming with overwri-te (display: “.25s, 0.5s or 1.0s”)

If you set a pre-selected time instead of “hold” mode, the display initially changes as follows:

.25s

SEL SELSTO

F A I L S A F E (PCM20)

Time Battery F.S.off

Position

With this arrangement, “hold” mode is effective when interference initially strikes, but after the set delay has elapsed the servos move to previously determined positions until the receiver again picks up a valid control signal. As soon as the recei-ver detects valid signals again, the “hold” phase or Fail-Safe servo positions are instantly abandoned.

The delay time, i. e. the time from the onset of in-terference to the triggering of FAIL-SAFE mode, can be set to any of three values: 0.25 sec., 0.5 sec. and 1.0 sec. These variations are designed to cater for differing operational conditions.

Pressing CLEAR resets the Fail-Safe setting in the highlighted fi eld to “hold”.

Setting the servo positionsThe FAIL-SAFE servo positions are freely pro-grammable for the receiver outputs 1 … 8.Use the rotary control to select the STO fi eld, then move the servos 1 … 8 to the appropriate po-sitions using the transmitter controls, and brief-ly press the rotary control to store the positions as the “Fail-Safe” settings. This data is transmit-ted to the receiver at regular intervals, so that the receiver can always revert to them if interference should strike.When you store the data by giving the rotary con-trol a brief press, you will see the following brief message on the screen:

147Program description: Special functions

. 25s

SEL SELSTO

Position storedF A I L S A F E (PCM20)

Time Battery F.S.off

Position

The FAIL-SAFE servo positions can be overwrit-ten at any time – even in fl ight – by selecting the appropriate menu and storing the transmitter set-tings anew.

Note:Some PCM receivers feature outputs 9 and 10, but variable Fail-Safe settings are not available for them; both servos move to the centre position if in-terference occurs.

Receiver battery FAIL-SAFE

As soon as the receiver battery voltage falls below a particular value, the servo which is assigned perma-nently to receiver output 1 in the “Battery F.S.” sec-tion of the Fail-Safe menu runs to one of three optio-nal positions, with the intention of indicating to the pi-lot that the receiver battery is failing.

Caution:The “Battery fail-safe” function constitutes a use-ful contribution to fl ying safety, but you should never be tempted to rely upon it as a standard warning of “time to land”, not least because the discharge behaviour of batteries varies widely ac-cording to type, and in any case the characteris-tics of any battery change as the cells age.

You can program any of three positions as the Batte-ry Fail-Safe setting for servo 1, and they are selected using the right-hand SEL fi eld:

• +75% travel in the one direction,• 0% servo centre, or• -75% travel in the opposite direction.

Select your preferred servo position using the rotary control.

.25s

SEL SELSTO

–75%

F A I L S A F E (PCM20)

Time Battery F.S.Position

Pressing the CLEAR button switches the “Battery F.S.” function off.If the battery fail-safe signal is triggered, you can re-gain control of the affected channel by briefl y opera-ting the associated transmitter control (throttle stick, or the transmitter control of a mixer input which af-fects servo 1). This disengages the FAIL-SAFE ser-vo, and it returns to the pilot’s commanded position. If this should occur, you must immediately initiate the landing approach in order to have the best possible chance of landing the model safely.

Note:It is perfectly possible to swap over the receiver outputs in the »Receiver output swap« menu (see page 153), but please note that the Battery Fail-Safe programming always refers to receiver so-cket No. 1, and is not affected by such actions.

W A R N I N G:NEVER, UNDER ANY CIRCUMSTANCES, SWITCH THE TRANSMITTER OFF WHEN YOU ARE FLYING A MODEL AIRCRAFT! IF YOU DO, YOU RUN A SE-RIOUS RISK OF LOSING THE MODEL, AS YOU WILL BE HIGHLY UNLIKELY TO BE ABLE TO RE-ACTIVATE THE RF SIGNAL QUICKLY ENOUGH WHEN YOU SWITCH ON AGAIN, SINCE THE TRANSMITTER ALWAYS RESPONDS WITH THE SECURITY QUERY “RF SIGNAL ON YES / NO” WHEN SWITCHED ON.

148 Program description: Special functions

Fail-safe adjust

Fail-safe in the “SPCM20” transmission mode

F A I L S A F E

Poshold

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

This menu appears in the multi-function list ONLY IF YOU HAVE SELECTED THE SPCM20 TRANSMIS-SION MODE. This mode of operation must be pre-set in the model memory specifi c »Base setup model« menu. The SPCM20 transmission mode can be used with all receivers with “smc” in the type designation (smc-19, smc-20, smc-19 DS, smc-20 DS, etc.).Fail-safe programming for the PCM20 mode is dis-cussed in the previous section; programming for the APCM24 mode can be found on the facing page.The operational security of Pulse Code Modulati-on (PCM) is inherently higher than that of simple Pul-se Position Modulation (PPM), since the receiver in-corporates an integral micro-processor which is ca-pable of processing control signals even when picked up in a “dirty” state. Only if the signals are incorrect or garbled due to outside interference does the recei-ver automatically replace the invalid signal with the last received correct signal, which is stored in the re-ceiver. This time-limited “hold-mode” procedure sup-presses brief interference caused by local drops in fi eld strength and similar momentary problems, which otherwise result in the familiar “glitches”.

Caution:We strongly recommend that you exploit the safe-ty potential inherent in the use of the PCM trans-mission modes PCM, SPCM and APCM by at least setting the throttle to move to idle (glow motor) or the motor to stop completely (electric motor) if Fail-Safe is triggered. If interference should occur with these settings, it is much less likely that the model will wreak havoc and cause personal injury

or property damage if the model is on the ground.If you have selected a PCM transmission mode for the current model memory but have not yet carried out the fail-safe programming, you will see a warning message on the screen when you switch the transmit-ter on. The message remains on-screen in the basic display for a few seconds:

Model name#01 0:37h SPCM20H-J.Sandbrunner

9.5V 2:52h C620 0 0 0

SF

0 000 00::

Fai l Safesetupt.b.d.

The “Fail Safe” function determines the behaviour of the receiver if interference affects the radio link bet-ween the transmitter and the receiver. The SPCM20 operating mode offers two optional types of “FAIL-SAFE” programming; each of the servos 1 … 8 can optionally …

1. … maintain the current position (“Hold” mode) When interference strikes, all the servos set to

“Hold” mode stay continuously at the position cor-responding to the last valid signal, until the recei-ver picks up another signal which it recognises as valid; or …

2. … move to a freely programmable position (“Pos”) if interference should occur.

In contrast to PCM20 mode, the receiver outputs 1 … 8 can be programmed to “Hold” or “Positi-on” mode individually (without a pre-set delay) in SPCM20 mode.

Note that receiver outputs 9 and 10 always remain in “Hold” mode.

Use the rotary control to select channels 1 to 8 in turn (�), and briefl y press the rotary control in order to switch between “Hold” ( ) and “Position” mode ( ):

Poshold

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

STO

F A I L S A F E

Use the rotary control to select the STO fi eld. Now se-lect the servos which you have set to Position mode, move them simultaneously to the appropriate positi-ons using the transmitter controls, and briefl y press the rotary control to store the positions as the “Fail-Safe” settings. This data is transmitted to the recei-ver at regular intervals, so that the receiver can al-ways revert to them if interference should strike. When you store the data by giving the rotary control a brief press, you will see the following message on the screen for a few moments:

Poshold

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

STO

Position stored

F A I L S A F E

W A R N I N G:NEVER, UNDER ANY CIRCUMSTANCES, SWITCH THE TRANSMITTER OFF WHEN YOU ARE FLYING A MODEL AIRCRAFT! IF YOU DO, YOU RUN A SE-RIOUS RISK OF LOSING THE MODEL, AS YOU WILL BE HIGHLY UNLIKELY TO BE ABLE TO RE-ACTIVATE THE RF SIGNAL QUICKLY ENOUGH WHEN YOU SWITCH ON AGAIN, SINCE THE TRANSMITTER ALWAYS RESPONDS WITH THE SECURITY QUERY “RF SIGNAL ON YES / NO” WHEN SWITCHED ON.

148

149Program description: Special functions 149

Fail-safe adjust

Fail-safe in the “APCM24” transmission mode

Poshold

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

F A I L S A F E

This menu appears in the multi-function list ONLY IF YOU HAVE SELECTED THE APCM24 TRANSMIS-SION MODE. This mode of operation must be pre-set in the model memory specifi c »Base setup model« menu. The APCM24 transmission mode can be used with all receivers with “amc” in the type designation.Fail-safe programming for the PCM20 and SPCM mo-des is discussed in the previous section.The operational security of Pulse Code Modulati-on (PCM) is inherently higher than that of simple Pul-se Position Modulation (PPM), since the receiver in-corporates an integral micro-processor which is ca-pable of processing control signals even when picked up in a “dirty” state. Only if the signals are incorrect or garbled due to outside interference does the recei-ver automatically replace the invalid signal with the last received correct signal, which is stored in the re-ceiver. This time-limited “hold-mode” procedure sup-presses brief interference caused by local drops in fi eld strength and similar momentary problems, which otherwise result in the familiar “glitches”.

Caution:We strongly recommend that you exploit the safe-ty potential inherent in the use of the PCM trans-mission modes PCM, SPCM and APCM by at least setting the throttle to move to idle (glow motor) or the motor to stop completely (electric motor) if Fail-Safe is triggered. If interference should occur with these settings, it is much less likely that the model will wreak havoc and cause personal injury or property damage if the model is on the ground.

If you have selected a PCM transmission mode for the current model memory but have not yet carried out the fail-safe programming, you will see a war-ning message on the screen when you switch on the transmitter. The message remains on-screen in the basic display for a few seconds:

Model name#01 0:39h APCM20H-J.Sandbrunner

9.5V 2:54h C620 0 0 0

StFl

Fai l Safesetupt.b.d.

0 000 00::

The “Fail Safe” function determines the behaviour of the receiver if interference affects the radio link bet-ween the transmitter and the receiver. The APCM24 operating mode offers two optional types of “FAIL-SAFE” programming; all the servos can optionally …

1. … maintain the current position (“Hold” mode) When interference strikes, all the servos set to

“Hold” mode stay continuously at the position cor-responding to the last valid signal, until the recei-ver picks up another signal which it recognises as valid; or …

2. … move to a freely programmable position (“Pos”) if interference should occur.

In contrast to PCM20 mode, the receiver outputs 1 … 8 can be programmed to “Hold” or “Positi-on” mode individually (without a pre-set delay) in SPCM20 mode.

Note that receiver outputs 9 and 10 always remain in “Hold” mode.

Use the rotary control to select channels 1 to 8 in turn (�), and briefl y press the rotary control in order to switch between “Hold” ( ) and “Position” mode ( ):

Poshold

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

STO

F A I L S A F E

Use the rotary control to select the STO fi eld. Now se-lect the servos which you have set to Position mode, move them simultaneously to the appropriate positi-ons using the transmitter controls, and briefl y press the rotary control to store the positions as the “Fail-Safe” settings. This data is transmitted to the recei-ver at regular intervals, so that the receiver can al-ways revert to them if interference should strike. When you store the data by giving the rotary control a brief press, you will see the following message on the screen for a few moments:

Poshold

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

STO

Position stored

F A I L S A F E

W A R N I N G:NEVER, UNDER ANY CIRCUMSTANCES, SWITCH THE TRANSMITTER OFF WHEN YOU ARE FLYING A MODEL AIRCRAFT! IF YOU DO, YOU RUN A SE-RIOUS RISK OF LOSING THE MODEL, AS YOU WILL BE HIGHLY UNLIKELY TO BE ABLE TO RE-ACTIVATE THE RF SIGNAL QUICKLY ENOUGH WHEN YOU SWITCH ON AGAIN, SINCE THE TRANSMITTER ALWAYS RESPONDS WITH THE SECURITY QUERY “RF SIGNAL ON YES / NO” WHEN SWITCHED ON.

150

Teacher/pupil

Connecting two transmitters for Trainer mode (teacher / pupil) operations

T E A C H E R / P U P I L

PT

C1� AI EL RU 05 06 07 08 09 10

The mx-24s transmitter features a DSC socket on the rear of the case as standard. This is suitable for connecting a fl ight simulator and the diagnosis lead, Order No. 4178.1 (as described on page 18), and also for integrating the transmitter in a Trainer (tea-cher / pupil) system. The transmitter can also be used in “Teacher” mode if it is fi tted with the optional Tea-cher / PC module, Order No. 3290.22; see Appendix.

Teacher transmitter settings

Up to ten control functions of the Teacher transmitter “T” can be transferred to the Pupil transmitter “P” eit-her individually or in any combination.The bottom line of the screen, marked “T”, indicates the number of the transmitter control which is assig-ned to inputs 1 … 4 (stick functions) and to one of the inputs 4 … 10 in the »Transmitter control adjust« menu.Use the rotary control to select the channels 1 to 10 which you wish to transfer, and press the rotary con-trol briefl y to switch between “T (Teacher)” ( ) and “P (Pupil)” ( ) modes. If, for instance, you wish to transfer control of the four functions on the two dual-axis stick units plus the fl aps to the pupil, and the fl aps are con-trolled on the Teacher transmitter by the right-hand side-mounted proportional control “CTRL 9” assigned to “Input 6”, then you should switch transmitter control numbers 1 to 4 and 9 from “T” to “P”.

PT

01�

02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10

T E A C H E R / P U P I L

Note:The screen-shot on top of the left-hand column shows the display for the “Fixed-wing” model type; the shot above shows the “Helicopter” model type. The only difference lies in the designations of the four functions controlled by the two dual-axis stick units.

To be able to transfer control to the pupil you must as-sign a Trainer switch; this is carried out on the right-hand side of the screen. We advise the use of the momentary switch SW 8, as this allows you to regain control at the Teacher transmitter without any delay, just by releasing it.

PT

01�

02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 8

T E A C H E R / P U P I L

The model to be controlled by the pupil must be programmed completely in one of the Teacher transmitter’s model memories, i. e. with all its func-tions including trims and any mixer functions. The pro-gramming must be carried out at the Teacher trans-mitter because it is this unit which actually controls the model, even in Pupil mode. For this reason the Teacher transmitter can be operated in any of the ty-pes of modulation available.The mx-24s transmitter should now be connected to the Pupil transmitter via the DSC socket and the ap-propriate Trainer lead. PLEASE NOTE: YOU MUST ALWAYS SWITCH THE TRANSMITTER ON FIRST,

AND ONLY THEN PLUG IN THE CONNECTING LEAD. If you do not keep to this sequence, you will have no means of activating the RF module.However, if you use the Teacher / PC module, Order No. 3290.2, the order in which you connect the sys-tem is of no signifi cance.At the end of this chapter you will fi nd a summary of the connecting leads required; more information is in-cluded in the Appendix on page 204.

Pupil transmitter set-up

The following transmitters can be used as the Pu-pil unit: Graupner/JR D14, FM414, FM4014, FM6014, mc-10, mc-12, mx-12, mc-14, mc-15, mc-16, mx-16s, mc-16/20, mc-17, mc-18, mc-19, mc-20, mc-22, mc-22s, mx-22, mc-24 and mx-24s, with four to ten control functions.The Pupil transmitter should be connected to the Tea-cher transmitter using the appropriate lead; see the following double page and page 204 of the Appendix.

Important:The Pupil transmitter MUST ALWAYS be set to operate in PPM mode, regardless of the modulati-on set on the Teacher transmitter: either PPM18 (1 … 9) or PPM24 (1 … 10), according to the number of channels to be transferred. However, if the Pu-pil transmitter is connected using its DSC socket, you must ALWAYS leave the Pupil transmitter’s On / Off switch at the “OFF” position, because this is the only setting in which the transmitter modu-le does not broadcast an RF signal even with the DSC lead plugged in. In this case the transmitter’s basic screen shows the message “DSC” instead of the selected transmitter channel:

150 Program description: Special functions

151151Program description: Special functions

Model name#01 0:30h SPCM20H-J.Sandbrunner

10.2V 0:30h0 0 0 0

Stop watchFlight tim

0 000 00::

DSC

The control functions you wish to transfer MUST act directly on the control channels, i. e. the recei-ver outputs, without the involvement of any type of mixer.If you are using an mc-series or mx-series trans-mitter, it is best to activate a free model memory and use that memory in its base setting, with the approp-riate model type (“Fixed-wing” or “Helicopter”) selec-ted. Assign the name “Pupil” to this memory, and set up the stick mode (Mode 1 … 4) and “Throttle forward / back” to suit the pupil’s preference. Leave all other settings at the basic default values. If you have se-lected the “Helicopter” model type, you must also set the throttle / collective pitch direction and idle trim on the Pupil transmitter. All other settings, including mi-xer and coupling functions, are entered exclusively at the Teacher transmitter, which in turn transfers them to the model.With “D” and “FM” type transmitters you must also check the direction of servo rotation and stick mode, and make corrections if necessary by re-connecting the leads inside the transmitter. All other mixers must be switched off or set to “zero”.When assigning the control functions the usual con-ventions must be observed:

Channel Function

1 Throttle / Collective pitch

2 Aileron / Roll

3 Elevator / Pitch-axis

4 Rudder / Tail rotor

If you wish to be able to transfer auxiliary control functions to the Pupil transmitter as well as the func-tions of the two dual-axis sticks (1 … 4), move to the »Transmitter control adjust« of the Pupil transmitter and assign transmitter controls to those inputs which correspond to the transmitter control numbers 4 … 10 which are to be transferred. In the above example – control of camber-changing fl aps using transmitter control 9 – an (unused) transmitter control should be assigned at the Pupil transmitter to “Input 9”. At the Pupil transmitter you can even assign an (external) switch, if the Pupil transmitter offers this facility. Ho-wever, in this case the relevant function can only be switched between two or three positions, e. g. for swit-ching a motor on and off. (If you neglect to assign a transmitter control at the Pupil transmitter, the corre-sponding control signal remains in its centre position when control is transferred to the Pupil transmitter.)

Trainer mode operations

Link the two transmitters using the appropriate lead (see summary in the right-hand column): the plug marked “M” (Master) must be inserted in the socket on the Teacher transmitter, and the plug marked “S” (Student) in the Pupil transmitter’s socket.

Important note:The ends of the Trainer lead you are using are marked “S” or “M”; they can be identifi ed by the three-pole barrel plugs. On no account connect one of these to a DSC system socket, as it is not suitable for this application.

Checking the system

Operate the Trainer switch you have assigned:

• If the Trainer system is working correctly, the dis-play changes from “�T” to “�P”.

• If you see the following warning message …

… both in the “Trainer” menu and in the basic dis-play, and the screen shows “-P” on the left of the “Trainer” menu, then there is a problem in the link between the Pupil transmitter and the Teacher transmitter; you will also be alerted to the problem by an audible warning. If this should happen, all functions are transferred automatically to the Tea-cher transmitter regardless of the switch position, to ensure that the model is never out of control.

Possible faults:• Interface in Pupil transmitter not connected cor-

rectly in place of the RF module• Pupil transmitter not ready for use• Pupil transmitter not set to PPM mode• Light-pipe not connected properly• Light-pipe lead loose in plug: If this should happen,

press lightly on the end of the connector (1) to re-lease the light-pipe clamp mechanism in the “S” or “M” connector, then push the light-pipe lead (2) in as far as it will go.

In later versions of the sys-tem the light-pipe lead is secured by a crimped screw arrangement.

Check that there is no dirt or dust in the openings of the light-pipe.

• Incorrect cable connection: select the appropriate lead from the table on the next page.

2

1

No pupil signal

152 Program description: Special functions

Pupil transmitter with DSC socket

Pupil transmitter with Pupil module, Order No. 3290.3, 3290.10, 3290.33

Trainer lead, Or-der No. 4179.1

Trainer lead, Or-der No. 3290.7

D 14, FM 414, FM 4014, FM 6014, mc-10 ... mc-24, mx-22

Teacher transmitter with DSC socket

Teacher transmitter with Teacher module, Order No. 3290.2, 3290.19,

3290.22

mx-12, mx-16s, mx-24s mc-19 bis mc-24, mx-22, mx-24s

Trainer lead, Or-der No. 4179.1

Trainer lead, Or-der No. 3290.8

S

M

mx-24s Teacher transmitter

mx-24s Pupil transmitter

mx-12, mx-16s, mx-22, mx-24s and – if fi tted with the DSC socket, Order No. 3290.24 – mc-19, mc-22s and mc-24

S

M

mx-24s Teacher transmitter with Tea-cher / PC module, Order No. 3290.22

Trainer light-pipe lead, Order No. 3290.4 or ECO-lead, Order No. 3290.5

Trainer leads(see also the Appendix, page 204)

4179.1 for Trainer mode operations with the mx-24s in con-junction with any other GRAUPNER transmitter fi tted with a DSC socket.

(identifi able by the two-pole barrel plugs at both ends)

3290.4 Light-pipe lead for transmitters with the opto-electronic Trainer system.

(identifi able by the relatively stiff “cable” with three-pole barrel plugs at both ends)

3290.5 ECO Trainer lead for opto-electronic Trainer system.

(identifi able by the high-fl ex co-axial cable with three-pole barrel plugs at both ends)

3290.7 Trainer lead for connecting a Teacher transmitter with DSC socket (e. g. mx-12, mx-16s, mx-24s) to a GRAUPNER pupil transmitter with opto-electronic Pu-pil socket

(identifi able by the “S” marking on the side of the three-pole barrel plug)

3290.8 Trainer lead for connecting an mx-24s Pupil transmit-ter to a GRAUPNER Teacher transmitter with Teacher socket for the opto-electronic system.

(identifi able by the “M” marking on the side of the three-pole barrel plug)

For more information regarding Trainer leads please turn to the next page. More detailed information about the opto-electro-nic modules for the Teacher and Pupil transmitters mentioned in this section are included in the instructions provided with your transmitter, and in the main GRAUPNER FS catalogue.

General notes on Trainer mode operations

The DSC socket which is installed as standard, the optional Teacher / PC module and the various leads make it possible to transfer all functions or programmable single or multiple func-tions to a suitable Pupil transmitter. When you connect the Tea-cher transmitter to a Pupil transmitter using the Trainer lead, note that the plug marked “M” (Master) must be connected to

153Program description: Special functions

For maximum fl exibility in terms of receiver socket as-signment, the mx-24s program provides a means of swapping over the servo outputs 1 to max. 12.With this option you can distribute the transmitter’s twelve “control channels” to any of the receiver out-puts, i. e. to servo sockets 1 … 12 respectively. Ho-wever, please note that the display in the »Servo dis-play« menu refers exclusively to the “Control chan-nels”, i. e. it does not take any interchanged outputs into account.

R E C E I V E R O U T P U TS e r v oS e r v oS e r v oS e r v o

SEL �

O u t p u t 1234

O u t p u tO u t p u tO u t p u t

1234

Hold the rotary control pressed in to select the line of the servo / output combination you wish to change. After a brief press on the rotary control you can now assign the desired “servo” to the selected “recei-ver” output using the rotary control in the highligh-ted fi eld … or restore the default assignment by pres-sing CLEAR. Any subsequent changes, such as ser-vo travel adjustments, Dual Rates / Expo, mixers etc., must still correspond to the original receiver as-signment!Typical applications:• If you wish to use a small receiver with six or even

just four servo sockets, it may be necessary to swap over the receiver sockets in order to operate a second camber-changing fl ap, a second aileron servo or a speed controller.

• If you are using a model set up for another make* of equipment, it may also prove necessary to swap servos for Trainer mode operations, to avoid ha-ving to re-connect the servos at the receiver.

• In the helicopter program of the mx-24s the out-puts for one collective pitch servo and the thrott-

le servo have been interchanged compared to cer-tain earlier GRAUPNER/JR mc-systems:

The throttle servo is now assigned to receiver out-put “6” and the collective pitch servo to output “1”. You may therefore wish to retain the earlier confi -guration. In this case you will need to program out-puts 1 and 6 as shown in the screen-shot printed below:

Notes:• If you wish to swap over the receiver outputs, ple-

ase remember that the Fail-Safe programming “Hold” and “Pos.” in SPCM and APCM mode al-ways refers to the “outputs”, i. e. the receiver’s so-cket numbers.

• Note also that the servo position displays in the »Servo display« menu also refer to the “servo number” or “control channel number”, and not to the receiver outputs, which you may have chan-ged.

* GRAUPNER does not guarantee that GRAUPNER radio cont-rol systems will work correctly in conjunction with receiving sys-tems and radio control equipment made by other manufacturers.

S e r v o 6S e r v o 2S e r v o 3S e r v o 4S e r v o 5S e r v o 1 6

SEL ��

R E C E I V E R O U T P U TO u t p u t 1

234

O u t p u tO u t p u tO u t p u t

5O u t p u tO u t p u t

Rx. output swap

Altering the servo sequence

the Teacher module, and the plug marked “S” (Stu-dent) to the Pupil module.The individual functions to be transferred are selected in the Teacher transmitter’s »Teacher/pupil« menu (see page 150), which can be operated in any of the following modes: PPM10, PPM18, PPM24, PCM20, SPCM20 or APCM24.

Suitable Pupil transmitters

D 14, FM 414, FM 4014, FM 6014, mc-10, mc-12, mx-12 mc-14, mc-15, mc-16, mx-16s, mc-16/20, mc-17, mc-18, mc-19, mc-20, mc-22, mc-22s, mx-22, mc-24 and mx-24s.The Pupil transmitter must always be set to operate in PPM mode.If you are using an mc-series or mx-series trans-mitter, it is best to activate a free model memory and use that memory in its base setting, with the appropri-ate model type (“Fixed-wing” or “Helicopter”) selected. Assign the name “Pupil” to this memory, and set up the stick mode (Mode 1 … 4) to suit the pupil’s prefe-rence. All other settings should be left at their default values. If you select the “Fixed-wing” model type it is permissible to set “Throttle forward / back” in the “Mo-tor” line of the »Model type« menu. If you have se-lected the “Helicopter” model type, you must also set the throttle / collective pitch direction and idle trim on the Pupil transmitter. All other settings, including mi-xer and coupling functions, are entered exclusively at the Teacher transmitter, which in turn transfers them to the model.If you are using one of the following transmitters: D14, FM414, FM4014, FM6014, FM6014 / PCM 18, you must also check the direction of servo rotation and stick mode, and make corrections if necessary by re-connecting the leads inside the transmitter. All other mixers must be switched off or set to “zero”.

154

Basic settings

Basic transmitter settings

In this menu you can adjust and enter the basic gene-ral settings which refer to the transmitter overall, e. g. the owner’s name, but also pre-sets for newly set-up model memories.Select the relevant line with the rotary control pressed in, then press the rotary control briefl y.The presets …

• “Stick mode”,• “Modulation”, • “Collective pitch min.”

… which you set in this menu are automatically ad-opted in any “free” model memory when you initiali-se it, i. e. use it for the fi rst time. However, these set-tings can be changed subsequently using the follo-wing menus: »Base setup model« and »Helicopter type«. Changes to the “presets” in this menu there-fore only affect model memories which you initialise in the future.

Note:The settings you enter in this menu are only entered once, and apply to the whole of the transmitter. When a model memory is initialised, the current settings in this menu are adopted in that memory.

Owner’s name

At this point you can enter a name with a maximum of 15 characters. Hold the rotary control pressed in to switch to the next screen page (�) …

<H-J Sandbru n

! “ # $ % & ´ ( ) * + , - . / 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 : ; < = > ? @ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ[¥]^_` a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o p q r s t u v w x y z { } ~

n

cN

ÇüéâäàåçêëèïîìÄÅÉæÆôöòûùÿÖÜ n

– > Owners name

… where you can enter the owner’s name by selec-ting letters from the character list. Use the rotary con-trol to select the character or symbol, and press the rotary control briefl y (or press and turn it) to accept the chosen character and move on to the next positi-on. You can move to each character within the name by holding the rotary control pressed in; (the screen shows a double arrow “<-->” at the appropriate posi-tion). Pressing CLEAR inserts a space character at that point.

Preset stick mode

Basically there are four possible ways of arranging the principal control functions on the two dual-axis sticks: the primary functions are aileron, elevator, rud-der and throttle (or airbrakes) for a fi xed-wing model, and roll, pitch-axis, tail rotor and throttle / collective pitch on a model helicopter. Which of these possible options you select depends on your individual prefe-rences and fl ying style.At the bottom edge of the screen you will see SEL. Press the rotary control briefl y, then select one of the options 1 to 4. Pressing CLEAR resets the function to

stick mode “1”.

Note:In the fi xed-wing program the direction of effect of the C1 stick can be changed individually in the »Model type« menu.

Fixed-wing stick modes

Helicopter stick modes

154 Program description: Global functions

GENERAL BASIC SETTINGSOwners namePre-set stick modePre-set modulation

Power-on beepBattery warningOwn phase name

Pre-set min. pitch

��

1SPCM20

yes9.3V

forwrdDisplay light unlim.

<

1 < >2 < >3 < >4 < >5 < >6 < >7 < >8 < >9 < >

10 < >

>

Own phase nameOwn phase nameOwn phase nameOwn phase nameOwn phase nameOwn phase nameOwn phase nameOwn phase nameOwn phase name

Full-throttle

Rud

der R

udder

Motor idle

Down-elevator

Up-elevator

Aile

ron A

ileron

Down-elevator

Up-elevator

Rud

der R

udder

Full-throttle

Motor idle

Aile

ron

Aileron

»MODE 1«(Throttle right)

»MODE 2«(Throttle left)

Full-throttle

Aile

ron

Aileron

Motor idle

Down-elevator

Up-elevator

Rud

der R

udder

Down-elevator

Up-elevator

Aile

ron A

ileron

Full-throttle

Motor idle

Rud

der R

udder

»MODE 3«(Throttle right)

»MODE 4«(Throttle left)

min. Pitch

Tail

roto

r Tail rotor

max. Pitch

Pitch-axis

Pitch-axis

Rol

l Roll

Pitch-axis

Pitch-axis

Tail

roto

r Tail rotor

min. Pitch

max. Pitch

Rol

l Roll

»MODE 1«(Pitch right)

»MODE 2«(Pitch left)

155

Pre-set modulation

The mx-24s differentiates between six different types of modulation:

1. PCM20: System resolution of 512 steps per chan-nel, for “mc” or “DS mc” type PCM receivers.

2. SPCM20: Super PCM modulation with high sys-tem resolution of 1024 steps per control function, for “smc” type receivers and the “R330”.

3. APCM24: Super PCM modulation with high sys-tem resolution of 1024 steps per control function, for “amc” type receivers, for up to twelve servos.

4. PPM10: Fast PPM transmission mode for Pico re-ceivers with up to fi ve servos, as used in RC cars, slow-fl y models, small helicopters, etc..

5. PPM18: Most widely used transmission mode (FM or FMsss) for all other GRAUPNER/JR PPM-FM receivers.

6. PPM24: PPM multi-servo transmission mode for simultaneous operation of twelve servos; for “DS 24 FM S” receiver.

Pressing CLEAR switches to the default “SPCM20” modulation type.

Pre-set min. pitch (model helicopters only)

At this point you can defi ne the operating direction of the throttle / collective pitch stick in the Helicopter programs; it should be selected to suit your preferred method of controlling your models. This is very impor-

tant, as the function of all the other options in the he-licopter program depends upon it, in so far as they af-fect the throttle and collective pitch functions, i. e. the throttle curve, idle trim, Channel 1 � tail rotor mixer etc.Key to settings:“forwrd”: minimum collective pitch setting when the

collective pitch stick (C1) is forward (away from you)

“back”: minimum collective pitch setting when the collective pitch stick (C1) is back (towards you).

Pressing CLEAR resets to “forward”.

Note:The direction of operation of the C1 stick for the fi xed-wing program can be reversed individually in the »Channel 1 curve« menu (see page 92), or – prefe-rably – in the »Model type« menu.

Display light

In this line you can determine how long the screen backlighting stays on when the transmitter is switched on, or after you press a button or operate the rotary control.The options are 30, 60, 120 seconds or “unlimited”.Pressing CLEAR switches the setting to “unlimited”.

Power-on beep

In this line you can switch the transmitter’s power-on beep on (“yes”) or off (“no”).Pressing CLEAR switches to “yes”.

Battery warning

In this line you can set the voltage threshold for the following warning display …

155Program description: Global functions

… within the range 9.3 to 11 V in increments of 0.1 Volts. Please don’t be tempted to set a very low value here, as you need plenty of time to land your model safely if the battery warning is triggered.Pressing CLEAR switches to “9.3 V”.

Own phase name 1 … 10

You can enter up to ten of your own phase names, each with a maximum of seven characters, drawn from a character list. These names are then availab-le in addition to the default phase names in all model memories.We recommend that you start with the “User’s phase name 1” line when entering your own phase names.A brief press on the rotary control takes you to the character table.

Own phase name A

! “ # $ % & ´ ( ) * + ,- . / 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 : ; < = > ?@ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ[¥]^_` a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o p q r s t u v w x y z { } ~c

N

Çüéâäàåçêëèïî ìÄÅÉæÆôöòûùÿÖÜ

1 < >--

Use the rotary control to select the desired character in the highlighted character fi eld. A brief press on the rotary control (or turning it whilst pressed in) switches to the next position, at which you can select the ap-propriate character.Pressing CLEAR inserts a space character at that point.Hold the rotary control pressed in to move to each character within the name. The next space is indica-ted by a double arrow <--> in the bottom line.

Batt must be re- charged!!

min. Pitch

Rol

l Roll

max. Pitch

Pitch-axis

Pitch-axis

Tail

roto

r Tail rotor

Pitch-axis

Pitch-axis

Rol

l Roll

min. Pitch

max. Pitch

Tail

roto

r Tail rotor

»MODE 3«(Pitch right)

»MODE 4«(Pitch left)

156 Program description: Global functions

Servo display

Display of servo positions

1 -100% 2 0%3 +100% 4 0%5 0% 6 -125%7 0% 8 0%9 0% 10 0%

11 0% 12 0%

In this display the current position of each servo is shown accurately in bar diagram form, covering the range -150% to +150% of normal travel. The display takes into account the transmitter control settings, the servo settings, the Dual Rate / Expo functions etc.. A setting of 0% corresponds to the exact servo centre point.You can move to the »Servo display« by selecting this menu, but you can also call it up directly from the basic display and from virtually any menu by pressing the HELP button with the rotary control held pressed in.

Notes:• To avoid programming errors, any changes you

make to the receiver output sequence in the »Re-ceiver output swap« menu are not included in this display, as the programming always refers to the original default receiver assignment.

• The number of channels shown in this menu re-fl ects the twelve control channels available when you are using the mx-24s transmitter. However, the actual number of channels varies according to the type of receiver you are using, and the num-ber of servos connected to it. The effective number may therefore be much smaller.

• We recommend that you use this display constant-ly when programming a model, as you can then immediately check all the settings at the transmit-ter. However, although this facility is useful, it does not relieve you of the need to test all the program-ming steps carefully before you operate the model for the fi rst time. Thorough checking is essential to eliminate the danger of programming errors!

Servo test

Checking the function of servos 1 … 8

S E R V O T E S T

activoff

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 80.5s

This function provides a means of automatically tes-ting servos, using any of the inputs 1 … 8. These can be selected individually using the rotary control, and activated or disabled with a brief press on the rota-ry control. As soon as you have “activated” just one of the inputs 1 … 8, the following message appears at the bottom edge of the screen:

activoff

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 80.5s

ENTER=activate

S E R V O T E S T

Pressing ENTER would now start the servo test at in-put “1” with a cycle time of 0.5 seconds.To change the cycle time, select the symbol below the time using the rotary control. Each brief press on the rotary control changes the movement cycle by 0.5 se-conds within the range 0.5 to 3.0 seconds.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 82.0s

activoff

ENTER=activate

S E R V O T E S T

Press ENTER to start the “Servo test” function: the servos now move automatically as if the associated transmitter controls were constantly being moved bet-ween -100% and +100% within the selected time fra-me. The test takes into account all the active mixer

and coupling functions in the current model memory, and the servos move within the set servo travel and any servo travel limits you have selected.When you initiate the servo test by pressing ENTER, the following window is superimposed on the screen:

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 82.0s

Servo test act.activoff

ENTER=activate

S E R V O T E S T

Press ENTER or the rotary control to halt the test again.

157

)

ENT

1

2

3

4

(_Desired (new) secret number :

C O D E L O C K

You can protect the multi-function menu from unau-thorised use by entering a four-digit code number using the numerals 1 to 4. The security number is en-tered using the set of buttons on the left-hand side of the screen.Ensure that the numbers 1 … 4 are displayed on the left margin of the screen, then enter the numbers in the sequence of your choice using the buttons as follows: ENTER = 1, ESC = 2, CLEAR = 3 and HELP = 4:

CLR

)(1234Desired (new) secret number :

C O D E L O C KMemorise secretnumber carefully

A brief press on the rotary control (CLR) erases the numbers you have entered.Make a careful note of the security code number; we suggest that you write it down and store it in a safe place. If you forget the number, you will have to send the transmitter to the GRAUPNER Service Centre for decoding.When you are satisfi ed, press the ENTER or ESC button to confi rm the four-digit security number.The lock takes effect next time you switch the trans-mitter off. When you switch on, the controls work wit-hout restriction, but you will not, for example, be able to switch models without entering the correct number combination:

Code lock

Blocking access to the multi-function list

Please enter secret number:

1

2

3

4

***

C O D E L O C K

( _)

If you enter the code number incorrectly, you have to wait a certain period of time before you can try again.

1

2

3

4

****Please enter secret number:

C O D E L O C K

( )

Input errorTime lock

Erasing the code number

If you wish to erase the code number again at some later date, call up this menu and immediately press the rotary control twice.The fi rst press on the rotary control erases the code number (CLR). The second press generates this mes-sage on the screen:

)

ENT

1

2

3

4

(_Desired (new) secret number :

C O D E L O C KMemorise secret ���� none ����

Now quit the menu by pressing the ENTER or ESC button. The four highlighted numbers on the left of the screen – 1 , 2 , 3 , 4 – now disappear, i. e. the side buttons resume their original function.

Quitting the menu without entering a code num-ber

You may have reached this menu by mistake, or out of curiosity, in which case you will want to leave it wit-hout pressing any buttons. In this situation the screen looks like this:

)

ENT

1

2

3

4

(_Desired (new) secret number :

C O D E L O C K

Press the rotary control once: the four highlighted numbers 1 , 2 , 3 , 4 on the left of the screen now disappear; the following message appears and the side buttons resume their original function:

)

ENT

1

2

3

4

(_Desired (new) secret number :

C O D E L O C KMemorise secret ���� none ����

Now quit the menu by pressing the ENTER or ESC button.

Tip:If you don’t want to use the programming lock at all, we advise you to remove this menu from the mul-ti-function list using the »Suppress Codes« menu, otherwise an unauthorised person could enter a code number and thereby prevent you using your own transmitter.

Program description: Global functions

158

mx-24s programming techniquesPreparation, e. g. for a fi xed-wing model aircraft

Programming examples: Fixed-wing model

Programming model data into an mx-24s …

... is easier than it may appear at fi rst sight.There is one basic rule which applies equally to all programmable radio control transmitters: if the pro-gramming is to go smoothly and the systems work as expected, the receiving system components must fi rst be installed correctly in the model, i. e. the mecha-nical systems must be fi rst-rate. This means: ensure that each servo is at its correct neutral position when you fi t the output lever or disc and connect the linka-ge to it. If you fi nd this is not the case, correct it! Re-move the output arm, rotate it by one or more splines and secure it again. If you use a servo tester, e. g. the Digital Servo Analyzer, Order No. 763, to centre the servos, you can be certain that their neutral position is exactly correct.Virtually all modern transmitters offer facilities for off-setting the neutral position of servos, but this is no substitute for a correct mechanical installation; it is only intended for fi ne tuning. Any substantial deviati-on from the “0” position may result in additional asym-metry when the signal undergoes further processing in the transmitter. Think of it this way: if the chassis of a car is distorted, you may be able to persuade the vehicle to run straight by holding the steering wheel away from centre, but it does not make the chassis any less bent, and the basic problem of ineffi ciency remains.Another important point is to set up the correct cont-rol travels as far as possible by using the appropriate linkage points in the mechanical system; this is much more effi cient than making major changes to the tra-vel settings at the transmitter. The same rule applies: electronic travel adjustment facilities are designed pri-marily to compensate for minor manufacturing tole-rances in the servos and for fi ne adjustment, and not to compensate for poor-quality construction and de-fective installation.If – as is usual nowadays – two separate aileron ser-

vos are installed in a fi xed-wing model aircraft, the ai-lerons can also be employed as airbrakes by defl ec-ting both of them up – simply by setting up a suitab-le mixer which superimposes a fl ap function on them (see the section starting on page 110). Such systems are generally more often used in gliders and electric gliders than in power models.

In such cases the servo output arms should be offset forward by one spline relative to the neutral point, i. e. towards the leading edge, and fi tted on the servo out-put shaft in that position. The mechanical differential achieved by this asymmetrical installation takes into account the fact that the braking effect of the up-going ailerons increases with their angle of defl ection, and this means that much less travel is usually required in the down-direction than the up-direction.Similar reasoning applies to the installation of the fl ap linkage when separate fl ap servos are installed, desi-gned to be used in a butterfl y (crow) braking system. Here again an asymmetrical linkage point is useful. The braking effect of the crow system is provided pri-marily by the down-movement of the fl aps rather than the up-movement of the ailerons, so in this case the servo output arms should point aft, i. e. offset towards the trailing edge, as this makes greater travel availab-le for the down-movement. When this combination of lowered fl aps and raised ailerons is used, the ailerons

should only be raised to a moderate extent, as their primary purpose in this confi guration is to stabilise and control the model rather than act as brakes.

You can “see” the difference in terms of braking effect by deploying the crow system, then looking at the un-derside of the wing from the front. The larger the pro-jected area of the defl ected control surfaces, the gre-ater the braking effect.This type of asymmetrical installation of the servo output arms can also make sense when setting up split fl aps or landing fl aps on a power model.Once you have completed your model and set up the mechanical systems accurately in this way, you are ready to start programming the transmitter.The instructions in this section are intended to re-fl ect standard practice by describing the basic gene-ral settings fi rst, and then refi ning and specialising them to complete the set-up. After the fi rst test-fl ight, and in the course of continued test-fl ying, you may need to adjust one or other of the model’s settings. As your piloting skills improve and you gain experience, you might want to try out different control systems and other refi nements, and to cater for these require-ments you may fi nd that the text deviates from the ob-vious order of options, or that one or other of the opti-ons is mentioned more than once.The contrary may also be true: for a particular mo-del not every one of the steps described in this sec-tion will be relevant, just as one or other of you may miss a particular step in the description for his parti-

159Programming examples: Fixed-wing model

cular model.At this point, just before you start programming the model data, it is worthwhile thinking carefully about a sensible layout of the transmitter controls.If the model in question is one with the emphasis on “power” – whether the power of an electric motor or an internal combustion engine – you will probably en-counter few problems in this matter, because the two dual-axis stick units are primarily employed to cont-rol the four basic functions “power control (= throttle)”, “rudder”, “elevator” and “aileron”. Nevertheless, you still have to call up the ...

»Model type« (page 70)

SEL

Offset +100%

��

Thr. min backM O D E L T Y P E

Tail typeAileron/camber flapsBrake Input 1

Normal1 AIL

Motor on C1

… and defi ne your preferred throttle direction, i. e. throttle minimum “forward” or “back”, because the de-fault setting is “none” (i. e. no motor).The difference between “none” and “Throttle min. for-ward / back” is the effect of the C1 trim. The trim is ef-fective over the full stick travel if “none” is entered, but it affects the idle range only if you enter “throttle min. forward / back”.However, this setting also takes the “direction of ef-fect” of the C1 stick into account, so that you do not need to change the direction of rotation of the thrott-le servo if you switch from “forward” to “back”. If you change the setting of “Throttle min. forward / back”, you activate a warning message on the screen …

… and you will hear a warning beep if you switch on the transmitter with the throttle stick too far in the di-rection of full throttle.You will certainly want to consider carefully how best to control any “auxiliary functions” included in your model, for example the programming of an (additio-nal) power-on warning in the »Base setup model« menu (page 64). Such a warning does not, of course, need to signal just “Throttle too high” or “Motor is on”; it could just as well warn you of “Undercarriage re-tracted” or similar. Give this some thought, and allow your imagination plenty of scope.In contrast, if your model is a glider or electric glider the whole situation may be rather different. The im-mediate question is: what is the best way of operating the motor and braking system? Some solutions have proved to be highly practical, and others less so.For example, it is not a good idea to be forced to let go of one of the primary sticks in order to ex-tend the airbrakes or deploy the crow braking system when your glider is on the landing approach. It sure-ly makes more sense to set up switchable functions for the C1 stick (see the programming examples on page 167 and 169), or to assign the braking system to the stick, and shift the motor control to a slider – or even a switch. With this type of model the electric mo-tor is often little more than a “self-launching system”, and is used either to drag the model into the sky at full power, or to pull it from one area of lift to the next at, say, half-power; for such models a three-position switch is usually quite adequate. If the switch is positi-oned where you can easily reach it, then you can turn the motor on and off without having to let go of the sticks – even on the landing approach. The mx-24s provides plenty of scope for your ideas here.Incidentally, similar thinking can be applied to fl ap control systems, regardless of whether they are “just” the ailerons, or full-span (combination) control sur-faces which are raised and lowered in parallel.

To control the electric motor all you need is one of the two-position switches SW 1 … 4 or 7, or – better – one of the two three-position switches CON TROL 7 or 8. In any case please be sure to select a switch which is close to the sticks, so that you can reach it at any time without having to let go of the primary controls. This switch should also be positioned on the side of the transmitter opposite to the hand which holds the model when hand-launching. In other words: if you use your right hand to launch the model, the switch which you select to control the motor should be on the left-hand side of the transmitter, and vice versa.Camber-changing fl aps can also be controlled very effectively by means of one of the three-position swit-ches (CTRL 7 or SW 5 + 6 or CTRL 8 or SW 9 + 10), or alternatively one of the two INC / DEC buttons CONTROL 5 or 6. The advantage of these latter con-trols is that their positions are stored separately for each fl ight phase, and are therefore not lost when you switch fl ight phases or models; this is not the case with the side-mounted proportional controls.Once you are satisfi ed that all these preparations have been completed successfully, you are ready to start programming.

Thr too high!

160

First steps in programming a new modelExample: fi xed-wing model aircraft with two ailerons and (initially) no motor

The fi rst time you use a new transmitter you should move to the ...

»General basic settings« menu (page 154)

... and defi ne a number of basic settings. These serve various purposes:The owner’s name which you enter in this menu ap-pears in the basic screen display, while the options marked “Preset” – “Stick mode”, “Modulation” and “min. pitch” – really are just presets: the settings you enter here are adopted as the defaults when you open a new model memory, but they are only a sug-gestion, and you can still change them at any time.The setting in the “Display light” line determines how long the screen illumination remains on when you switch the transmitter on, and also after you press a button or operate the rotary control.Select “yes” or “no” in the “Power-on beep” line to de-termine whether the transmitter is to emit the “mx-24s identifi cation melody” whenever you switch the unit on.

Programming examples: Fixed-wing model

In the “Battery warning” line you can determine the voltage at which the battery warning is triggered. Ple-ase don’t be tempted to set a very low value here, as you need plenty of time to land your model safely if the battery warning is triggered.In the ten lines marked “Own phase name” you can create your “own” valid phase names which will be available in all model memories, in case you don’t think any of the preset phase names are appropria-te. These names are entered by switching to the se-cond screen page and selecting the appropriate let-ters from a character list, as described for entering the Owner’s name.Press ESC to leave this menu and return towards the multi-function list after completing your “general set-tings”.When setting up a new model you should use the ro-tary control to move to the ...

»Model select« menu (page 59)

02030405 ��� ���

01

06 ��� ���

��� free���

��� ���

��� ���

0:00

freefreefreefree

... where you select a free model memory, and con-fi rm your choice by pressing the ENTER button, or gi-ving the rotary control a brief press. You are now re-quested to select the type of model to be program-med:

Select model type (free model memory)

In this example we are setting up a fi xed-wing mo-del, so we confi rm the (highlighted) fi xed-wing model symbol by pressing ENTER, or with a brief press on the rotary control. The screen now reverts to the basic display.

Note:Once you have called up the “Model select” option it is not possible to interrupt the process, i. e. you must choose one or the other model type, even if you switch the transmitter off in the meantime! However, if you make a mistake you can always correct it simply by erasing the model memory.

Now that you have overcome this fi rst hurdle, you can start on the actual transmitter settings to suit the mo-del in the …

»Base setup model« menu (page 64)

Info

Modulation

��

< >< >

SPCM20

Graubelestill in test

Auto trim

1

6

BASIC SETTINGS, MODELModel name

Stick mode

VolumeAuto timer resetPower on warning

yes

At this point you can enter the “Model name” by mo-ving to the character table via the � symbol. If you wish, you can also enter a brief item of “information” in the next line using the same method. At this stage you should check the settings for “Stick mode” and “Modulation” which were adopted from the »Basic settings« menu when the model memory was initia-lised, and change them if necessary.Initially the “Volume” option only affects the alarm ti-mer in the »Timers (general)« menu, which is of no interest to us at the moment. In the “Auto timer re-

GENERAL BASIC SETTINGSOwners namePre-set stick modePre-set modulation

Power-on beepBattery warningOwn phase name

Pre-set min. pitch

��

4SPCM20

yes9.3V

forwrdDisplay light 60s

<

1 < >2 < >3 < >4 < >5 < >6 < >7 < >8 < >9 < >

10 < >

>

Own phase nameOwn phase nameOwn phase nameOwn phase nameOwn phase nameOwn phase nameOwn phase nameOwn phase nameOwn phase name

H-J Sandbrunner

161

set” line you can set “yes” or “no” to determine whe-ther all the timers – with the exception of the “Model timer” and the “Battery timer” – are to be reset auto-matically when the transmitter is switched on.The “Auto trim” option provides a fast, straightfor-ward method of trimming a model … and also to knock it out of trim again if you accidentally move the selected Auto-Trim switch. For this reason you should only assign a switch to this function just before the fi rst fl ight of a new model – the most suitable one is the momentary switch SW 8 – and then erase the as-signment again immediately after the trimming fl ight. When assigning the switch please ensure that the sticks for functions 2 … 4 are at their neutral position.Regardless of this, the “Auto-trim” function can be set to apply to all fl ight phases, or separately in each fl ight phase. This depends on your settings in the »Stick mode« menu (“global / “phase”).You would then operate the auto-trim switch in fl ight once you have brought the model to the desired fl ight attitude using the two dual-axis sticks. At the moment the switch is operated, the software records the devi-ations of the sticks 2 … 4 (aileron*, elevator and rud-der) from the neutral position, and adopts them as the new trim values. However, the change takes place over a period of about one second, rather than in-stantly, giving you plenty of time to return the sticks to the normal position.

* Please read the note relating to this on page 65.

The next menu is ...

»Model type« (page 70)

M O D E L T Y P E

Tail typeAileron/camber flapsBrake

SEL

Offset +100% Input 1

Normal1 AIL

��

Motor on C1 None

... in which you select the basic arrangement of the servos in the model, and inform the transmitter of your choice.The following options are available:Motor on C1: • “None”: trim works in all positions of

the stick, and the “Brake settings” sub-menu of the »Wing mixers« menu (see section starting on page 110) is available without restriction.

• “Throttle min. forward or back”: the C1 trim works over the idle range only.

If the throttle stick is too far in the di-rection of full-throttle when you switch the transmitter on, you are alerted to the danger with the warning message “Throttle too high”; see page 22.

In parallel with this, the “Brake set-tings” sub-menu of the »Wing mi-xers« menu (see section starting on page 110) is only available if you have entered “none” for the currently active fl ight phase in the “Motor” line of the »Phase settings« menu; see page 100.

Tail: “Normal”, “V-tail”, “Delt/fl .wing” or “2 EL Sv 3 + 8”

(If you select a V-tail, but the control surfaces move incorrectly when you apply elevator and rudder commands, please refer to the notes in the ta-ble in the right-hand column of page 40. The same applies if ailerons and fl aps work incorrectly.)

Aileron/camber fl aps: 1 or 2 aileron servos and 0, 1, 2 or 4 fl ap servos

Brake: Airbrake servo controlled by the C1 stick or by a control connected to In-put 7, 8 or 9 (»Transmitter control

adjust« menu). An associated Offset value can be entered.

Since we wish to use the C1 stick to operate the bra-king system, as set up in the “Brake settings” sub-menu of the »Wing mixers« menu, we leave the set-ting under “Brake” at “Input 1”. At the “Offset” point you should defi ne the mixer neutral point at the set-ting at which the braking system is retracted (i. e. in-active). If the offset is not right at the end of the trans-mitter travel, the remainder of the travel is a “dead zone”, i. e. this range of the stick travel has no effect on any mixers you may have set.At this point – if not before – you should check that the servos are connected to the receiver in the stan-dard Graupner sequence:

The following settings apply to a model with a “nor-mal” tail; however, if your model has a V-tail, the set-tings can be adopted virtually unchanged. If the mo-del is a delta or fl ying wing the situation is not quite so simple. A special programming example covering this model type will be found on page 188.

Programming examples: Fixed-wing model

Battery

Free, or auxiliary function

Free, or auxiliary function, or right fl ap

Free, or auxiliary function, or fl ap, or left fl ap

Right aileron

Rudder

Elevator

Aileron or left aileron

Airbrakes or throttle / speed controller

Batt

987654321

10Free, or auxiliary function

Free, or auxiliary function

Rec

eive

r

162

»Servo adjustment« (page 74)

Servo 1 => 0% 100% 100% 150% 150%Servo 2 => 0% 100% 100% 150% 150%Servo 3 => 0% 100% 100% 150% 150%Servo 4 => 0% 100% 100% 150% 150%

RevSEL SYM ASY SYM ASY �

cent. – travel + – limit +SEL

In this menu you can set various parameters rela-ting to the servos, i. e. “Direction of rotation” “Neu-tral setting”, “Servo travel” and “Travel limit” (maxi-mum permitted servo travel) to suit the requirements of the model.By “requirements” we mean adjustments to servo centre and servo travel which are needed to compen-sate for minor manufacturing tolerances in servos and slight inaccuracies in the model itself.

Notes:• For mechanical and electronic reasons, the maxi-

mum possible travel of all GRAUPNER servos is 150% each side of centre. If you exceed this va-lue, for example by the sum of the values in the two columns “Centre” and “Servo travel”, then the associated servo will no longer follow control com-mands beyond this point. Bear in mind also that mixers and settings in the »Dual Rate / Expo« menu also affect servo travels.

• The facilities provided in this menu for selecting asymmetrical servo travels are NOT intended for setting differential travel on ailerons and / or cam-ber-changing fl aps. There are functions designed specifi cally for this in the »Wing mixers« menu; for a V-tail the »Dual mixers« menu should be used. In the latter case it is ESSENTIAL to set the tail type to “normal” in the »Model type« menu (see page 70).

In the last column – “Travel limit” – the basic settings of 150% in each case can and should be reduced sig-

nifi cantly, since the values stated here act virtually as “limiters”. This setting defi nes the point on the servo’s travel beyond which it is not permitted to move, and is designed to prevent the servo striking its mechanical end-stops and stalling (drawing a heavy current). The deciding factor for this value is therefore the end of the mechanical movement available at the servo, con-trol surface and / or linkage.

As an example of this we will consider a model with a standard (cruciform) tail in which the rudder moves in a wedge-shaped cut-out in the elevator. The rud-der must not defl ect to the point where it fouls the ele-vator and perhaps jams it, and to avoid this it is usual practice to adjust the pushrod travel mechanically so that at full stick defl ection the rudder has slight clea-rance to the elevator. Provided that the rudder is con-trolled solely by the rudder stick, this system presents no further problems. However, if you set up a mixer which also affects the rudder, i. e. you add a supple-mentary signal to the normal rudder signal (e. g. an “Aileron 2 � 4 rudder” mixer), the cumulative effect of the two signals may be excessive, and the rudder may still foul the elevator. Setting the travel limit cor-rectly in this menu will reliably prevent the rudder de-fl ecting too far. However, take care not to set the tra-vel limit at too low a value, as this would place an ex-cessive restriction on the rudder defl ection.

Alternatively, of course, you could reduce the travels on both sides, so that neither control surface fouls the other even when the maximum cumulative defl ections are applied. However, with this method you would have to accept a permanent reduction in the normal rudder travel in order to prevent an event which might only occur very rarely.

The following menu is also of interest, and not only for power fl iers:

»Stick mode« (page 76)

Channel 1 Aileron 0.0s 0.0sElevator 0.0s 0.0sRudder 0.0s 0.0s

Tr.step SYM ASYSEL

globalglobalglobalglobalTrim

4444

0.0s 0.0s

– time +�

�

The increment adjustment for the digital trims in the “Tr.step” column (number of trim increments for each “trim lever click”) is of general interest, and can be set separately for each of the four trim levers. Later, when you are programming fl ight phases, the second co-lumn of this menu allows you to select whether the trims for aileron, elevator and rudder are to act “glo-bally”, i. e. are applicable to all fl ight phases regard-less, or are to act differently according to the fl ight phase selected.The “time” column, in contrast, is of no interest to us at this early stage of programming.When you have completed the settings to this point, a fi xed-wing model, either powered or glider, is rea-dy to fl y in its basic form. However, there are no “refi -nements” in this set-up, and it is precisely the refi ne-ments which will give you more long-term pleasure in your fl ying. Assuming that you are already capable of fl ying your model safely, it is time to get a taste of the-se extra facilities; to this end we now move on to the menu ...

»Wing mixers« (page 110)

«normal »��

+ 30%

SEL

+ 50%2–>43–>5

=>

0%0%

Brake settings

AileronElevator

rudderaileron

Aileron differential

W I N G M I X E R S

This menu will show a varying range of options de-

Programming examples: Fixed-wing model

163

pending on the information you have entered in the »Model type« menu. Since in this section we are dealing with a model fi tted with only two wing-moun-ted servos, the multi-fl ap menu (described in the sec-tion starting on page 116) is not available. For this re-ason we begin with the sub-menu …

»Brake settings«

B R A K E S E T T I N G S

��

off

If the above message appears, then your model is equipped with a motor, which is not the assumpti-on we have made in this section. This means that you have selected “forward / back” instead of “none” in the “Motor on C1” line of the »Model type« menu (see page 70). We suggest that you change this setting temporarily, or change the “yes” entry to “no” in the “Motor” column of the »Phase settings« menu (see page 100) in the currently active fl ight phase – in this case Phase 1:

AILE��

CrowB R A K E S E T T I N G S

Elevat. curveDiff. reduct.

0%0%

=>

After this little diversion into the intricacies of interacti-ve dependency we return to the matter in hand:If the ailerons are set up to act as brakes by defl ec-ting up together, then you should enter a value in the “Crow” (Butterfl y) line once you have activated AILE . You should also always enter a value in the “Diff. re-duct.” line below it, corresponding to that which you have entered (or intend to enter) in the “Aileron diffe-

rential” line of the »Wing mixers« menu (see screen-shot below right column on left page). Differential re-duction means that aileron differential is suppressed to a greater or lesser extent when you operate the airbrake stick. The purpose of this is to increase the down-going aileron travel on the landing approach, with the aim of improving aileron response when the model is close to the ground.In most cases it is only necessary to set up an “Ele-vat. curve” mixer if pitch-trim changes occur when the braking system is applied, i. e. the model balloons up or dives when the brakes are deployed. Such ma-nifestations only usually occur when ailerons are de-fl ected up for the braking effect, or when a butter-fl y (crow) braking system is used. In this case you should check the settings at a safe height, and adjust them if necessary. Note that you should attempt to maintain a “normal” airspeed, rather than a particular fl ight attitude, otherwise there is a risk that the model will be fl ying so slowly that it will drop suddenly when you retract the brakes.

--7%

OU

TP

UT

-- +

100

1-7%-19%

Brake

InputOutput

off

Elevator

PointCurve

1

After leaving the “Brake settings” it is time to set up “Aileron differential”:The purpose of this mixer is to eliminate adverse yaw. When a model aircraft turns, the down-going aile-ron produces more drag than the up-going one when both move through the same angle, and this causes the aeroplane to yaw in the opposite direction to the turn. This problem can be solved by setting differenti-al servo throw, i. e. by reducing the travel of the down-going aileron servo. A value between 20% and 40% is usually a good starting point, but the “perfect” set-

ting nearly always has to be established by practical testing.The “Aileron 2 � 4 rudder” mixer serves a similar purpose, but also makes many models generally ea-sier to handle when turning. A value of around 50% is usually a good, practical starting point. However, it should be possible to switch this function off, particu-larly if you have ambitions as an aerobatic pilot; this is done by assigning a switch to the mixer.

When you have completed the model-specifi c set-tings up to this point, you are probably ready to con-sider fl ying the model again. At this point you should certainly take the time to carry out a series of “dry runs”, i. e. to check all the settings thoroughly while the model is still on the ground. Remember that a se-rious programming error may damage more than just the model. If you are not sure of any point, ask an ex-perienced model pilot for advice.

If during the test phase you realise that one or other of the settings needs to be changed in order to tailor the model’s control response to your preferences – perhaps the servo travels are too great or too small overall – then we suggest that you turn to the follo-wing menu ...

»Dual Rate / Exponential« (page 86)

Aileron 100% + 25% Elevator 80% + 30%Rudder

DUAL EXP0

SELSEL ��

100% 0%

... in order to adjust the overall set-up to suit your re-quirements and fl ying style.“Dual Rates” are used to adjust the magnitude of the stick’s effect. However, if it is only the control re-sponse around neutral which is too powerful for com-fortable fl ying, i. e. the maximum travels are accep-

Programming examples: Fixed-wing model

164

table, then “Exponential” can also be employed. If you assign a switch to these functions, you can even switch between two different Dual Rate / Expo set-tings in fl ight.The same applies to the:

»Channel 1 Curve« (page 90)

–25%

OU

TP

UT

-- +

1

100

+73%–25%

1Point

InputCurve

onOutput

Channel 1 C U R V E

In this option you can place one or more reference points on the control curve of the throttle / brake ser-vo in such a way that it responds to commands in ex-actly the way you wish.A good example of this is adjusting the airbrake “dead zone”. Usually the brakes only extend from the wing after the airbrake stick has been moved some dis-tance, i. e. there is a “dead zone” in the airbrake stick travel. “Bending” the curve slightly will shorten the “dead zone”. The airbrakes will then extend from the wing rather earlier, and you will have fi ner control over the remainder of the travel. Similar arguments could also be applied to the motor control system, which could be controlled via C1 as an alternative.

If you are using a PCM, SPCM or APCM receiver, then you should certainly move to the following menu …

»Fail Safe settings« (pages 146 … 149)

Poshold

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

STO

F A I L S A F E

… and defi ne the receiver’s behaviour if interference should occur, because “doing nothing” is the worst thing you can possibly do – especially if you are set-ting up a fi xed-wing model aircraft.By default the transmitter is set to “Hold” mode, and this means that the receiver continues to pass to the servos the last control signals which it recognised as valid, i. e. it simply “holds” things as they were. In the most favourable case the power model continu-es fl ying in a straight line for an indefi nite period, and “lands” somewhere or other, without causing or suf-fering major damage. However, if that should happen in the “wrong” place and time, then the model could, for example, end up tearing uncontrollably across the fl ying site, endangering pilots and spectators alike. That is why it is important to consider at this early sta-ge whether it might not be better at least to set “Motor off” as the Fail-Safe response, in order to avoid this kind of risk.In the case of an electric glider, on the other hand, the Fail-Safe setting “Motor off” can also be used as a means of stopping the motor and its propeller reli-ably once the model has landed – all you have to do is switch the transmitter off immediately after the lan-ding.Incidentally, the author defi nitely prefers a “braked conclusion” to a fl ight in his own sight when the alter-native is to watch the model drift off “somewhere or other”.

Note:For PCM20, SPCM20 and APCM24 mode, please see the program descriptions on pages 146 … 149 for details of setting up the Fail-Safe system.

164 Programming examples: Fixed-wing model

165

Including an electric power system in model programming

There are various ways of switching electric power systems on and off. The simplest method of inclu-ding an electric motor in a model set-up is to use the throttle / brake stick. However, since we have alrea-dy reserved the C1 transmitter control for the airbra-kes in the preceding programming example, the ob-vious solutions are either to control the motor using a switch, as described in the section starting on page 167, or simply to use an alternative transmitter cont-rol.One of the three-position switches (CONTROL 7 or 8) could be used for this, alternatively the left or right proportional control. Note that the two INC / DEC but-tons CONTROL 5 + 6 are not so suitable, as they do not allow the pilot to alter motor speed quickly enough in an emergency.However, yet another alternative is one of the two-position switches. In theory this should be the switch which is easiest for you to reach when hand-laun-ching the model; see the note in the right-hand co-lumn of page 159.However, before we move on to the individual examp-les, it is important to point out that inputs 5 to 8 are programmable separately for each fl ight phase in the »Transmitter control adjust« menu. The other way of looking at this is that these inputs have to be pro-grammed separately for each fl ight phase!Since control of the power system must be availab-le regardless of the currently active fl ight phase, you would therefore need to repeat your settings separa-

tely in each fl ight phase if you were to use one of the-se inputs 5 to 8, and then perhaps adjust all of them separately if the settings proved to be incorrect.This procedure is susceptible to errors as well as being extremely long-winded, and for this reason we urge you from the outset to use one of the inputs 9 to 12, which are fl ight phase independent, and there-fore only have to be programmed once for each mo-del memory.However, this method does call for one additional pro-gramming step. If the receiver you wish to use has fe-wer than nine outputs, kindly move on to the menu …

»Receiver output swap« (page 153)

… and swap over two receiver outputs. This procedu-re only has to be carried out once, and there is nor-mally nothing else that has to be altered in the model memory concerned.So: connect your speed controller to a vacant output, e. g. “1” and assign, say, servo 9 to this output:

SEL �

9S e r v oS e r v oS e r v oS e r v o

234

1234

R E C E I V E R O U T P U TO u t p u tO u t p u tO u t p u tO u t p u t

A further option which is common to the following ex-amples 1 … 5, namely automatic elevator trim adjust-ment under power, is therefore mentioned at the start of this section:After the fi rst few powered fl ights you may have disco-vered that the model requires constant elevator trim when the motor is switched on; this can be corrected by setting up a free mixer, and adjusting it to suit your model.This is done by moving to the menu …

»Free mixers« (page 135)

… and programming a “LinearMIX” or perhaps a “Cur-veMIX”, in our example from “9” to “EL”:

=>

?? ?? - - - -?? ?? - - - -

SEL �� SELSEL

9 EL?? ?? - - - -

LinearMIX

type

1LinearMIXLinearMIXLinearMIX

234

from to Adjust

On the second page of this screen the corrective va-lue – usually a small one – is then entered as follows:

9 EL

+4% 0%

OU

TP

UT

-- +

100

O f f s e t+4%

SYM ASY STO CLR

Linear MIX 1

Mix input

Note:The method of setting up a curve mixer is described in detail in the Chapter entitled »Channel 1 curve« in the section starting on page 90.

165Programming examples: Fixed-wing model

166 Programming examples: Fixed-wing model

Example 1

Using the right or left side-mounted proportional control 9 or 10At the receiver end you require a proportional speed controller.With these transmitter controls it is a very simple mat-ter to include the power system in the programming. All you have to do is assign one of the two controls in the »Transmitter control adjust« menu, and con-nect the controller to the corresponding servo output socket on the receiver – in this example, Output “9”.Either of these two proportional controls can be used to provide fully proportional control of motor speed.For example, assign the left-hand proportional control CONTROL 10 to the fl ight phase independent input 9 in the menu …

»Control adjust« (page 78)

0% +100%+100% 0.0 0.00% +100%+100% 0.0 0.00% +100%+100% 0.0 0.00% +100%+100% 0.0 0.0

SYM ASYASYSYMSEL SEL«normal »

Cnt. 10

��

1211109

–time+

InputInputInputInput

freefreefree

–travel+offset

… and, if necessary, adjust the travels to suit your speed controller.Pressing the HELP button with the rotary control pressed in now takes you to the »Servo display«. Move the transmitter control, and you will see the bar for Channel 9 move from one side to the other and back.However, if you later move the proportional control forward too quickly when you are at the fl ying fi eld, you may fi nd that the abrupt motor start places an ex-tremely severe load on the whole power train; you should certainly take measures to avoid this problem.Use the rotary control to activate the ASYmmetri-

Example 2

Using one of the two three-position switches (CTRL 7 or 8)This variant implements a multi-stage switching sys-tem for the drive motor using the OFF – half-throttle – full throttle method. At the receiver end you require a proportional speed controller.In principle the settings required for this are the same as described for Example 1, and the same remarks and recommendations apply.Apart from the proportional speed control provided by Example 1 and the three-stage speed control provi-ded by Example 2, the choice of one of the two types of transmitter controls only affects the type of timer control; see page 170.

Note:It is possible to adjust the “half-throttle setting” by shif-ting the neutral point and then adjusting the travel: de-duct the offset value from the travel on the side whe-re the neutral point was shifted, and add the same va-lue on the other side, i. e. for an offset value of -20%: +80% on the minus side of travel and +120% on the plus side, and vice versa with an offset of +20%.

Example 3

Using a two-position switch SW 1 … 4 or 7This variant implements a pure ON / OFF function.At the receiver end you would use either a simple electronic switch, or – if you prefer a “soft” motor start – a proportional speed controller.The settings required for this are basically the same as those described for Example 1. The same remarks and recommendations apply.In this case the only difference from the earlier de-scription is the way the selected switch is displayed in the following menu:

cal value input below the “-time+” column, and then move the selected control to the “ON” position, so that the highlighted fi eld “changes sides”. Enter a value of at least one second, so that the motor starts more smoothly if you move the proportional control too quickly in the direction of “ON”. Now switch back to the »Servo display« and reassure yourself that the system works as expected.

0% +100%+100%0% +100%+100% 0.0 0.00% +100%+100% 0.0 0.00% +100%+100% 0.0 0.0

SYM ASYASYSYMSEL SEL«normal »

��

0.0 1.0

1211109

–time+

Cnt. 10InputInputInputInput

freefreefree

–travel+offset

Note:It is important that you can switch the motor off in-stantly at any time, so do not enter a time delay on the “OFF” side. This does not place an excessive load on the power train, as the motor simply “runs down” naturally.

The control travels and direction for the speed cont-roller are usually adjusted in the “-travel+” column of the »Transmitter control adjust« menu. Alternatively you can enter these settings in the menu …

»Servo adjustment« (page 74)

Servo 6 => 0% 100% 100% 150% 150%Servo 7 => 0% 100% 100% 150% 150%Servo 8 => 0% 100% 100% 150% 150%Servo 9 => 0% 100% 100% 150% 150%

SEL SYM ASY SYM ASYSEL��

Rev cent. – travel + – limit +

167Programming examples: Fixed-wing model

»Control adjust« (page 78)

0% +100%+100%0% +100%+100% 0.0 0.00% +100%+100% 0.0 0.00% +100%+100% 0.0 0.0

SYM ASYASYSYMSEL SEL«normal »

1

��

1.00.0

1211109

–time+

InputInputInputInput

freefreefree

–travel+offset

Once again, hold the rotary control pressed in and move to the line for the fl ight phase independent input “9”. As in Example 1, activate SEL in the second co-lumn with a brief press on the rotary control, and then move the desired switch – in this case “1” – from the intended motor OFF position in the direction of mo-tor ON.The appropriate travels to suit the speed controller are entered in the “-travel+” column. If you are using a proportional speed controller and want the motor to start smoothly, you can enter a suitable delay time in the right-hand column.All the other settings are the same as those descri-bed in Example 1, as mentioned at the start of this example, and the same remarks and recommendati-ons apply.

C1 stick doubling as electric motor and butterfl y (crow) control(Butterfl y (crow) as landing aid: ailerons raised, fl aps lowered)

Example 4Before we address the programming of this (fourth) example, i. e. the expansion of the basic programming described up to this point, we would like to add a few words about the position of the “throttle / brake stick” at “motor OFF” and / or “Brake OFF”.Normally the C1 stick is moved forward to open the throttle, and moved back to extend the brakes. Howe-ver, if you switch, for example, from “motor OFF” (= stick “back”) to the brake system using this “classical” arrangement, the result would be “full brake” as soon as the transition time (set in the »Phase settings« menu) has elapsed, and vice versa: if you switch to “power” from “brakes retracted”, the motor would im-mediately run up to “full power” within the set transiti-on period.From this “vice” it is certainly possible to make a “vir-tue”, in that a “glider fl yer” – usually fl ying with the brake “forward” – only switches to motor “ON” when required, and then reduces power if necessary (and – we hope – does not forget to move the C1 stick back to “forward” when he switches back again). However, a typical “power fl yer” will probably tend towards the opposite priority, i. e. only switch to brake when re-quired. It is just as easy to set up the zero point of both systems so that they coincide, and this avoids these interactions; “glider fl yers” would probably tend towards “forward”, “power fl yers” presumably towards “back”.Whatever your preference, the mx-24s transmitter permits both variants. However, in the following text we assume that the two “Off” positions are to coinci-de at the “forward” position. If you would prefer it the other way round, that’s no problem: the only diffe-rence to the version described here is in the choice of “Throttle min. back / forward” and, if necessary, a cor-responding brake offset in the menu:

»Model type« (page 70)

SEL

Offset +100%

Normal2 AIL

��

Thr. min frontM O D E L T Y P E

Tail typeAileron/camber flapsBrake Input 1

Motor on C1

Here you start by moving to the “Motor” line, where you select whether the throttle minimum position (= motor “OFF” position) is to be “front” or “back” – as al-ready discussed. In the following programming ex-ample we will make “motor OFF” and “brake OFF” coincide at “front” (forward).

Note:If you choose “Throttle min. forward / back”, the trim acts only towards the “Idle” end of the travel, and not equally on both sides of the C1 stick as is the case if you enter “none”. Since the C1 trim is generally sel-dom used with an electric-powered model, this has no further relevance.

Set the “Tail” type to suit your model’s confi guration: in this case “normal”.In the “Aileron / camber fl aps” line enter the correct number of aileron and fl ap servos – in our example “2 AIL”.In the last line leave the choice of “Brake retracted = forward” at the default entry. However, if you have de-cided on “Brake retracted = back”, select the “Brake” line and defi ne the Offset point as “back”, as descri-bed on page 71.

SEL

Offset –100%

Normal

�� STO

2 AIL

Thr. min frontM O D E L T Y P E

Tail typeAileron/camber flapsBrake Input 1

Motor on C1

168 Programming examples: Fixed-wing model

time” column.The next essential step is to assign these two fl ight phases to a switch, which is used in fl ight to switch between the two fl ight phases. In this case a sing-le switch is suffi cient. However, it is important that the switch should be within easy reach, so that you can swiftly switch between “Motor” and “Brake” even du-ring a landing approach, without having to let go of one of the sticks.The selected switch is assigned in the menu …

»Phase assignment« (page 104)

Use the rotary control to select the switch symbol be-low “C”. After a brief press on the rotary control, con-fi rm the desired switch, e. g. “SW 4”.

A B C D E F<1 >

SEL4I Normal

P H A S E A S S I G N M E N T

p r i o r combi

Both switch positions, i. e. ON (I) and OFF ( ) are in-itially assigned to Phase “1 normal”. Select SEL with the rotary control, and give the rotary control a brief press to activate the select list for the phases which you have set up in the »Phase settings« menu. For example, name the phase for the upper switch po-sition “normal”, and the phase for the lower positi-on “Landing” (or vice versa). These phase names will now appear in all fl ight phase specifi c menus, and – of course – also in the transmitter’s basic display.Now move to the “Landing” fl ight phase and select the “Crow” line in the sub-menu …

»Brake settings« (page 112 …)

AILE��

CrowB R A K E S E T T I N G S

Elevat. curveDiff. reduct.

0%0%

=>

… of the »Wing mixers« menu (see page 110). Here you should set the desired up-travel of the ailerons when the C1 stick (“Brake”) is moved. Now move on to the “FLAP” column, if appropriate, in order to set the down-travel of the fl aps (in the example abo-ve this is suppressed). This position of the wing fl aps is known as the “crow” or “butterfl y” setting; see also page 119.In the “Diff. reduction” line enter a value which corre-sponds to the one you have entered (or intend to en-ter) on the input side of the »Wing mixers« menu in the “Aileron differential” line.The “Elevat. curve” mixer can be set up to provide au-tomatic suppression of the model’s pitch-trim change, which normally occurs when ailerons are raised to act as a landing aid. The optimum corrective values for this must be found by test-fl ying your particular mo-del.If you have set everything correctly up to this point, operating the C1 stick in the “normal” fl ight phase simply controls the motor, whereas the motor should be switched off in the “Landing” fl ight phase (Ser-vo 1 to -100% in the »Servo display«, regardless of “Throttle min. forward / back”, or the equivalent of a servo travel setting which differs by 100%). In this fl ight phase the C1 stick only controls the ailerons and – if fi tted – the fl aps, with the neutral point at the position of the C1 stick which corresponds to your se-lected offset.

In the next step we have to set up the system which controls the effect of the C1 stick on the motor.This is achieved by moving to the menu …

»Phase settings« (page 100)

Phase 1Phase 2 1.0sPhase 3 0.1s -Phase 4

NameSELSEL

�

Normal 1.0s

Timer Sw. time0.1s

�� SEL

-

SELMotor

yesno

yesyes

+Landing

… and assigning a relevant name to “Phase 1” with a brief press on the rotary control followed by selecting from the list; in our example: “normal”. The asterisk (*) in the right-hand column indicates the currently acti-ve phase. As long as you have not assigned any pha-se switches, this will always be Phase 1. For the sake of our example, we will assign the name “Landing” to “Phase 2”.If you wish, you can assign what is known as a fl ight phase timer to each phase in the “Timer” column, in order to record the motor run time and also the gli-ding times. For example, in the “normal” fl ight phase you could assign one of the timers “Clk 1 … 3”, in or-der to record the total motor run time via the C1 stick. The timer is controlled by a pre-defi ned control switch on the C1 stick. As soon as you switch to the “Lan-ding” fl ight phase, this fl ight phase timer is automati-cally halted, and is suppressed in the basic display. For more details on this function please turn to page 108.In the “Motor” column you decide the phase in which the motor is to be controlled by the throttle / brake stick: enter “yes / no” accordingly; this setting also de-fi nes where the brake system – set up in the “Brake settings” sub-menu of the »Wing mixers« menu – is to be switched off (= “yes”) and on (= “no”).Finally enter a suitable transition time in the “Switch

169Programming examples: Fixed-wing model

Example 5If, in contrast to the assumptions of the preceding Ex-ample 4, your model features supplementary conven-tional airbrakes, or even just airbrakes on their own, these can also be included in the model’s control sys-tem if you adopt the following programming procedu-re:Carry out the programming in the menus »Model type«, »Phase settings« and »Phase assignment« as described under Example 4. However, the settings described in that section in the “Brake settings” sub-menu of the »Wing mixers« menu are only relevant if you also wish to use a Butterfl y (crow) system in par-allel with the airbrakes.With the settings described under Example 4, the usual method of controlling the electric motor is adop-ted, as is that for a butterfl y (crow) system, if approp-riate. All we need to do now is add the programming of the control system for an airbrake, connected in our example to Output 8. This is accomplished by moving to the menu …

»Control adjust« (page 78)

… and switching to the “normal” fl ight phase. Hold the rotary control pressed in, and move to the “Input 8” line. Select the SEL fi eld below the “Offset” column and give the rotary control a brief press: the value fi eld for Input 8 is now highlighted. Change the offset value until the model’s airbrakes are “retracted” again:

0% +100%+100% 0.0 0.00% +100%+100% 0.0 0.00% +100%+100% 0.0 0.0

+100%+100% 0.0 0.0

SYM ASYASYSYMSEL SEL«Normal »

+100%–time+

��

Input 5 freeInput 6Input 7Input 8

freefreefree

–travel+offset

A brief press on the rotary control returns you to the SEL fi eld; now select the left-hand SEL fi eld, move to the “Landing” phase and press the rotary control

again briefl y. A new window now appears superim-posed on the screen:

0% +100%+100% 0.0 0.00% +100%+100% 0.0 0.00% +100%+100% 0.0 0.0

+100%+100% 0.0 0.0

SYM ASYASYSYMSEL SEL«Landing»

–100%–time+

��

Input 5 freeInput 6Input 7Input 8

frfreefr

–travel+offset

Move desired switchor control adj.

Move the C1 stick. As soon as it is detected, “Cnt. 1” will appear on the screen instead of “free”:

0% +100%+100% 0.0 0.00% +100%+100% 0.0 0.00% +100%+100% 0.0 0.0

+100%

SYM ASYASYSYMSEL SEL«Landing»

0%Cnt. 1 +100% 0.0 0.0–time+offset

��

Input 5 freeInput 6Input 7Input 8

freefree

–travel+

Leave the Offset value in this fl ight phase at “0%”. Ho-wever, you may need to reverse the prefi x of the tra-vel setting in order to reverse the direction of the transmitter control; this is effected by changing the travel setting in the “-travel+” column from +100% to -100%.Now we are virtually at our destination. Check your programming in the »Servo display« menu: you will fi nd that only “Servo 1” (speed controller) is controlled in the “normal” phase, and only the airbrake “servo 8” is controlled in the “Landing” phase, together with the aileron and fl ap servos if present – exactly what we were aiming for.

C1 stick doubling as electric motor and airbrake control

170

Operating timers using a stick function or switch

Programming examples: Fixed-wing model

Examples 4 and 5 on the preceding pagesIf you have been following the example of model pro-gramming described on the preceding pages, and de-cided to adopt Example 4 (page 167) or 5 (page 169), or if you are using the C1 stick (throttle / brake stick) to control the power system regardless of these pro-gramming examples, you can use a control switch to turn the stopwatch on and off automatically.The two control switches “G1” or “G2” are pre-pro-grammed to the C1 stick. To assign one of them to the timer you wish to use, move to the menu …

»Timers (general)« (page 106)

0:00 0s

Timer AlarmSEL SEL SEL �

�

G1

0:33h5:03h

0s0:00

Model timeBatt. time

Stop watchFlight tim

Top :Centr:

… and select the “Stopwatch” line by holding the ro-tary control pressed in. Assign one of the control swit-ches “G1” or “G2” to the selected timer by moving the C1 stick from the desired motor “OFF” position in the direction of motor “ON”.The stopwatch in the basic display will now start run-ning when you move the C1 stick in the direction of full-throttle. It will stop again when you move the C1 stick back beyond the switching point.

Example 1 on the preceding pagesIf you have been following the example of model pro-gramming described on the preceding pages and de-cided to adopt Example 1, as described on page 166, then move to the menu …

»Control switch« (page 94)

C O N T R O L S W I T C HG1 Cnt. –75%G2G3G4

SEL �

free

=> G1+75% =>

0% =>0% =>

G2G3G4

Cnt.

STO SEL

11

free

… and select the line for one of the control switches G3 to G8 with the rotary control pressed in. Press the rotary control with the left-hand SEL fi eld highlighted, and then simply move the associated side-mounted proportional control, e. g. CONTROL 10, from the mo-tor “OFF” position in the direction of motor “ON”.Now use the rotary control to move to the STO fi eld, and move the selected transmitter control close to the motor “OFF” position (e. g. move the proportional con-trol back towards you) …

SEL

–75% =>+75% =>+85%

0%=>=>

SEL STO

11

eet. 10

C O N T R O L S W I T C Ht. G1

G2G3G4

t.

… and defi ne the switching point at the desired set-ting with a brief press on the rotary control. The swit-ched state is displayed in the right-hand column: abo-ve the switching point the switch used here (G3) is shown “closed”, and below it, “open”.Now move on to the menu …

»Timers (general)« (page 106)

Model timeBatt. time

Stop watchFlight tim

CLR�

2 : 41h5 : 03h

0:00 0s0:00 0s

Timer Alarm

Top :Centr:

… and select the “Stopwatch” line with the rotary con-trol pressed in. Activate switch assignment. As soon as you move the selected side-mounted proportional control from the motor “OFF” position past the swit-ching point in the direction of motor “ON”, the control switch assigned to this transmitter control will appear in the right-hand column:

0s

AlarmSEL SEL SEL�

�

2:41h5:03h

Timer0:00

SEL

C30:000s

Model timeBatt. time

Stop watchFlight tim

Top :Centr:

The stopwatch in the basic display now starts when you move the transmitter control towards full-throttle, and stops when you move it back again.

Examples 2 and 3 on the preceding pagesIf you prefer to control your motor with a switch, then you do not need any of the control switches just de-scribed. All you have to do is assign the same switch to the stopwatch, so that the timer starts running when you switch the motor on.

Tip:When using an electric motor, the motor run is usu-ally limited by the capacity of the battery, and in this case you would normally set the stopwatch to “count down”. Simply enter the maximum permitted motor run time in the “Timer” column, e. g. “5 min.”, and set the transmitter to emit warning tones shortly before

171Programming examples: Fixed-wing model

the permissible time has elapsed, e. g. “30 seconds” beforehand.

AlarmSEL SEL SEL�

�

2:41h5:03h

Timer0:00

SEL

C35:000s

30s

Model timeBatt. time

Stop watchFlight tim

Top :Centr:

In the basic display start by pressing the CLEAR but-ton with the stopwatch halted, so that the stopwatch switches to the “Timer” function. The timer can now be started and stopped using the transmitter control assigned to the motor.

172

Servos running in parallel

In many cases a second servo is required to run in parallel with an existing servo; for example, if two air-brake or spoiler servos are installed in the wings, or separate elevators are each actuated by one ser-vo, or a twin-fi n model requires two rudder servos, or where two servos are required for a large control sur-face due to the high forces involved.In theory this task could be solved simply by connec-ting the two servos together in the model using a con-ventional Y-lead. However, this has the drawback that the linked servos cannot be adjusted individually from the transmitter, i. e. the basic advantage of the com-puter radio control system – freely variable servo set-tings – is forfeited.The fi rst example describes the method of coupling two airbrake or spoiler servos, the second a means of controlling two or more throttle servos, and the third the coupling of two elevator servos.The example of “Two rudder servos” on the next page describes the procedure for coupling a pair of rudder servos; note that variant 1 – using a »Dual mixer« – is always preferable for applications of this kind, as it is easier and quicker to program this type of arrange-ment. The second variant, using the »Free mixers« menu, is more complex, but does provide for asym-metrical and / or non-linear travel curves.

172 Programming examples: Fixed-wing model

Two airbrake or spoiler servosWe will assume that you have installed one servo in each wing panel to actuate your airbrakes or spoi-lers, and have left the default linear control curve in the »Channel 1 curve« menu unchanged. We now connect one of the two servos to the standard recei-ver output, which is Output 1, and the second to any vacant receiver socket 5 … 12, in our example output “8”. Now move to the menu …

»Control adjust« (page 78)

… and select the FLIGHT PHASE INDEPENDENT input 9 with the rotary control pressed in. Assign “Transmitter control 1” to this input:

0% +100%+100% 0.0 0.0

0.0 0.0

ASYSYM ASYSYMSELSEL

0% +100%+100% 0.0 0.0

��

0%0%

+100%+100% 0.0 0.0+100%+100%

Cnt. 1

«Normal »1211109

–time+

InputInputInputInput

freefreefree

–travel+offset

The remaining entries can be left at the default va-lues. If necessary, adjust the servo travel in the »Ser-vo adjustment« menu, where you can – if required – fi ne-tune the travels of servos 1 and 9 to match each other.However, in our example the second airbrake servo is connected to output 8, so we now have to ensure that our settings for input 9 actually arrive at receiver out-put 8. To accomplish this we move to the menu …

»Rx. output swap« (page 153)

… and swap over the two servos 8 and 9:

SEL

7 79

10

89

10�

�

8

S e r v oS e r v oS e r v oS e r v o

R E C E I V E R O U T P U TO u t p u tO u t p u tO u t p u tO u t p u t

Note:In theory “Transmitter control 1” can also be assig-ned to the fl ight phase specifi c inputs 5 … 8. This is an obvious choice if you (initially) do not plan to pro-gram fl ight phases. Even so, we recommend that you keep to the method as described, because if you sub-sequently set up a series of fl ight phases, you may be somewhat surprised to discover that only one airbra-ke moves instead of both of them …

Multi-motor model aircraftOf course, model aircraft with two or more motors can also be set up as already described. The fi rst thrott-le servo or the fi rst speed controller would be connec-ted to (receiver) output 1 in the usual way, and every other throttle servo (or every other speed controller) would be connected to one of the vacant (receiver) outputs 5 … 12. Transmitter control 1 can then be as-signed to the inputs of the control channels which you have selected, e. g.:

0% +100%+100% 0.0 0.0

0.0 0.0

ASYSYM ASYSYMSEL«normal »

SEL

Cnt. 1 0% +100%+100% 0.0 0.0

��

Cnt. 1

0%0%

+100%+100% 0.0 0.0+100%+100%

Cnt. 11211109

–time+

InputInputInputInput free

–travel+offset

173

Two rudder servosIn this example we will connect two rudders “in paral-lel”. The second rudder could be connected to recei-ver output 8, which is not already in use.

Variant 1Move to the menu ...

»Dual mixers« (page 144)

… and select one of the dual mixers. Enter “8” and “RU” using SEL, as shown in this screen-shot:

8 0%

Diff.SEL �

�

? ? ? ? 0%

SEL

? ? ? ? 0%

SEL

RUD U A L M I X E R

Mixer MixerMixer

123

Of course, the same-sense link “� �”, which would be available via “input 8”, must be disabled for this ap-plication. For this reason it really is essential that you set input 8 to “free” in the menu ...

»Control adjust« (page 78)

0% +100%+100% 0.0 0.00% +100%+100% 0.0 0.00% +100%+100% 0.0 0.00% +100%+100% 0.0 0.0

SYM ASYASYSYMSEL SEL«normal »

��

offset –time+librefree

Input 5 freeInput 6Input 7Input 8

freefree

–travel+

… in order to separate the control function from the control channel.If all the dual mixers are already in use for other pur-poses, you can still fall back on the following alterna-tive.

Variant 2In this variant you move to the menu …

»Free mixers« (page 135)

8 =>?? - - - -

?? ?? - - - -?? ?? - - - -

SEL � SELSEL

RU??

Tr1234

LinearMIX

type

LinearMIXLinearMIXLinearMIX

from to Adjust

… and set up a “Tr RU � 8” mixer.In the “Type” column select the “Tr” setting, to ensure that the rudder trim affects both rudder servos.Now switch to the graphic page and set a SYMmetri-cal mixer input of +100%:

+100% +100% 0%

OU

TP

UT

-- +

100

STOASYSYM CLR

8RU

Of fset

Linear MIX 1

Mix input

Here again, “Input 8” should be programmed to “free” in the »Transmitter control adjust« menu, in all fl ight phases if you have set them up. It is easier to separate control function (8) from control channel “8” in the fl ight phase independent menu …

»MIX-only channel« (page 142)

1 2 3 5 6 7 8 9 11124 10

M I X O N LY C H A N N E L

MIXonlynormal

173Programming examples: Fixed-wing model

Two elevator servosThis time we need to wire up two elevator servos “in parallel”. In accordance with the receiver socket se-quence – see the section starting on page 37 – the second elevator servo should be connected to recei-ver output 8.The software is pre-confi gured for this arrangement, i. e. a suitable mixer is provided as standard. You will fi nd this in the menu:

»Model type« (page 70)

In this menu hold the rotary control pressed in and switch to the “Tail type” line, where you simply select the “2 EL Sv 3+8” entry:

SEL

Offset +100%

��

2 AIL 4 WK2 EL Sv 3+8

M O D E L T Y P E

Tail typeAileron/camber flapsBrake Input 1

Motor on C1 None

The travels of the two servos can be fi ne-tuned in the familiar way using the »Two rudder servosServo ad-justment« menu.

174

Using fl ight phases

Within any model memory you can program up to eight different fl ight phases (stages of fl ight), each in-corporating settings which can be entirely different from those in the others.Each fl ight phase can be called up by means of a switch or combination of switches. Flight phases re-present the simplest and most convenient method of switching between different model settings in fl ight, and they are usually programmed for different stages of a typical fl ight, such as normal, thermal, speed, distance etc.. However, fl ight phase programming can also be used as a straightforward method of trying out minor modifi cations to the control system – such as different mixer ratios – while the model is in the air. This makes it much quicker to fi nd the optimum set-tings for a particular model.However, before you start with the actual program-ming, we recommend that you consider whether the digital trims for aileron, elevator and rudder should be “global” in effect – i. e. should be set to the same va-lues in all fl ight phases – or should be “phase-speci-fi c”, i. e. variable separately in each fl ight phase.If you decide on, say, phase-specifi c elevator trim, then move to the menu …

»Stick mode« (page 76)

0.0s 0.0s0.0s 0.0s0.0s 0.0s

SYM ASYSEL

globalglobal

global

4444

0.0s 0.0s

�� SEL

Phase

– time +

Channel 1 AileronElevatorRudder

Tr.stepTrim

… and alter the default “global” setting accordingly.You may also like to exploit this opportunity to set the number of trim increments in the “Trim increment” co-lumn.

Example 1 …

… following up the earlier programming example: an electric glider with two aileron servos.The electric power system is controlled independent-ly of the C1 stick, using one of the two side- mounted proportional controls CONTROL 9 or 10, or one of the two three-position switches CONTROL 7 or 8. The speed controller is accordingly connected to receiver output 9 as described in Examples 1 and 2 on page 166, on which this expanded programming procedure is based. That is why we selected “none” in the “Motor on C1” line of the »Model type« menu. This setting has various ramifi cations, including the suppression of the “Motor” column in the »Phase settings« menu, and the unrestricted availability of the “Brake settings” sub-menu in the »Wing mixers« menu.

Step 1

»Phase settings« (page 100)

Phase 1Phase 2 1.0sPhase 3 3.0sPhase 4

SEL

�

Normal 2.0sThermal

0.0s

�� SEL

-Speed

++

SELName Fl.ph.Tim Sw. time

The fi rst step is to assign names to one or more fl ight phases, which should describe the various stages of fl ight. The name is important, as it helps you dif-ferentiate between the individual phases when you are programming and operating the model. The name is always displayed on the screen in all the menus which are variable separately for each fl ight phase. However, the phase names have no signifi cance in terms of programming.The method of selecting the appropriate line and name, and of setting up the transition time – by tur-ning and pressing the rotary control – should now be really familiar to you.

Note:The names you assign to the various phases are of no signifi cance in programming terms – with the ex-ception of Phase 1, which should always be assigned the name “normal”, as it is always active even if you disable the fl ight phases.

For general model fl ying three fl ight phases are usu-ally quite suffi cient:• «Thermal» for launch and “staying up”,• «normal» for normal fl ying conditions, and• «Speed» for fl ying in “top gear”. In the “Switch time” column you can defi ne the period over which the transition from one phase into (!) ano-ther fl ight phase occurs; this provides a smooth shift between the different servo settings, and can prevent a possibly damaging lurch when you switch between different control surface settings under unfavourable circumstances. An asterisk (�) in the “Status” column indicates the fl ight phase which is currently active.

Step 2 You must assign a switch or switches so that you can actually move between the different fl ight phases. The ideal unit for switching a maximum of three fl ight pha-ses is one of the two three-position switches (SW 5 + 6 or SW 9 + 10).One fl ight phase is then assigned to each of the two switch end-points A … F, starting from the centre point. The switches are assigned in the menu ...

»Phase assignment« (page 104)

First select the switch symbol below “C”, press the rotary control briefl y and move the switch to one end-point, then return it to the centre position.Now select the switch symbol below “D”, give a brief press on the rotary control, and move the switch to the opposite end-point.

174 Programming examples: Fixed-wing model

175175Programming examples: Fixed-wing model

A B C D E F<1 >

SEL5 6 Normal

P H A S E A S S I G N M E N T

p r i o r combi

The phase switch is now programmed correctly, and the next step is to assign fl ight phases to each switch position. Although you have already assigned names to certain fl ight phases, you will initially see the name of phase “1” (normal) on the right-hand side of the

screen.Move the switch to one end-point, and se-lect the SEL fi eld on the right of the screen. Use the rotary control to select the fl ight phase you wish to assign to this switch po-sition (in this example «2 Thermal»):

A B C D E F<

5 6

SELThermal2 >

P H A S E A S S I G N M E N T

p r i o r combi

Repeat the procedure with the centre position of the switch, to which the name “1 normal” is assigned.

Finally assign the name “3 Speed” to the opposite end-point of the switch. A brief press on the rotary control concludes the name assignment process.The model settings you programmed be-

fore you assigned the phase switch are now stored in the fl ight phase “1 normal”; that is the phase which is called up when the switch is at the centre position.

Step 3 You have already programmed all the settings for your model in the primary fl ight phase, and you can avo-id having to enter all the data again in the “new” fl ight phases by copying the programmed settings – which you know from test-fl ying to be correct – from the “normal” fl ight phase into the other two fl ight phases, where they will be adjusted to suit the new require-ments. This is carried out in the menu:

»Copy / Erase« (page 60)

=>=>=>=>=>

��

Erase modelCopy model –> modelCopy MX24 –> externalCopy external –> MX24Copy flight phase

Select the “Copy fl ight phase” menu point with the ro-tary control pressed in, then press ENTER or give a brief press on the rotary control.A window now appears entitled “Copy from phase”; in it select “normal” ...

Copy1 Normal 2 Thermal357

68

4Speed

from Phase:

… and then press ENTER again; the screen re-sponds by changing to “Copy to phase”. Select the destination (initially “2 Thermal”), and confi rm by pressing ENTER again. Confi rm your selection in the security query which appears, then wait while all the settings defi ned by your programming procedure are copied to the new phase.Use the same procedure to copy the same data to the other phase (“1 normal” � “3 Speed”).

Step 4 At this point all three phases are programmed and all the settings have been copied; a “smooth” transition has also been programmed, but ... all the settings are the same, i. e. there are no values which are specifi c to the different fl ight phases.A good place to start might be to alter the fl ap set-tings to meet the different requirements of the indivi-dual fl ight phases; to accomplish this we move to the menu …

»Control adjust« (page 78)

+100%+100% 0.0 0.00% +100%+100% 0.0 0.00% +100%+100% 0.0 0.00% +100%+100% 0.0 0.0

SYM ASYASYSYMSEL � SEL«Speed »

–7%

–time+offset

Input 5 freeInput 6Input 7Input 8

freefreefree

–travel+

… and select the “Offset” column, where you enter the aileron settings in so far as they differ from those in the “normal” fl ight phase. However, do remember to switch to the desired fl ight phase before you do this; i. e. check the phase name displayed at bottom left of the screen, in accordance with the switch position. Both positive and negative changes to the travel set-tings are possible. Naturally, these adjustments have to be carried out separately for each fl ight phase.

176 Programming examples: Fixed-wing model

Step 5 It may be necessary to adjust the elevator trim for each fl ight phase; this is carried out using the digital trim lever for the elevator stick, and assumes that you have set at least the elevator trim to “phase” (instead of “global”) in the »Stick mode« menu, as recom-mended at the start of this programming example.Alternatively you can adjust the settings in the »Pha-se trim F3B« menu:

NormalThermalSpeed�

«Speed » EL

0%+10%

–8%

Step 6 In the menu …

»Wing mixers« (page 110)

�� «Speed »

33%

SEL

50%

=>

0%0%2–>43–>5

Brake settings

AileronElevator

rudderaileron

Aileron differential

W I N G M I X E R S

… the name of the currently active fl ight phase ap-pears at the bottom of the screen. If you now move the fl ight phase switch, the name of the phase selec-ted by the switch appears, although the new phase still contains the settings previously copied from the “normal” fl ight phase. At this point you can enter the phase-specifi c values for aileron differential, the ratio for the aileron to rudder mixer and – if used – the ele-vator to aileron mixer (the latter increases the model’s agility around the lateral axis for aerobatics).

Note:The displayed list of options varies according to the

Example 2

Glider with four-fl ap wing, two airbrakes and aero-tow release

The following example assumes that you have alrea-dy set up the model accurately in mechanical terms, and have checked carefully that all the control sur-faces move in the correct “sense” (direction) relative to the stick commands. Please check these aspects very carefully as described in the previous program-ming examples, and carry out any changes or fi ne-tu-ning required by swapping servos at the receiver and / or using the »Servo adjustment« menu.Generally speaking, the fi ne-tuning of a model can only be carried out in fl ight, and we therefore recom-mend that you use one of the INC / DEC buttons (CONTROL 5 or 6) for this purpose instead of the ro-tary control; see page 28.This programming example only works properly if the servos are connected to the receiver output sockets as shown in the diagram below:

AI

FL

FL

AI

EL

RU

Battery

Right airbrake

Right fl ap

Left fl ap

Right aileron

Rudder

Elevator

Left aileron

Left airbrake

Batt

987654321

10Aero-tow release

Free, or auxiliary function

Rec

eive

r

number of servos entered in the “Ailerons / camber fl aps” line of the »Model type« menu.

Finally switch to the “Brake settings” sub-menu …

AILE��

–30%+33%

=>

CrowB R A K E S E T T I N G S

Elevat. curveDiff. reduct.

… and enter in the “Crow” line the extent to which the ailerons are to rise to act as airbrakes. In the “Diff. re-duction” line you should enter the value which you previously selected in the “Aileron differential” line, so that the set differential is suppressed when the bra-kes are deployed. In the “Elevat. curve” sub-menu you may wish to set a corrective value for the elevator to provide pitch trim compensation; see page 120.

Note:The “Brake settings” menu is switched “off” if you en-tered “Motor on C1 forward / back” in the »Model type« menu (see page 70), and leave “yes” for the currently active fl ight phase in the “Motor” column of the »Phase settings« menu (see page 100). You may therefore need to switch fl ight phases.

177Programming examples: Fixed-wing model

Start the programming of the model in a free model memory: move to the »Base setup model« menu, enter the model name and select your preferred stick mode and the type of receiver installed in the model.In the menu …

»Model type« (Seite 70)

SEL

Offset +100%2 AIL 2 FL

��

M O D E L T Y P E

Tail typeAileron/camber flapsBrake Input 1

NormalMotor on C1 None

… leave “Motor on C1” to “none” and the tail type at “normal”. However, you must set “2 AIL 2 FL” in the “Ailerons / camber fl aps” line for this model confi gura-tion. In the “Brake” line set or leave “Input 1”, because the associated C1 stick is to be used as the transmit-ter control for operating the two airbrake servos con-nected to receiver sockets 1 + 8.The Offset value defi nes the neutral position of all the mixers in the “Brake settings” sub-menu of the »Wing mixers« menu. Place this neutral point at about +90%; this assumes that the airbrakes are to be re-tracted at the forward position of the C1 stick. The re-minder of the travel between 90% and the full travel of the stick (100%) is then an intentional dead zone with these two mixers; this ensures that the control sur-faces affected by the mixers set up in the “Brake set-tings” menu remain in their “normal” position even if the C1 stick is moved slightly away from its end-point. At the same time the effective travel of the transmitter control is automatically expanded back to 100%.In the menu …

»Control adjust« (page 78)

… assign a switch to the fl ight phase independent in-put 9 for operating the aero-tow release. The travel of

the control for triggering the switch can be adjusted using the “-travel+” column.

0% +100%+100% 0.0 0.00% +100%+100% 0.0 0.00% +100%+100% 0.0 0.00% +100%+100% 0.0 0.0

SYM ASYASYSYMSEL SEL«normal »

7

��

1211109

offset –time+

InputInputInputInput

freefreefree

–travel+

Pressing the HELP button with the rotary control pressed in now takes you to the »Servo display«, where you can check the effect of these settings.Since the C1 control is required to operate servo 8 as well as servo 1, this link must be created using the »Control adjust« and »Receiver output swap« me-nus.Move at fi rst to the line for the fl ight phase indepen-dent “input 10” and assign “transmitter control 1” to it as follows:

0% +100%+100% 0.0 0.0Cnt. 1 0% +100%+100% 0.0 0.0

0% +100%+100% 0.0 0.00% +100%+100% 0.0 0.0

SYM ASYASYSYMSEL SEL«normal »

7

��

1211109

offset –time+

InputInputInputInput

freefree

–travel+

With this stage complete, move to the menu …

»Receiver output swap« (page 153)

SEL

7 7

98

89

10�

�

10S e r v oS e r v oS e r v oS e r v o

R E C E I V E R O U T P U TO u t p u tO u t p u tO u t p u tO u t p u t

… and swap over servos 8 and 10, so that the signal for servo 10 is present at (receiver) output 8, and that for servo 8 at output 10. For more details on this pro-

cedure please turn to the section entitled “Servos run-ning in parallel” on page 172.The travels, and – if necessary – the direction of ro-tation of the airbrake servo 1 and the second airbra-ke servo, which still constitutes servo 10 as far as the transmitter’s internal processing is concerned, can be adjusted in the menu …

»Servo adjustment« (page 74)

Servo 1 => 0% 100% 100% 150% 150%Servo 2 => 0% 100% 100% 150% 150%Servo 3 => 0% 100% 100% 150% 150%Servo 4 => 0% 100% 100% 150% 150%

RevSEL SYM ASY SYM ASY �

cent. – travel + – limit +SEL

In the multi-fl ap menu of the menu …

»Wing mixers« (page 110)

… you should now enter the fi rst mixer values for the four wing fl aps (two ailerons and two fl aps):

+100% + 60%

Diff. + 50% + 30%0% 0%

0% 0% +100% +100%0% 0% 0% 0%AILE

SELSEL��

+100%

FLAP

+ 60%AI

Ail–tr

Fl.posFL

El–>Fl

Note:The parameter values shown in this example will vary from model to model, and will need to be optimised in the course of a fl ight testing programme.

In the line …

�Ai�: … you defi ne the extent in percentage terms to which the two pairs of control sur-faces “AILE” and “FLAP” are to follow the ai-leron control system. When setting the para-

178178 Programming examples: Fixed-wing model

extent to which AILE and FLAP follow the movement when the C1 stick is moved. The aim is for the airbrakes to move up “slight-ly” and both fl aps to defl ect down as far as possible.

Pressing the HELP button with the rota-ry control pressed in will show you the ser-vo travels, and – in particular – will illustrate that the C1 control has no effect on the wing fl aps above the previously selected brake offset of 90% (“dead zone” of the C1 stick).

Check all the wing fl ap travels once more, and adjust the servo centres, servo travel and travel limits in the »Servo adjustment« menu if necessary.When you have completed the non memory specifi c (i. e. global) settings up to this point, you are probably ready to consider fl ying the model again.

In the following section we show how to set up two more fl ight phases, each of which demands slightly different wing fl ap settings.However, since we previously set up the “Brake set-tings” in the “normal” fl ight phase, and have optimised these values, we must now ensure that the transmit-ter automatically switches to the “normal” fl ight pha-se when the C1 stick is moved in the “brake” direction; this step must be completed before you set up the new fl ight phases.Assuming that you have changed nothing in the de-fault assignment of the C1 stick for the control swit-ches G1 and G2, we now move directly to the »Logi-cal switches« menu. If this is not the case, you must fi rst program a suitable control switch in the »Con trol switches« menu, using the procedure described on page 94.

»Logical switches« (page 97)

First activate the left hand fi eld (already high-lighted), then locate the three-position switch you

one of the side-mounted proportional cont-rols, then you should assign the appropriate transmitter control to Input 6 in the »Trans-mitter control adjust« menu. In this menu you would then set the desired response to a movement of the transmitter control selec-ted for this purpose, in the form of a percen-tage value.

El�Fl: This mixer causes the ailerons (AILE) and fl aps (FLAP) to defl ect when an elevator command is given.

The mixer direction must be selected to ensure that up-elevator causes all the wing fl aps to defl ect down, and down-elevator causes up-fl ap. The usual values for this mi-xer are in the low two-digit range.

Pressing the HELP button with the rotary control pressed in takes you to the »Servo display«, where you can check the settings you have completed thus far.Now move on to the “Brake settings”, staying within the »Wing mixers« menu:

WK2

+30% 0%+80% +50% 0%

=>

��

+40%

AILE FLAP

CrowB R A K E S E T T I N G S

Elevat. curveDiff. reduct.

Note:The “Brake settings” menu is switched “off” if you en-tered “Motor on C1 forward / back” in the »Model type« menu (see page 70), and leave “yes” for the currently active fl ight phase in the “Motor” column of the »Phase settings« menu (see page 100). You may therefore need to switch fl ight phases.

Crow: Earlier we selected the C1 stick for airbrake control. At this point you can determine the

meter values it is important to check that the ailerons defl ect in the correct “sense” (direc-tion).

The adjustment range of -100% … +100% enables you to set the correct direction of travel as well as the desired aileron travels.

Ail-tr: At this point you determine the extent in percentage terms of the effect of aileron trim on AILE and FLAP.

Diff.: At this point you enter the differential for the aileron control system of the AILE and FLAP surfaces. Please see page 111 for an explanation of aileron differential.

The adjustment range of -100% … +100% enables you to set the correct direction of differential regardless of the direction of ro-tation of the aileron and fl ap servos.

Fl.pos: In this line you set the fl ight phase specifi c fl ap positions for all the wing fl aps (ailerons and camber-changing fl aps) present on your model. This enables you to determine the position the fl aps take up in each fl ight phase.

Note:The values which appear in this line refer back to the same data set used at the com-parable position in the »Phase trim F3B« menu, for which reason any changes you make here affect both menus.

�FL�: Since the default settings for all inputs in the »Transmitter control adjust« menu is “free”, neither the ailerons nor the fl aps can be operated until you have entered values at this point. You can therefore leave the de-fault entries unchanged for the moment.

However, if you wish to be able to vary the fl ap positions relative to the setting selec-ted in the “FL.pos” line, using a switch or

179179Programming examples: Fixed-wing model

have already selected for switching between the fl ight phases, for example SW 9 + 10, and move it back from its centre position, i. e. in the direction of SW 9.The next step is to move the C1 stick approximate-ly to its centre position, then use the rotary control to move to the right-hand fi eld and activate switch assignment with a brief press on the rotary control. Move the C1 stick to its end-stop in the direction of “brakes retracted”. The switch will now appear as “G1” or “G2”, depending on the direction of the stick move-ment.Leave the default “AND” link of these two switches un-changed; if you see an “OR” in the appropriate menu line, set the selected logical switch to this setting:

L1L2 L2L3L4

SEL

9 G1 L1

L3L4

��

L O G I C A L S W I T C H E SAND

ANDAND

AND

If you now leave the C1 stick in the “brakes retrac-ted” position, AND have not also moved the selected fl ight phase switch when assigning it, THEN the logi-cal switch is closed, as indicated by the symbol at far right. On the other hand, if only one of the two swit-ches is open – i. e. if the stick is positioned past the offset point in the direction of “brakes extended”, or if the fl ight phase switch has been operated, then the logical switch also opens.After these preparations please move to the menu …

»Phase settings« (page 100)

Phase 1Phase 2 1.0sPhase 3 1.0sPhase 4

SEL

�

Normal 1.0sThermal

0.1s

�� SEL

-Speed

+

+

SELName Fl.ph.Tim Sw. time

… and activate the SEL fi eld under the “Name” co-lumn with a brief press on the rotary control.Now assign the name “Normal” to Phase 1 – the nor-mal phase – by selecting it with the rotary control. This is the phase which contains the settings you have entered thus far. (Alternatively you can create your own phase name in the »Basic settings« menu, if you prefer this to the default names.)Phase 2 is to be assigned the name “Thermal”, and Phase 3 the name “Speed”. In the right-hand column set a “Switch time” from any other phase into the cur-rent phase, in order to avoid an abrupt phase shift, i. e. sudden changes in control surface positions. We suggest that you try out different transition times. In this example we have selected a value of one second.In the menu …

»Phase assignment« (page 104)

… the appropriate switches are assigned to these fl ight phases; these are the switches you will use to shift between the three phases.Since no particular priority is required, we suggest that you choose switch assignment “C” in the display and select the logical switch “L1” as the switch – as set up earlier, and described on page 178. With this step complete, activate the switch assignment under “D” and operate the three-position switch (which we have selected for our example) forward from its centre position, i. e. in the direction of SW 10.After completing the switch assignment, use the rota-ry control to move to the SEL fi eld at far right, and ac-

tivate the phase name assignment with a brief press on the rotary control. Close “L1” by moving the se-lected three-position switch back, AND moving the C1 stick to the “brakes retracted” position. Assign the name “<2 Thermal>” to this switch position, and as-sign the name “< normal>” to the “OFF position”.

A B C D E F

SELL1 <1 >2 Thermal10

P H A S E A S S I G N M E N T

p r i o r combi

A B C D E F

SELL1 <1 >Normal10

P H A S E A S S I G N M E N T

p r i o r combi

Finally move the three-position switch forward, in the direction of SW 10, and assign the name “<3 Speed>” to this switch position.

A B C D E F

SELL1 <1 >3 Speed10

P H A S E A S S I G N M E N T

p r i o r combi

From this point on, the selected phase names will be superimposed during all further programming work in all the fl ight phase specifi c menus – see the table on page 98 – in accordance with the position of the pha-se select switches.Since we have already entered some settings in fl ight phase specifi c menus, e. g. in the wing mixer menu, we can copy these settings into the “Thermal” fl ight phase as the next step.

180180 Programming examples: Fixed-wing model

Note:The FLAP and AILE positions at the two switch end-points and the switch centre position refl ect the va-lues set in the “-travel+” column, the Offset value, and the mixer ratio which you have set in the “Multi-fl ap menu” of the »Wing mixers« menu.

For our purposes we will leave the transmitter cont-rol “travel” at a symmetrical setting of +100%, and the Offset value at 0%, as shown in the screen-shot.However, it is advisable to enter a SYMmetrical or ASYmmetrical time for a smooth transition between the three switch positions. This is entered in the “-time+” column; in our example the value is set to “1.0 s 1.0 s”:

0% +100%+100%

0% +100%+100% 0.0 0.00% +100%+100% 0.0 0.0

ASYSYMSEL SEL�� ASY

0.0 0.0

SYM

Cnt. 6

–time+offset

0% +100%+100% 1.0 1.0

«Thermal»

free

8765Input

InputInputInput

freefree

–travel+

In the “Multi-fl ap menu” of the menu …

»Wing mixers« (page 110)

+100% + 60%

Diff. + 50% + 30%+ 10% + 15%

+10% +10%0% 0% 0% 0%AILE

SYMASY��

+100%

FLAP

+ 60%

+15% +15%

«Thermal»SYM ASY

AIAil–tr

Fl.posFL

El–>Fl

… you should now change the values for “Fl.pos” and “�FL�” in the “Thermal” fl ight phase:Fl.pos: In this line you defi ne the AILE and FLAP

positions in the “Thermal” fl ight phase for the neutral of centre position of the assig-ned transmitter control (proportional con-

Phase to

1 Normal 2 Thermal

YESNO

–�

to be copied?

You can now repeat the whole procedure with the fl ight phase “3 Speed”.

At this point we will enter the changes required in the “Thermal” fl ight phase, as an example of the procedure.To vary the fl ap settings in the “Thermal” phase you simply move to the menu …

»Control adjust« (pagee 78)

… and assign a transmitter control to input 6, as de-scribed on page 78.If you assign one of the two side-mounted proportio-nal controls to this input, or one of the two INC / DEC buttons (in our example CONTROL 6) you can fi ne-tune the travels of the ailerons (2 + 5) and the fl aps (6 + 7) by setting the mixer ratios in the »Wing mixers« menu.

0% +100%+100% 0.0 0.00% +100%+100% 0.0 0.00% +100%+100% 0.0 0.00% +100%+100% 0.0 0.0

ASYSYMSEL«Thermal»

��

Cnt. 6

SYM ASYSEL

free

–time+offset8765Input

InputInputInput

freefree

–travel+

If you assign another free three-position switch to In-put 6 instead, you can use it to call up three diffe-rent fl ap positions for the ailerons (AILE) and fl aps (FLAP), and three elevator positions (EL) in the “Thermal” fl ight phase; see the following page. (These three switch positions correspond to the centre posi-tion and the two end-points of the side-mounted pro-portional control mentioned above.)

This is achieved by calling up the menu …

»Copy / Erase« (page 60)

… and selecting the “Copy fl ight phase” line:

=>=>=>=>=>

��

Erase modelCopy model –> modelCopy MX24 –> externalCopy external –> MX24Copy flight phase

In “Copy from phase” you will see all eight possible fl ight phases listed:

1. Select the fl ight phase you wish to copy, i. e. “1 normal”.

1 Normal 2 Thermal357

68

4Speed

Copy from Phase:

2. Give the rotary control a brief press (or press EN-TER) to move to the “Copy to phase” window for entering the destination memory.

3. Select the phase “2 Thermal” as destination:

1 Normal357

68

4Speed2 Thermal

Copy to Phase:

4. Confi rm this with a brief press on the rotary cont-rol, or by pressing ENTER.

5. The screen now presents you with a security que-ry, which you should confi rm with “YES”:

181181Programming examples: Fixed-wing model

trol, INC / DEC button or three-position switch).

�FL�: At this point you determine the extent to which the aileron and fl ap servos are to follow as fl aps when the selected transmit-ter control (see above) or the three-positi-on switch is moved.

Pressing CLEAR resets altered settings to the default values.

Note:We recommend that the mixer ratios should be set so that the fl aps are positioned slightly “lower” than the ailerons, as this helps to produce more effi cient lift distribution across the wingspan.

Pressing the HELP button with the rotary control pressed in takes you to the »Servo display«, whe-re you can check the response of the AILE and FLAP servos when you operate the selected fl ap control. (First move the C1 stick to the forward position, as this makes it easier to follow the “AILE” and “FLAP” settings when you operate the associated transmitter control.):

• In the centre position of the transmitter control, the “FL.pos” setting in our example is +10% on AILE, and +15% on FLAP.

• At the one end-point of the transmitter control AILE and FLAP revert to their neutral positions, as the mixer ratio in our example just compensates for the FL.pos setting, whereas:

• AILE and FLAP move to the maximum defl ection determined by the set mixer ratio at the opposite end-point of the transmitter control.

Now we have to address the pitch-trim compensati-on issue. To set the correct elevator travel we have to leave the “Multi-fl ap” menu and return to the base page of the »Wing mixers« menu:

«Thermal»��

+5% +5%ASYSYM

0%

=>=>

2–>46–>3

Multi-flap menuBrake settingsAileronFlaps

rudderelevator

W I N G M I X E R S

At the two end-points of the three-position switch the elevator (in our example) follows symmetrically, with a mixer ratio of +5% (correct for each direction). On the other hand, if you are using a proportional cont-rol or one of the INC / DEC buttons, then the elevator defl ects in proportion to the position of the transmit-ter control.The settings for the “Speed” fl ight phase can now be adjusted in the same manner.

Notes:• Regardless of these settings, the digital trims for

aileron, elevator and rudder take effect “globally” or per “phase” according to your selected setting in the »Stick mode« menu (see page 76).

• All values vary from model to model. You will need to adjust the settings to suit your particular aircraft, preferably during a test-fl ying programme.

182 Programming examples: Fixed-wing model

Controlling timed sequencesby means of time delays and curve mixers

An interesting feature of the mx-24s software, and one which deserves to be better known, is that it is possible to slow down virtually all servo movements over a period of up to 9.9 seconds simply by opera-ting a switch.The following section will explain how such functions can be programmed, with the help of a few examples. Once you have made yourself familiar with these faci-lities we are sure you will think of more applications.The programming procedure commences in the menu …

»Control adjust« (page 78)

0% +100%+100% 0.0 0.00% +100%+100% 0.0 0.00% +100%+100% 0.0 0.00% +100%+100% 0.0 0.0

SYM ASYASYSYMSEL SEL«normal »

Cnt. 5

��

1211109

offset –time+

InputInputInputInput

freefreefree

–travel+

… where the fi rst step is to assign one of the two side-mounted proportional controls or one of the two INC / DEC buttons to the desired control channel, so that it is possible to move to all points on the control curve during the programming procedure. In our ex-ample we are using CONTROL 5 assigned to Input 9. Don’t be tempted to enter a time delay in the “-time+” column at this stage.Now move to the menu …

»MIX-only channel« (page 142)

1 2 3 5 6 7 8 9 11124 10

M I X O N LY C H A N N E L

MIXonlynormal

… and set the selected control channel – in our ex-ample “9” – to “MIX only”.

This setting of “MIX only” is absolutely essential, be-cause the control curves of the curve mixers descri-bed in the following example only affect the output of the same channel – which is what we want to achieve – if there is no direct connection between the trans-mitter control and the output. In this mode the trans-mitter control signal carries out a detour via a curve mixer, during which it can be manipulated in almost any way you like before being passed to the appropri-ate output.For this reason the next step is to move to the menu …

»Free Mixers« (page 135)

SEL��

???? - - - -- - - -- - - -

????9

????8

76

9

SEL SEL

=>9

LinearMIX

type

LinearMIXLinearMIX

from to AdjustCurve MIX

… and program a same-channel curve mixer, e. g. from “9” to “9”. On the second page of this menu you can defi ne the shape of the control curve, but please bear in mind that the following examples should only be considered as ideas and guidelines, and that you can set up your own control curves in any way you wish.For example, this is how the control curve might look for …

... the delayed switching of a searchlight after a retractable undercarriage has started to extend:

-100%L -100%

OU

TP

UT

-- +1

100

-103%

9 9Curve MIX 9

InputCurve

off PointOutput

… actuating a wheel door which closes again af-ter the wheel has been extended:

-100%L

OU

TP

UT

--

100

+

1 29 9

-103%

-100%

Curve MIX 9

InputCurve

off PointOutput

… starting extending a folding power system …

-100%L

OU

TP

UT

--

100

+

19 9

-103%

-100%

Curve MIX 9

InputCurve

on PointOutput

… starting the electric motor connected to out-put 10 and actuated by the same switch, but with a delay:

-101%L

OU

TP

UT

--

100

+1

9 10

-104%

-100%

Curve MIX 10

InputCurve

on PointOutput

Once the function you have programmed according to these ideas is working as you want it to – you can check this at any time by calling up the »Servo dis-play« menu by pressing the HELP button with the ro-tary control pressed in – then you should conclude the programming procedure by moving to the menu …

183

»Control adjust« (page 78)

0% +100%+100%0% +100%+100%0% +100%+100% 0.0 0.00% +100%+100% 0.0 0.0

ASYASYSYMSEL SEL«normal »

9

��

0.00.0

SYM

1211109

offset –time+

9.9 9.9InputInputInputInput

freefreefree

–travel+

… and assigning any switch you like (e. g. “9”) to the control channel you are using, instead of the pre-viously selected proportional control – in this case “CONTROL 5” to channel “9”. You can then set the desired SYMmetrical or ASYmmetrical time period in the “-time+” column; this defi nes the time over which the programmed function is to take effect.

Note:When assigning switches, please bear in mind at all times that a single switch can trigger multiple func-tions. For example, a retractable undercarriage con-nected to output 6 can be operated by the same switch used to trigger the time-controlled wheel doors or the undercarriage searchlight, connected to output 9 – as described in our example.

Programming examples: Fixed-wing model

184

Eight-fl ap wing

In its standard form the mx-24s fi xed-wing program provides a convenient method of controlling a maxi-mum of six servos for the aileron / fl ap function.If the wings are fi tted with eight control surfaces, you can set up a dual mixer and up to four free mixers in order to control two more servos operating the super-imposed inboard ailerons and fl aps.In this section we consider a glider without separate (conventional) airbrakes in the wings.The servos should be connected to a suitable recei-ver in the following sequence:

Control surface Receiver output

Ailerons 2 + 5

Flaps 1 (outboard) 6 + 7

Flaps 2 (centre) 9 + 10

Flaps 3 (inboard) 11 + 12

Elevator 3

Rudder 4

To control all the wing fl aps you will need the two sticks plus only one of the two INC / DEC buttons CONTROL 5 or 6 or alternatively a maximum of two two-position switches (SW).To set up a control system for all the servos, fi rst switch to the menu ...

Programming examples: Fixed-wing model

»Model type« (page 70)

SEL

Offset +100%

��

2 AIL 4 FL

M O D E L T Y P E

Tail typeAileron/camber flapsBrake Input 1

NormalMotor on C1 None

… and select “2 AIL 4 FL” In the “Ailerons / fl aps” line.Now switch to the menu ...

»Dual mixers« (page 144)

12 0%

Diff.SELSEL �

�

11? ? ? ? 0%

SEL

? ? ? ? 0%

D U A L M I X E RMixerMixerMixer

123

… and set up one of the mixers – in our example mi-xer 1 – to “�11�” and “�12�”.This dual mixer combines servos 11 and 12 to act as ailerons (11 and 12 moving in opposite direc-tions when a “�12�” control signal is present) and as fl aps (11 and 12 moving in the same direction when a “�11�” control signal is present). However, since the ailerons are controlled by one of the two sticks, and at present this is affecting neither of the control channels 11 and 12, you must set up a free mixer in order to create this link. This is accomplished in the menu …

»Free mixers« (page 135)

Tr =>- - - -

?? ?? - - - -?? ?? - - - -

SEL � SEL

AI 12?? ??

SEL

LinearMIX

type

1LinearMIXLinearMIXLinearMIX

234

from to Adjust

… where you program an unused linear mixer, for ex-ample LinearMIX 1, with “Tr” and “AIL � 12”.On the second screen page you can enter a mixer va-lue to suit the model:

+20% +20% 0%

OU

TP

UT

- +

100

STOASYSYM CLR

Tr AI 12

Of fse t

Linear MIX 1

Mix input

This mixer now transfers the aileron function to the two inboard fl ap servos 11 + 12 with the help of the dual mixer which we set up earlier.We now need to set up the fl ap servos 6 + 7 (FLAP) and 9 + 10 (FL2) to act as ailerons: select the menu …

»Wing mixers« (page 110)

… and move to the “Multi-fl ap menu” within it:

AI +100% Ail–trDiff. 0% FL.pos 0%

FL 0% +100%+100%El–>Fl 0% 0% 0% 0%

AILESEL SEL SEL�

�

+100%

FLAP FL2

0% +100%+100%0% 0%

+75% +50%

0% 0%0% 0%

+50%+75%

In the “�QR�” line enter suitable values for the aile-ron control of the two pairs of wing fl aps, and do the same in the “Ail-tr” line to ensure that aileron trim is also transferred.At this stage it is advisable to check the settings you have programmed thus far by calling up the »Servo display« menu:

• When you give an aileron command, servos 6 + 7, 9 + 10 and 11 + 12 should move in parallel with servos 2 + 5; the aileron trim lever should also af-fect all these servos.

102 59 76

34

PPM24 or APCM24

11 12

185

• The C1 stick still only operates the servo connec-ted to receiver output 1.

Caution:Check the screen carefully! When the ailerons are operated, the bars in the »Servo display« should move in the same direction; when fl aps are opera-ted, in opposite directions.

The fi nal step in this procedure is to select the menu ...

»Servo adjustment« (page 74)

Servo 1 => 0% 100% 100% 150% 150%Servo 2 => 0% 100% 100% 150% 150%Servo 3 => 0% 100% 100% 150% 150%Servo 4 => 0% 100% 100% 150% 150%

RevSEL SYM ASY SYM ASY �

cent. – travel + – limit +SEL

… and carry out any fi ne-tuning of the servo travels required.This completes the basic programming of the eight-fl ap wing.

Flap positioning in different fl ight phasesThe fl ap positions can now be programmed to diffe-rent settings for each fl ight phase. Start by program-ming two or more fl ight phases using the menus »Phase settings« and »Phase assignment«. Take this opportunity to change the standard “global” set-ting for the effect of the digital trims to “phase”, if this is what you want to achieve; this is selected in the »Stick mode« menu (see page 76).An example of programming fl ight phases can be found on page 174.When you have completed this stage, move to the menu ...

»Free mixers« (page 135)

… and – in order to solve a problem which is about to crop up – program an additional mixer, for example: LinearMIX 2 “7 � 11” …

Tr =>

?? ?? - - - -?? ?? - - - -

SEL SEL

AI 127 11

�� SEL

=>1234

LinearMIX

type

LinearMIXLinearMIXLinearMIX

from to Adjust

… then assign a SYMmetrical setting of +100% to it on the set-up page:

+100% +100% 0%

OU

TP

UT

- +

100

STOASYSYM CLR

2 7 11

Offset

Linear MIX

Mix input

Why?As already mentioned several times at relevant points, inputs 5 … 8 can (and must) be programmed separately for each fl ight phase in the »Control ad-just« menu. It has also been explained at the ap-propriate point that “Input 7” is automatically de-cou-pled from “Servo 7” if you choose “2 AIL 2/4 FL” in the “Ailerons / camber fl aps” line of the »Model type« menu, i. e. it is virtually set to “Mix only” status by de-fault. However, we need just such a fl ight phase spe-cifi c “free” input in order to be able to trim the inboard fl aps separately for each fl ight phase. The “7 � 11” mixer you have just set up simply links this to “Input 7” in the background.

One fl ap setting for each fl ight phaseIf you are satisfi ed with one fl ap position per fl ight phase, then you need to move to the “Multi-fl ap menu” of the menu …

»Wing mixers« (page 110)

… and set up the servo pairs “AILE” (2 + 5), “FLAP” (6 + 7) and “FL2” (9 + 10) in each of the programmed fl ight phases to suit your requirements:

+100% +75% +50%

Diff. 0% 0% 0%0% 0%

0% +100%+100%0% 0% 0% 0%

AILESEL SEL SEL�

�

+100%

FLAP FL2

0% +100%+100%0%

0% 0%

+50%

«Normal »

+75%AI

Ail–tr

FL.pos FL

El–>Fl

However, the corresponding settings for the servo pair 11 + 12 are entered in the menu …

»Control adjust« (page 78)

+100%

«Normal »

ASYSYM ASYSYM

0% +100% 0.0 0.00%

0%

+100%+100%+100%+100%+100%+100%

0.0 0.00.0 0.00.0 0.0

SEL SEL

0%

��

Input freeInputInputInput

freefreefree

–travel+ –time+offset

5678

… in the Offset column for input 7. (We have alrea-dy set up the free mixer which we need to “transport” these settings to control channel 11 – see the pre-vious column.)At this point in the proceedings you should also check that inputs 5, 6 and 8 are set to “free” in each fl ight phase. This ensures that any (accidental) settings of transmitter controls or switches which you have mis-takenly or accidentally assigned have no effect on the model.

Note:The offset you enter may need to be positive or nega-tive, depending on the orientation of the servos in the model’s wings.

However, if you wish to set up …

Programming examples: Fixed-wing model

186 Programming examples: Fixed-wing model

Variable fl ap settings in each fl ight phase using one of the two INC / DEC buttons,then you can select a single transmitter control to vary the basic settings of all eight wing fl aps simulta-neously, separately for each fl ight phase.To achieve this you should fi rst move to the menu …

»Control adjust« (page 78)

… where you assign the same INC / DEC button to the inputs 5, 6 AND 7 – for example CONTROL 5 – in each fl ight phase, and at the same time reduce the travel to around 50% or even less, as this provides very fi ne adjustment of the fl ap trim. It is also possib-le to fi ne-tune the throws of the individual fl ap pairs in one menu by entering different travel settings:

«Normal »

ASY ASYSYM

0% 0.0 0.00%

0%

+25% +25%+25% +25%

+100%+100%

0.0 0.00.0 0.00.0 0.0

SEL SEL

0%

�� SYM

Cnt. 5 +25% +25%

–time+offset

Cnt. 5Cnt. 5

InputInputInputInput free

–travel+

5678

Notes:• Of course, a possible alternative is to use one of

the switches or side-mounted proportional con-trols, but please note that their positions are not stored separately for each fl ight phase – in con-trast to the two INC / DEC buttons CONTROL 5 and 6.

• If you prefer to use a switch, set the “deviation” from the offset point SYMmetrically or ASYmetri-cally in the “-travel+” column.

Flap compensation when an elevator command is givenIf you fl ight-test the model and discover that elevator trim correction is required when the fl aps are raised or lowered, this can be set up in the menu ...

»Wing mixers« (page 110)

SYM��

=>0%

0%0%ASY«Normal »

2–>46–>3

W I N G M I X E R SMulti-flap menuBrake settingsAileronFlaps

rudderelevator

… where you select the “Flap 6 � 3 elevator” line and enter a suitable value for each fl ight phase. If you have assigned the same transmitter control to the in-puts 5, 6 and 7 – as described above – then all eight wing fl aps will move simultaneously, while the eleva-tor will follow the movement according to the set mi-xer ratio.

Flap movement when elevator commands are gi-venThe fl aps can be set up to defl ect when the eleva-tor stick is moved; this function increases the model’s agility around the lateral axis, and is normally used only when the model is fl ying fast. The mixer is set up in the “Multi-fl ap menu” of the menu …

»Wing mixers« (page 110)

+100%

Diff. 0% 0%

0% +100%+100%0% 0% 0% 0%

SYM ASY ASY��

+100%

0% +100%+100%0% 0%

«Normal »ASY SYM SYM

AILE FLAP FL2

+75% +50%

0% 0%0% 0%

+50%+75%AI

Ail–tr

FL.pos FL

El–>Fl

… where you enter the appropriate values in the “El-> Fl” line, separately for each fl ight phase. The fl aps are usually set to defl ect in the opposite direction to the elevator. This mixer causes the two fl ap pairs (servos 6 + 7 and 9 + 10) to defl ect in parallel in accordance with the set mixer ratio, while the ailerons (servos 2 + 5) also follow this movement.

We will now set up the two inboard fl ap servos (ser-vos 11 + 12) to follow the movement of the other wing fl aps; this is achieved in the menu …

»Free mixers« (page 135)

Tr =>

EL

SEL SEL

AI 127 11

�� SEL

=>11 =>

?? ?? - - - -

1234

LinearMIX

type

LinearMIXLinearMIXLinearMIX

from to Adjust

… where we invoke an “EL � 11” mixer.Provided that the dual mixer is already set up, as de-scribed on page 184, the effect of this mixer is to cau-se the inboard fl aps to follow the travel of the other wing fl aps when an elevator command is given.On the second page of the display a mixer input should be entered to suit the model and the fl ight phase.We want this mixer – in our example LinearMIX 3 – to work in a fl ight phase specifi c manner, and to this end we must move to the menu …

»MIX active in phase« (page 142)

SEL«Normal »��

AI 127 11

EL 11????

LinearMIXM I X A C T I V I N P H A S E

yesLinearMIXLinearMIXLinearMIX

yes

yesno

12

43

… and defi ne the fl ight phases in which the mixer is to be active (“yes”) and those in which it is to be disabled (“no”). This requires you to switch between the fl ight phases and set the mixer to “yes” or “no” ac-cordingly for each phase.

187Programming examples: Fixed-wing model

Brake settings

Note:The “Brake settings” menu is switched “off” if you en-tered “Motor on C1 forward / back” in the »Model type« menu (see page 70), and leave “yes” for the currently active fl ight phase in the “Motor” column of the »Phase settings« menu (see page 100). You may therefore need to switch fl ight phases.

In the “Brake settings” sub-menu of the »Wing mi-xers« menu you can set up a braking system which causes the ailerons 2 + 5 to defl ect up, and the fl ap pairs “FLAP” (6 + 7) and “FL2” (9 + 10) to defl ect down, while elevator trim is applied (if necessary) to maintain the correct fl ight attitude (see page 120).You can control the braking system using the C1 stick. However, the mixer neutral point (offset) of the brake system must be adjusted appropriately. This is carried out in the menu …

»Model type« (page 70)

SEL

Offset +90%

��

2 AIL 4 FLNormal

STO

M O D E L T Y P E

Tail typeAileron/camber flapsBrake Input 1

Motor on C1 None

… where you need to select the “Brake” line. Move the C1 stick to the position at which the airbrake mi-xer is to be triggered – normally just before the for-ward end-point – then select STO and confi rm the trigger point with a brief press on the rotary control.If you now move the C1 stick towards the pilot beyond this point, all the brake system mixers will respond in accordance with the corresponding mixer ratio. Below this point the mixer is inactive, which means that you can also select a “dead zone”.To make the inboard fl aps 11 + 12 follow this move-

ment, you need to set up a further free mixer: “C1 � 11”.

Tr =>

EL

SEL SEL

AI 127 11

�� SEL

=>11

C1 11=>=>

1234

LinearMIX

type

LinearMIXLinearMIXLinearMIX

from to Adjust

This mixer causes the inboard fl aps to follow in the same direction, refl ecting the position of the C1 stick.Ideally the neutral point of this mixer should be loca-ted at the position on the C1 stick travel which you earlier defi ned as the offset point in the “Brake” line of the »Model type« menu (see left-hand column).

11

+50% 0% +90%

OU

TP

UT

+

100

STOASYSYM CLR

C1

Offset

4Linear MIX

Mix input

Now move the C1 stick in the direction of “Brakes ex-tended”, and use ASY to set the required down-tra-vel. However, it is important to ensure that the servos don’t strike their end-stops. Make use of the “Travel li-mit” line of the »Servo adjustment« menu if neces-sary.You may also wish to adjust the control characteri-stics of the C1 stick using the »Channel 1 curve« menu.If your model features additional (conventional) air-brakes or spoilers, and if your receiver still has Output 1 free, you can control them using the C1 stick simply by connecting the airbrake servo to receiver output 1.However, if the left and right airbrakes are actuated by two separate servos instead of one, then receiver out-put 8 should still be available for connecting the se-cond airbrake servo. In this case program the link to

the second airbrake servos as described in the sec-tion entitled “Servos running in parallel” on page 172.

Reduction of aileron and fl ap differential (servos 2 + 5, 6 + 7 and 9 + 10)It may prove to be necessary to reduce the degree of aileron differential which you have already program-med, in order to improve aileron response when the “crow” brake system is deployed as described above.To do this select “Differential reduction” in the “Brake settings” section of the »Wing mixers« menu: this re-duces the degree of aileron differential when the crow brake setting is invoked using the C1 stick; the diffe-rential reduction increases progressively as the stick is advanced; see page 119 for more details.

Aileron differential for the inboard fl aps (servos 11 + 12)Differential travel for the supplementary wing fl aps 11 + 12 when used as ailerons can be set up in the »Dual mixers« menu; see earlier.However, it is not possible to set differential reduction for the wing fl aps 11 + 12. In this case the travel of the inboard fl aps is usually very small, so differential reduction is not strictly necessary.

188

Delta / fl ying wing model aircraft

On page 158, where the section on fi xed-wing mo-del programming starts, you will fi nd general notes re-garding the procedure for installing and setting up the RC system in a model, and – of course – this also ap-plies to deltas and fl ying wings. The information on test-fl ying and refi ning the settings is also relevant, in-cluding the section on programming fl ight phases.

In their characteristic shape and geometry, deltas and fl ying wings differ very clearly from “normal” models even at fi rst sight, but the differences in the servo ar-rangement required are rather more subtle. The “clas-sic” model delta or fl ying wing generally has only two control surfaces, which act both as ailerons (moving in opposite directions) and as elevators (moving in the same direction), in a similar way to the superimposed rudder / elevator functions of a V-tail.More recent designs tend to be more complex; one (or two) inboard control surfaces may be set up to act purely as elevators, while the outboard ailerons also act as elevators, but to a reduced extent. If a fl ying wing has four or even six wing control surfaces, it is certainly feasible nowadays to set them up with cam-ber-changing fl ap functions and / or even a butterfl y (crow) system. However, the servos for all these mo-del confi gurations must be connected to the receiver as follows (see also page 37):

Please also read the notes on operating six-fl ap wings with PCM20 and SPCM20 receivers on pages 39 and 137.

In accordance with the receiver output sequence, the fi rst step here is to move to the menu ...

»Model type« (page 70)

SEL

Offset +100%

��

2 AIL4 WKDelt / f l .wing

M O D E L T Y P E

Tail typeAileron/camber flapsBrake Input 1

Motor on C1 None

… and select the following settings:“Motor on C1” “none” or “Throttle min forward / back”“Tail”: “Delt/fl .wing”“Aileron / camber fl aps”: “2AIL” (appears automatically) If necessary, expand the “2 AIL” entry

by one, two or four camber-changing fl aps (“1 FL”, “2 FL” or “4 FL”).

“Brake”: can be ignored; it is only of interest if the model is a delta or fl ying wing of the “2 AIL 1 / 2 / 4 FL” type. In this case see the section entitled “Brake”

on page 71.The primary function of these settings is to defi ne the range of “wing mixers” which the software will offer. To cater for all the variants, the following section discus-ses the options separately for two-fl ap and multi-fl ap models:

Delta / fl ying wing of the “2AIL” type

SEL

Offset +100%

��

2 AILDel t / f l .wing

M O D E L T Y P E

Tail typeAileron/camber flapsBrake Input 1

Motor on C1 None

If you retain the standard “2AIL” setting in the “Aile-rons / camber fl aps” line, the software automatical-ly mixes the elevator and ailerons in the correct man-ner, including the trim function. In this case the mixer ratios can be adjusted by varying the Dual Rate set-tings in the »Dual Rate / Exponential« menu (see page 86).It makes sense in any case to enter settings in the “Aileron 2 � 4 rudder” line of the menu …

»Wing mixers« (page 110)

… and you may wish to “play” a little with low differen-tial values, but do take care, as differential can have unexpected effects on the handling characteristics of a fl ying wing.

SEL��

=>

+ 50%+ 10%

2–>4

Brake settings

Aileron rudderAileron differential

W I N G M I X E R S

Due to the unique characteristics of this type of mo-del, differential settings other than very low values

Programming examples: Fixed-wing model

Battery

Free, or aux. function

Right fl ap / elevator

Left fl ap / elevator

Free, or aux. function (e. g. right rudder)

Rudder (or left rudder)

Right elevon

Left elevon

Airbrake or throttle or speed controller (elec-tric model)

Batt

987654321

10Free, or aux. function or left FL2 / elevator

Free, or aux. function or right FL2 / elevator

Rec

eive

r

189Programming examples: Fixed-wing model

can result in unwanted moments which are very diffi -cult to correct.

Delta / Flying wing of the “2 AIL 1 / 2 / 4 FL” type

SEL

Offset +100%

��

2 AIL 4 FLDel t / f l .wing

M O D E L T Y P E

Tail typeAileron/camber flapsBrake Input 1

Motor on C1 None

In the case of deltas and fl ying wings with more than two wing fl aps it is possible to compensate for unwan-ted moments more easily. For example, the “tipping” moment (= up-elevator effect) when ailerons are de-fl ected up can be corrected by lowering the fl aps (= down-elevator effect) to the appropriate degree.If you decide on a model of this type and have con-nected the servos to the receiver sockets as stated in the table above, then the aileron function will work correctly for the two (outboard) aileron servos, but the elevator function of the two aileron servos and – if present – the (inboard) fl aps will not.This is only achieved when you select “2AIL 1 / 2 / 4 FL” in the “Multi-fl ap menu” of the menu …

»Wing mixers« (page 110)

+100% +60% +30%+60% +30%

Diff. 0% 0% 0% 0% 0%

0% +100%

SYM��

+100%

0%0%

ASY SYM ASY ASY

+100% +100%+100%

SYM

0% 0% 0% 0% 0% 0% AILE FLAP FL2

AIAil–tr

Fl.posFL

El–>Fl

… where you set up the effect of the elevator control system on ailerons, fl aps and – if present – fl aps 2 in the “El->Fl” line.

Note:Aileron trim can be set separately (see below), but the trim is transferred together with the set mixer va-lue if the “El->Fl” mixer is employed.

The following settings vary widely from model to model. Please do not assume that the stated va-lues will be correct for your particular design!In the top line of this “Multi-fl ap menu” we can set the effect of the aileron stick on ailerons, fl aps and – if present – FL2, in a similar manner to a “normal” four-fl ap or six-fl ap wing. However, the effect of the aileron trim on ailerons and fl aps is set in the “Ail-tr” line be-low it.The setting for differential travel is rather a delica-te matter with this model type; we recommend that you do not set a value for differential at all unless you have considerable experience with this model type.In the interests of safety, in the “�FL�” line you should change the default value of 100% in the “FLAP” column – and of “FL2” if present – to 0%:

+100% +60% +30%+60% +30%

Diff. 0% 0% 0% 0% 0%

0% 0%+55% +55% +55% +55%

SYM��

+100%

0%0%

+55% +55%

ASY SYM ASY ASY

0%

SYMAILE FLAP FL2

0% 0%

AIAil–tr

Fl.posFL

El–>Fl

In the »Transmitter control adjust« menu the de-fault setting for all inputs is “free”, which is perfectly safe. However, if you should assign a transmitter con-trol in error at a later date, this setting will at least pre-vent it having an unwanted effect.We have already discussed the last line – “El->Fl” – in the previous section.

Many years ago the author operated a model delta using the mc-20 of the period, programmed (in prin-ciple) exactly in this way, with the refi nement of a but-

terfl y (crow) landing aid – the latter exploiting the “Brake � aileron” and “Brake � fl ap” wing mixers to provide complete automatic compensation for pitch trim changes. In this case the term “ailerons” means the outboard wing control surfaces, and “fl ap” the in-board pair of control surfaces.

To achieve this with the mx-24s you should move to the “Brake settings” menu of the menu …

»Wing mixers« (page 110)

FL2

–50% 0%0% 0% 0%

=>

��

+60%

FLAPAILE

CrowB R A K E S E T T I N G S

Elevat. curveDiff. reduct.

… and enter appropriate values in the “Crow” line for the ailerons (to be raised) and the “fl aps” (to be lowe-red), then carry out adjustments so that the unwanted pitching moments cancel each other out, i. e. the mo-del maintains a stable attitude. However, you must be careful to allow the wing fl aps suffi cient “scope” to act as elevators, i. e. do not use the whole of the servo travel for the crow settings alone.You can safely ignore all the other settings in this menu.

Note:The “Brake settings” menu is switched “off” if you en-tered “Motor on C1 forward / back” in the »Model type« menu (see page 70), and leave “yes” for the currently active fl ight phase in the “Motor” column of the »Phase settings« menu (see page 100). You may therefore need to switch fl ight phases.

A modern sweptback fl ying wing can be operated in a similar way. Many of these models also feature in-board and outboard control surfaces: the former for-ward of the Centre of Gravity, the latter aft of it. De-

190

fl ecting the inboard control surface(s) down increa-ses lift and produces an up-elevator effect. Defl ec-ting them up creates the opposite effect. In contrast, the outboard ailerons have the reverse effect: a down-defl ection produces a down-elevator effect, and vice versa. In this case there are really no limits to what you can achieve with careful thought and the sophis-ticated mixers included in the software of the mx-24s. This could extend to setting up curve mixers which pass just a small degree of up / down travel to the outboard pair of control surfaces, and only then at fairly extreme stick travels. For his own model this wri-ter uses a curve mixer defi ned by a total of four refe-rence points, i. e.:

0%

OU

TP

UT

-- +

100

1 2

EL 5

+33%0%

Point

Curve MIX 9

InputCurve

offOutput

In this example the two reference points 1 and 2 are set to 0%, the left end-point to +60%, and the right end-point to -65%; the curve is then rounded off by pressing the ENTER button.Please note that you should be extremely careful when setting differential travel with such a confi gurati-on, regardless of the type of servo arrangement your model employs. This is because differential travels on a tail-less model tend to produce an asymmetrical elevator effect rather than the desired reduction in ad-verse yaw. For this reason it is advisable to start with a differential setting of 0% – at least for the fi rst few fl ights. When you are familiar with the model and feel the need to experiment, it may then be feasible under certain circumstances to try differential settings devia-ting from zero.For larger models it may be advisable to install win-glets fi tted with rudders, i. e. small vertical surfaces

Programming examples: Fixed-wing model

at the wingtips. If these are actuated by two separa-te servos, the rudder signal can very easily be “split” and differential applied by using one of the mixers in the menu ...

»Dual mixers« (page 144)

… with the second rudder servo connected to a free receiver output. In the case of a model with the “Del-ta / fl ying wing” tail type, this might be receiver output “5”, which we will use in the following example:

Diff.SEL �

�

? ? ? ? 0%

SEL

? ? ? ? 0%

SEL

5 RU +75%D U A L M I X E R

Mixer MixerMixer

123

The differential travel is necessary in this case, since the outside rudder turns through a larger radius than the inside rudder when the model is fl ying a turn; this is broadly analogous to the effect of front wheel toe-in on a car.

Note:This is the only possible method of programming dif-ferential rudder travel!

You may also want both rudders to defl ect outwards when a braking system is operated using the C1 stick, and this can be achieved by setting up a further “LinearMIX C1 � 5” mixer with a suitable travel set-ting. The offset should be set to “forward” (+100%) or “back” (-100%) to suit your personal preference, but the C1 stick is usually at the forward end-point when the airbrakes are retracted, and the winglet rudders are required only to defl ect outwards proportionally when the brakes are extended.Even though the default setting of all the inputs in the »Transmitter control adjust« menu is “free”, you should still move to the fl ight phase independent menu …

»MIX-only channel« (page 142)

… and, in the interests of safety, de-couple the “wrong” control function from the control channel to which the second servo is connected. In our example this means setting control channel 5 to “MIX only”:

1 2 3 5 6 7 8 9 11124 10

M I X O N LY C H A N N E L

MIXonlynormal

191For your notes

192 Programming examples: Fixed-wing model

F3A model aircraft

F3A models belong to the category of powered fi xed-wing model aircraft designed for competition fl ying. They may be powered by an internal combustion en-gine or an electric motor. Electric-powered models are eligible to fl y in the international F3A “pattern” class, where they are now fully competitive, as well as in the F5A electric aerobatic class.

On page 158, where the section on fi xed-wing mo-del programming starts, you will fi nd general notes re-garding the procedure for installing and setting up the RC system in a model, and – of course – this also ap-plies to F3A models, and therefore does not need to be repeated at this point.If F3A models are accurately built, they usually ex-hibit fl ying characteristics which are almost comple-tely neutral. The perfect aerobatic aircraft has a very smooth but precise control response, and any move-ment around any one of its fl ight axes should not af-fect the other axes.F3A models are fl own using aileron, elevator and rud-der controls, and the use of separate servos for each aileron is almost universal. The fl ying controls are complemented by control of motor power (throttle function) and in many cases a retractable undercar-riage. As a result the servo assignment for channels 1 to 5 is no different from the fi xed-wing models we have already described.The auxiliary function “Retracts” is usually assigned to one of the auxiliary channels 6 to 9. Ideally the re-tracts are operated using a channel switch without a

centre detent. An optional “extra” – used only if ne-cessary – is mixture adjustment control for the carbu-rettor. This is generally controlled by one of the two INC / DEC buttons on the transmitter, connected to one of the auxiliary channels otherwise not in use.

When assigning functions to the auxiliary channels at the transmitter it is advisable to ensure that the cont-rols required are within easy reach, since the advan-ced aerobatic pilot has very little time to think about letting go of the sticks – especially when fl ying in competition conditions.

ProgrammingThe basic programming of the transmitter has alrea-dy been described in detail in the section starting on page 160 … 164, so this section concentrates on tips specifi c to F3A models.In the menu …

»Servo adjustment« (page 74)

Servo 1 => 0% 100% 100% 150% 150%Servo 2 => 0% 100% 100% 150% 150%Servo 3 => 0% 100% 100% 150% 150%Servo 4 => 0% 100% 100% 150% 150%

RevSEL SYM ASY SYM ASY �

cent. – travel + – limit +SEL

… you can adjust the servo travels to suit your model.

It has proved advisable to use at least 100% servo travel, as precision of control can be perceptibly bet-ter if relatively large servo throws are employed. This should be borne in mind when building the model and designing the control surface linkages. Check the di-rection of servo rotation, and take care to set the ser-vo centres accurately at the mechanical level.Any minor corrections required can be made in the 3rd column of the »Servo adjustment« menu during the fi rst test-fl ights.The next step is to select the menu …

»Model type« (page 70)

… and activate the idle trim for Channel 1 (normal-ly “back”; i. e. full-throttle forward). The digital trim now works at the idle end of stick travel:

SEL

Offset +100%2 AIL

��

Thr. min backNormal

M O D E L T Y P E

Tail typeAileron/camber flapsBrake Input 1

Motor on C1

The remaining settings can be left as shown in the il-lustration.

Once you have test-fl own the model and trimmed it out carefully, we recommend that you reduce the trim travel for elevator and ailerons. The model then responds much more smoothly to any changes you make at the trim levers, and thereby avoids “over-trim-ming” the model; with full trim travel a single trim in-crement can have too powerful an effect: if the model tends to pull slightly to the left, one click of the trim causes it to pull right. The increment size of the digital trims can be altered in the menu …

»Stick mode« (page 76)

… where you simply reduce the number of trim incre-ments in the “Trim.step” column.

Battery

Free, or aux. function (2nd EL servo)

Free, or aux. function (mixture adjustment)

Free, or aux. function (retracts)

Right aileron

Rudder

Elevator

Aileron or left aileron

Airbrake or throttle or speed controller (electric model)

Batt

987654321

10Free, or aux. function

Free, or aux. function

Rec

eive

r

193Programming examples: Fixed-wing model

0.0s 0.0s0.0s 0.0s0.0s 0.0s

SYM ASYSEL

globalglobalglobalglobal

422

0.0s 0.0s

��

Channel 1 AileronElevatorRudder

Trim.stepTrim – time +2

You may fi nd it necessary to assign transmitter cont-rols to particular inputs to operate the retractable un-dercarriage and carburettor mixture adjustment. This is carried out in the menu …

»Control adjust« (page 78)

+100%

«normal »

ASYSYM ASYSYM

0% +100% 0.0 0.0

Cnt. 54 0%

0%

+100%+100%+100%+100%+100%+100%

0.0 0.00.0 0.00.0 0.0

SEL

0%

�� SEL

Input 5 freeInput 6Input 7Input 8 free

–travel+ –time+offset

… where you might decide to select an ON / OFF switch connected to Input 6 to operate the retracts, and one of the two INC / DEC buttons, e. g. CON-TROL 5, connected to Input 7, for mixture adjust-ment. You will need to adjust the travel of the transmit-ter controls; they can also be reversed if necessary by setting negative travel values.

Note:You may wish to set a time delay for the retracts, as this provides a more realistic retraction / extension speed, although this has no effect if you use the non-proportional retract servo C713, Order No. 3887.

F3A models generally fl y at extremely high speeds, and respond very “solidly” to corrective movements of the servos. However, in competition fl ying it is vi-tal that all abrupt control movements and corrections should be kept to a minimum, as the judges will inva-riably notice any lack of smoothness and dock a few fl ight points, so it is advisable to set exponential cont-

rol characteristics on the stick functions.Switch to the menu …

»Dual Rate/Exponential« (page 86)

Exponential values of around +30% on aileron, ele-vator and rudder have proved to be a good star-ting point, and you can set them in the right-hand co-lumn of this menu using the rotary control. These va-lues provide smooth, well-defi ned control of the typi-cal F3A model.

100%100%

DUAL

SELSEL� � � � � � � � � ? �

100%+30%+30%

+30%

EXPO

AileronElevatorRudder

(Many experts use higher values; even up to +60% exponential.)

Since the response of (many) glowplug motors to the throttle stick is by no means truly linear, you may want to exploit the menu …

»Channel 1 curve« (page 90)

… to set what we might term a “bent”, i. e. non-linear, throttle curve. In particular, four-stroke engines with Roots superchargers, such as the OS Max FS 120, call for a steep rise in the curve at the bottom end of the speed range. However, you will need to expe-riment to fi nd the perfect throttle curve. A typical C1 control curve for the motor might look like this:

0%0%

OU

TP

UT

-- +

1

100

–50%

1

InputCurve

on PointOutput

Channel 1 C U R V E

Only three reference points, namely -100% cont-rol travel (= “L, low”), +100% travel (= “H, high”) and -

50% control travel (“1”) produce the curve shown in this screen-shot when rounded off.

Basic procedure:1. Erase the reference point “1” which is present at

the centre point in the basic software setting by moving the C1 stick to centre and pressing the CLEAR button at the side.

2. Now move the C1 stick – and with it the verti-cal line in the graph – to around -50% travel, and briefl y press the rotary control.

3. To obtain the curve shape shown here, use the ro-tary control to raise this reference point to about 0% in the highlighted fi eld of the “Point” line.

4. Finally round off the curve by pressing the left-hand ENTER button.

If you need to set additional reference points between the left (“L”) and right (“H”) ends of the curve, repeat steps 2 and 3 using the same procedure.If you operate the radio control system in one of the PCM modes, it is advisable to set up and store sui-table fail-safe settings using the menu …

»Fail-safe adjust« (pages 146 … 149)

… since the default setting of the transmitter is “hold” mode.This equates to “do nothing”, i. e. the receiver con-tinuously passes the last valid signals to the servos in the model: it “holds them still”. This is more or less the worst possible setting for a power model, and might well ensure, for example, that the model would tear uncontrollably across the fl ying fi eld, placing pi-lots and spectators alike at serious risk of injury! For this reason we strongly recommend that you should at least set the motor to stop or throttle back, in order to avoid precisely this risk; it also makes sense to lo-wer the undercarriage, or leave it lowered. Once you have made these settings you should certainly check them again once the model has been test-fl own and

194 Programming examples: Fixed-wing model

trimmed out.

Poshold

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

STO

F A I L S A F E

Never, under any circumstances, attempt to check the settings by switching the transmitter off when you are fl ying a model aircraft! If you do, you run a serious risk of losing the model, as you will be highly unlikely to be able to re-activate the RF si-gnal quickly enough when you switch on again, since the transmitter always responds with the security query “RF signal on YES / NO” when swit-ched on.Since F3A models generally have two aileron servos, it has proved useful to defl ect both ailerons “up” for the landing. In most cases this causes the model to fl y slightly more slowly and with a more stable attitude on the landing approach.To achieve this you will need to program mixers in the menu ...

»Free mixers« (page 135)

Both ailerons are required to defl ect “up” as a landing aid, in parallel with the movement of the throttle stick, but only from the half-throttle setting in the direction of idle. The further the stick is moved towards the idle position, the more the ailerons defl ect up. The reverse occurs when you open the throttle: the ailerons are centred to avoid the model suddenly ballooning up.A little down-elevator must usually be mixed in to ensure that the aircraft does not climb when the aile-rons are deployed in this way.To meet both these requirements you need the two li-near mixers shown in the illustration below. The mi-xers are activated using one and the same switch,

e. g. SW 7, which therefore has to be assigned to both mixers with the same switching direction.

5 =>EL

?? ?? - - - -?? ?? - - - -

SEL SELSEL

C1C1

7I7I =>

��

1234

LinearMIX

type

LinearMIXLinearMIXLinearMIX

from to Adjust

Move to the second screen page and set the appro-priate mixer ratios. In both cases the mixer neutral point should be left at the centre point of the C1 stick arc.Select the ASY fi eld, then set 0% for both mixers abo-ve the centre point of the control, and the following settings below the centre point, i.e. in the direction of idle:LinearMIX 1: -60% ... -80% andLinearMIX 2: -5% ... -10% .

Example of LinearMIX 1:

0% 0%

OU

TP

UT

-- +

100

STOASYSYM CLR

C1 5

Offset–70%

Linear MIX 1

Mix input

This completes the basic set-up for a typical F3A mo-del.

Compensating for model-specifi c errorsIt is an unfortunate fact of life that even very careful-ly built models exhibit minute faults and inaccuracies which produce unwanted deviations when the model is fl ying. The mixers of a computer radio control sys-tem are then required to compensate for these defi -ciencies. In this section we will describe how to carry out these adjustments, but please note the following points before we get started: it is vital to ensure that the model is built as accurately as humanly possible, is balanced perfectly around the lateral and longitu-dinal axes, and that motor downthrust and side thrust are correct.

Rudder causes unwanted movement around the longitudinal and lateral axes

It is often the case that a rudder command causes the model to rotate slightly around the longitudinal and / or lateral axes. This is particularly troublesome in what is known as knife-edge fl ight, where the model’s total lift is generated by the fuselage, aided by the rudder defl ection. The result is that the model rotates and changes heading slightly, as if the pilot had applied aileron or elevator at the same time. The-se tendencies have to be corrected with compensa-tion around the lateral axis (elevator) and around the longitudinal axis (aileron).This can be achieved easily with the mx-24s, explo-iting the »free mixers« once again. For example, if the model rotates to the right around the longitudinal (roll) axis when the rudder is defl ected, then a mixer needs to be set up which defl ects the ailerons slightly to the left. Heading changes around the lateral (eleva-tor) axis can be corrected in a similar way using a mi-xer acting upon the elevator:

a) Correction around the lateral axis (elevator)

LinearMIX 3: “RU � EL”

Asymmetrical setting. The exact values required must be found by fl ight testing.

195Programming examples: Fixed-wing model

b) Correction around the longitudinal axis (aileron)

LinearMix 4: “RU � AI”

Asymmetrical setting. The exact values required must be found by fl ight testing.

In most cases relatively small mixer values are called for, typically below 10%, but this does vary from mo-del to model. If you use curve mixers, the mixer ratios can be adjusted even more accurately to match diffe-rent rudder defl ections. Again, no defi nite values can be stated, as they vary for each model.

Vertical climb and descent

Many models exhibit a tendency to deviate from the ideal line in vertical climbs and descents.To correct this we need an elevator centre position which varies according to the throttle setting. For ex-ample, if the model tends to pull out of a vertical de-scent by itself when the motor is throttled back, slight down-elevator must be mixed in at this throttle setting.This is accomplished by programming a free mixer “C1 � EL”. As a rule you will need to set mixer values below 5%, but once again there is no substitute for test-fl ying.

Rolling (movement around the longitudinal axis) at idle

When you reduce the throttle setting, the model may tend to roll slightly in one direction. Clearly an aileron correction must be made.However, it is much more elegant to let a free mixer “C1 � AI” correct this effect than to move the stick each time.The input values are usually very small (around 3%), and the adjustment process should only be carried out in calm weather. Often all you need to do is apply the mixer in the control segment between half-thrott-le and idle. To achieve this, program the mixer ASY-metrically.

Rolling when ailerons and fl aps are extended

If you fl y the landing approach with both ailerons de-fl ected up, the model may show a tendency to roll slightly due to minor variations in aileron servo travel (or constructional inaccuracies). This manifests itself as one wing tending to hang low on the landing ap-proach. Once again, this fault can easily be corrected using a mixer “C1 � AI” to vary the compensation ac-cording to the position of the ailerons / landing fl aps.You must provide a means of switching the mixer on and off using the same switch which controls the aile-ron / landing fl ap function (see previous page), so that the mixer only has any effect when the aileron / lan-ding fl ap function is activated.The appropriate value must be found by test-fl ying.

Summary

The settings described on this page are intended pri-marily for the “expert fl yer” who needs an F3A aero-batic model which fl ies with absolutely accurate, neu-tral control response.Please bear in mind that it takes tremendous effort, time, sensitivity and expertise to refi ne the fl ying cha-racteristics of a model to this extent. Some experts continue the programming procedure even when they are fl ying. It is not advisable to try this if you are just a moderately advanced pilot making your fi rst attempt with an F3A aerobatic model. You would be well ad-vised to request help from an experienced pilot, and carry out the above-mentioned fi ne-tuning adjust-ments one by one, with the expert at your side, until your aeroplane exhibits the neutral fl ying characteris-tics which you desire. At this point, when your model is fl ying perfectly, you can forget all about trimming and start concentrating on fl ying the aerobatic mano-euvres themselves, which are not necessarily easy to fl y well.

196

Model helicopter

Programming examples: Model helicopter

In this programming example we assume that you have already read and understood the descriptions of the individual menus, and are by now familiar with the general handling of the transmitter. We also assu-me that you have built and adjusted the helicopter ex-actly in accordance with the kit instructions. The elec-tronic facilities provided by the transmitter should ne-ver be used to compensate for major mechanical in-accuracies.As so often in life, there are various ways and means of reaching a particular destination when program-ming the mx-24s. In this example our intention is to provide a sensibly structured course of action, so that you have a clear idea of the logical programming techniques required. Where there are several possib-le methods, we fi rst describe the simplest and most easily understood solution. It is likely that the helicop-ter will work perfectly when set up in this way, but na-turally you are still free to try out other solutions at a later stage in case they turn out to suit you better.

As our programming example we take the GRAUP-NER STARLET 50 model helicopter, with right-hand rotor direction, three swashplate linkage points distri-buted equally at 120° using the “3Sv (2 roll)” swash-plate type, a beginner’s set-up without enhanced throttle curve, with no method of infl uencing the gyro from the transmitter, and with no speed governor. We have deliberately chosen this simple programming

project in order to demonstrate that it is possible to produce a helicopter which fl ies extremely well with relatively little programming effort.Nevertheless, we don’t want to keep from you all the possible expansion facilities: the basic description is followed by set-up notes on gyro gain, speed gover-nors and different helicopter mechanics.At the initial programming stage you have to defi ne a number of basic transmitter settings once only, to in-form the transmitter of your preferred method of cont-rol. This is accomplished in the menu …

»Basic settings« (page 154)

… where you start by entering the “owner’s name”, so that it appears in the basic screen display. Switch to the second screen page with a brief press of the rotary control on the � symbol; here you can enter the name by selecting characters from a comprehen-sive symbol list:

<H-J Sandbru n

! “ # $ % & ´ ( ) * + , - . / 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 : ; < = > ? @ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ[¥]^_` a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o p q r s t u v w x y z { } ~

n

cN

ÇüéâäàåçêëèïîìÄÅÉæÆôöòûùÿÖÜ n

– > Owners name

The “Preset stick mode” should be selected using the criteria described on page 154.The same applies to “Preset modulation”.

The “Preset min. pitch” point should be set to suit your personal preference.These options, marked “Preset” – “Stick mode”, “Modulation” and “min. pitch” – really are no more than presets; the settings you enter here are adopted as the defaults when you open a new model memory, but you can still change them at any time.The setting in the “Display light” line determines how long the backlighting of the screen remains on when you switch the transmitter on, and after you press a button or operate the rotary control.Select “yes” or “no” in the “Power-on beep” line to de-termine whether the “mx-24s identifi cation melody” is to sound whenever you switch the transmitter on.In the “Battery warning” line you can determine the voltage at which the transmitter battery warning is triggered. Please don’t be tempted to set a very low value at this point, as you will need plenty of time to land your model safely if the battery warning is trigge-red.In the “Own phase name” line you can create your “own” phase names, in case you don’t think any of the preset designations are appropriate. We suggest you leave this for a later stage.Once you have completed these settings, it is time to move on to the menu …

»Model select« (page 59)

… and select a free model memory using the rotary control, …

02030405 ��� ���

01

06 ��� ���

��� free���

��� free���

��� ���

0:00

freefreefree

… then give a brief press on the rotary control (or press the ENTER button) to select the model type

1SPCM20

9.3V

<

1 < >2 < >

>H-J SandbrunnerGENERAL BASIC SETTINGS

Owners namePre-set stick modePre-set modulation

Power-on beepBattery warningOwn phase name

Pre-set min. pitch forwrdDisplay light unlim.

Own phase name

yes

197Programming examples: Model helicopter

“Helicopter”.

Select model type (free model memory)

Confi rm your choice with a brief press of the rotary control (or ENTER), and the screen immediately swit-ches to the basic display.If the warning “Throttle too high” appears, move the collective pitch stick to the minimum position, and the message will disappear.The next step is to select a name for the model me-mory you have selected; the name is entered in the menu …

»Base setup model« (page 66)

< >< >

SPCM20

0%

1

6

Starlet 50still in phase test

7

SEL��

Info

ModulationAutorotation

BASIC SETTINGS, MODELModel name

Stick mode

VolumeAuto timer resetPower on warningAuto trim

Autorot. C1 Pos.Marker key

yes

The “Model name” is entered using virtually the same procedure as for the Owner’s name; this is descri-bed in the centre column of the left-hand page under »Basic settings«.At this stage you should check the settings for “Stick mode” and “Modulation”; these were adopted from

the »Basic settings« menu when the model memory was initialised, but you may need to change them for the model memory you are using.In the “Info” line you can enter a small amount of sup-plementary information relating to your selected mo-del (max. fi fteen letters or symbols). This information may help you later when selecting models from the list.Another option is activated in the “Auto-rotation” line. Even if you are a beginner to fl ying and are not yet ready for this, it is advisable at least to defi ne the auto-rotation switch, so that you have an “emergency off” switch for the motor.This is accomplished in the “Auto-rotation” line of the menu: press the rotary control briefl y to activa-te switch assignment, and move one of the ON / OFF switches (e. g. SW 7) to the “ON” position.The AR switch should be located at a position on the transmitter where you can easily reach it without let-ting go of the sticks, e. g. above the collective pitch stick.

Note:Please see the next double page but one for informa-tion on setting up this “Emergency OFF switch”.

And another tip:Please get used to giving all the switches a common “on” direction; then a quick glance at the transmitter before fl ying will soon reassure you that all switches are “off”.

Initially the set-up options in the lines “Marker key”, “Volume”, “Auto timer reset” and “Power-on war-ning” are of no interest to us …… and the “Auto-trim” line should only be assigned a switch if you wish to carry out the “initial trimming” of your helicopter as part of a trimming fl ight. For safety reasons you should always erase the switch assign-ment again immediately after the trimming fl ight.

We now come to the fi rst setting which is specifi c to helicopters. Move to the menu …

»Helicopter type« (page 72)

Under “Swashplate type” select the type of linkage for the swashplate / collective pitch function, in our ex-ample: “3 Sv (2 roll)”.The “Linearise swashplate” line is of no interest to us at the moment.In the “Rotor direction” line you must determine the direction of rotation of the main rotor as viewed from above, i. e. right or left, or clockwise and anti-clockwi-se respectively. In our example this is “right”.

3Sv(2roll)

SEL

0%- 70%

��

right

H E L I T Y P ESwashplate typeLinearis. swashpl. noRotor directionPitch min.Expo throttle lim.Thr. limit warning

forwrd

The preset “min. pitch” has been adopted from the »Basic settings« menu, but you should check here that the “forward” or “back” parameter is set correctly; change it if necessary.We can generally ignore “Expo throttle limit” for the time being, while the “Thr. limit warning” line can safely be left at the default setting.At this point, if you have not already done so, you should connect the servos to the receiver in the cor-rect order. However, please note that the fi rst collecti-ve pitch servo and the socket for the throttle servo or speed controller have been interchanged on recent GRAUPNER/JR systems. This applies to the mx-16s, mc-19, mc-22(s), mx-22, all mc-24 variants and now also the mx-24s.

198 Programming examples: Model helicopter

tions of rotation of the individual servos.The basic aim here should be to keep servo travels at +/-100% wherever possible, as this maintains best possible system resolution and accuracy. Use the “Rev” point if necessary to reverse the direction of ro-tation of any servo; do check carefully that the direc-tion you set really is correct. The tail rotor servo must operate in such a way that the nose (!) of the helicop-ter moves in the same direction as the movement of the tail rotor stick.In the menu ...

»Stick mode« (page 77)

Pitch/thrRoll 0.0s 0.0sPitch ax. 0.0s 0.0sTail rot. 0.0s 0.0s

Tr.step SYM ASYSEL

Thr LimglobalglobalglobalTrim

4444

0.0s 0.0s

– time +�

� SEL

… you can set the size of the increment for each “trim lever click” in the “Tr.step” column.With model helicopters the C1 trim only affects the throttle servo. This trim (“Cut-off trim”) has a number of special features, but we will not discuss them again in detail at this point; please refer to the section on page 34. (Thanks to the digital trims of the mx-24s, the transmitter automatically stores the trim values when you switch models, and optionally even when you switch fl ight phases.)This menu also includes another helicopter- specifi c setting: at this point you can determine the function of the trim lever located adjacent to the collective pitch stick: select the “Throttle limit” setting in the “Pitch / thr” line. In this mode the trim lever corres-ponds approximately to the familiar idle trim. However, if it is pushed right forward, the throttle limiter (set up later) will smoothly release the full travel of the throttle function; this is assigned to “Input 12” in the menu …

»Control adjust« (page 78)

0% +100%+100%

+100%

� ASYSYM ASYSYMSEL

0%0%0%

+100%+100%+100%+100%+100%

0.0 0.00.0 0.00.0 0.00.0 0.0

«normal »SEL

–time+9

offset –travel+Thr.l

InputInputInput

Cnt.free

free9101112

free

… where it is designated “Throttle limit 12”.This input serves as throttle limiter. It acts solely on output “6”, to which the throttle servo is connected. By default the throttle limiter is assigned to the right-hand side-mounted proportional control “CONTROL 9”.

Just to remind you:The throttle limiter does not control the throttle ser-vo; it just limits the travel of this servo in the forward direction in accordance with its selected setting. The throttle servo is usually controlled by the collective pitch stick via the throttle curve you have set up; this is the reason why Input 6 must always be left at the “free” setting. For more details please see the sec-tions on pages 81 and 82 of the manual.

Select the ASY fi eld in the “-travel+” column, and in-crease the value in the highlighted fi eld from 100% to 125%, with the throttle limiter pushed fully forward.

0% +100%+100%

Thr.l +125%offset

SEL � ASYSYM ASYSYMSEL

–travel+ –time+

0%0%0%

+100%+100%+100%+100%+100%

0.0 0.00.0 0.00.0 0.00.0 0.0

«normal »

InputInputInput

Cnt. 9

freefreefree

9101112

This ensures that the throttle limiter cannot possibly restrict the full throttle travel set by the collective pitch stick when the model is in fl ight.You have now completed the basic settings at the transmitter, i. e. the procedure which you will need to use time and again when setting up new models.

Battery

Free, or speed governor

Free, or gyro gain

Motor speed

Free, or pitch-axis (2) servo (4-point linkage)

Tail rotor (gyro system)

Pitch-axis (1) servo

Roll (1) servo

Collective pitch or roll (2) or pitch-axis servo (2) servo

Batt

987654321

10Free, or aux. function

Free, or aux. function

Rec

eive

r

The mixer ratios and mixer directions relating to the swashplate servos for collective pitch, roll and pitch-axis are pre-set to +61% in each case. These settings are found in the menu:

»Swashplate mixer« (page 145)

SEL

S W A S H M I X E RPitch + 61%Rol lPi tch ax.

�

+ 61%+ 61%

If the swashplate does not respond correctly to the stick movements, the fi rst step is to change the mixer directions from “+” to “-” if necessary. The second step is to move to the menu …

»Servo adjustment« (page 74)

Servo 1 => 0% 100% 100% 150% 150%Servo 2 => 0% 100% 100% 150% 150%Servo 3 => 0% 100% 100% 150% 150%Servo 4 => 0% 100% 100% 150% 150%

RevSEL SYM ASY SYM ASY �

cent. – travel + – limit +SEL

… and reverse the servo directions if required. In the same menu you can also set up the travels and direc-

199

The actual helicopter-specifi c set-up is carried out pri-marily in the menu ...

»Helicopter mixer« (page 122)

PitchChannel 1Channel 1

Pitch ax.0%

Gyro suppressionSwashplate rotation

«normal »�

=>=>=>

0%0%0%0%

0%0°

Swashplate limiter off

ThrottleTail rot.

Tail rot. ThrottleThrottleRoll

Roll Tail rot.Throttle

Pitch ax. Tail rot.

In the very fi rst line you will see the “Collective pitch” function, and a brief press on the rotary control swit-ches to the corresponding sub-menu. Here you will fi nd a graph of the collective pitch curve, which is ini-tially defi ned only by the three points “L” (low), “1” and “H” (high); in most cases this is all you need.

Tip:We strongly advise that you set up your helicopter using just these three curve points; more points com-plicate the whole matter, and at present are more trouble than they are worth.

The reference point for hovering should generally be the mechanical centre point of the collective pitch stick, as this position feels most natural to the majori-ty of pilots. You can, of course, set up the curve to lo-cate the hover at a different point, but you should not be tempted to do this unless you know exactly what you are doing. Start by setting the collective pitch stick to centre. Assuming that you previously adjusted the servos in accordance with the manufacturer’s in-structions, the servo output arms will now (usually) be at right-angles to the servo case. If you have not al-

Programming examples: Model helicopter

ready done so, adjust the mechanical linkages to the rotor head so that all the blades are set to a collective pitch angle of 4° to 5° positive for the hover. All known helicopters will fl y at approximately this setting.Now move the collective pitch stick right back to the maximum collective pitch point (the collective pitch minimum position has already been defi ned as “for-ward”). The solid vertical line in the graph indica-tes the current stick position. You can now adjust this point “H” (high) on the collective pitch curve using the rotary control, with the aim of producing a collective pitch maximum setting of around 9° at the main rotor blades. Point “H” should be around 50%.

Note:A rotor blade set-up gauge, e. g. the GRAUPNER item, Order No. 61, is very useful when setting up bla-de pitch angles.

Now push the collective pitch stick fully forward to the collective pitch minimum position: Point “L” (low). Set the blade pitch angle for this setting to a value in the range 0 to -4°, according to the pilot’s fl ying ability. This process produces a slightly “bent” line (known as the “collective pitch curve”) at the hover point, with the result that the graph may look something like this:

?1

+50%+25% O

UT

PU

T 100

Pitch

InputCurve

off PointOutput

At this point you should round off the curve by simply pressing the ENTER button again.If you now switch to the auto-rotation phase – you will see the name of the fl ight phase “Autorot” at the bot-tom of the screen – you will fi nd the “old” collective pitch curve once more. In this phase you should set the same values as in the normal phase, with the fol-

lowing exception: increase the collective pitch angle by about 2° at “H”, i. e. the extreme backward position of the stick. This gives slightly more pitch for fl aring the model when practising “autos” at a later (!) date.Once you have set up the collective pitch curve, press ESC to return to the list of Helicopter Mixer menus. Operate the auto-rotation switch to return to the “nor-mal” fl ight phase, then move to the “Channel 1 � throttle” line where you can set up the throttle curve.The fi rst step here is to defi ne the idle trim range by adjusting point “L” on the throttle curve; it should be set to around -65%.

–65%–65%

OU

TP

UT

-- +

1

100

–100%

L

Channel 1

InputCurve

off PointOutput

Throttle

With the throttle limiter closed and the idle trim fully open, move the collective pitch stick to the “minimum” position and move it slightly to and fro. The throttle servo should not respond to this movement. This ar-rangement gives you a seamless transition from idle trim to the throttle curve. You will probably need to make further adjustments to the throttle curve, but this can only be carried out later as part of the fl ight-testing process.If you temporarily switch from the graphic screen to the auto-rotation fl ight phase (AR), the following dis-play appears:

Channel 1 Throttle

off

This means that this mixer is switched off, and the

200 Programming examples: Model helicopter

reference points; anything more elaborate is strict-ly the province of experienced pilots. For the moment you can safely accept the pre-set values of “L” = -30% at the bottom end of stick travel and “H” = +30% at the opposite end, although you may fi nd it necessary to make slight corrections to these settings later.Now switch back to the AR fl ight phase for a moment. The set-up curve is disabled here, with the result that the tail rotor servo no longer responds to collective pitch commands (when the main rotor is not powered, there is no torque to be corrected). All the other sub-points are of no importance to us for the moment.If your gyro features gain control from the transmitter – unlike the type we are using in this example – you can adjust gyro gain from the transmitter by assigning one of the free INC / DEC buttons to the “Gyro” input in the “Gyro” line of the menu:

»Control adjust« (page 80)

+100%

«normal »

ASYSYM ASYSYM

0% +100% 0.0 0.0

Cnt. 50%

0%

+100%+100%+100%+100%+100%

0.0 0.00.0 0.00.0 0.0

SEL

0%

�� SEL

+50%

–time+

ThrotGyro

Input freefree

free7

Input

6

offset –travel+8

5

Move the slider forward until the beeping stops, and you reach the position marker at the aerial end of the corresponding display. Now use the rotary cont-rol to move to the ASY fi eld in the “Travel” column. At this point set the maximum gain of the gyro to a va-lue such as 50%, which represents a safe fi xed va-lue when the button is at its forward end-point. You will probably need to adjust the value in the course of fl ight-testing. Additional notes on setting up gyros can be found in the section “Gyro suppression” on pages 127 … 128.To conclude the initial programming procedure, a few words about the menu:

throttle servo is switched to a fi xed value which can be set up as follows: press ESC to return to the menu list. You will fi nd that certain new sub-menus now ap-pear in the list, but only as long as you stay in the auto-rotation phase. The new menus are:

PitchThr setting AR –90%Tailrotoroffset ARGyro suppressionSwashplate rotation 0°

«Autorot»

�

=>

0%0%

Swashplate limiter off

The important line here is “Thr setting AR”. The va-lue on the right of this line should be set to either ap-proximately +125% or -125%, depending on the di-rection of rotation of the throttle servo.

0°«Autorot»

=>

0%0%

�� SEL

–125%PitchThr setting ARTailrotoroffset ARGyro suppressionSwashplate rotation

If you are not sure of this, call up the »Servo dis-play« menu by pressing the HELP button with the ro-tary control pressed in.This setting ensures that the motor is reliably stop-ped in the auto-rotation phase (to cope with an emer-gency). Later, when you have gained suffi cient expe-rience to practise auto-rotation landings, the setting should be changed to a value which provides a reliab-le idle.At present the remaining sub-menus are of no impor-tance. Switch “AR” off, and we can move back to the fi rst menu list.Call up the “Channel 1 � tail rotor” line, in which you can set static torque compensation (DMA) for the tail rotor. Here again, it is better to keep to just three

»Channel 1 curve« (page 92)

?

OU

TP

UT

-- +

1

100

–60%–60%

InputCurve

off PointOutput

Channel 1 C U R V E

This function represents a sort of “convenient expo-nential curve” for the collective pitch stick and the mi-xer functions associated with it.This curve should probably not be used at all initially. If you do use it, be sure to use it “carefully”, and even then not until the very last stage, i. e. when all the other settings have been completed. It must not be used to adjust the throttle / collective pitch function, as the superimposed signals may produce unpredic-table effects.

You have now completed all the helicopter-speci-fi c adjustments which can be carried out in the calm of your workshop. Further fi ne-tuning must now be made with the model in fl ight. With a little luck, test-fl ying will show the need for only minor (digital) trim adjustments, which are – of course – stored automati-cally by the transmitter.If a major change is necessary, you should carry out the mechanical correction required, or make adjust-ments to the programmed settings we have just dis-cussed.

201

Further adjustmentsIf you have followed our programming example to this point, you will have a helicopter which is set up pro-perly, and is in an ideal state for hovering practice and simple circuits. Of course, you may wish to activate additional functions depending on your skill and fl ying experience.If you wish to fl y using different rotor speeds and trim set-ups, you will need to activate a series of “Flight phases” which can be called up via switches which you assign.The fi rst step in this process is to call up the menu …

»Phase settings« (page 102)

AutorotPhase 1 0.1sPhase 2 0.1s -Phase 3

SELSEL

�Autorot 0.1sThermik

0.1s

�� SEL

-

-–�

Name Fl.ph.Tim. Sw. time

… where the symbols at far right in the “Status” co-lumn have the following meaning:“–”: No phase switch present“+”: Phase switch present“�”: Currently active phaseBefore you set up the fl ight phases you should consi-der carefully whether you want to use individual swit-ches to select them, or – always our recommendation – use one three-position switch which enables you to select up to three fl ight phases in addition to auto-ro-tation. The latter option is more logical, and easier to remember.In the menu shown above the “Autorot” line is alrea-dy selected. If the auto-rotation phase is activated, it always has absolute priority over any other phases to which you assign switches.In this menu your fi rst step is to assign unambiguous names to phases 1 to 3; the names are simply se-

Programming examples: Model helicopter

lected from a list. The phase name makes it easier to distinguish the various phases, and is later displayed on the screen in all phase-specifi c menus, e. g.:

AutorotPhase 1 1.1sPhase 2 1.1s -Phase 3

SELSEL

�Autorot 1.1s

Hover1.1s

�� SEL

-

-–�

Normal

AerobatName Fl.ph.Tim. Sw. time

Move to the next column and set the transition time which you wish to apply when switching FROM one phase INTO a new one: a setting of about one se-cond is usually ample. Later this value can also be adjusted to suit your personal taste. Please note that there is always zero delay when switching INTO the auto-rotation phase, whose “Autorot” name cannot be changed. However, you can set the transition time which applies when you switch FROM auto-rotation into another phase.You now need to set up a method of switching be-tween different fl ight phases by assigning the indivi-dual phase switches or three-position switch.Phase switches are assigned in the menu …

»Phase assignment« (page 104)

A B C D E F<1 >

SEL5 6 Normal1

P H A S E A S S I G N M E N T

p r i o r combi

Assign the switch, e. g. the three-position switch SW 5 + 6 under “C” or “D”.The next step is to allot the fl ight phases you have set up in the »Phase settings« menu to the individual switch positions. Since you have already assigned na-mes to the fl ight phases, these names now appear on

the screen: initially the name of Phase “1” is display-ed on the right. If you operate the auto-rotation switch (which you have already assigned), the screen dis-play changes to “Autorot”.

A B C D E F<1 >

SEL5 6 Normal1

P H A S E A S S I G N M E N T

p r i o r combiAutorot

Just to remind you:The auto-rotation phase has absolute precedence.

Operate the auto-rotation switch again (if necessary), then move the selected switch – in our example the three-position switch SW 5 + 6 – to one end-point. Use the rotary control to move to the SEL fi eld on the right of the screen, and activate it. Now use the rotary control to select the fl ight phase you wish to assign to this switch position (in our example “2 Hover”) …

A B C D E F<

5 6 Hover1 >2

SEL

P H A S E A S S I G N M E N T

p r i o r combi

… and confi rm your choice with a brief press of the rotary control or ENTER.Alternatively you can immediately move the switch to the other end-point and select the name – e. g. “Ae-robat” – for this switch position. Proceed in exactly the same way for the centre position of the switch, to which we will assign the name “1 normal”.

Note:Of course, it is perfectly possible to swap the names over, or select different names for the three switch po-sitions. For example, if you are using a speed gover-

202

»Control adjust« (page 80)

+100%

«Normal »

ASYSYM ASYSYM

0% +100% 0.0 0.0

Cnt. 50%

0%

+100%+100%+100%+100%+100%

0.0 0.00.0 0.00.0 0.0

SEL

0%

��

+50%

SEL–time+

ThrotGyro

Input freefree

free7

Input

6

offset –travel+8

5

Requirement:The governor must be programmed in such a way that the “back” position of the three-position switch, e. g. CONTROL 8, equates to “governor off”, while the forward position determines the actual rotational speed of the rotor.

In Phase 1 “Normal” the speed governor should be kept switched off; this phase is used primarily for che-cking the motor and other general settings.You can accomplish this by selecting the “Input 8” line using the rotary control: leave or reset this to “free”, then simply change the value to -100% (max. -125%) in the “offset” column.

+100%

ASYSYM ASYSYM

0% +100% 0.0 0.00%

–125%

+100%+100%+100%+100%+100%

0.0 0.00.0 0.00.0 0.0

SEL

0%

��

+50%

SEL«Normal »

Cnt. 5

offset –time+

ThrotGyro

Input freefree

7Input

6

–travel+8

5

free

Call up the »Servo display« menu, and check that the indicated “servo travel” of channel 8 stays fi xed at -100% (or up to -125%). This means that the speed

Suggestion for expanded programming: speed governorAt some stage you will probably consider equipping your model helicopter with a speed regulator, or go-vernor, i. e. a device such as the mc Heli Control. This unit provides a safe way of fl ying your helicopter with different system rotational speeds. It is sensible to couple the individual rotational speeds with the fl ight phases, so that you can make additional adjustments as required for each rotor speed.Before you carry out the programming at the trans-mitter, it is essential to install the speed governor and program it exactly as described in the manufacturer’s instructions. As you would expect, the mx-24s of-fers several possible methods of implementing diffe-rent rotational speeds in individual fl ight phases. The-se include “ultra-convenient” facilities, but they do call for much greater programming effort at the transmit-ter, and for this reason are best reserved for the ex-perienced pilot.The following example involves certain restrictions in terms of convenience, but the effi ciency of rotor speed governing is perfectly adequate, and the sys-tem is reasonably easy to program and – not least – straightforward to operate.The procedure is similar to that for setting up gyro gain. As in that case, the adjustment facilities of “-tra-vel+” and “offset” in the »Transmitter control ad-just« menu are exploited in order to defi ne the end-points of a three-position switch (SW 5 + 6 or 9 + 10 or CONTROL 7 + 8). It is equally possible to use one of the INC / DEC buttons or one of the side-mounted proportional controls.To set up this system you should again call up the menu:

0

100125

%

+100%-100% 0

-100-125

�O

UT

PU

T

Control travel

Since the switch has three posi-tions, only three settings are available for the transmitter control travel.

202 Programming examples: Model helicopter

nor (regulator) programmed as described in the sec-tion starting in the next column, a sequence of the type “normal / hover / aerobat” might well be approp-riate.

The model settings which you entered before you as-signed a phase switch are now located in the “nor-mal” fl ight phase. Now that you have assigned multip-le fl ight phases, this is the phase which is called up when the phase switch is at the centre position.These settings are known to be correct, i. e. you have test-fl own the model using them, so it is a good star-ting point to copy them into the other fl ight phases, as this ensures that at least the model fl ies safely in each phase. This is done using the »Copy / Erase« menu; see page 60 :

=>=>=>=>=>=>

��

Erase modelCopy model –> modelCopy MX24 –> externalCopy external –> MX24Copy flight phaseBack-up all models –> PC

Once you have set up a series of fl ight phases it is possible to make changes to the phase-specifi c me-nus for each phase separately. Since the mx-24s features digital trims, in the Helicopter program all four trim positions are stored separately for each fl ight phase, in addition to the other menu settings which you have entered separately for each fl ight phase; see the »Stick mode« menu, page 77.

0.0s 0.0s0.0s 0.0s0.0s 0.0s

SYM ASYSEL

globalPhaseglobal

4444

0.0s 0.0s

�� SEL

– time +

Pitch/thrRollPitch ax.Tail rot.

Tr.step

Thr Lim

Trim

Forward switch end-point

Switch cen-tre positionBack switch

end-point

203

governor – which is to be “switched off” at the upper pre-set of -100% – is actually reliably switched off at this setting.A low hover speed of around 1350 rpm is to be set for the “hover” fl ight phase (Phase 2). This is achieved as follows: switch to the appropriate fl ight phase and select “Input 8” again. The current fl ight phase is dis-played at bottom left on the screen.Since the inputs 5 … 8 are assigned separately for each fl ight phase, you should fi rst activate transmit-ter control assignment and then operate the selec-ted three-position switch (in our example CONTROL 8) so that the latter is detected by the software. Move the switch to the “forward” position – which equates to “speed governor active” – then select the ASY fi eld in the “Travel” column and set the value there to 0%.

+100%

«Hover »

ASYSYM ASYSYM

0% +100% 0.0 0.00% +100%+100%

+100%0.0 0.00.0 0.00.0 0.0

SEL

0%

��

+50%Cnt. 8

SEL

0% +100% 0%Cnt. 5

offset –time+

ThrotGyro

Input freefree

7Input

6

–travel+8

5

Of course, you may wish to change this value, depen-ding on the type of speed governor you are using. La-ter you will need to use a rev counter to set the rotor speed accurately. If you fi nd that you have to set a va-lue below 0%, it will be necessary to alter the value in the “offset” column accordingly.Repeat the procedure in fl ight phase 3 («Aerobat»), this time with a percentage value of around +40% to provide a high rotor speed for aerobatics. Once again, this value will vary according to the type of governor you are using.

203Programming examples: Model helicopter

+100%

«Aerobat»

ASYSYM ASYSYM

0% +100% 0.0 0.00% +100%+100%

+100%0.0 0.00.0 0.00.0 0.0

SEL

0%

��

+50%

SEL

0% +100% +40%Cnt. 5

offset –time+Cnt. 8

ThrotGyro

Input freefree

7Input

6

–travel+8

5

This method of programming the speed governor is comparatively simple, but it does provide a means of calling up individual fl ight phases which are set to dif-ferent rotational speeds. The switch must always be left in the “forward” position. Nevertheless, you can still switch the speed governor off at any time, in any fl ight phase, simply by moving the switch to its “back” position; see »Servo display«, Channel 8.

If you have set up your helicopter as described in this programming example, you will fi nd that it is capable of carrying out extremely challenging fl ight tasks even though it is no competition machine. We suggest that you should not make use of supplementary functions until your model is fl ying perfectly, so that you will be in a position to recognise and appreciate any impro-vements. It is always best to implement additional re-fi nements one at a time wherever possible, otherwi-se you won’t know which change has brought about any improvement. Bear in mind that a good pilot is not recognised by the number of complex functions with which he can cope, but by the results he can obtain when fl ying a helicopter with a relatively simple set-up.

204

Teacher / PC module for mx-22 / mx-24sOrder No. 3290.22

Required in order to operate the mx-22 or mx-24s as the Teacher transmitter for Trainer mode operations, and for data transfer. The module is installed in the transmitter, and the 14-pin plug is connected to the corresponding socket on the transmitter circuit board. The appropriate opening is already present in the transmitter case, and the set includes full installation instructions.The opto-electronic light-pipe lead (Order No. 3290.4) or alternatively the Eco-lead (Order No. 3290.5) is connected to the barrel socket. The se-cond socket is intended for the copy lead (Order No. 4179.2), and is used for transferring data bet-ween two mx-24s transmitters. Alternatively, the mx-22 or mx-24s / PC interface lead (Order No. 4182.9) can be connected to the module for com-municating with a PC.Unless you are an experienced modeller, we re-commend that you ask your nearest GRAUPNER Service Centre to install the Trainer / PC module in your transmitter.Programming is carried out in the »Teacher/pu-pil« menu, as described on page 150.

Appendix

Accessories

Light-pipe lead for Trainer systemOrder No. 3290.4

The light-pipe lead is connected to the appropriate barrel sockets on the Teacher and Pupil modules. The plugs are marked as follows:M (Master) = Teacher transmitterS (Student) = Pupil transmitter

Eco lead for Trainer systemOrder No. 3290.5

The ECO Trainer lead is connected to the approp-riate barrel sockets on the Teacher and Pupil mo-dules. The plugs are marked as follows:M (Master) = Teacher transmitterS (Student) = Pupil transmitter

Trainer leadOrder No. 4179.1

This lead is fi tted with 3.5 mm mono barrel plugs on both ends, and is suitable for connecting any two GRAUPNER transmitters fi tted with DSC so-ckets.

SM

Trainer leadOrder No. 3290.8

This lead is suitable for connecting a Pupil trans-mitter with DSC socket (e.g. mx-12, mx-16s, mx-24s) to a GRAUPNER Teacher transmitter with Teacher socket for the opto-electronic system.M (Master) = Teacher transmitter

M S

Trainer leadOrder No. 3290.7

This lead is suitable for connecting a Teacher transmitter with DSC socket (e. g. mx-12, mx-16s, mx-24s) to a GRAUPNER Pupil transmitter with Pupil socket for the opto-electronic system.S (Student) = Pupil transmitter

General notes on Trainer mode operationsThe accessories listed on this page, together with the DSC socket which is installed as standard, en-able the user to transfer all functions or program-mable single or multiple functions to a suitab-le Pupil transmitter for Trainer mode operations. When you connect the Teacher transmitter to a Pupil transmitter using the Trainer lead, note that the plug marked “M” (Master) must be connected to the Teacher module, and the plug marked “S” (Student) to the Pupil module.The individual functions to be transferred are se-lected in the »Teacher/pupil« menu (see page 150) of the Teacher transmitter, which can optio-nally be operated in the following modes: PPM10, PPM18, PPM24, PCM20, SPCM20 or APCM24.

205Appendix

Luxury neckstrap for hand-hand transmittersOrder No. 70.25

25 mm wide, with spring clip.Special variable-length design.

PC interface leadmc-22(s), mx-22 and mx-24s/PCOrder No. 4182.9

Required for communicating (copying and storing) between mc-22(s) / mx-22 / mx-24s transmit-ters and an IBM-compatible PC. At the transmitter end the Teacher / PC module, Order No. 3290.2, is required.The lead is supplied with the necessary software.

Diagnosis lead (DSC*)Order No. 4178.1

This diagnosis (closed loop) lead is used to con-nect a receiver directly to the mx-24s transmit-ter. The action of plugging the lead into the DSC socket on the back of the transmitter automati-cally switches the transmitter on, but at the same time the RF module remains disabled, so that no signal is transmitted via the aerial. The transmit-ter must not be switched on using the main ON / OFF switch.

Copy lead mc-22(s)/mc-22(s), mx-22/mx-22 or mx-22/mc-22 and mx-24s/mx-24sOrder No. 4179.2

For copying between two mc-22(s) or mx-22 transmitters, or between an mc-22(s) transmitter and an mx-22 transmitter, or between two mx-24s transmitters.To connect the lead to mx-22 and mx-24s trans-mitters a Trainer / PC module, Order No. 3290.22, is required in each unit. To connect it to the mc-22(s) transmitter the interface distributor, Order No. 4182.3 is required.

* DSC = Direct Servo Control

USB PC interfacemc-22(s), mx-22 and mx-24s/PCOrder No. 4185

Required for communicating (copying and storing) between mc-22(s) / mx-22 / mx-24s transmit-ters and an IBM-compatible PC without a serial port. At the transmitter end the Teacher / PC mo-dule, Order No. 3290.2 is required.The lead is supplied with the necessary software.

Approved operating frequencies in individual EU countriesThis radio control system may only be operated on the frequencies and channels approved for use in each EU nation; please check the legal situation in your own coun-try. It is prohibited to operate a radio control system on any frequency and channel other than those listed. If you are not using a PLL-SYNTHESIZER receiver, use genui-ne GRAUPNER plug-in crystals exclusively, as listed in the main GRAUPNER catalogue.

60 35,000 F F F F F F F F F F

61 35,010 F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F

62 35,020 F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F

63 35,030 F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F

64 35,040 F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F

65 35,050 F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F

66 35,060 F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F

67 35,070 F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F

68 35,080 F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F

69 35,090 F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F

70 35,100 F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F

71 35,110 F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F

72 35,120 F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F

73 35,130 F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F

74 35,140 F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F

75 35,150 F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F

76 35,160 F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F

77 35,170 F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F

78 35,180 F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F

79 35,190 F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F

80 35,200 F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F

281 35,210 F F F F F F F F F F

282 35,220 F F F F F F F F F F

182 35,820 F F F F F F

183 35,830 F F F F F F

184 35,840 F F F F F F

185 35,850 F F F F F F

186 35,860 F F F F F F

197 35,870 F F F F F F

188 35,880 F F F F F F

189 35,890 F F F F F F

190 35,900 F F F F F F

191 35,910 F F F F F F

50 40,665 F C B F C B F C B F C B F C B F C B F C B F C B F C B C B C B F C B F C B F C B F C B F C B F C B F C B F C B F C B F C B F C B

51 40,675 F C B F C B F C B F C B F C B F C B F C B F C B F C B C B C B F C B F C B F C B F C B F C B F C B F C B F C B F C B F C B F C B

42 40,685 F C B F C B F C B F C B F C B F C B F C B F C B F C B C B C B F C B F C B F C B F C B F C B F C B F C B F C B F C B F C B F C B

53 40,695 F C B F C B F C B F C B F C B F C B F C B F C B F C B C B C B F C B F C B F C B F C B F C B F C B F C B F C B F C B F C B F C B

54 40,715 C B C B C B F C B F C B C B C B F C B F C B F C B F C B C B F C B F C B F C B F C B

55 40,725 C B C B C B F C B F C B C B C B F C B F C B F C B C B F C B F C B F C B

56 40,735 C B C B C B F C B F C B C B C B F C B F C B F C B C B F C B F C B F C B

57 40,765 C B C B C B F C B F C B C B C B F C B F C B F C B C B F C B F C B F C B

58 40,775 C B C B C B F C B F C B C B C B F C B F C B F C B C B F C B F C B F C B

59 40,785 C B C B C B F C B F C B C B C B F C B F C B F C B C B F C B F C B F C B

81 40,815 C B C B C B F C B F C B C B C B F C B F C B F C B F C B F C B F C B

82 40,825 C B C B C B F C B F C B C B C B F C B F C B F C B F C B F C B F C B

83 40,835 C B C B C B F C B F C B C B C B F C B F C B F C B F C B F C B F C B

84 40,865 C B C B C B F C B F C B C B C B F C B F C B F C B F C B F C B F C B

85 40,875 C B C B C B F C B F C B C B C B F C B F C B F C B F C B F C B

86 40,885 C B C B C B F C B F C B C B C B F C B F C B F C B F C B F C B

87 40,915 C B C B C B F C B F C B C B C B F C B F C B F C B F C B F C B

88 40,925 C B C B C B F C B F C B C B C B F C B F C B F C B F C B F C B

89 40,935 C B C B C B F C B F C B C B C B F C B F C B F C B F C B F C B

90 40,965 C B C B C B F C B F C B C B C B F C B F C B F C B F C B F C B

91 40,975 C B C B C B F C B F C B C B C B F C B F C B F C B F C B F C B

92 40,985 C B C B C B C B C B F C B C B C B F C B F C B F C B F C B

400 41,000 F

401 41,010 F

402 41,020 F

403 41,030 F

404 41,040 F

405 41,050 F

406 41,060 F

407 41,070 F

408 41,080 F

409 41,090 F

410 41,100 F

411 41,110 F C B

412 41,120 F C B

413 41,130 F C B

414 41,140 F C B

415 41,150 F C B

416 41,160 F C B

417 41,170 F C B

418 41,180 F C B

419 41,190 F C B

420 41,200 F C B

Frequency bandChannel

No.Frequ.MHz D A B CH CY CZ DK E F L LT NGB GR I IRL

41MHz

SLO

35MHz

35MHz-B

40MHz

NL P S SKIS

Appendix

Legende:F C B = Alle ModelleF = Nur FlugmodelleC B = Nur Auto- und Schiffsmodelle

Key to symbols:F C B = All modelsF = Airplanes onlyC B = Model cars and boats only

Légende:F C B = Tous les modèlesF = Seulement pour modèles volantsC B = Seulement pour autos et bateaux

Legenda:F C B = Tutti i modelliF = Solo modelli di aereiC B = Solo auto e imbarcazioni

Keine Haftung für Druckfehler! Änderungen vorbehalten!

Liability for printing errors excluded! We reserve the right to introduce modifi cations!

Nous ne sommes pas responsables d’éventuelles erreurs d’impression! Sous réserve de modifi cations!

Nessuna responsabilità per errori di stampa! Ci riserviamo la facoltà di apportare cambiamenti!

206

207Appendix

Ap

pro

val c

erti

fi ca

tes

Co

nfo

rmit

y ce

rtifi

cate

EU

co

nfo

rmit

y d

ecla

rati

on

Approval certifi cates Conformity

Ko

nfo

rmit

ätse

rklä

run

gg

emäß

dem

Ges

etz

üb

erF

un

kan

lag

enu

nd

Tele

kom

un

ikat

ion

sen

dei

nri

chtu

ng

en(F

TE

G)

un

dd

erR

ich

tlin

ie19

99/5

/EG

(R&

TT

E)

Dec

lara

tion

ofC

onfo

rmity

inac

cord

ianc

ew

ithth

eR

adio

and

Tel

ecom

unik

atio

nsT

erm

inal

Equ

ipm

ent

Act

(FT

EG

)an

dD

irect

ive

1999

/5/E

G(R

&T

TE

)

Gra

upne

rGm

bH&

Co.

KGH

enrie

ttens

traße

94-9

6D

-732

30Ki

rchh

eim

/Tec

k

erkl

ärt,

dass

das

Pro

dukt

:de

clar

esth

atth

epr

oduc

tV

erw

endu

ngsz

wec

k:F

un

kan

lag

ezu

rFer

nst

euer

un

gvo

nM

od

elle

nIn

tend

edpu

rpos

eR

adio

equ

ipm

entf

orr

emo

teco

ntr

olli

ng

ofm

od

els

Ger

ätek

lass

e:2

Equ

ipm

entc

lass

beib

estim

mun

gsge

mäß

erV

erw

endu

ngde

ngr

undl

egen

den

Anf

orde

rung

ende

s§

3un

dde

nüb

rigen

eins

chlä

gige

nB

estim

mun

gen

des

FT

EG

(Art

ikel

3de

rR

&T

TE

)en

tspr

icht

.co

mpl

ies

with

the

esse

ntia

lreq

uire

men

tsof

§3

and

the

othe

rre

leva

ntpr

ovis

ions

ofth

eF

TE

G(A

rtic

le3

ofth

eR

&T

TE

Dire

ctiv

e),w

hen

used

for

itsin

tend

edpu

rpos

e

Ang

ewen

dete

harm

onis

iert

eN

orm

en:

Har

mon

ised

stan

dard

sap

plie

d

EN

6095

0

EN

301

489-

1/-3

EN

300

220-

1/-3

Ges

undh

eitu

ndS

iche

rhei

tgem

äߧ

3(1

)1.

(Art

ikel

3(1

)a)

)H

ealth

and

safe

tyre

quire

men

tspu

rsua

ntto

§3

(1)

1.(A

rtic

le3

(1)

a))

Sch

utza

nfor

deru

ngen

inB

ezug

auf

die

elek

trom

agne

tisch

eV

ertr

äglic

hkei

t§3

(1)

2,A

rtik

el3

(1)

b))

Pro

tect

ion

requ

irem

entc

once

rnig

elec

trom

agne

ticco

mpa

tibili

ty§

3(1

)2,

Art

ikel

3(1

)b)

)

Maß

nahm

enzu

ref

fizie

nten

Nut

zung

des

Fre

quen

zspe

ktru

ms

§3

(2)

(Art

ikel

3(2

))M

easu

res

for

the

effic

ient

use

ofth

era

dio

freq

uenc

ysp

ectr

um§

3(2

)(A

rtic

le3

(2))

Kirc

hhei

m,3

1.A

ugus

t200

7H

ans

Gra

upne

r,G

esch

äfts

führ

erH

ans

Gra

upne

r,M

anag

ing

Dire

ctor

Gra

up

ner

Gm

bH

&C

o.

KG

Hen

riet

ten

stra

ße

94-9

6D

-732

30K

irch

hei

m/T

eck

Ger

man

yT

el:

0702

1/72

2-0

EM

ail:

info

@g

rau

pn

er.d

eF

ax:

0702

1/72

2-18

8

mx-

24s

/35

/40

/41

MH

z

208

Index

Appendix

3D-Rotary see Rotary control

AAerial Receiver 26, 27 Transmitter 23, 27 Telescopic 23Aileron / fl ap, see Model typeAileron Control 53, 112, 117, 178, 184, 188 Differential, see Wing mixer Effect 114, 120, 163, 187Airbrake 36, 90, 91, 94Alarm timer, see TimerAPCM receiver 38, 184APCM24, see ModulationAR throttle, see Throttle setting ARArrow symbol 33, 56ASY 33Auto-rotation Phase 50, 53, 100, 104, 122, 129, 133,

199 Settings 132 Switch 50, 67, 104Auto-rotation 45, 50, 67, 77, 102, 104, 132,

197 C1 position 67 Tail rotor offset AR 133 Throttle position AR 53, 132, 200Auto-trim 45, 65, 68

BBack-up all models, see Copy / EraseBase setup model 18, 20, 34, 44, 45, 64, 66Basic display 17, 20, 22, 24, 25, 30, 31, 34,

45, 47, 49, 50, 51, 56, 64 … 68, 83, 98, 100 ... 103, 106 ... 109, 130, 150

Battery Fail-Safe, see Fail-SafeBattery must be charged 12, 22, see also

under Warning displaysBattery time 44, 45, 51, 68, 106, 161, see

Transmitter operating time

Battery voltage 12, 22Brake settings 46, 52, 70, 71, 110 Offset 70, 79, 167Butterfl y 101, 113, 114, 119, 163, 168, 189,

see also under Crow

CC1 trim 34, 46, 70, 73, 77, 82, 125, 159,

161, 167, 198Camber-changing fl ap Control, see Wing mixer Differential 112, 187Carburettor 5, 73, 82, 90, 92, 124, 126, 130,

132, 192 Adjustment 34 Characteristic 90, 92 Lever 130 Linkage 130 Opening 130 Setting 94, 125Care notes 5Ch1, see C1Channel 1 curve Fixed-wing 90 Helicopter 92, 122, 124, 126Channel select 17, 18, 21, 24, 150Charge lead 5, 11, 12, 13Charge socket 12, 13, 21Charging Receiver battery 12 Transmitter battery 10, 20CLEAR 20, 22, 30Clk 1 … 3, see Flight phase timerCLR 22, 30Code lock, see Input lockCode number, see Input lockCollective pitch Control 54, 72, 132, 137, 145 Curve 53, 68, 92, 122, 129, 199 Min. 46, 55, 56, 73, 96, 155, 196, 197 Settings 73, 130, 155 Trim 43, 137, 141

Contrast 20, 22, 30, see also DisplayControl adjust, see Transmitter controlControl travel, see Transmitter control travelControlling timed sequences 182Copy / Erase 44, 60 Erase model 44, 60Copy Back-up all models 44, 61 External � mx24s 44, 61 Flight phase 44, 61, 100, 102, 175, 180 Model � model 44, 61 mx24 � external 44, 61Copy lead 60, 204, 205Crow 101, 113, 114, 119, 163, 168, 189Crystal 17, 23, 26, 206Curve mixer 53, 54, 90, 92, 112, 120, 134,

139,182, 190, 195Cut-off trim 21, 34, 125, 198 see also Trim

DDelay time see Fail-Safe see Transition timeDelta model 36, 46, 70, 117, 188 see also Model type and Tail typeDifferential Aileron 52, 111, 114, 115, 118, 120,

163, 176, 187 Flap 36, 112, 187 see also Dual mixers see also Wing mixersDifferential reduction 36, 114, 120, 187Digital trim 34, 36, 42, 84, 133, 181, 202Direction of rotor rotation 46, 72, 126, 127Display 20, 22 Backlighting 55, 155 Contrast 20, 22, 30DMA, see Torque compensationDSC socket 18, 21 see Charge socketDual mixer 37, 54, 70, 144, 162, 172, 184,

190 Differential degree 54, 70, 144Dual Rate 29, 48, 86, 88 Asymmetrical 48, 87, 89Dual-axis stick 20, 28, 30, 32, 34, 184 Converting 16

EElectric power system 6, 110, 165, 167ENT 33ENTER 20, 22, 30Erase Model, see CopyErase button (CLR) 20, 22ESC 20, 22, 30Expo 29, 86, 88 Asymmetrical 87, 89 Throttle limit 46, 73, 84Exponential (control), see Expo

FF3A model 192Fail-Safe 20, 22, 40, 54, 55, 59, 193 APCM24 149 Battery 147 PCM20 146 SPCM20 148Fixed switch 28, 30, 32, 33, 97Fixed-wing model 34, 36Flight phase 22, 36, 42, 49, 60, 98, 174 Copy 61 Name, see Phase name Programming 98 Switches 49, 104, 105, 179 Timer 49, 50, 51, 100, 102, 108, 168 Transition delay, see Transition timeFlight timer 22, 106, 107Flying wing, see Tail typeFree mixer, see MixerFrequency band (changing) 17, 21Function fi elds 33Function input

209

see Stick function inputFunction select, see Multi-function menuFuse 12FX switch, see Fixed switch

GGeneral settings 55, 154Gyro 5, 105, 127, 153, 196, 200 Effect 53, 81, 127, 196, 202 Gain 43, 81 Suppression 42, 53, 127Gyro sensor 81, 127, 200, see also under

Gyro

HHEIM Mechanics 72, 126, 128, 145 System 126, 128Helicopter mixers 122Helicopter programs Flight phase specifi c 98, see also Heli-

copter mixersHelicopter, see Model helicopterHelicopter type 43, 46, 72, 137, 145, 154,

197HELP 20, 22, 23, 30, 110, 157Help function, see HELPHold mode 55, 146 ... 149, see also Fail-

SafeHotkey 30Hover point 67, 124, 129, 199

IIdentifi cation melody, see Power-on beepIdle setting 34, 73, 82, 129Idle trim 55, 73, 77, 125, 129, 150, 153,

192, 198, 199, see also Cut-off trimIgnition Electrical 6INC / DEC buttons 20, 28, 32, 40, 43, 47,

75, 78, 60, 81, 90, 94, 123, 127, 141, 144, 159, 165, 176, 180, 184, 192, 200

Input buttons, see Operating buttonsInput lock 33, 56, 157Installation Linkages 4, 5, 27, 72, 74, 128 Receiving system 4, 26, 38, 43 Servos 4, 27 Trainer / PC module 11, 21, 60, 152,

204, 205Interface 15

LLanguage select 23Lap counter 49, 50, 52, 100, 102, 107, 108Lap time 49, 50, 100, 102, 108LCD screen, see DisplayLiability 6, 206Light-pipe lead 21, 151, 152, 204Linear mixer 52 ... 54, 134, 135, 144, 184,

187, 194LinearMIX, see Linear mixerLogical switch, see Switch

MMarker button 67, 124, 125, 126MIX active in phase 54, 98, 142, 186Mix only channel 43, 47, 54, 83, 110, 121,

134, 137, 141, 142, 173, 182, 190Mixer 26, 29, 40, 43, 46, 47, 52, 55, 56, 59,

67, 70, 72, 75, 79, 83, 90, 92, 94, 101, 110, 122, 134, 142, 144, 150 ... 152, 182

Wing, see Wing mixer Free 43, 53, 54, 135, 142, 144, 165,

173, 182, 184 ... 186, 194 Helicopter, see Helicopter mixer see Model helicopter Neutral point 46, 54, 111, 134, 137, 161,

187, 194 Serial connection 135, 136 Switch 53, 136Mixer direction 113, 115, 118, 121, 127,

139, 145, 178, 198, see also Mixer in-

put, asymmetrical / symmetricalMixer input 43, 54, 72, 111, 114, 115, 117,

119, 122, 126, 134, 145, 173, 178, 180, 181, 186, 187,194, 198

Asymmetrical 54, 139 Symmetrical 43, 54, 139Model (operating) time 22, 44, 45, 51, 58,

59, 65, 68, 106, 161Model Erase 44, 60 Memory, see Model select Name 22, 44, 45, 58, 59, 64, 66, 150,

153, 160, 177, 197 Number 59 Select 44, 58, 59, 60, 62, 64, 66, 160,

196, 197Model change, see Model selectModel helicopter 34, 42, 58, 61, 77, 82, 122,

129, 132, 141, 154, 196Model memory Set-up 58, 150, 153, 160, 197Model type 17, 22, 34, 40, 46, 49, 51... 54,

58, 59, 60, 65, 70, 79, 100, 105, 110, 137, 138, 144, 150, 153, 159, 161, 167

Display 22, 40, 43, 58 Fixed-wing 36 Helicopter (type) 42, 72Modulation PCM20 9, 11, 17, 22, 23, 39, 44, 45, 54,

64, 66, 146, 153, 155 SPCM20 9, 11, 17, 22, 23, 39, 44, 45,

55, 64, 66, 148, 153, 155 PPM18 9, 11, 17, 23, 44, 45, 55, 64, 66,

153, 155 PPM24 9, 11, 17, 23, 44, 45, 55, 64, 66,

153, 155 PPM10 9, 11, 23, 44, 45, 55, 64, 66,

153, 155 APCM24 9, 11, 22, 23, 44, 45, 55, 64,

66, 149, 153, 155Motor controller 37, 79, 142, 165, 172, 174,

see also Speed controllerMotor run time 30, 95, 101, 106, 168, 170

Multi-fl ap menu 36, 39, 40, 52, 53, 70, 105, 110, 177, 181, 184, 189

Multi-function list 22, 30, 31, 59, 62, 145, 146, 157, 160

Multi-function menu 20, 30, 56, 58, 59, 157

NName see Owner’s name see Phase nameNeutral setting see Stick settings see Servo centreNeutralising lever 16No Pupil signal, see Warning displayNon-delayed channel 51, 98, 105Numeric input, see Input lock

OOffset see Brake see Transmitter control see Mixer neutral point Input 37, 47, 52, 71, 79, 80, 111, 144,

145, 166, 169, 175, 180, 185, 187, 190, 202

On / Off 33Operating buttons 20, 30Operating controls, see Transmitter controlOperating time Model 5, 22, 65 Transmitter 5, 12, 22, 65, 106Owner’s name 55, 154

PPC interface lead 205PC socket 60, 204, 205PCM receiver 39PCM20, see ModulationPhase Assignment 49, 50, 78, 80, 84, 86, 88,

90, 92, 98, 100, 102, 104, 105, 108, 110, 122, 168, 169, 175, 179, 185,

Appendix

210

201 Name 22, 49, 50, 56, 100, 102, 104,

110, 155, 160, 168, 175, 179, 196, 199

Setting 49 ... 52, 56, 70, 78, 80, 86, 88, 90, 92, 98, 100, 102, 105, 106, 108, 110, 119, 122, 161, 163, 167, 169, 174, 179, 185, 201

Switch 45, 49, 50, 67, 98, 100, 102, 104, 105, 168, 174, 175, 179, 201, 202

Trim (F3B) 98, 105, 176, 178Pitch, see Collective pitchPLL, see Synthesizer under RF modulePlug-in crystal, see CrystalPolarity Charge socket 12 Receiver battery 13 Transmitter battery connector 12Position mode 55, 146, 148, 149, see also

Fail-SafePower supply 4, 12, 13, 26Power-on beep 55, 155, 160, 196Power-on warning 20, 22, 44, 45, 58, 65, 68PPM receiver 37, 38PPM10, see ModulationPPM18, see ModulationPPM24 receiver 38, 184PPM24, see ModulationProportional, see also under Transmitter

controls Control 20, 128, 134, 136 Side-mounted control 15, 20, 26, 28, 43,

47, 71, 75, 78, 80, 82, 94, 96, 108, 122, 125, 138, 144, 159, 165, 166, 170, 174, 178, 182, 198, 202

Rotary control 127

QQuick-Select 31

RRange 24 Check 5, 27

Receiver 4, 17, 18, 20, 21, 23, 26 Aerial, see Aerial Battery 13, 26 Output 38, 39, 55, 101, 110, 146, 147,

153 Power supply 13Receiver socket sequence Fixed-wing 37 Helicopter 43Receiving system 4, 26, 38, 43Reference point 33, 48, 90, 92, 123, 139,

190, 193, 200 Function 48, 123Resetting changes, see CopyReverse, see Servo reverseRF module 11, 14, 17, 21, 23, 24, 30, 150 Synthesizer 11, 17, 21, 24Rotary control 20, 22, 30Rotor direction 46, 72, 126, 127

SSafety Notes 4, 131Saving changes, see CopyScreen contrast, see Display contrastSEL 33Self-neutralising lever 16Serial connection, see MixerServo Centre (offset) 46, 59, 74, 147, 156,

162, 178, 192 Direction (reverse) 38, 43, 46, 74, 111,

134, 138, 144, 145, 192, 198, 200 Display 20, 31, 56, 153, 156, 168, 185 Neutral position, see Centre (offset) Reverse 38, 43, 46, 74, 111, 134, 138,

144, 145, 192, 198, 200 Sequence, see Model type Setting 38, 40, 43, 46, 55, 56, 70, 74,

82, 114, 119, 121, 134, 137, 144, 156, 178, 187

Test 56, 156 Travel 20, 27, 28, 34, 46, 70, 72, 74, 75,

82, 112, 134, 137, 153, 156, 162,

189, 192, 195, 198, 203 Travel limit 27, 46, 53, 75, 119, 134, 156,

162Slot time 31, 51, 106Socket 15Socket number 40, 55, 59, 147, 153SPCM receiver 39SPCM20, see ModulationSpeed controller 6, 26, 36, 166, 167Split mode 111Step, see Trim incrementStick 5, 20, 45, 47, 53, 59, 64, 66, 76, 77,

86, 88, 90, 92, 94, 135, 150, 154, 161, 184, 192, 193

Centring force 16 Converting 16 Length adjustment 14Stick mode 23, 28, 44, 45, 55, 56, 59, 64,

66, 74, 150, 153, 154, 160, 177, 196 Channel 81, 105, 110, 121, 122, 134,

142, 144, 153, 156, 172, 173, 182, 184, 190

Curve 48, 68, 90, 92, 122, 124, 126, 129, 137, 139, 164, 182, 193

Function 18, 20, 27, 28, 34, 48, 53, 55, 59, 64, 65, 66, 68, 78, 80, 86, 88, 90, 92, 110, 119, 129, 134, 142, 144, 150, 154, 190

Function input 28, 74, 78, 80, 110 Travel, see Transmitter control travelStick settings 20, 22, 46, 47, 52, 76, 77, 82,

84, 129, 136STO 33Stopwatch 22, 30, 49, 51, 94, 106, 108, 170Suppress Codes 44, 62Suppress models 44, 62Suppressing Electric motors 6 Servos 6Swashplate 42, 46, 47, 72, 77, 126, 145,

196 Limiting 53, 128 Linearisation 46, 72

Linkage 47, 77, 145 Mixer 54, 122, 145, 198 Rotation 53, 67, 72, 128 Servos 46, 72, 145, 198 Type 43, 46, 72, 196, 197Switch Assignment 32, 78, 80, 86, 88, 95, 104,

107, 170, 179, 197 Display 48, 93 Expanded 32 Fixed switch 30, 32, 97 Logical 29, 30, 33, 44, 45, 48, 65, 68,

86, 88, 97, 100, 102, 104, 108, 136, 141, 178, 179

Switch channel 54, 134, 135Switching point assignment, see Transmitter

control switchSYM 33Synthesizer RF module 11, 17, 21, 24

TTail, see Tail typeTail type 37, 46, 54, 70, 177 2 EL Sv 3+8 37, 38, 46, 70 Delta 37 ... 39, 46, 70, 117, 188 Flying wing 37 ... 39, 46, 70, 117, 188 Normal 37 ... 39, 46, 70 V-tail 37 ... 39, 46, 70Telescopic aerial, see AerialThrottle / Airbrakes 34, 39, 40, 48, 90, 135 Control curve 90Throttle / Collective pitch curve 48, 92 Curve 42, 73, 82, 124, 129, 193 Limit 28, 34, 42, 46, 47, 77, 82, 125,

136, 198 Limit Expo, see Expo throttle limit Limiter 42, 47, 73, 82, 125, 129, 198 Pre-set 125, 129 Setting AR 47, 77, 84, 129, 133, 136

Appendix

Index

211

Too high, see Warning display Trim, see C1 trim Warning threshold 46, 73Timed sequences 182Time delay see Auto-rotation see Fail-Safe see Transition time Transmitter control 79, 81 Flight phase, see Transition time Switch function 79, 81 Throttle limiter 83, 131Time1 Time2 49, 50, 100, 102, 108Timer 29, 30, 44, 45, 49, 50, 51, 65, 68, 95,

100, 102, 106 … 108, 161, 166, 168, 170

Alarm 44, 45, 49, 50, 51, 65, 68, 107, 108, 161

General 51, 106 Flight phase, see under Flight phase Switch 49, 50, 106, 108Torque compensation (DMA) Static 126, 127, 200Trainer mode 11, 14, 15, 18, 20, 21, 29, 38,

43, 55, 60, 150, 153, 204 Defects 22, 151Transition time 49, 50, 101, 103, 105, 111,

167, 168, 174, 179, 201Transmission mode, see ModulationTransmitter Aerial, see Aerial Battery 5, 7, 12, 13, 14, 18, 21, 61, 106 Case 14, 15, 21, 93 Charge lead 11, 12 Description 20 Neckstrap 20 Operating time 22, 65Transmitter control Assignment, see Setting Direction 34, 47, 79, 81, 91, 169 Offset 37, 46, 47, 54, 71, 79, 80 Position 30, 33, 65, 91, 95, 123, 127,

139 Setting 28, 29, 47, 78, 80 Setting: Throttle limit 82 Switch 30, 32, 48, 65, 68, 83, 93, 94, 97,

106, 108, 125, 136, 141, 168, 170, 178

Switch assignment. 32, 94 Travel 30, 47, 48, 52, 71, 79, 81, 119,

134, 161, 177Travel limit, see ServoTrim Control 65, 68, 76, 77, 84, 132, 198 Digital 34, 84, 133, 181, 202 Increment 47, 76, 77, 162, 174, 192 Lever 22, 34, 47, 59, 74, 76, 77, 118,

136, 162, 185, 192 Memory 65, 68 Position 34, 83, 202 Point 91, 93, 123, 140 Point function, see Reference point func-

tion Reduction, see Trim increment Slider, see Trim control Value 34, 59, 65, 68, 124, 161, 198Type of modulation, see Modulation

UUser’s name, see Owner’s nameUsing the system for the fi rst time 23

VV-tail, see Tail and Model typeVolume 44, 45, 65, 68, 161, 197

WWarning Display 20, 22 Signal 5, 12, 22, 23, 24, 61, 171Wing mixer 29, 36, 39, 40, 52, 110, 163,

176, 177 see Airbrakes see Butterfl y Aileron differential, see Differential

Flap differential, see Differential

YYaw Adverse 111, 163

Appendix

212212 For your notes

213213For your notes

214 For your notes

215Guarantee certifi cate

Guarantee certifi cate Wir gewähren auf dieses Erzeugnis eine Garantie vonThis product is warrantied for

Sur ce produit nous accordons une garantie de 24Monatenmonthsmois

Servicestellen / Service / Service après-vente

Garantie-UrkundeWarranty certifi cate / Certifi cat de garantie

Computer-System mx-24s

Die Fa. Graupner GmbH & Co. KG, Henriettenstraße 94-96, 73230 Kirchheim/Teck gewährt ab dem Kaufdatum auf die-ses Produkt eine Garantie von 24 Monaten. Die Garantie gilt nur für die bereits beim Kauf des Produktes vorhande-nen Material- oder Funktionsmängel. Schäden, die auf Ab-nützung, Überlastung, falsches Zubehör oder unsachgemä-ße Behandlung zurückzuführen sind, sind von der Garantie ausgeschlossen. Die gesetzlichen Rechte und Gewährleis-tungsansprüche des Verbrauchers werden durch diese Ga-rantie nicht berührt. Bitte überprüfen Sie vor einer Reklama-tion oder Rücksendung das Produkt genau auf Mängel, da wir Ihnen bei Mängelfreiheit die entstandenen Unkosten in Rechnung stellen müssen.

Graupner GmbH & Co. KG, Henriettenstraße 94-96. 73230 Kirchheim/Teck, Germany guarantees this product for a pe-riod of 24 months from date of purchase. The guarantee ap-plies only to such material or operational defects witch are present at the time of purchase of the product. Damage due to wear, overloading, incompetent handling or the use of in-correct accessories is not covered by the guarantee. The user´s legal rights and claims under guarantee are not af-fected by this guarantee. Please check the product carefully for defects before you are make a claim or send the item to us, since we are obliged to make a charge for our cost if the product is found to be free of faults.

La société Graupner GmbH & Co. KG, Henriettenstraße 94-96, 73230 Kirchheim/Teck, Allemagne, accorde sur ce pro-duit une garantie de 24 mois à partir de la date d´achat. La garantie prend effet uniquement sur les vices de fonction-nement et de matériel du produit acheté. Les dommages dûs à de l´usure, à de la surcharge, à de mauvais acces-soires ou à d´une application inadaptée, sont exclus de la garantie. Cette garantie ne remet pas en cause les droits et prétentions légaux du consommateur. Avant toute réclama-tion et tout retour du prouit, veuillez s.v.p. cotrôler et noter exactement les défauts ou vices.

Transmitter alone, in aluminium case

� 4730.77 mx-24s 35-/35-MHz-B-Band

� 4748.77 mx-24s 40-/41-MHz Band

Übergabedatum:Date of purchase/delivery:Date de remise:

Name des Käufers:Owner´s name:Nom de I`acheteur:

Straße, Wohnort:Complete adress:Domicie et rue:

Firmenstempel und Unterschrift des Einzelhändlers:

Stamp and signature of dealer:

Cachet de la fi rme et signature du détaillant :

Graupner-ZentralserviceGraupner GmbH & Co. KGHenriettenstrasse 94 - 96D-73230 Kirchheim

Servicehotline� (+49) 0 18 05 47 28 76Montag - Freitag9:30 - 11:30 + 13:00 - 15:00 Uhr

United KingdomGraupner ServiceBrunel DriveGB, NEWARK, Nottingham shireNG242EG� (+44) 16 36 61 05 39

SverigeBaltechno ElectronicsBox 5307S 40227 Göteborg� (+46) 31 70 73 00 0

SchweizGraupner ServiceWehntalerstrasse 37CH 8181 Höri� (+41) 43 26 66 58 3

LuxembourgKit Flammang129, route d’ArlonL 8009 Strassen� (+35) 23 12 23 2

FranceGraupner FranceGérard Altmayer86, rue St. AntoineF 57601 Forbach-Oeting� (+33) 3 87 85 62 12

EspanaFA - Sol S.A.C. Avinyo 4E 8240 Manresa� (+34) 93 87 34 23 4

Ceská RepublikaSlovenská RepublikaRC Service Z. HnizdilLetecka 666/22CZ 16100 Praha 6 - Ruzyne� (+42) 2 33 31 30 95

Belgie/Belgique/NederlandJan van MouwerikSlot de Houvelaan 30NL 3155 Maasland VT� (+31) 10 59 13 59 4

ItaliaGiMaxVia Manzoni, no. 8I 25064 Gussago� (+39) 030 25 22 73 2

216